10 CFR Part 431 — Energy Efficiency Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial Equipment

PART 431—ENERGY EFFICIENCY PROGRAM FOR CERTAIN COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENT Authority: 42 U.S.C. 6291-6317; 28 U.S.C. 2461 note. Source: 64 FR 54141, Oct. 5, 1999, unless otherwise noted. Editorial Note: At 90 FR 43371, Sept. 9, 2025, as required by the Congressional Review Act and Pub. L. 119-8, the Department of Energy removed the amendments to several sections in part 431 made effective on Dec. 23, 2024, at 89 FR 91163, Oct. 9, 2024. As of Sept. 9, 2025, the affected sections reverted to the Dec. 22, 2024 version. Subpart A—General Provisions § 431.1 Purpose and scope. This part establishes the regulations for the implementation of provisions relating to commercial and industrial equipment in Part B of Title III of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act (42 U.S.C. 6291-6309) and in Part C of Title III of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act (42 U.S.C. 6311-6317), which establishes an energy conservation program for certain commercial and industrial equipment. [70 FR 60414, Oct. 18, 2005] § 431.2 Definitions. The following definitions apply for purposes of this part. Any words or terms not defined in this Section or elsewhere in this part shall be defined as provided in Section 340 of the Act. Act Alternate efficiency determination method or AEDM Btu Commercial HVAC & WH product Covered equipment DOE the Department Energy conservation standard EPCA Flue loss Gas Import Independent laboratory Industrial equipment (1) In operation consumes, or is designed to consume energy; (2) To any significant extent, is distributed in commerce for industrial or commercial use; and (3) Is not a “covered product” as defined in Section 321(2) of EPCA, 42 U.S.C. 6291(2), other than a component of a covered product with respect to which there is in effect a determination under Section 341(c) of EPCA, 42 U.S.C. 6312(c). ISO Manufacture Manufacturer Manufacturer's model number Private labeler (1) Such product (or its container) is labeled with the brand or trademark of a person other than a manufacturer of such product; (2) The person with whose brand or trademark such product (or container) is labeled has authorized or caused such product to be so labeled; and (3) The brand or trademark of a manufacturer of such product does not appear on such label. Secretary State State regulation [69 FR 61923, Oct. 21, 2004, as amended at 71 FR 71369, Dec. 8, 2006; 74 FR 12071, Mar. 23, 2009; 75 FR 666, Jan. 5, 2010; 76 FR 12503, Mar. 7, 2011; 77 FR 28987, May 16, 2012; 79 FR 26601, May 9, 2014; 87 FR 45197, July 27, 2022; 89 FR 82071, Oct. 9, 2024; 90 FR 43384, Sept. 9, 2025] § 431.3 Error Correction procedure for energy conservation standards rules. Requests for error corrections pertaining to an energy conservation standard rule for commercial or industrial equipment shall follow those procedures and provisions detailed in 10 CFR 430.5 of this chapter. [81 FR 57758, Aug. 24, 2016] § 431.4 Procedures, interpretations, and policies for consideration of new or revised energy conservation standards and test procedures for commercial/industrial equipment. The procedures, interpretations, and policies for consideration of new or revised energy conservation standards and test procedures set forth in appendix A to subpart C of part 430 of this chapter shall apply to the consideration of new or revised energy conservation standards and test procedures considered for adoption under this part. [85 FR 8711, Feb. 14, 2020] Subpart B—Electric Motors Source: 69 FR 61923, Oct. 21, 2004, unless otherwise noted. § 431.11 Purpose and scope. This subpart contains energy conservation requirements for electric motors. It contains test procedures that EPCA requires DOE to prescribe, related requirements, energy conservation standards prescribed by EPCA, labeling rules, and compliance procedures. It also identifies materials incorporated by reference in this part. This subpart does not cover “small electric motors,” which are addressed in subpart X of this part. This subpart does not cover electric motors that are “dedicated-purpose pool pump motors,” which are addressed in subpart Z of this part. [77 FR 26633, May 4, 2012, as amended at 86 FR 40774, July 29, 2021] § 431.12 Definitions. The following definitions apply for purposes of this subpart, and of subparts U and V of this part. Any words or terms not defined in this Section or elsewhere in this part shall be defined as provided in Section 340 of the Act. Accreditation Accreditation body Accreditation system Accredited laboratory Air-over electric motor i.e., Alternative efficiency determination method AEDM Average full load efficiency Basic model Brake electric motor Certificate of conformity Certification program Certification system Component set CSA Definite purpose electric motor (1) To standard ratings with standard operating characteristics or standard mechanical construction for use under service conditions other than usual, such as those specified in NEMA MG 1-2016, Paragraph 14.3, “Unusual Service Conditions,” (incorporated by reference, see (2) For use on a particular type of application. Definite purpose motor (1) To standard ratings with standard operating characteristics or standard mechanical construction for use under service conditions other than usual, such as those specified in NEMA MG 1-2016, Paragraph 14.3, “Unusual Service Conditions,” (incorporated by reference, see (2) For use on a particular type of application. Electric motor Electric motor with encapsulated windings see Electric motor with moisture resistant windings see Electric motor with sealed windings see Enclosed motor Equipment class Fire pump electric motor General purpose electric motor (1) Standard operating characteristics and mechanical construction for use under usual service conditions, such as those specified in NEMA MG 1-2016, paragraph 14.2, “Usual Service Conditions,” (incorporated by reference, see (2) Standard operating characteristics or standard mechanical construction for use under unusual service conditions, such as those specified in NEMA MG 1-2016, paragraph 14.3, “Unusual Service Conditions,” (incorporated by reference, see General purpose electric motor (subtype I) (1) Is a single-speed, induction motor; (2) Is rated for continuous duty (MG1) operation or for duty type S1 (IEC); (3) Contains a squirrel-cage (MG1) or cage (IEC) rotor; (4) Has foot-mounting that may include foot-mounting with flanges or detachable feet; (5) Is built in accordance with NEMA T-frame dimensions or their IEC metric equivalents, including a frame size that is between two consecutive NEMA frame sizes or their IEC metric equivalents; (6) Has performance in accordance with NEMA Design A (MG1) or B (MG1) characteristics or equivalent designs such as IEC Design N (IEC); (7) Operates on polyphase alternating current 60-hertz sinusoidal power, and: (i) Is rated at 230 or 460 volts (or both) including motors rated at multiple voltages that include 230 or 460 volts (or both), or (ii) Can be operated on 230 or 460 volts (or both); and (8) Includes, but is not limited to, explosion-proof construction. Note 1 to definition of “General purpose electric motor (subtype I)”: References to “MG1” above refer to NEMA Standards Publication MG 1-2016 (incorporated by reference in § 431.15). References to “IEC” above refer to IEC 60034-1, 60034-12:2016, 60050-411, and 60072-1 (incorporated by reference in § 431.15), as applicable. General purpose electric motor (subtype II) (1) Is built in accordance with NEMA U-frame dimensions as described in NEMA MG 1-1967 (incorporated by reference, see (2) Has performance in accordance with NEMA Design C characteristics as described in MG1 or an equivalent IEC design(s) such as IEC Design H; (3) Is a close-coupled pump motor; (4) Is a footless motor; (5) Is a vertical solid shaft normal thrust motor (as tested in a horizontal configuration) built and designed in a manner consistent with MG1; (6) Is an eight-pole motor (900 rpm); or (7) Is a polyphase motor with a voltage rating of not more than 600 volts, is not rated at 230 or 460 volts (or both), and cannot be operated on 230 or 460 volts (or both). Note 2 to definition of “General purpose electric motor (subtype II)”: With the exception of the NEMA Motor Standards MG1-1967 (incorporated by reference in § 431.15), references to “MG1” above refer to NEMA MG 1-2016 (incorporated by reference in § 431.15). References to “IEC” above refer to IEC 60034-1, 60034-12, 60050-411, and 60072-1 (incorporated by reference in § 431.15), as applicable. IEC IEC Design H motor (1) Is an induction motor designed for use with three-phase power; (2) Contains a cage rotor; (3) Is capable of direct-on-line starting (4) Has 4, 6, or 8 poles; (5) Is rated from 0.12 kW to 160 kW at a frequency of 60 Hz; and (6) Conforms to Sections 9.1, 9.2, and 9.3 of the IEC 60034-12:2016 (incorporated by reference, see IEC Design HE (1) Is an induction motor designed for use with three-phase power; (2) Contains a cage rotor; (3) Is capable of direct-on-line starting; (4) Has 4, 6, or 8 poles; (5) Is rated from 0.12 kW to 160 kW at a frequency of 60 Hz; and (6) Conforms to section 9.1, Table 3, and Section 9.3 of the IEC 60034-12:2016 (incorporated by reference, see IEC Design HEY (1) Is an induction motor designed for use with three-phase power; (2) Contains a cage rotor; (3) Is capable of star-delta starting; (4) Has 4, 6, or 8 poles; (5) Is rated from 0.12 kW to 160 kW at a frequency of 60 Hz; and (6) Conforms to section 5.7, Table 3 and Section 9.3 of the IEC 60034-12:2016 (incorporated by reference, see IEC Design HY (1) Is an induction motor designed for use with three-phase power; (2) Contains a cage rotor; (3) Is capable of star-delta starting; (4) Has 4, 6, or 8 poles; (5) Is rated from 0.12 kW to 160 kW at a frequency of 60 Hz; and (6) Conforms to Section 5.7, Section 9.2 and Section 9.3 of the IEC 60034-12:2016 (incorporated by reference, see IEC Design N motor (1) Is an induction motor designed for use with three-phase power; (2) Contains a cage rotor; (3) Is capable of direct-on-line starting; (4) Has 2, 4, 6, or 8 poles; (5) Is rated from 0.12 kW to 1600 kW at a frequency of 60 Hz; and (6) Conforms to Sections 6.1, 6.2, and 6.3 of the IEC 60034-12:2016 (incorporated by reference, see see IEC Design NE (1) Is an induction motor designed for use with three-phase power; (2) Contains a cage rotor; (3) Is capable of direct-on-line starting; (4) Has 2, 4, 6, or 8 poles; (5) Is rated from 0.12 kW to 1600 kW at a frequency of 60 Hz; and (6) Conforms to section 6.1, Table 3 and Section 6.3 of the IEC 60034-12:2016 (incorporated by reference, see IEC Design NEY (1) Is an induction motor designed for use with three-phase power; (2) Contains a cage rotor; (3) Is capable of star-delta starting; (4) Has 2, 4, 6, or 8 poles; (5) Is rated from 0.12 kW to 1600 kW at a frequency of 60 Hz; and (6) Conforms to section 5.4, Table 3 and Section 6.3 of the IEC 60034-12:2016 (incorporated by reference, see IEC Design NY (1) Is an induction motor designed for use with three-phase power; (2) Contains a cage rotor; (3) Is capable of star-delta starting; (4) Has 2, 4, 6, or 8 poles; (5) Is rated from 0.12 kW to 1600 kW at a frequency of 60 Hz; and (6) Conforms to Section 5.4, Section 6.2 and Section 6.3 of the IEC 60034-12:2016 (incorporated by reference, see IEEE Immersible electric motor Inverter Inverter-capable electric motor Inverter-only electric motor Liquid-cooled electric motor NEMA NEMA Design A motor (1) Is designed to withstand full-voltage starting and developing locked-rotor torque as shown in NEMA MG 1-2016, paragraph 12.38.1 (incorporated by reference, see (2) Has pull-up torque not less than the values shown in NEMA MG 1-2016, paragraph 12.40.1; (3) Has breakdown torque not less than the values shown in NEMA MG 1-2016, paragraph 12.39.1; (4) Has a locked-rotor current higher than the values shown in NEMA MG 1-2016, Paragraph 12.35.2 for 60 hertz and NEMA MG 1-2016, Paragraph 12.35.4 for 50 hertz; and (5) Has a slip at rated load of less than 5 percent for motors with fewer than 10 poles. NEMA Design B motor (1) Designed to withstand full-voltage starting; (2) Develops locked-rotor, breakdown, and pull-up torques adequate for general application as specified in Sections 12.38, 12.39 and 12.40 of NEMA MG 1-2016 (incorporated by reference, see (3) Draws locked-rotor current not to exceed the values shown in Section 12.35.2 for 60 hertz and 12.35.4 for 50 hertz of NEMA MG 1-2016; and (4) Has a slip at rated load of less than 5 percent for motors with fewer than 10 poles. NEMA Design C motor (1) Is designed to withstand full-voltage starting and developing locked-rotor torque for high-torque applications up to the values shown in NEMA MG 1-2016, paragraph 12.38.2 (incorporated by reference, see (2) Has pull-up torque not less than the values shown in NEMA MG 1-2016, paragraph 12.40.2; (3) Has breakdown torque not less than the values shown in NEMA MG 1-2016, paragraph 12.39.2; (4) Has a locked-rotor current not to exceed the values shown in NEMA MG 1-2016, paragraphs 12.35.2 for 60 hertz and 12.35.4 for 50 hertz; and (5) Has a slip at rated load of less than 5 percent. Nominal full-load efficiency see Open motor Partial electric motor Rated frequency (1) Directly to the motor, in the case of electric motors capable of operating without an inverter; or (2) To the inverter in the case on inverter-only electric motors. Rated load full-load, full rated load, rated full-load Rated voltage Special purpose motor Special purpose electric motor Specialized frame size Motor horsepower/standard kilowatt equivalent Maximum NEMA frame diameters 2 Pole 4 Pole 6 Pole 8 Pole Enclosed Open Enclosed Open Enclosed Open Enclosed Open 1/.75 48 48 48 48 48 140 140 1.5/1.1 48 48 48 48 140 140 140 140 2/1.5 48 48 48 48 140 140 180 180 3/2.2 140 48 140 140 180 180 180 180 5/3.7 140 140 140 140 180 180 210 210 7.5/5.5 180 140 180 180 210 210 210 210 10/7.5 180 180 180 180 210 210 15/11 210 180 210 210 20/15 210 210 210 210 Standard frame size Submersible electric motor (1) Is intended to operate continuously only while submerged in liquid; (2) Is capable of operation while submerged in liquid for an indefinite period of time; and (3) Has been sealed to prevent ingress of liquid from contacting the motor's internal parts. Total power loss Totally enclosed non-ventilated (TENV) electric motor [69 FR 61923, Oct. 21, 2004, as amended at 74 FR 12071, Mar. 23, 2009; 77 FR 26633, May 4, 2012; 78 FR 75993, Dec. 13, 2013; 79 FR 31009, May 29, 2014; 86 FR 21, Jan. 4, 2021; 87 FR 63654, Oct. 19, 2022; 87 FR 64689, Oct. 26, 2022; 88 FR 36150, Sept. 29, 2023] Test Procedures, Materials Incorporated and Methods of Determining Efficiency § 431.14 [Reserved] § 431.15 Materials incorporated by reference. (a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this subpart with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, the U.S. Department of Energy (DOE) must publish a document in the Federal Register [email protected], https://www.energy.gov/eere/buildings/building-technologies-office. [email protected], www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html. (b) CSA. www.shopcsa.ca/onlinestore/welcome.asp. (1) CSA C390-10 (reaffirmed 2019), (“CSA C390-10”), Test methods, marking requirements, and energy efficiency levels for three-phase induction motors, (2) CSA C747-09 (reaffirmed 2019) (“CSA C747-09”), Energy efficiency test methods for small motors, (c) IEC. webstore.iec.ch. (1) IEC 60034-1 Edition 12.0 2010-02, (“IEC 60034-1”), Rotating Electrical Machines, Part 1: Rating and Performance, February 2010, IBR approved as follows: section 4: Duty, clause 4.2.1 and Figure 1, IBR approved for § 431.12. (2) IEC 60034-1, Edition 12.0 2010-02, (“IEC 60034-1:2010”), Rotating Electrical Machines—Part 1: Rating and Performance, IBR approved for appendix B to this subpart. (3) IEC 60034-2-1:2014, Rotating electrical machines—Part 2-1: Standard methods for determining losses and efficiency from tests (excluding machines for traction vehicles), (4) IEC 60034-12:2016, Rotating electrical machines, Part 12: Starting performance of single-speed three-phase cage induction motors, (5) IEC 60050-411, International Electrotechnical Vocabulary Chapter 411: Rotating machines, 1996, IBR approved as follows: sections 411-33-07 and 411-37-26, IBR approved for § 431.12. (6) IEC 60051-1:2016, Edition 6.0 2016-02, (“IEC 60051-1:2016”), Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and their accessories—Part 1: Definitions and general requirements common to all parts, IBR approved for appendix B to this subpart. (7) IEC 60072-1, Dimensions and Output Series for Rotating Electrical Machines—Part 1: Frame numbers 56 to 400 and flange numbers 55 to 1080, (8) IEC 60079-7:2015, Explosive atmospheres—Part 7: Equipment protection by increased safety “e”, (9) IEC 61800-9-2:2017, Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems—Part 9-2: Ecodesign for power drive systems, motor starters, power electronics and their driven applications—Energy efficiency indicators for power drive systems and motor starters, (d) IEEE. www.ieee.org/web/publications/home/index.html. (1) IEEE Std 112-2017 (“IEEE 112-2017”), IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators, (2) IEEE Std 114-2010 (“IEEE 114-2010”), Test Procedure for Single-Phase Induction Motors, (e) NEMA. www.nema.org/. (1) ANSI/NEMA MG 1-2016 (Revision 1, 2018) (“NEMA MG 1-2016”), Motors and Generators, (2) NEMA Standards Publication MG1-1967 (“NEMA MG1-1967”), Motors and Generators, (i) Part 11, Dimension; (ii) Part 13, Frame Assignments—A-C Integral-Horsepower Motors; (f) NFPA. www.nfpa.org/. (1) NFPA 20, Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection, (2) [Reserved] [77 FR 26634, May 4, 2012, as amended at 78 FR 75994, Dec. 13, 2013; 86 FR 21, Jan. 4, 2021; 87 FR 63656, Oct. 19, 2022] § 431.16 Test procedures for the measurement of energy efficiency. For purposes of 10 CFR part 431 and EPCA, the test procedures for measuring the energy efficiency of an electric motor shall be the test procedures specified in appendix B to this subpart B. § 431.17 [Reserved] § 431.18 Testing laboratories. (a) Testing pursuant to § 431.17(a)(5)(ii) must be conducted in an accredited laboratory for which the accreditation body was: (1) The National Institute of Standards and Technology/National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NIST/NVLAP); or (2) A laboratory accreditation body having a mutual recognition arrangement with NIST/NVLAP; or (3) An organization classified by the Department, pursuant to § 431.19, as an accreditation body. (b) NIST/NVLAP is under the auspices of the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)/National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), which is part of the U.S. Department of Commerce. NIST/NVLAP accreditation is granted on the basis of conformance with criteria published in 15 CFR part 285. The National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program, “Procedures and General Requirements,” NIST Handbook 150-10, April 2020, (referenced for guidance only, see [69 FR 61923, Oct. 21, 2004, as amended at 77 FR 26635, May 4, 2012; 87 FR 63657, Oct. 19, 2022] Energy Conservation Standards § 431.25 Energy conservation standards and effective dates. (a) Except as provided for fire pump electric motors in paragraph (b) of this section, each general purpose electric motor (subtype I) with a power rating of 1 horsepower or greater, but not greater than 200 horsepower, including a NEMA Design B or an equivalent IEC Design N motor that is a general purpose electric motor (subtype I), manufactured (alone or as a component of another piece of equipment) on or after December 19, 2010, but before June 1, 2016, shall have a nominal full-load efficiency that is not less than the following: Table 1—Nominal Full-Load Efficiencies of General Purpose Electric Motors (Subtype I), Except Fire Pump Electric Motors Motor horsepower/Standard kilowatt equivalent Nominal full-load efficiency Open motors Enclosed motors 6 4 2 6 4 2 1/.75 82.5 85.5 77.0 82.5 85.5 77.0 1.5/1.1 86.5 86.5 84.0 87.5 86.5 84.0 2/1.5 87.5 86.5 85.5 88.5 86.5 85.5 3/2.2 88.5 89.5 85.5 89.5 89.5 86.5 5/3.7 89.5 89.5 86.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 7.5/5.5 90.2 91.0 88.5 91.0 91.7 89.5 10/7.5 91.7 91.7 89.5 91.0 91.7 90.2 15/11 91.7 93.0 90.2 91.7 92.4 91.0 20/15 92.4 93.0 91.0 91.7 93.0 91.0 25/18.5 93.0 93.6 91.7 93.0 93.6 91.7 30/22 93.6 94.1 91.7 93.0 93.6 91.7 40/30 94.1 94.1 92.4 94.1 94.1 92.4 50/37 94.1 94.5 93.0 94.1 94.5 93.0 60/45 94.5 95.0 93.6 94.5 95.0 93.6 75/55 94.5 95.0 93.6 94.5 95.4 93.6 100/75 95.0 95.4 93.6 95.0 95.4 94.1 125/90 95.0 95.4 94.1 95.0 95.4 95.0 150/110 95.4 95.8 94.1 95.8 95.8 95.0 200/150 95.4 95.8 95.0 95.8 96.2 95.4 (b) Each fire pump electric motor that is a general purpose electric motor (subtype I) or general purpose electric motor (subtype II) manufactured (alone or as a component of another piece of equipment) on or after December 19, 2010, but before June 1, 2016, shall have a nominal full-load efficiency that is not less than the following: Table 2—Nominal Full-Load Efficiencies of Fire Pump Electric Motors Motor horsepower/standard kilowatt equivalent Nominal full-load efficiency Open motors Enclosed motors 8 6 4 2 8 6 4 2 1/.75 74.0 80.0 82.5 74.0 80.0 82.5 75.5 1.5/1.1 75.5 84.0 84.0 82.5 77.0 85.5 84.0 82.5 2/1.5 85.5 85.5 84.0 84.0 82.5 86.5 84.0 84.0 3/2.2 86.5 86.5 86.5 84.0 84.0 87.5 87.5 85.5 5/3.7 87.5 87.5 87.5 85.5 85.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 7.5/5.5 88.5 88.5 88.5 87.5 85.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 10/7.5 89.5 90.2 89.5 88.5 88.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 15/11 89.5 90.2 91.0 89.5 88.5 90.2 91.0 90.2 20/15 90.2 91.0 91.0 90.2 89.5 90.2 91.0 90.2 25/18.5 90.2 91.7 91.7 91.0 89.5 91.7 92.4 91.0 30/22 91.0 92.4 92.4 91.0 91.0 91.7 92.4 91.0 40/30 91.0 93.0 93.0 91.7 91.0 93.0 93.0 91.7 50/37 91.7 93.0 93.0 92.4 91.7 93.0 93.0 92.4 60/45 92.4 93.6 93.6 93.0 91.7 93.6 93.6 93.0 75/55 93.6 93.6 94.1 93.0 93.0 93.6 94.1 93.0 100/75 93.6 94.1 94.1 93.0 93.0 94.1 94.5 93.6 125/90 93.6 94.1 94.5 93.6 93.6 94.1 94.5 94.5 150/110 93.6 94.5 95.0 93.6 93.6 95.0 95.0 94.5 200/150 93.6 94.5 95.0 94.5 94.1 95.0 95.0 95.0 250/186 94.5 95.4 95.4 94.5 94.5 95.0 95.0 95.4 300/224 95.4 95.4 95.0 95.0 95.4 95.4 350/261 95.4 95.4 95.0 95.0 95.4 95.4 400/298 95.4 95.4 95.4 95.4 450/336 95.8 95.8 95.4 95.4 500/373 95.8 95.8 95.8 95.4 (c) Except as provided for fire pump electric motors in paragraph (b) of this section, each general purpose electric motor (subtype II) with a power rating of 1 horsepower or greater, but not greater than 200 horsepower, including a NEMA Design B or an equivalent IEC Design N motor that is a general purpose electric motor (subtype II), manufactured (alone or as a component of another piece of equipment) on or after December 19, 2010, but before June 1, 2016, shall have a nominal full-load efficiency that is not less than the following: Table 3—Nominal Full-Load Efficiencies of General Purpose Electric Motors (Subtype II), Except Fire Pump Electric Motors Motor horsepower/ Nominal full-load efficiency Open motors Enclosed motors 8 6 4 2 8 6 4 2 1/.75 74.0 80.0 82.5 74.0 80.0 82.5 75.5 1.5/1.1 75.5 84.0 84.0 82.5 77.0 85.5 84.0 82.5 2/1.5 85.5 85.5 84.0 84.0 82.5 86.5 84.0 84.0 3/2.2 86.5 86.5 86.5 84.0 84.0 87.5 87.5 85.5 5/3.7 87.5 87.5 87.5 85.5 85.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 7.5/5.5 88.5 88.5 88.5 87.5 85.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 10/7.5 89.5 90.2 89.5 88.5 88.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 15/11 89.5 90.2 91.0 89.5 88.5 90.2 91.0 90.2 20/15 90.2 91.0 91.0 90.2 89.5 90.2 91.0 90.2 25/18.5 90.2 91.7 91.7 91.0 89.5 91.7 92.4 91.0 30/22 91.0 92.4 92.4 91.0 91.0 91.7 92.4 91.0 40/30 91.0 93.0 93.0 91.7 91.0 93.0 93.0 91.7 50/37 91.7 93.0 93.0 92.4 91.7 93.0 93.0 92.4 60/45 92.4 93.6 93.6 93.0 91.7 93.6 93.6 93.0 75/55 93.6 93.6 94.1 93.0 93.0 93.6 94.1 93.0 100/75 93.6 94.1 94.1 93.0 93.0 94.1 94.5 93.6 125/90 93.6 94.1 94.5 93.6 93.6 94.1 94.5 94.5 150/110 93.6 94.5 95.0 93.6 93.6 95.0 95.0 94.5 200/150 93.6 94.5 95.0 94.5 94.1 95.0 95.0 95.0 (d) Each NEMA Design B or an equivalent IEC Design N motor that is a general purpose electric motor (subtype I) or general purpose electric motor (subtype II), excluding fire pump electric motors, with a power rating of more than 200 horsepower, but not greater than 500 horsepower, manufactured (alone or as a component of another piece of equipment) on or after December 19, 2010, but before June 1, 2016 shall have a nominal full-load efficiency that is not less than the following: Table 4—Nominal Full-Load Efficiencies of NEMA Design B General Purpose Electric Motors (Subtype I and II), Except Fire Pump Electric Motors Motor horsepower/ Nominal full-load efficiency Open motors Enclosed motors 8 6 4 2 8 6 4 2 250/186 94.5 95.4 95.4 94.5 94.5 95.0 95.0 95.4 300/224 95.4 95.4 95.0 95.0 95.4 95.4 350/261 95.4 95.4 95.0 95.0 95.4 95.4 400/298 95.4 95.4 95.4 95.4 450/336 95.8 95.8 95.4 95.4 500/373 95.8 95.8 95.8 95.4 (e) For purposes of determining the required minimum nominal full-load efficiency of an electric motor that has a horsepower or kilowatt rating between two horsepower or two kilowatt ratings listed in any table of energy conservation standards in paragraphs (a) through (d) of this section, each such motor shall be deemed to have a listed horsepower or kilowatt rating, determined as follows: (1) A horsepower at or above the midpoint between the two consecutive horsepowers shall be rounded up to the higher of the two horsepowers; (2) A horsepower below the midpoint between the two consecutive horsepowers shall be rounded down to the lower of the two horsepowers; or (3) A kilowatt rating shall be directly converted from kilowatts to horsepower using the formula 1 kilowatt = ( 1 0.746 (f) The standards in Table 1 through Table 4 of this section do not apply to definite purpose electric motors, special purpose electric motors, or those motors exempted by the Secretary. (g) The standards in Table 5 through Table 7 of this section apply only to electric motors, including partial electric motors, that satisfy the following criteria: (1) Are single-speed, induction motors; (2) Are rated for continuous duty (MG 1) operation or for duty type S1 (IEC); (3) Contain a squirrel-cage (MG 1) or cage (IEC) rotor; (4) Operate on polyphase alternating current 60-hertz sinusoidal line power; (5) Are rated 600 volts or less; (6) Have a 2-, 4-, 6-, or 8-pole configuration, (7) Are built in a three-digit or four-digit NEMA frame size (or IEC metric equivalent), including those designs between two consecutive NEMA frame sizes (or IEC metric equivalent), or an enclosed 56 NEMA frame size (or IEC metric equivalent), (8) Produce at least one horsepower (0.746 kW) but not greater than 500 horsepower (373 kW), and (9) Meet all of the performance requirements of one of the following motor types: A NEMA Design A, B, or C motor or an IEC Design N, NE, NEY, NY or H, HE, HEY, HY motor. (h) Each NEMA Design A motor, NEMA Design B motor, and IEC Design N (including NE, NEY, or NY variants) motor that is an electric motor meeting the criteria in paragraph (g) of this section and with a power rating from 1 horsepower through 500 horsepower, but excluding fire pump electric motors, manufactured (alone or as a component of another piece of equipment) on or after June 1, 2016, but before June 1, 2027, shall have a nominal full-load efficiency of not less than the following: Table 5 to Paragraph ( h Motor horsepower/ Nominal full-load efficiency (%) 2 Pole 4 Pole 6 Pole 8 Pole Enclosed Open Enclosed Open Enclosed Open Enclosed Open 1/.75 77.0 77.0 85.5 85.5 82.5 82.5 75.5 75.5 1.5/1.1 84.0 84.0 86.5 86.5 87.5 86.5 78.5 77.0 2/1.5 85.5 85.5 86.5 86.5 88.5 87.5 84.0 86.5 3/2.2 86.5 85.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 85.5 87.5 5/3.7 88.5 86.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 86.5 88.5 7.5/5.5 89.5 88.5 91.7 91.0 91.0 90.2 86.5 89.5 10/7.5 90.2 89.5 91.7 91.7 91.0 91.7 89.5 90.2 15/11 91.0 90.2 92.4 93.0 91.7 91.7 89.5 90.2 20/15 91.0 91.0 93.0 93.0 91.7 92.4 90.2 91.0 25/18.5 91.7 91.7 93.6 93.6 93.0 93.0 90.2 91.0 30/22 91.7 91.7 93.6 94.1 93.0 93.6 91.7 91.7 40/30 92.4 92.4 94.1 94.1 94.1 94.1 91.7 91.7 50/37 93.0 93.0 94.5 94.5 94.1 94.1 92.4 92.4 60/45 93.6 93.6 95.0 95.0 94.5 94.5 92.4 93.0 75/55 93.6 93.6 95.4 95.0 94.5 94.5 93.6 94.1 100/75 94.1 93.6 95.4 95.4 95.0 95.0 93.6 94.1 125/90 95.0 94.1 95.4 95.4 95.0 95.0 94.1 94.1 150/110 95.0 94.1 95.8 95.8 95.8 95.4 94.1 94.1 200/150 95.4 95.0 96.2 95.8 95.8 95.4 94.5 94.1 250/186 95.8 95.0 96.2 95.8 95.8 95.8 95.0 95.0 300/224 95.8 95.4 96.2 95.8 95.8 95.8 350/261 95.8 95.4 96.2 95.8 95.8 95.8 400/298 95.8 95.8 96.2 95.8 450/336 95.8 96.2 96.2 96.2 500/373 95.8 96.2 96.2 96.2 (i) Starting on June 1, 2016, each NEMA Design C motor and IEC Design H (including HE, HEY, or HY variants) motor that is an electric motor meeting the criteria in paragraph (g) of this section and with a power rating from 1 horsepower through 200 horsepower manufactured (alone or as a component of another piece of equipment) shall have a nominal full-load efficiency that is not less than the following: Table 6 to Paragraph ( i Motor horsepower/standard kilowatt equivalent Nominal full-load efficiency (%) 4 Pole 6 Pole 8 Pole Enclosed Open Enclosed Open Enclosed Open 1/.75 85.5 85.5 82.5 82.5 75.5 75.5 1.5/1.1 86.5 86.5 87.5 86.5 78.5 77.0 2/1.5 86.5 86.5 88.5 87.5 84.0 86.5 3/2.2 89.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 85.5 87.5 5/3.7 89.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 86.5 88.5 7.5/5.5 91.7 91.0 91.0 90.2 86.5 89.5 10/7.5 91.7 91.7 91.0 91.7 89.5 90.2 15/11 92.4 93.0 91.7 91.7 89.5 90.2 20/15 93.0 93.0 91.7 92.4 90.2 91.0 25/18.5 93.6 93.6 93.0 93.0 90.2 91.0 30/22 93.6 94.1 93.0 93.6 91.7 91.7 40/30 94.1 94.1 94.1 94.1 91.7 91.7 50/37 94.5 94.5 94.1 94.1 92.4 92.4 60/45 95.0 95.0 94.5 94.5 92.4 93.0 75/55 95.4 95.0 94.5 94.5 93.6 94.1 100/75 95.4 95.4 95.0 95.0 93.6 94.1 125/90 95.4 95.4 95.0 95.0 94.1 94.1 150/110 95.8 95.8 95.8 95.4 94.1 94.1 200/150 96.2 95.8 95.8 95.4 94.5 94.1 (j) Starting on June 1, 2016, each fire pump electric motor meeting the criteria in paragraph (g) of this section and with a power rating of 1 horsepower through 500 horsepower, manufactured (alone or as a component of another piece of equipment) shall have a nominal full-load efficiency that is not less than the following: Table 7—Nominal Full-Load Efficiencies of Fire Pump Electric Motors at 60 Hz Motor horsepower/ Nominal full-load efficiency (%) 2 Pole 4 Pole 6 Pole 8 Pole Enclosed Open Enclosed Open Enclosed Open Enclosed Open 1/.75 75.5 82.5 82.5 80.0 80.0 74.0 74.0 1.5/1.1 82.5 82.5 84.0 84.0 85.5 84.0 77.0 75.5 2/1.5 84.0 84.0 84.0 84.0 86.5 85.5 82.5 85.5 3/2.2 85.5 84.0 87.5 86.5 87.5 86.5 84.0 86.5 5/3.7 87.5 85.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 85.5 87.5 7.5/5.5 88.5 87.5 89.5 88.5 89.5 88.5 85.5 88.5 10/7.5 89.5 88.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 90.2 88.5 89.5 15/11 90.2 89.5 91.0 91.0 90.2 90.2 88.5 89.5 20/15 90.2 90.2 91.0 91.0 90.2 91.0 89.5 90.2 25/18.5 91.0 91.0 92.4 91.7 91.7 91.7 89.5 90.2 30/22 91.0 91.0 92.4 92.4 91.7 92.4 91.0 91.0 40/30 91.7 91.7 93.0 93.0 93.0 93.0 91.0 91.0 50/37 92.4 92.4 93.0 93.0 93.0 93.0 91.7 91.7 60/45 93.0 93.0 93.6 93.6 93.6 93.6 91.7 92.4 75/55 93.0 93.0 94.1 94.1 93.6 93.6 93.0 93.6 100/75 93.6 93.0 94.5 94.1 94.1 94.1 93.0 93.6 125/90 94.5 93.6 94.5 94.5 94.1 94.1 93.6 93.6 150/110 94.5 93.6 95.0 95.0 95.0 94.5 93.6 93.6 200/150 95.0 94.5 95.0 95.0 95.0 94.5 94.1 93.6 250/186 95.4 94.5 95.0 95.4 95.0 95.4 94.5 94.5 300/224 95.4 95.0 95.4 95.4 95.0 95.4 350/261 95.4 95.0 95.4 95.4 95.0 95.4 400/298 95.4 95.4 95.4 95.4 450/336 95.4 95.8 95.4 95.8 500/373 95.4 95.8 95.8 95.8 (k) For purposes of determining the required minimum nominal full-load efficiency of an electric motor that has a horsepower or kilowatt rating between two horsepower or two kilowatt ratings listed in any table of energy conservation standards in paragraphs (h) through (l) of this section, each such motor shall be deemed to have a listed horsepower or kilowatt rating, determined as follows: (1) A horsepower at or above the midpoint between the two consecutive horsepowers shall be rounded up to the higher of the two horsepowers; (2) A horsepower below the midpoint between the two consecutive horsepowers shall be rounded down to the lower of the two horsepowers; or (3) A kilowatt rating shall be directly converted from kilowatts to horsepower using the formula 1 kilowatt = ( 1 0.746 (l) The standards in Table 5 through Table 7 of this section do not apply to the following electric motors exempted by the Secretary, or any additional electric motors that the Secretary may exempt: (1) Air-over electric motors; (2) Component sets of an electric motor; (3) Liquid-cooled electric motors; (4) Submersible electric motors; and (5) Inverter-only electric motors. (m) The standards in tables 8 through 10 of this section apply only to electric motors, including partial electric motors, that satisfy the following criteria: (1) Are single-speed, induction motors; (2) Are rated for continuous duty (MG 1) operation or for duty type S1 (IEC); (3) Contain a squirrel-cage (MG 1) or cage (IEC) rotor; (4) Operate on polyphase alternating current 60-hertz sinusoidal line power; (5) Are rated 600 volts or less; (6) Have a 2-, 4-, 6-, or 8-pole configuration, (7) Are built in a three-digit or four-digit NEMA frame size (or IEC metric equivalent), including those designs between two consecutive NEMA frame sizes (or IEC metric equivalent), or an enclosed 56 NEMA frame size (or IEC metric equivalent), (8) Produce at least one horsepower (0.746 kW) but not greater than 750 horsepower (559 kW), and (9) Meet all of the performance requirements of one of the following motor types: A NEMA Design A, B, or C motor or an IEC Design N, NE, NEY, NY or H, HE, HEY, HY motor. (n) Starting on June 1, 2027, each NEMA Design A motor, NEMA Design B motor, and IEC Design N (including NE, NEY, or NY variants) motor that is an electric motor meeting the criteria in paragraph (m) of this section and with a power rating from 1 horsepower through 750 horsepower, but excluding fire pump electric motors and air-over electric motors, manufactured (alone or as a component of another piece of equipment) shall have a nominal full-load efficiency of not less than the following: Table 8 to Paragraph ( n z Motor horsepower/standard kilowatt equivalent Nominal full-load efficiency (%) 2 Pole 4 Pole 6 Pole 8 Pole Enclosed Open Enclosed Open Enclosed Open Enclosed Open 1/.75 77.0 77.0 85.5 85.5 82.5 82.5 75.5 75.5 1.5/1.1 84.0 84.0 86.5 86.5 87.5 86.5 78.5 77.0 2/1.5 85.5 85.5 86.5 86.5 88.5 87.5 84.0 86.5 3/2.2 86.5 85.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 85.5 87.5 5/3.7 88.5 86.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 86.5 88.5 7.5/5.5 89.5 88.5 91.7 91.0 91.0 90.2 86.5 89.5 10/7.5 90.2 89.5 91.7 91.7 91.0 91.7 89.5 90.2 15/11 91.0 90.2 92.4 93.0 91.7 91.7 89.5 90.2 20/15 91.0 91.0 93.0 93.0 91.7 92.4 90.2 91.0 25/18.5 91.7 91.7 93.6 93.6 93.0 93.0 90.2 91.0 30/22 91.7 91.7 93.6 94.1 93.0 93.6 91.7 91.7 40/30 92.4 92.4 94.1 94.1 94.1 94.1 91.7 91.7 50/37 93.0 93.0 94.5 94.5 94.1 94.1 92.4 92.4 60/45 93.6 93.6 95.0 95.0 94.5 94.5 92.4 93.0 75/55 93.6 93.6 95.4 95.0 94.5 94.5 93.6 94.1 100/75 95.0 94.5 96.2 96.2 95.8 95.8 94.5 95.0 125/90 95.4 94.5 96.2 96.2 95.8 95.8 95.0 95.0 150/110 95.4 94.5 96.2 96.2 96.2 95.8 95.0 95.0 200/150 95.8 95.4 96.5 96.2 96.2 95.8 95.4 95.0 250/186 96.2 95.4 96.5 96.2 96.2 96.2 95.4 95.4 300/224 95.8 95.4 96.2 95.8 95.8 95.8 350/261 95.8 95.4 96.2 95.8 95.8 95.8 400/298 95.8 95.8 96.2 95.8 450/336 95.8 96.2 96.2 96.2 500/373 95.8 96.2 96.2 96.2 550/410 95.8 96.2 96.2 96.2 600/447 95.8 96.2 96.2 96.2 650/485 95.8 96.2 96.2 96.2 700/522 95.8 96.2 96.2 96.2 750/559 95.8 96.2 96.2 96.2 (o) Starting on June 1, 2027, each NEMA Design A motor, NEMA Design B motor, and IEC Design N (including NE, NEY, or NY variants) motor that is an air-over electric motor meeting the criteria in paragraph (m) of this section and with a power rating from 1 horsepower through 250 horsepower, built in a standard frame size, but excluding fire pump electric motors, manufactured (alone or as a component of another piece of equipment) shall have a nominal full-load efficiency of not less than the following: Table 9 to Paragraph ( o z Motor horsepower/standard kilowatt equivalent Nominal full-load efficiency (%) 2 Pole 4 Pole 6 Pole 8 Pole Enclosed Open Enclosed Open Enclosed Open Enclosed Open 1/.75 77.0 77.0 85.5 85.5 82.5 82.5 75.5 75.5 1.5/1.1 84.0 84.0 86.5 86.5 87.5 86.5 78.5 77.0 2/1.5 85.5 85.5 86.5 86.5 88.5 87.5 84.0 86.5 3/2.2 86.5 85.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 85.5 87.5 5/3.7 88.5 86.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 86.5 88.5 7.5/5.5 89.5 88.5 91.7 91.0 91.0 90.2 86.5 89.5 10/7.5 90.2 89.5 91.7 91.7 91.0 91.7 89.5 90.2 15/11 91.0 90.2 92.4 93.0 91.7 91.7 89.5 90.2 20/15 91.0 91.0 93.0 93.0 91.7 92.4 90.2 91.0 25/18.5 91.7 91.7 93.6 93.6 93.0 93.0 90.2 91.0 30/22 91.7 91.7 93.6 94.1 93.0 93.6 91.7 91.7 40/30 92.4 92.4 94.1 94.1 94.1 94.1 91.7 91.7 50/37 93.0 93.0 94.5 94.5 94.1 94.1 92.4 92.4 60/45 93.6 93.6 95.0 95.0 94.5 94.5 92.4 93.0 75/55 93.6 93.6 95.4 95.0 94.5 94.5 93.6 94.1 100/75 95.0 94.5 96.2 96.2 95.8 95.8 94.5 95.0 125/90 95.4 94.5 96.2 96.2 95.8 95.8 95.0 95.0 150/110 95.4 94.5 96.2 96.2 96.2 95.8 95.0 95.0 200/150 95.8 95.4 96.5 96.2 96.2 95.8 95.4 95.0 250/186 96.2 95.4 96.5 96.2 96.2 96.2 95.4 95.4 (p) Starting on June 1, 2027, each NEMA Design A motor, NEMA Design B motor, and IEC Design N (including NE, NEY, or NY variants) motor that is an air-over electric motor meeting the criteria in paragraph (m) of this section and with a power rating from 1 horsepower through 20 horsepower, built in a specialized frame size, but excluding fire pump electric motors, manufactured (alone or as a component of another piece of equipment) shall have a nominal full-load efficiency of not less than the following: Table 10 to Paragraph ( p z Motor horsepower/standard kilowatt equivalent Nominal full-load efficiency (%) 2 Pole 4 Pole 6 Pole 8 Pole Enclosed Open Enclosed Open Enclosed Open Enclosed Open 1/.75 74.0 82.5 82.5 80.0 80.0 74.0 74.0 1.5/1.1 82.5 82.5 84.0 84.0 85.5 84.0 77.0 75.5 2/1.5 84.0 84.0 84.0 84.0 86.5 85.5 82.5 85.5 3/2.2 85.5 84.0 87.5 86.5 87.5 86.5 84.0 86.5 5/3.7 87.5 85.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 85.5 87.5 7.5/5.5 88.5 87.5 89.5 88.5 89.5 88.5 85.5 88.5 10/7.5 89.5 88.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 90.2 15/11 90.2 89.5 91.0 91.0 20/15 90.2 90.2 91.0 91.0 (q) For purposes of determining the required minimum nominal full-load efficiency of an electric motor that has a horsepower or kilowatt rating between two horsepower or two kilowatt ratings listed in any table of energy conservation standards in paragraphs (n) through (p) through of this section, each such motor shall be deemed to have a listed horsepower or kilowatt rating, determined as follows: (1) A horsepower at or above the midpoint between the two consecutive horsepowers shall be rounded up to the higher of the two horsepowers; (2) A horsepower below the midpoint between the two consecutive horsepowers shall be rounded down to the lower of the two horsepowers; or (3) A kilowatt rating shall be directly converted from kilowatts to horsepower using the formula 1 kilowatt = ( 1/0.746 (r) The standards in tables 8 through 10 of this section do not apply to the following electric motors exempted by the Secretary, or any additional electric motors that the Secretary may exempt: (1) Component sets of an electric motor; (2) Liquid-cooled electric motors; (3) Submersible electric motors; and (4) Inverter-only electric motors. [79 FR 31010, May 29, 2014, as amended at 87 FR 63657, Oct. 19, 2022; 88 FR 36150, Sept. 29, 2023] § 431.26 Preemption of State regulations. Any State regulation providing for any energy conservation standard, or other requirement with respect to the energy efficiency or energy use, of an electric motor that is not identical to a Federal standard in effect under this subpart is preempted by that standard, except as provided for in Section 345(a) and 327(b) and (c) of the Act. Labeling § 431.31 Labeling requirements. (a) Electric motor nameplate Required information. (i) The motor's nominal full load efficiency (as of the date of manufacture), derived from the motor's average full load efficiency as determined pursuant to this subpart; and (ii) A Compliance Certification number (“CC number”) supplied by DOE to the manufacturer or private labeler, pursuant to § 431.36(f), and applicable to that motor. Such CC number must be on the nameplate of a motor beginning 90 days after either: (A) The manufacturer or private labeler has received the number upon submitting a Compliance Certification covering that motor, or (B) The expiration of 21 days from DOE's receipt of a Compliance Certification covering that motor, if the manufacturer or private labeler has not been advised by DOE that the Compliance Certification fails to satisfy § 431.36. (2) Display of required information. (3) Optional display. or with some comparable designation or logo, if the motor meets the applicable standard prescribed in § 431.25, as determined pursuant to this subpart, and is covered by a Compliance Certification that satisfies § 431.36. (b) Disclosure of efficiency information in marketing materials. (i) On each page of a catalog that lists the motor; and (ii) In other materials used to market the motor. (2) The “ee” logo, or other similar logo or designations, may also be used in catalogs and other materials to the same extent they may be used on labels under paragraph (a)(3) of this section. [69 FR 61923, Oct. 21, 2004, as amended at 77 FR 26637, May 4, 2012] § 431.32 Preemption of State regulations. The provisions of § 431.31 supersede any State regulation to the extent required by Section 327 of the Act. Pursuant to the Act, all State regulations that require the disclosure for any electric motor of information with respect to energy consumption, other than the information required to be disclosed in accordance with this part, are superseded. Certification § 431.35 Applicability of certification requirements. Section 431.36 sets forth the procedures for manufacturers to certify that electric motors comply with the applicable energy efficiency standards set forth in this subpart. § 431.36 Compliance Certification. (a) General. (1) The representations as to the basic model must be based on use of a certification organization; or (2) Any testing of the basic model on which the representations are based must be conducted at an accredited laboratory. (b) Required contents General representations. (i) The nominal full load efficiency for each basic model of electric motor distributed is not less than the minimum nominal full load efficiency required for that motor by § 431.25; (ii) All required determinations on which the Compliance Certification is based were made in compliance with the applicable requirements prescribed in this subpart; (iii) All information reported in the Compliance Certification is true, accurate, and complete; and (iv) The manufacturer or private labeler is aware of the penalties associated with violations of the Act and the regulations thereunder, and of 18 U.S.C. 1001 which prohibits knowingly making false statements to the Federal Government. (2) Specific data. (ii) The Compliance Certification must identify the basic models on which actual testing has been performed to meet the requirements of § 431.17. (iii) The format for a Compliance Certification is set forth in appendix C of this subpart. (c) Optional contents. (d) Signature and submission. https://www.regulations.doe.gov/ccms. (e) New basic models. (f) Response to Compliance Certification; Compliance Certification Number (CC number) (2) Issuance of CC number(s). (A) DOE will provide a single unique CC number, “CC________,” to the manufacturer or private labeler, and such CC number shall be applicable to all electric motors distributed by the manufacturer or private labeler, or (B) When required by paragraph (f)(3) of this section, DOE will provide more than one CC number to the manufacturer or private labeler. (ii) Subsequent Compliance Certification. When DOE advises that any other Compliance Certification is acceptable, it will provide a unique CC number for any brand name, trademark or other name when required by paragraph (f)(3) of this section. (iii) When DOE declines to provide a CC number as requested by a manufacturer or private labeler in accordance with § 431.36(c), DOE will advise the requester of the reasons for such refusal. (3) Issuance of two or more CC numbers. (A) For which DOE has previously provided a CC number, or (B) That duplicates or overlaps with other names under which the manufacturer or private labeler sells electric motors. (ii) Once DOE has provided a CC number for a particular name, that shall be the only CC number applicable to all electric motors distributed by the manufacturer or private labeler under that name. (iii) If the Compliance Certification in which a manufacturer or private labeler requests a CC number is the initial Compliance Certification submitted by it or on its behalf, and it distributes electric motors not covered by the CC number(s) DOE provides in response to the request(s), DOE will also provide a unique CC number that shall be applicable to all of these other motors. [69 FR 61923, Oct. 21, 2004, as amended at 76 FR 59006, Sept. 23, 2011; 77 FR 26638, May 4, 2012] Appendix A to Subpart B of Part 431 [Reserved] Appendix B to Subpart B of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Efficiency of Electric Motors Note: Manufacturers of electric motors subject to energy conservation standards in § 431.25 must test in accordance with this appendix. For any other electric motor that is not currently covered by the energy conservation standards at § 431.25, manufacturers of this equipment must test in accordance with this appendix 180 days after the effective date of the final rule adopting energy conservation standards for such motor. For any other electric motor that is not currently covered by the energy conservation standards at § 431.25, manufacturers choosing to make any representations respecting of energy efficiency for such motors must test in accordance with this appendix. 0. Incorporation by Reference In § 431.15, DOE incorporated by reference the entire standard for CSA C390-10, CSA C747-09, IEC 60034-1:2010, IEC 60034-2-1:2014, IEC 60051-1:2016, IEC 61800-9-2:2017, IEEE 112-2017, IEEE 114-2010, and NEMA MG 1-2016; however, only enumerated provisions of those documents are applicable as follows. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of this appendix takes precedence over those documents. Any subsequent amendment to a referenced document by the standard-setting organization will not affect the test procedure in this appendix, unless and until the test procedure is amended by DOE. 0.1. CSA C390-10 (a) Section 1.3 “Scope,” as specified in sections 2.1.1 and 2.3.3.2 of this appendix; (b) Section 3.1 “Definitions,” as specified in sections 2.1.1 and 2.3.3.2 of this appendix; (c) Section 5 “General test requirements—Measurements,” as specified in sections 2.1.1 and 2.3.3.2 of this appendix; (d) Section 7 “Test method,” as specified in sections 2.1.1 and 2.3.3.2 of this appendix; (e) Table 1 “Resistance measurement time delay,” as specified in sections 2.1.1 and 2.3.3.2 of this appendix; (f) Annex B “Linear regression analysis,” as specified in sections 2.1.1 and 2.3.3.2 of this appendix; and (g) Annex C “Procedure for correction of dynamometer torque readings” as specified in sections 2.1.1 and 2.3.3.2 of this appendix. 0.2. CSA C747-09 (a) Section 1.6 “Scope” as specified in sections 2.3.1.2 and 2.3.2.2 of this appendix; (b) Section 3 “Definitions” as specified in sections 2.3.1.2 and 2.3.2.2 of this appendix; (c) Section 5 “General test requirements” as specified in sections 2.3.1.2 and 2.3.2.2 of this appendix; and (d) Section 6 “Test method” as specified in sections 2.3.1.2 and 2.3.2.2 of this appendix. 0.3. IEC 60034-1:2010 (a) Section 4.2.1 as specified in section 1.2 of this appendix; (b) Section 7.2 as specified in sections 2.1.2, 2.3.1.3, 2.3.2.3, and 2.3.3.3 of this appendix; (c) Section 8.6.2.3.3 as specified in sections 2.1.2, 2.3.1.3, 2.3.2.3, and 2.3.3.3 of this appendix; and (d) Table 5 as specified in sections 2.1.2, 2.3.1.3, 2.3.2.3, and 2.3.3.3 of this appendix. 0.4. IEC 60034-2-1:2014 (a) Method 2-1-1A (which also includes paragraphs (b) through (f) of this section) as specified in sections 2.3.1.3 and 2.3.2.3 of this appendix; (b) Method 2-1-1B (which also includes paragraphs (b) through (e), (g), and (i) of this section) as specified in sections 2.1.2 and 2.3.3.3 of this appendix; (c) Section 3 “Terms and definitions” as specified in sections 2.1.2, 2.3.1.3, 2.3.2.3, 2.3.3.3, and 2.4.1 of this appendix; (d) Section 4 “Symbols and abbreviations” as specified in sections 2.1.2, 2.3.1.3, 2.3.2.3, 2.3.3.3 and 2.4.1 of this appendix; (e) Section 5 “Basic requirements” as specified in sections 2.1.2, 2.3.1.3, 2.3.2.3, 2.3.3.3, and 2.4.1 of this appendix; (f) Section 6.1.2 “Method 2-1-1A—Direct measurement of input and output” (except Section 6.1.2.2, “Test Procedure”) as specified in sections 2.3.1.3 and 2.3.2.3 of this appendix; (g) Section 6.1.3 “Method 2-1-1B—Summations of losses, additional load losses according to the method of residual losses” as specified in sections 2.1.2 and 2.3.3.3 of this appendix; and (h) Section 7.1. “Preferred Testing Methods” as specified in section 2.4.1 of this appendix; (i) Annex D, “Test report template for 2-1-1B” as specified in sections 2.1.2 and 2.3.3.3 of this appendix. 0.5. IEC 60051-1:2016 (a) Section 5.2 as specified in sections 2.1.2, 2.3.1.3, 2.3.2.3, and 2.3.3.3 of this appendix; and (b) [Reserved]. 0.6. IEC 61800-9-2:2017 (a) Section 3 “Terms, definitions, symbols, and abbreviated terms” as specified in sections 2.4.2 and 2.4.3 of this appendix; (b) Section 7.7.2, “Input-output measurement of PDS losses” as specified in sections 2.4.2 and 2.4.3 of this appendix; (c) Section 7.7.3.1, “General” as specified in sections 2.4.2 and 2.4.3 of this appendix; (d) Section 7.7.3.2. “Power analyser and transducers” as specified in sections 2.4.2 and 2.4.3 of this appendix; (e) Section 7.7.3.3, “Mechanical Output of the motor” as specified in sections 2.4.2 and 2.4.3 of this appendix; (f) Section 7.7.3.5, “PDS loss determination according to input-output method” as specified in sections 2.4.2 and 2.4.3 of this appendix; (g) Section 7.10 “Testing Conditions for PDS testing” as specified in sections 2.4.2 and 2.4.3 of this appendix. 0.7. IEEE 112-2017 (a) Test Method A (which also includes paragraphs (c) through (g), (i), and (j) of this section) as specified in section 2.3.2.1 of this appendix; (b) Test Method B (which also includes paragraphs (c) through (f), (h), (k) and (l) of this section) as specified in sections 2.1.3 and 2.3.3.1 of this appendix; (c) Section 3, “General” as specified in sections 2.1.3, 2.3.2.1, and 2.3.3.1 of this appendix; (d) Section 4, “Measurements” as specified in sections 2.1.3, 2.3.2.1, and 2.3.3.1 of this appendix; (e) Section 5, “Machine losses and tests for losses” as specified in sections 2.1.3, 2.3.2.1, and 2.3.3.1 of this appendix; (f) Section 6.1, “General” as specified in sections 2.1.3, 2.3.2.1, and 2.3.3.1 of this appendix; (g) Section 6.3, “Efficiency test method A—Input-output” as specified in section 2.3.2.1 of this appendix; (h) Section 6.4, “Efficiency test method B—Input-output” as specified in sections 2.1.3 and 2.3.3.1 of this appendix; (i) Section 9.2, “Form A—Method A” as specified in section 2.3.2.1 of this appendix; (j) Section 9.3, “Form A2—Method A calculations” as specified in section 2.3.2.1 of this appendix; (k) Section 9.4, “Form B—Method B” as specified in sections 2.1.3, and 2.3.3.1 of this appendix; and (l) Section 9.5, “Form B2—Method B calculations” as specified in sections 2.1.3 and 2.3.3.1 of this appendix. 0.8. IEEE 114-2010 (a) Section 3.2, “Test with load” as specified in section 2.3.1.1 of this appendix; (b) Section 4, “Testing Facilities as specified in section 2.3.1.1 of this appendix; (c) Section 5, “Measurements” as specified in section 2.3.1.1 of this appendix; (d) Section 6, “General” as specified in section 2.3.1.1 of this appendix; (e) Section 7, “Type of loss” as specified in section 2.3.1.1 of this appendix; (f) Section 8, “Efficiency and Power Factor” as specified in section 2.3.1.1 of this appendix; (g) Section 10 “Temperature Tests” as specified in section 2.4.1.1 of this appendix; (h) Annex A, Section A.3 “Determination of Motor Efficiency” as specified in section 2.4.1.1 of this appendix; and (i) Annex A, Section A.4 “Explanatory notes for form 3, test data” as specified in section 2.4.1.1 of this appendix. 0.9. NEMA MG 1-2016 (a) Paragraph 1.40.1, “Continuous Rating” as specified in section 1.2 of this appendix; (b) Paragraph 12.58.1, “Determination of Motor Efficiency and Losses” as specified in the introductory paragraph to section 2.1 of this appendix, and (c) Paragraph 34.1, “Applicable Motor Efficiency Test Methods” as specified in section 2.2 of this appendix; (d) Paragraph 34.2.2 “AO Temperature Test Procedure 2—Target Temperature with Airflow” as specified in section 2.2 of this appendix; (e) Paragraph 34.4, “AO Temperature Test Procedure 2—Target Temperature with Airflow” as specified in section 2.2 of this appendix. 1. Scope and Definitions 1.1 Scope. 1.2 Definitions. Electric motors above 500 horsepower Small, non-small-electric-motor electric motor (“SNEM”) (a) Is not a small electric motor, as defined § 431.442 and is not a dedicated-purpose pool pump motor as defined at § 431.483; (b) Is rated for continuous duty (MG 1) operation or for duty type S1 (IEC); (c) Operates on polyphase or single-phase alternating current 60-hertz (Hz) sinusoidal line power; or is used with an inverter that operates on polyphase or single-phase alternating current 60-hertz (Hz) sinusoidal line power; (d) Is rated for 600 volts or less; (e) Is a single-speed induction motor capable of operating without an inverter or is an inverter-only electric motor; (f) Produces a rated motor horsepower greater than or equal to 0.25 horsepower (0.18 kW); and (g) Is built in the following frame sizes: any two-, or three-digit NEMA frame size (or IEC metric equivalent) if the motor operates on single-phase power; any two-, or three-digit NEMA frame size (or IEC metric equivalent) if the motor operates on polyphase power, and has a rated motor horsepower less than 1 horsepower (0.75 kW); or a two-digit NEMA frame size (or IEC metric equivalent), if the motor operates on polyphase power, has a rated motor horsepower equal to or greater than 1 horsepower (0.75 kW), and is not an enclosed 56 NEMA frame size (or IEC metric equivalent). Synchronous Electric Motor (a) Is not a dedicated-purpose pool pump motor as defined at § 431.483 or is not an air-over electric motor; (b) Is a synchronous electric motor; (c) Is rated for continuous duty (MG 1) operation or for duty type S1 (IEC); (d) Operates on polyphase or single-phase alternating current 60-hertz (Hz) sinusoidal line power; or is used with an inverter that operates on polyphase or single-phase alternating current 60-hertz (Hz) sinusoidal line power; (e) Is rated 600 volts or less; (f) Produces at least 0.25 hp (0.18 kW) but not greater than 750 hp (559 kW). 2. Test Procedures 2.1. Test Procedures for Electric Motors that meet the criteria listed at § 431.25(g), and electric motors above 500 horsepower that are capable of operating without an inverter. Air-over electric motors must be tested in accordance with Section 2.2. Inverter-only electric motors must be tested in accordance with 2.4. Efficiency and losses must be determined in accordance with NEMA MG 1-2016, Paragraph 12.58.1, “Determination of Motor Efficiency and Losses,” or one of the following testing methods: 2.1.1. CSA C390-10 (see section 0.1 of this appendix) 2.1.2. IEC 60034-2-1:2014, Method 2-1-1B (see section 0.4(b) of this appendix). The supply voltage shall be in accordance with Section 7.2 of IEC 60034-1:2010. The measured resistance at the end of the thermal test shall be determined in a similar way to the extrapolation procedure described in Section 8.6.2.3.3 of IEC 60034-1:2010, using the shortest possible time instead of the time interval specified in Table 5 to IEC 60034-1:2010, and extrapolating to zero. The measuring instruments for electrical quantities shall have the equivalent of an accuracy class of 0,2 in case of a direct test and 0,5 in case of an indirect test in accordance with Section 5.2 of IEC 60051-1:2016, or 2.1.3. IEEE 112-2017, Test Method B (see section 0.7(b) of this appendix). 2.2. Test Procedures for Air-Over Electric Motors Except noted otherwise in section 2.2.1 and 2.2.2 of this appendix, efficiency and losses of air-over electric motors must be determined in accordance with NEMA MG 1-2016 (excluding Paragraph 12.58.1). 2.2.1. The provisions in Paragraph 34.4.1.a.1 of NEMA MG 1-2016 related to the determination of the target temperature for polyphase motors must be replaced by a single target temperature of 75 °C for all insulation classes. 2.2.2. The industry standards listed in Paragraph 34.1 of NEMA MG 1-2016, “Applicable Motor Efficiency Test Methods” must correspond to the versions identified in section 0 of this appendix, specifically IEEE 112-2017, IEEE 114-2010, CSA C390-10, CSA C747-09, and IEC 60034-2-1:2014. In addition, when testing in accordance with IEC 60034-2-1:2014, the additional testing instructions in section 2.1.2 of this appendix apply. 2.3. Test Procedures for SNEMs capable of operating without an inverter. Air-over SNEMs must be tested in accordance with section 2.2. of this appendix. Inverter-only SNEMs must be tested in accordance with section 2.4. of this appendix. 2.3.1. The efficiencies and losses of single-phase SNEMs that are not air-over electric motors and are capable of operating without an inverter, are determined using one of the following methods: 2.3.1.1. IEEE 114-2010 (see section 0.8 of this appendix); 2.3.1.2. CSA C747-09 (see section 0.2 of this appendix), or 2.3.1.3. IEC 60034-2-1:2014 Method 2-1-1A (see section 0.4(a) of this appendix),. The supply voltage shall be in accordance with Section 7.2 of IEC 60034-1:2010. The measured resistance at the end of the thermal test shall be determined in a similar way to the extrapolation procedure described in Section 8.6.2.3.3 of IEC 60034-1:2010, using the shortest possible time instead of the time interval specified in Table 5 of IEC 60034-1:2010, and extrapolating to zero. The measuring instruments for electrical quantities shall have the equivalent of an accuracy class of 0,2 in case of a direct test and 0,5 in case of an indirect test in accordance with Section 5.2 of IEC 60051-1:2016. 2.3.1.3.1. Additional IEC 60034-2-1:2014 Method 2-1-1A Torque Measurement Instructions. 2.3.1.3.2. Couple the machine under test to a load machine. Measure torque using an in-line, shaft-coupled, rotating torque transducer or stationary, stator reaction torque transducer. Operate the machine under test at the rated load until thermal equilibrium is achieved (rate of change 1 K or less per half hour). Record U, I, Pel, n, T, θc. 2.3.2. The efficiencies and losses of polyphase electric motors considered with rated horsepower less than 1 that are not air-over electric motors, and are capable of operating without an inverter, are determined using one of the following methods: 2.3.2.1. IEEE 112-2017 Test Method A (see section 0.7(a) of this appendix); 2.3.2.2. CSA C747-09 (see section 0.2 of this appendix); or 2.3.2.3. IEC 60034-2-1:2014 Method 2-1-1A (see section 0.4(a) of this appendix). The supply voltage shall be in accordance with Section 7.2 of IEC 60034-1:2010. The measured resistance at the end of the thermal test shall be determined in a similar way to the extrapolation procedure described in Section 8.6.2.3.3 of IEC 60034-1:2010 using the shortest possible time instead of the time interval specified in Table 5 of IEC 60034-1:2010, and extrapolating to zero. The measuring instruments for electrical quantities shall have the equivalent of an accuracy class of 0,2 in case of a direct test and 0,5 in case of an indirect test in accordance with Section 5.2 of IEC 60051-1:2016. 2.3.2.3.1. Additional IEC 60034-2-1:2014 Method 2-1-1A Torque Measurement Instructions. 2.3.2.3.2. Couple the machine under test to load machine. Measure torque using an in-line shaft-coupled, rotating torque transducer or stationary, stator reaction torque transducer. Operate the machine under test at the rated load until thermal equilibrium is achieved (rate of change 1 K or less per half hour). Record U, I, Pel, n, T, θc. 2.3.3. The efficiencies and losses of polyphase SNEMs with rated horsepower equal to or greater than 1 that are not air-over electric motors, and are capable of operating without an inverter, are determined using one of the following methods: 2.3.3.1. IEEE 112-2017 Test Method B (see section 0.7(b) of this appendix); 2.3.3.2. CSA C390-10 (see section 0.1 of this appendix); or 2.3.3.3. IEC 60034-2-1:2014 Method 2-1-1B (see section 0.4(b) of this appendix). The supply voltage shall be in accordance with Section 7.2 of IEC 60034-1:2010. The measured resistance at the end of the thermal test shall be determined in a similar way to the extrapolation procedure described in Section 8.6.2.3.3 of IEC 60034-1:2010 using the shortest possible time instead of the time interval specified in Table 5 of IEC 60034-1:2010, and extrapolating to zero. The measuring instruments for electrical quantities shall have the equivalent of an accuracy class of 0,2 in case of a direct test and 0,5 in case of an indirect test in accordance with Section 5.2 of IEC 60051-1:2016. 2.4. Test Procedures for Electric Motors that are Synchronous Motors and Inverter-only Electric Motors Section 2.4.1 of this appendix applies to electric motors that are synchronous motors that do not require an inverter to operate. Sections 2.4.2. and 2.4.3. of this appendix apply to electric motors that are synchronous motors and are inverter-only; and to induction electric motors that are inverter-only electric motors. 2.4.1. The efficiencies and losses of electric motors that are synchronous motors that do not require an inverter to operate, are determined in accordance with IEC 60034-2-1:2014, Section 3 “Terms and definitions,” Section 4 “Symbols and abbreviations,” Section 5 “Basic requirements,” and Section 7.1. “Preferred Testing Methods.” 2.4.2. The efficiencies and losses of electric motors (inclusive of the inverter) that are that are inverter-only and do not include an inverter, are determined in accordance with IEC 61800-9-2:2017. Test must be conducted using an inverter that is listed as recommended in the manufacturer's catalog or that is offered for sale with the electric motor. If more than one inverter is available in manufacturer's catalogs or if more than one inverter is offered for sale with the electric motor, test using the least efficient inverter. Record the manufacturer, brand and model number of the inverter used for the test. If there are no inverters specified in the manufacturer catalogs or offered for sale with the electric motor, testing must be conducted using an inverter that meets the criteria described in section 2.4.2.2. of this appendix. 2.4.2.1. The inverter shall be set up according to the manufacturer's instructional and operational manual included with the product. Manufacturers shall also record switching frequency in Hz, max frequency in Hz, Max output voltage in V, motor control method ( i.e., 2.4.2.2. If there are no inverters specified in the manufacturer catalogs or offered for sale with the electric motor, test with a two-level voltage source inverter. No additional components influencing output voltage or output current shall be installed between the inverter and the motor, except those required for the measuring instruments. For motors with a rated speed up to 3 600 min-1, the switching frequency shall not be higher than 5 kHz. For motors with a rated speed above 3 600 min-1, the switching frequency shall not be higher than 10 kHz. Record the manufacturer, brand and model number of the inverter used for the test. 2.4.3. The efficiencies and losses of electric motors (inclusive of the inverter) that are inverter-only and include an inverter are determined in accordance with IEC 61800-9-2:2017. 2.4.3.1. The inverter shall be set up according to the manufacturer's instructional and operational manual included with the product. Manufacturers shall also record switching frequency in Hz, max frequency in Hz, Max output voltage in V, motor control method ( i.e., 3. Procedures for the Testing of Certain Electric Motor Categories Prior to testing according to section 2 of this appendix, each basic model of the electric motor categories listed below must be set up in accordance with the instructions of this section to ensure consistent test results. These steps are designed to enable a motor to be attached to a dynamometer and run continuously for testing purposes. For the purposes of this appendix, a “standard bearing” is a 600- or 6000-series, either open or grease-lubricated double-shielded, single-row, deep groove, radial ball bearing. 3.1. Brake Electric Motors: Brake electric motors shall be tested with the brake component powered separately from the motor such that it does not activate during testing. Additionally, for any 10-minute period during the test and while the brake is being powered such that it remains disengaged from the motor shaft, record the power consumed ( i.e., 3.2. Close-Coupled Pump Electric Motors and Electric Motors with Single or Double Shaft Extensions of Non-Standard Dimensions or Design: To attach the unit under test to a dynamometer, close-coupled pump electric motors and electric motors with single or double shaft extensions of non-standard dimensions or design must be tested using a special coupling adapter. 3.3. Electric Motors with Non-Standard Endshields or Flanges: If it is not possible to connect the electric motor to a dynamometer with the non-standard endshield or flange in place, the testing laboratory shall replace the non-standard endshield or flange with an endshield or flange meeting NEMA or IEC specifications. The replacement component should be obtained from the manufacturer or, if the manufacturer chooses, machined by the testing laboratory after consulting with the manufacturer regarding the critical characteristics of the endshield. 3.4. Electric Motors with Non-Standard Bases, Feet or Mounting Configurations: An electric motor with a non-standard base, feet, or mounting configuration may be mounted on the test equipment using adaptive fixtures for testing as long as the mounting or use of adaptive mounting fixtures does not have an adverse impact on the performance of the electric motor, particularly on the cooling of the motor. 3.5. Electric Motors with a Separately-Powered Blower: For electric motors furnished with a separately-powered blower, the losses from the blower's motor should not be included in any efficiency calculation. This can be done either by powering the blower's motor by a source separate from the source powering the electric motor under test or by connecting leads such that they only measure the power of the motor under test. 3.6. Immersible Electric Motors: Immersible electric motors shall be tested with all contact seals removed but be otherwise unmodified. 3.7. Partial Electric Motors: Partial electric motors shall be disconnected from their mated piece of equipment. After disconnection from the equipment, standard bearings and/or endshields shall be added to the motor, such that it is capable of operation. If an endshield is necessary, an endshield meeting NEMA or IEC specifications should be obtained from the manufacturer or, if the manufacturer chooses, machined by the testing laboratory after consulting with the manufacturer regarding the critical characteristics of the endshield. 3.8. Vertical Electric Motors and Electric Motors with Bearings Incapable of Horizontal Operation: Vertical electric motors and electric motors with thrust bearings shall be tested in a horizontal or vertical configuration in accordance with the applicable test procedure under section 2 through section 2.4.3. of this appendix, depending on the testing facility's capabilities and construction of the motor, except if the motor is a vertical solid shaft normal thrust general purpose electric motor (subtype II), in which case it shall be tested in a horizontal configuration in accordance with the applicable test procedure under section 2 through section 2.4.3. of this appendix. Preference shall be given to testing a motor in its native orientation. If the unit under test cannot be reoriented horizontally due to its bearing construction, the electric motor's bearing(s) shall be removed and replaced with standard bearings. If the unit under test contains oil-lubricated bearings, its bearings shall be removed and replaced with standard bearings. If necessary, the unit under test may be connected to the dynamometer using a coupling of torsional rigidity greater than or equal to that of the motor shaft. [87 FR 63657, Oct. 19, 2022] Appendix C to Subpart B of Part 431—Compliance Certification Certification of Compliance With Energy Efficiency Standards for Electric Motors (Office of Management and Budget Control Number: 1910-1400. Expires February 13, 2014) An electronic form is available at https://www.regulations.doe.gov/ccms/. 1. Name and Address of Company (the “company”): 2. Name(s) to be Marked on Electric Motors to Which this Compliance Certification Applies: 3. If manufacturer or private labeler wishes to receive a unique Compliance Certification number for use with any particular brand name, trademark, or other label name, fill out the following two items: A. List each brand name, trademark, or other label name for which the company requests a Compliance Certification number: B. List other name(s), if any, under which the company sells electric motors (if not listed in item 2 above): Submit electronically at https://www.regulations.doe.gov/ccms. Submit paper form by Certified Mail to: This Compliance Certification reports on and certifies compliance with requirements contained in 10 CFR Part 431 (Energy Conservation Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial Equipment) and Part C of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act (Pub. L. 94-163), and amendments thereto. It is signed by a responsible official of the above named company. Attached and incorporated as part of this Compliance Certification is a Listing of Electric Motor Efficiencies. For each rating of electric motor* for which the Listing specifies the nominal full load efficiency of a basic model, the company distributes no less efficient basic model with that rating and all basic models with that rating comply with the applicable energy efficiency standard. * For this purpose, the term “rating” means one of the combinations of an electric motor's horsepower (or standard kilowatt equivalent), number of poles, motor type, and open or enclosed construction, with respect to which § 431.25 of 10 CFR Part 431 prescribes nominal full load efficiency standards. Person to Contact for Further Information: Name: Address: Telephone Number: Facsimile Number: If any part of this Compliance Certification, including the Attachment, was prepared by a third party organization under the provisions of 10 CFR 431.36, the company official authorizing third party representations: Name: Address: Telephone Number: Facsimile Number: Third Party Organization Officially Acting as Representative: Third Party Organization: Responsible Person at the Organization: Address: Telephone Number: Facsimile Number: All required determinations on which this Compliance Certification is based were made in conformance with the applicable requirements in 10 CFR Part 431, subpart B. All information reported in this Compliance Certification is true, accurate, and complete. The company is aware of the penalties associated with violations of the Act and the regulations thereunder, and is also aware of the provisions contained in 18 U.S.C. 1001, which prohibits knowingly making false statements to the Federal Government. Signature: Date: Name: Title: Firm or Organization: Attachment of Certification of Compliance With Energy Efficiency Standards for Electric Motor Efficiencies Date: Name of Company: Motor Type (i.e., general purpose electric motor (subtype I), fire pump electric motor, general purpose electric motor (subtype II), NEMA Design B general purpose electric motor) Motor horsepower/standard kilowatt equivalent Least efficient basic model—(model numbers(s)) Open motors Enclosed motors 8 6 4 2 8 6 4 2 1/.75 ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ 1.5/1.1 ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ 2/1.5 ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ 3/2.2 ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ 5/3.7 ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ Etc ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ Note: Basic Model Rating Models Actually Tested and Not Previously Identified Motor horsepower/standard kilowatt equivalent Least efficient basic model—(model numbers(s)) Open motors Enclosed motors 8 6 4 2 8 6 4 2 ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ Etc ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ [69 FR 61923, Oct. 21, 2004, as amended at 76 FR 59006, Sept. 23, 2011] Subpart C—Commercial Refrigerators, Freezers and Refrigerator-Freezers Source: 70 FR 60414, Oct. 18, 2005, unless otherwise noted. § 431.61 Purpose and scope. This subpart contains energy conservation requirements for commercial refrigerators, freezers and refrigerator-freezers, pursuant to Part C of Title III of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 6311-6317. § 431.62 Definitions concerning commercial refrigerators, freezers and refrigerator-freezers. Air-curtain angle (1) For equipment without doors and without a discharge air grille or discharge air honeycomb, the angle between a vertical line extended down from the highest point on the manufacturer's recommended load limit line and the load limit line itself, when the equipment is viewed in cross-section; and (2) For all other equipment without doors, the angle formed between a vertical line and the straight line drawn by connecting the point at the inside edge of the discharge air opening with the point at the inside edge of the return air opening, when the equipment is viewed in cross-section. Basic model Blast chiller Blast freezer Buffet table or preparation table Chef base or griddle stand Closed solid Closed transparent Commercial freezer Commercial hybrid (1) That consists of two or more thermally separated refrigerated compartments that are in two or more different equipment families, and (2) That is sold as a single unit. Commercial refrigerator Commercial refrigerator-freezer Commercial refrigerator, freezer, and refrigerator-freezer (1) Is not a consumer product (as defined in § 430.2 of this chapter); (2) Is not designed and marketed exclusively for medical, scientific, or research purposes; (3) Operates at a chilled, frozen, combination chilled and frozen, or variable temperature; (4) Displays or stores merchandise and other perishable materials horizontally, semi-vertically, or vertically; (5) Has transparent or solid doors, sliding or hinged doors, a combination of hinged, sliding, transparent, or solid doors, or no doors; (6) Is designed for pull-down temperature applications or holding temperature applications; and (7) Is connected to a self-contained condensing unit or to a remote condensing unit. Customer order storage cabinet Door Door angle (1) For equipment with flat doors, the angle between a vertical line and the line formed by the plane of the door, when the equipment is viewed in cross-section; and (2) For equipment with curved doors, the angle formed between a vertical line and the straight line drawn by connecting the top and bottom points where the display area glass joins the cabinet, when the equipment is viewed in cross-section. Fully open (for drawers) High-temperature refrigerator Holding temperature application Horizontal Closed Horizontal Open Ice-cream freezer (1) Prior to the compliance date(s) of any amended energy conservation standard(s) issued after January 1, 2023 for ice-cream freezers (see § 431.66), a commercial freezer that is capable of an operating temperature at or below −5.0 °F and that the manufacturer designs, markets, or intends specifically for the storing, displaying, or dispensing of ice cream or other frozen desserts; or (2) Upon the compliance date(s) of any amended energy conservation standard(s) issued after January 1, 2023 for ice-cream freezers (see § 431.66), a commercial freezer that is capable of an operating temperature at or below −13.0 °F and that the manufacturer designs, markets, or intends specifically for the storing, displaying, or dispensing of ice cream or other frozen desserts. Integrated average temperature Lighting occupancy sensor Lowest application product temperature Low-temperature freezer Medium-temperature refrigerator Mobile refrigerated cabinet Night curtain Operating temperature Pull-down temperature application Rating temperature i.e., Remote condensing unit Scheduled lighting control Self-contained condensing unit Semivertical Open Service over counter Test package Transparent Vertical Closed Vertical Open Wedge case [88 FR 66222, Sept. 26, 2023] Test Procedures § 431.63 Materials incorporated by reference. (a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this subpart with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, the DOE must publish a document in the Federal Register [email protected], www.energy.gov/eere/buildings/building-technologies-office. www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html or : [email protected]. (b) ANSI. http://www.ansi.org: (1) ANSI /AHAM HRF-1-2004, Energy, Performance and Capacity of Household Refrigerators, Refrigerator-Freezers and Freezers (2) AHAM HRF-1-2008 (“HRF-1-2008”), Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers, Energy and Internal Volume of Refrigerating Appliances Errata to Energy and Internal Volume of Refrigerating Appliances, (c) AHRI. [email protected]; www.ahrinet.org/. (1) ARI Standard 1200-2006, Performance Rating of Commercial Refrigerated Display Merchandisers and Storage Cabinets, (2) AHRI Standard 1200 (I-P)-2010 (“AHRI Standard 1200 (I-P)-2010”), 2010 Standard for Performance Rating of Commercial Refrigerated Display Merchandisers and Storage Cabinets, (3) AHRI Standard 1200-2023 (I-P) (“AHRI 1200-2023”), 2023 Standard for Performance Rating of Commercial Refrigerated Display Merchandisers and Storage Cabinets, (4) AHRI Standard 1320-2011 (I-P), (“AHRI 1320-2011”) 2011 Standard for Performance Rating of Commercial Refrigerated Display Merchandisers and Storage Cabinets for Use With Secondary Refrigerants, (d) ASHRAE. [email protected]; www.ashrae.org/. (1) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 72-2022 (ASHRAE 72-2022), Method of Testing Open and Closed Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers, (2) Errata sheet for ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 72-2022 (ASHRAE 72-2022 Errata), Method of Testing Open and Closed Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers, (e) ASTM. www.astm.org/. (1) ASTM E1084-86 (Reapproved 2009), Standard Test Method for Solar Transmittance (Terrestrial) of Sheet Materials Using Sunlight, (2) ASTM F2143-16, Standard Test Method for Performance of Refrigerated Buffet and Preparation Tables, [74 FR 1139, Jan. 9, 2009, as amended at 77 FR 10318, Feb. 21, 2012; 78 FR 62993, Oct. 23, 2013; 79 FR 22308, Apr. 21, 2014; 88 FR 66224, Sept. 26, 2023] § 431.64 Uniform test method for the measurement of energy consumption of commercial refrigerators, freezers, and refrigerator-freezers. (a) Scope. (b) Testing and calculations. (2) Determine the daily energy consumption and pan storage volume, pan display area, and refrigerated volume of each buffet table or preparation table by conducting the appropriate test procedure set forth below in appendix C to this subpart. The daily energy consumption shall be calculated using raw measured values and the final test results shall be recorded in increments of 0.01 kWh/day. (3) Determine the energy consumption per weight of product and product capacity of each blast chiller and blast freezer by conducting the appropriate test procedure set forth below in appendix D to this subpart. The energy consumption per weight of product shall be calculated using raw measured values and the final test results shall be recorded in increments of 0.01 kWh/lb. [88 FR 66225, Sept. 26, 2023] Energy Conservation Standards § 431.66 Energy conservation standards and their effective dates. (a) In this section— (1) The term “AV” means the adjusted volume (ft 3 3 3 (2) The term “V” means the chilled or frozen compartment volume (ft 3 (3) For the purpose of paragraph (d) of this section, the term “TDA” means the total display area (ft 2 2 (b)(1) Each commercial refrigerator, freezer, and refrigerator-freezer with a self-contained condensing unit designed for holding temperature applications manufactured on or after January 1, 2010 and before March 27, 2017 shall have a daily energy consumption (in kilowatt-hours per day) that does not exceed the following: Category Maximum daily energy consumption Refrigerators with solid doors 0.10V + 2.04. Refrigerators with transparent doors 0.12V + 3.34. Freezers with solid doors 0.40V + 1.38. Freezers with transparent doors 0.75V + 4.10. Refrigerator/freezers with solid doors the greater of 0.27AV-0.71 or 0.70. (2) Each service over the counter, self-contained, medium temperature commercial refrigerator (SOC-SC-M) manufactured on or after January 1, 2012, shall have a total daily energy consumption (in kilowatt hours per day) of not more than 0.6 × TDA + 1.0. As used in the preceding sentence, “TDA” means the total display area (ft 2 (c) Each commercial refrigerator with a self-contained condensing unit designed for pull-down temperature applications and transparent doors manufactured on or after January 1, 2010 and before March 27, 2017 shall have a daily energy consumption (in kilowatt-hours per day) of not more than 0.126V + 3.51. (d) Each commercial refrigerator, freezer, and refrigerator-freezer with a self-contained condensing unit and without doors; commercial refrigerator, freezer, and refrigerator-freezer with a remote condensing unit; and commercial ice-cream freezer manufactured on or after January 1, 2012 and before March 27, 2017 shall have a daily energy consumption (in kilowatt-hours per day) that does not exceed the levels specified: (1) For equipment other than hybrid equipment, refrigerator-freezers or wedge cases: Equipment category Condensing unit Equipment Rating Operating Equipment class Maximum daily energy consumption Remote Condensing Commercial Refrigerators and Commercial Freezers Remote (RC) Vertical Open (VOP) 38 (M) ≥32±2 VOP.RC.M 0.82 × TDA + 4.07 Semivertical Open (SVO) 38 (M) ≥32±2 SVO.RC.M 0.83 × TDA + 3.18 Horizontal Open (HZO) 38 (M) ≥32±2 HZO.RC.M 0.35 × TDA + 2.88 Vertical Closed Transparent (VCT) 38 (M) ≥32±2 VCT.RC.M 0.22 × TDA + 1.95 Horizontal Closed Transparent (HCT) 38 (M) ≥32±2 HCT.RC.M 0.16 × TDA + 0.13 Vertical Closed Solid (VCS) 38 (M) ≥32±2 VCS.RC.M 0.11 × V + 0.26 Horizontal Closed Solid (HCS) 38 (M) ≥32±2 HCS.RC.M 0.11 × V + 0.26 Service Over Counter (SOC) 38 (M) ≥32±2 SOC.RC.M 0.51 × TDA + 0.11 Self-Contained Commercial Refrigerators and Commercial Freezers without Doors Self-Contained (SC) Vertical Open (VOP) 38 (M) ≥32±2 VOP.SC.M 1.74 × TDA + 4.71 Semivertical Open (SVO) 38 (M) ≥32±2 SVO.SC.M 1.73 × TDA + 4.59 Horizontal Open 38 (M) ≥32±2 HZO.SC.M 0.77 × TDA + 5.55 Commercial Ice-Cream Freezers Remote (RC) Vertical Open (VOP) −15 (I) ≤−5±2** ** VOP.RC.I 2.89 × TDA + 8.7 Semivertical Open (SVO) SVO.RC.I 2.89 × TDA + 8.7 Horizontal Open (HZO) HZO.RC.I 0.72 × TDA + 8.74 Vertical Closed Transparent (VCT) VCT.RC.I 0.66 × TDA + 3.05 Horizontal Closed Transparent (HCT) HCT.RC.I 0.4 × TDA + 0.31 Vertical Closed Solid (VCS) VCS.RC.I 0.27 × V + 0.63 Horizontal Closed Solid (HCS) HCS.RC.I 0.27 × V + 0.63 Service Over Counter (SVO) SOC.RC.I 1.26 × TDA + 0.26 Self-Contained (SC) Vertical Open (VOP) VOP.SC.I 5.55 × TDA + 15.02 Semivertical Open (SVO) SVO.SC.I 5.52 × TDA + 14.63 Horizontal Open (HZO) HZO.SC.I 2.44 × TDA + 9 Vertical Closed Transparent (VCT) VCT.SC.I 0.67 × TDA + 3.29 Horizontal Closed Transparent (HCT) HCT.SC.I 0.56 × TDA + 0.43 Vertical Closed Solid (VCS) VCS.SC.I 0.38 × V + 0.88 Horizontal Closed Solid (HCS) HCS.SC.I 0.38 × V + 0.88 Service Over Counter (SVO) SOC.SC.I 1.76 × TDA + 0.36 * The meaning of the letters in this column is indicated in the three columns to the left. ** Ice-cream freezer is defined in 10 CFR 431.62 as a commercial freezer that is designed to operate at or below −5 °F (−21 °C) and that the manufacturer designs, markets, or intends for the storing, displaying, or dispensing of ice cream. (2) For commercial refrigeration equipment with two or more compartments ( i.e. (i) For remote condensing commercial hybrid refrigerators, hybrid freezers, hybrid refrigerator-freezers, and non-hybrid refrigerator-freezers, where two or more independent condensing units each separately cool only one compartment, measure the total refrigeration load of each compartment separately according to the ARI Standard 1200-2006 test procedure (incorporated by reference, see § 431.63). Calculate compressor energy consumption (CEC) for each compartment using Table 1 in ARI Standard 1200-2006 using the saturated evaporator temperature for that compartment. The CDEC for the entire case shall be the sum of the CEC for each compartment, fan energy consumption (FEC), lighting energy consumption (LEC), anti-condensate energy consumption (AEC), defrost energy consumption (DEC), and condensate evaporator pan energy consumption (PEC) (as measured in ARI Standard 1200-2006). (ii) For remote condensing commercial hybrid refrigerators, hybrid freezers, hybrid refrigerator-freezers, and non-hybrid refrigerator-freezers, where two or more compartments are cooled collectively by one condensing unit, measure the total refrigeration load of the entire case according to the ARI Standard 1200-2006 test procedure (incorporated by reference, see § 431.63). Calculate a weighted saturated evaporator temperature for the entire case by: (A) Multiplying the saturated evaporator temperature of each compartment by the volume of that compartment (as measured in ARI Standard 1200-2006), (B) Summing the resulting values for all compartments, and (C) Dividing the resulting total by the total volume of all compartments. Calculate the CEC for the entire case using Table 1 in ARI Standard 1200-2006 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.63), using the total refrigeration load and the weighted average saturated evaporator temperature. The CDEC for the entire case shall be the sum of the CEC, FEC, LEC, AEC, DEC, and PEC. (iii) For self-contained commercial hybrid refrigerators, hybrid freezers, hybrid refrigerator-freezers, and non-hybrid refrigerator-freezers, measure the TDEC for the entire case according to the ARI Standard 1200-2006 test procedure (incorporated by reference, see § 431.63). (3) For remote-condensing and self-contained wedge cases, measure the CDEC or TDEC according to the ARI Standard 1200-2006 test procedure (incorporated by reference, see § 431.63). The MDEC for each model shall be the amount derived by incorporating into the standards equation in paragraph (d)(1) of this section for the appropriate equipment class a value for the TDA that is the product of: (i) The vertical height of the air-curtain (or glass in a transparent door) and (ii) The largest overall width of the case, when viewed from the front. (e) Each commercial refrigerator, freezer, and refrigerator-freezer with a self-contained condensing unit designed for holding temperature applications and with solid or transparent doors; commercial refrigerator with a self-contained condensing unit designed for pull-down temperature applications and with transparent doors; commercial refrigerator, freezer, and refrigerator-freezer with a self-contained condensing unit and without doors; commercial refrigerator, freezer, and refrigerator-freezer with a remote condensing unit; and commercial ice-cream freezer manufactured on or after March 27, 2017, shall have a daily energy consumption (in kilowatt-hours per day) that does not exceed the levels specified: (1) For equipment other than hybrid equipment, refrigerator/freezers, or wedge cases: Equipment category Condensing Equipment Rating Operating Equipment Maximum Remote Condensing Commercial Refrigerators and Commercial Freezers Remote (RC) Vertical Open (VOP) 38 (M) ≥32 VOP.RC.M 0.64 × TDA + 4.07. 0 (L) <32 VOP.RC.L 2.2 × TDA + 6.85. Semivertical Open (SVO) 38 (M) ≥32 SVO.RC.M 0.66 × TDA + 3.18. 0 (L) <32 SVO.RC.L 2.2 × TDA + 6.85. Horizontal Open (HZO) 38 (M) ≥32 HZO.RC.M 0.35 × TDA + 2.88. 0 (L) <32 HZO.RC.L 0.55 × TDA + 6.88. Vertical Closed Transparent (VCT) 38 (M) ≥32 VCT.RC.M 0.15 × TDA + 1.95. 0 (L) <32 VCT.RC.L 0.49 × TDA + 2.61. Horizontal Closed Transparent (HCT) 38 (M) ≥32 HCT.RC.M 0.16 × TDA + 0.13. 0 (L) <32 HCT.RC.L 0.34 × TDA + 0.26. Vertical Closed Solid (VCS) 38 (M) ≥32 VCS.RC.M 0.1 × V + 0.26. 0 (L) <32 VCS.RC.L 0.21 × V + 0.54. Horizontal Closed Solid (HCS) 38 (M) ≥32 HCS.RC.M 0.1 × V + 0.26. 0 (L) <32 HCS.RC.L 0.21 × V + 0.54. Service Over Counter (SOC) 38 (M) ≥32 SOC.RC.M 0.44 × TDA + 0.11. 0 (L) <32 SOC.RC.L 0.93 × TDA + 0.22. Self-Contained Commercial Refrigerators and Commercial Freezers Without Doors Self-Contained (SC) Vertical Open (VOP) 38 (M) ≥32 VOP.SC.M 1.69 × TDA + 4.71. 0 (L) <32 VOP.SC.L 4.25 × TDA + 11.82. Semivertical Open (SVO) 38 (M) ≥32 SVO.SC.M 1.7 × TDA + 4.59. 0 (L) <32 SVO.SC.L 4.26 × TDA + 11.51. Horizontal Open (HZO) 38 (M) ≥32 HZO.SC.M 0.72 × TDA + 5.55. 0 (L) <32 HZO.SC.L 1.9 × TDA + 7.08. Self-Contained Commercial Refrigerators and Commercial Freezers With Doors Self-Contained (SC) Vertical Closed Transparent (VCT) 38 (M) ≥32 VCT.SC.M 0.1 × V + 0.86. 0 (L) <32 VCT.SC.L 0.29 × V + 2.95. Vertical Closed Solid (VCS) 38 (M) ≥32 VCS.SC.M 0.05 × V + 1.36. <32 VCS.SC.L 0.22 × V + 1.38. Horizontal Closed Transparent (HCT) 38 (M) ≥32 HCT.SC.M 0.06 × V + 0.37. 0 (L) <32 HCT.SC.L 0.08 × V + 1.23. Horizontal Closed Solid (HCS) ≥32 HCS.SC.M 0.05 × V + 0.91. 0 (L) <32 HCS.SC.L 0.06 × V + 1.12. Service Over Counter (SOC) ≥32 SOC.SC.M 0.52 × TDA + 1. 0 (L) <32 SOC.SC.L 1.1 × TDA + 2.1. Self-Contained Commercial Refrigerators with Transparent Doors for Pull-Down Temperature Applications Self-Contained (SC) Pull-Down (PD) 38 (M) ≥32 PD.SC.M 0.11 × V + 0.81. Commercial Ice-Cream Freezers Remote (RC) Vertical Open (VOP) −15 (I) ≤−5** VOP.RC.I 2.79 × TDA + 8.7. Semivertical Open (SVO) SVO.RC.I 2.79 × TDA + 8.7. Horizontal Open (HZO) HZO.RC.I 0.7 × TDA + 8.74. Vertical Closed Transparent (VCT) VCT.RC.I 0.58 × TDA + 3.05. Horizontal Closed Transparent (HCT) HCT.RC.I 0.4 × TDA + 0.31. Vertical Closed Solid (VCS) VCS.RC.I 0.25 × V + 0.63. Horizontal Closed Solid (HCS) HCS.RC.I 0.25 × V + 0.63. Service Over Counter (SOC) SOC.RC.I 1.09 × TDA + 0.26. Self-Contained (SC) Vertical Open (VOP) VOP.SC.I 5.4 × TDA + 15.02. Semivertical Open (SVO) SVO.SC.I 5.41 × TDA + 14.63. Horizontal Open (HZO) HZO.SC.I 2.42 × TDA + 9. Vertical Closed Transparent (VCT) VCT.SC.I 0.62 × TDA + 3.29. Horizontal Closed Transparent (HCT) HCT.SC.I 0.56 × TDA + 0.43. Vertical Closed Solid (VCS) VCS.SC.I 0.34 × V + 0.88. Horizontal Closed Solid (HCS) HCS.SC.I 0.34 × V + 0.88. Service Over Counter (SOC) SOC.SC.I 1.53 × TDA + 0.36. * The meaning of the letters in this column is indicated in the columns to the left. ** Ice-cream freezer is defined in 10 CFR 431.62 as a commercial freezer that is designed to operate at or below −5 °F *(−21 °C) and that the manufacturer designs, markets, or intends for the storing, displaying, or dispensing of ice cream. (2) For commercial refrigeration equipment with two or more compartments ( i.e., (3) For remote condensing and self-contained wedge cases, measure the CDEC or TDEC according to the AHRI Standard 1200 (I-P)-2010 test procedure (incorporated by reference, see § 431.63). For wedge cases in equipment classes for which a volume metric is used, the MDEC shall be the amount derived from the appropriate standards equation in paragraph (e)(1) of this section. For wedge cases of equipment classes for which a TDA metric is used, the MDEC for each model shall be the amount derived by incorporating into the standards equation in paragraph (e)(1) of this section for the equipment class a value for the TDA that is the product of: (i) The vertical height of the air curtain (or glass in a transparent door) and (ii) The largest overall width of the case, when viewed from the front. (f) Exclusions. [70 FR 60414, Oct. 18, 2005, as amended at 74 FR 1140, Jan. 9, 2009; 78 FR 62993, Oct. 23, 2013; 79 FR 22308, Apr. 21, 2014; 79 FR 17816, Mar. 28, 2014] Appendix A to Subpart C of Part 431 [Reserved] Appendix B to Subpart C of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Energy Consumption of Commercial Refrigerators, Freezers, and Refrigerator-Freezers Note: On or after September 20, 2024, any representations, including for certification of compliance, made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of commercial refrigeration equipment, except for buffet tables or preparation tables, blast chillers, blast freezers, or mobile refrigerated cabinets, must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. Prior to September 20, 2024, any representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of commercial refrigeration equipment, except for buffet tables or preparation tables, blast chillers, blast freezers, or mobile refrigerated cabinets, must be made either in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix or with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix as it appeared in appendix B to subpart C of part 431 in the 10 CFR parts 200-499 edition revised as of January 1, 2023. Buffet tables or preparation tables are subject to the test method requirements in appendix C to subpart C of part 431. Blast chillers and blast freezers are subject to the test method requirements in appendix D to subpart C of part 431. The test procedure for equipment cooled only by secondary coolants in section 1.1.3 of this appendix is not required for use until the compliance date(s) of any amended energy conservation standard(s) (see § 431.66) for such commercial refrigeration equipment. High-temperature refrigerators must be tested as medium-temperature refrigerators according to section 2.1.3 of this appendix based on the lowest application product temperature until the compliance date(s) of any amended energy conservation standard(s) (see § 431.66) established for high-temperature refrigerators. On and after the compliance date(s) of such energy conservation standard(s) (see § 431.66), high-temperature refrigerators must be tested as high-temperature refrigerators according to section 2.1.4 of this appendix. 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.63 the entire standard for AHRI 1200-2023; AHRI 1320-2011; ASHRAE 72-2022 and ASHRAE 72-2022 Errata (the latter two collectively referenced as ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata). However, only enumerated provisions of AHRI 1200-2023 and AHRI 1320-2011 are applicable to this appendix as follows: 0.1. AHRI 1200-2023 (a) Section 3, “Definitions,” as referenced in section 1.1 of this appendix. (b) Section 3.2.8, “Dew Point,” as referenced in section 2.2. of this appendix. (c) Section 3.2.20, “Total Display Area (TDA),” as referenced in section 3.2 of this appendix. (d) Section 4, “Test Requirements,” as referenced in section 1.1 of this appendix. (e) Section 4.1.1.1, “High Temperature Applications,” as referenced in section 2.1.4 of this appendix. (f) Section 4.1.1.2, “Ice Cream Applications,” as referenced in section 2.1.1 of this appendix. (g) Section 4.1.1.3, “Low Temperature Applications,” as referenced in section 2.1.2 of this appendix. (h) Section 4.1.1.4, “Medium Temperature Applications,” as referenced in section 2.1.3 of this appendix. (i) Section 5.1, “Rating Requirements for Remote Commercial Refrigerated Display Merchandisers and Storage Cabinets” as referenced in sections 1.1.2, 1.1.3, and 1.5.3.3 of this appendix. (j) Section 5.2, “Rating Requirements for Self-Contained Commercial Refrigerated Display Merchandisers and Storage Cabinets,” as referenced in section 1.1.1 of this appendix. (k) Section 9, “Symbols and Subscripts,” as referenced in section 1.1 and 2.2 of this appendix. (l) Appendix C, “Commercial Refrigerated Display Merchandiser and Storage Cabinet Refrigerated Volume Calculation—Normative” as referenced in section 3.1 of this appendix. (m) Appendix D, “Commercial Refrigerated Display Merchandiser and Storage Cabinet Total Display Area (TDA) Calculation—Normative,” as referenced in section 3.2 of this appendix. 0.2. AHRI 1320-2011 (a) Sections 5.2.7 and 5.2.8 as referenced in section 1.1.3 of this appendix. (b) [Reserved]. 1. Test Procedure 1.1. Determination of Daily Energy Consumption. Determine the daily energy consumption of each covered commercial refrigerator, freezer, or refrigerator-freezer by conducting the test procedure set forth in AHRI 1200-2023, section 3, “Definitions,” section 4, “Test Requirements,” and section 9, “Symbols and Subscripts.” 1.1.1. For each commercial refrigerator, freezer, or refrigerator-freezer with a self-contained condensing unit, also use AHRI 1200-2023, section 5.2, “Rating Requirements for Self-Contained Commercial Refrigerated Display Merchandisers and Storage Cabinets.” 1.1.2. For each commercial refrigerator, freezer, or refrigerator-freezer with a remote condensing unit, also use AHRI 1200-2023, section 5.1, “Rating Requirements for Remote Commercial Refrigerated Display Merchandisers and Storage Cabinets.” 1.1.3. For each commercial refrigerator, freezer, or refrigerator-freezer used with a secondary coolant, test according to section 1.1.2 of this appendix, except in place of the equations for CDEC and CEC in sections 5.1.2 and 5.1.2.1 of AHRI 1200-2023, respectively, apply the following equations: CDEC = CEC + [FEC + LEC + AEC + DEC + PEC]* + CPEC CEC = [(Q rt CP dt Where CPEC and Q CP 1.2. Methodology for Determining Applicability of Transparent Door Equipment Families. To determine if a door for a given model of commercial refrigeration equipment is transparent: (a) Calculate the outer door surface area including frames and mullions; (b) calculate the transparent surface area within the outer door surface area excluding frames and mullions; (c) calculate the ratio of (2) to (1) for each of the outer doors; and (d) the ratio for the transparent surface area of all outer doors must be greater than 0.25 to qualify as a transparent equipment family. 1.3. Drawers. Drawers shall be treated as identical to doors when conducting the DOE test procedure. Commercial refrigeration equipment with drawers intended for use with pans shall be configured with stainless steel food service pans, installed in a configuration per the manufacturer's instructions utilizing the maximum pan sizes specified. If the manufacturer does not specify the pan sizes, the maximum pan depth and pan volume allowed shall be used. For commercial refrigeration equipment with drawers intended for use with pans, the net usable volume includes only the interior volume of the pan(s) in the drawer. The net usable volume shall be measured by the amount of water needed to fill all the pan(s) to within 0.5 inches of the top rim, or determined by calculating the total volume of all pan(s) using the pan manufacturers' published pan volume. For commercial refrigeration equipment with drawers not intended for pans, the net usable volume shall be equal to the total volume of the drawer to the top edge of the drawer. Test simulators shall be placed in commercial refrigeration equipment with drawers as follows: For each drawer, there shall be two test simulators placed at each of the following locations: at the left end, at the right end, and at consistent 24 inch to 48 inch intervals across the width of the drawer (for drawers wider than 48 inches). For drawers with overall internal width of 48 inches or less, only the left and right ends shall have test simulators. If test simulators are to be placed at a pan edge or divider, the test simulator shall be placed at the nearest adjacent location. For each drawer, one test simulator shall be placed on the bottom of the pan or drawer at each of the front and rear test simulator locations of the drawer. Test simulators shall be placed in contact with the drawer or pan end or ends unless load limiting stops are provided as part of the case. Test simulators shall be secured such that the test simulators do not move during the test. The net usable volume where test simulators are not required shall be filled with filler material so that between 60 percent and 80 percent of the net usable volume is occupied by test simulators and uniformly occupied by filler material. 1.4. Long-time Automatic Defrost. For commercial refrigeration equipment not capable of operating with defrost intervals of 24 hours or less, testing may be conducted using a two-part test method. 1.4.1. First Part of Test. The first part of the test shall be a 24-hour test starting in steady-state conditions and including eight hours of door opening (according to ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata). The energy consumed in this test, ET1, shall be recorded. 1.4.2. Second Part of Test. The second part of the test shall be a defrost cycle, including any operation associated with a defrost. The start and end of the test period be determined as the last time before and first time after a defrost occurrence when the measured average simulator temperature ( i.e., DI 1.4.3. Daily Energy Consumption. Based on the measured energy consumption in these two tests, the daily energy consumption (DEC) in kWh shall be calculated as: Where: DEC ET ET t NDI t DI t DC 1440 = conversion factor, minutes per day. 1.5. Customer Order Storage Cabinets. Customer order storage cabinets shall conduct door openings according to ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata, except that each door shall be opened to the fully open position for 8 seconds, once every 2 hours, for 6 door-opening cycles. 1.5.1. Ambient Compartments. For customer order storage cabinets that have at least one individual-secured compartment that is not capable of maintaining an integrated average temperature below the ambient dry-bulb temperature, the individual-secured compartment(s) at ambient dry-bulb temperature shall be categorized as a high-temperature refrigerator compartment for the purpose of testing and rating. All volume, total display area, and energy consumption calculations shall be included within the high-temperature refrigerator category and summed with other high-temperature refrigerator category compartment(s) calculations. 1.5.2. Convertible Compartments. For customer order storage cabinets that have individual-secured compartments that are convertible between the ambient dry-bulb temperature and the ≥32 °F operating temperature, the convertible compartment shall be tested as a medium-temperature refrigerator compartment or at the lowest application product temperature as specified in section 2.2 of this appendix. 1.5.3. Inverse Refrigeration Load Test. For customer order storage cabinets that supply refrigerant to multiple individual-secured compartments and that allow the suction pressure from the evaporator in each individual-secured compartment to float based on the temperature required to store the customer order in that individual-secured compartment, test according to section 1.1.2 of this appendix, except that energy (heat) loss shall be allowed at a rate and ΔT equivalent to the energy gains of a standard refrigerated cabinet as specified in sections 1.5.3.1-1.5.3.3 of this appendix. 1.5.3.1. Anti-sweat door heaters. Anti-sweat door heaters shall be de-energized for the inverse refrigeration load test specified in section 1.5.3. of this appendix. 1.5.3.2. Integrated Average Temperature. For medium-temperature refrigerator compartments, the integrated average temperature shall be 112.4 °F ±2.0 °F. For low-temperature freezer compartments, the integrated average temperature shall be 150.4 °F ±2.0 °F. For ambient compartments, the integrated average temperature shall be 75.4 °F ±2.0 °F. 1.5.3.3. Daily Energy Consumption. Determine the calculated daily energy consumption (“CDEC”) and the EER based on AHRI 1200-2023, section 5.1, “Rating Requirements for Remote Commercial Refrigerated Display Merchandisers and Storage Cabinets,” except that the compressor energy consumption (“CEC”) shall be calculated by applying the following equations: ML d A e A m A e H a H c H t H a m a A m C p,liner W liner T liner Where: CEC Q t ML FEC AEC DEC 3.412 = conversion factor, BTU per Wh; EER 1000 = conversion factor, W per kW; W in N d A e A m H a H c e.g., H t m a C p,liner W liner ΔT liner e.g., 2. Test Conditions 2.1. Integrated Average Temperatures. Conduct the testing required in section 1 of this appendix, and determine the daily energy consumption at the applicable integrated average temperature as follows: 2.1.1. Ice-Cream Freezers. Test ice-cream freezers and ice-cream freezer compartments to the integrated average temperature specified in section 4.1.1.2, “Ice Cream Applications,” of AHRI 1200-2023. 2.1.2. Low-Temperature Freezers. Test low-temperature freezers and low-temperature freezer compartments to the integrated average temperature specified in section 4.1.1.3, “Low Temperature Applications,” of AHRI 1200-2023. 2.1.3. Medium-Temperature Refrigerators. Test medium-temperature refrigerators and medium-temperature refrigerator compartments to the integrated average temperature specified in section 4.1.1.4, “Medium Temperature Applications,” of AHRI 1200-2023. 2.1.4. High-Temperature Refrigerators. Test high-temperature refrigerators and high-temperature refrigerator compartments to the integrated average temperature specified in section 4.1.1.1, “High Temperature Applications,” of AHRI 1200-2023. 2.2. Lowest Application Product Temperature. If a unit of commercial refrigeration equipment is not able to be operated at the integrated average temperature specified in section 2.1 of this appendix, test the unit at the lowest application product temperature (LAPT), as defined in § 431.62. For units equipped with a thermostat, LAPT is the measured temperature at the lowest thermostat setting of the unit (for units that are only able to operate at temperatures above the specified test temperature) or the highest thermostat setting of the unit (for units that are only able to operate at temperatures below the specified test temperature). For remote condensing equipment without a thermostat or other means of controlling temperature at the case, the lowest application product temperature is measured at the temperature achieved with the dew point temperature (as defined in section 3.2.8, “Dew Point,” of AHRI 1200-2023) or mid-point evaporator temperature (as defined in section 9, “Symbols and Subscripts,” of AHRI 1200-2023) set to 5 degrees colder than that required to maintain the manufacturer's specified application temperature that is closest to the specified integrated average temperature. 2.3. Testing at NSF Test Conditions. For commercial refrigeration equipment that is also tested in accordance with NSF test procedures (Type I and Type II), integrated average temperatures and ambient conditions used for NSF testing may be used in place of the DOE-prescribed integrated average temperatures and ambient conditions provided they result in a more stringent test. That is, the measured daily energy consumption of the same unit, when tested at the rating temperatures and/or ambient conditions specified in the DOE test procedure, must be lower than or equal to the measured daily energy consumption of the unit when tested with the rating temperatures or ambient conditions used for NSF testing. The integrated average temperature measured during the test may be lower than the range specified by the DOE applicable temperature specification provided in section 2.1 of this appendix, but may not exceed the upper value of the specified range. Ambient temperatures and/or humidity values may be higher than those specified in the DOE test procedure. 2.4. Liquid Refrigerant Pressure Required Accuracy. The liquid refrigerant pressure required accuracy is ±35 kPa (±5.1 psi). 2.5 Commercial Refrigerator, Freezer, and Refrigerator-Freezer connected to a Direct Expansion Remote Condensing Unit with R-744. For commercial refrigerators, freezers, and refrigerator-freezers connected to a direct expansion remote condensing unit with R-744, instead of the liquid refrigerant measurements for direct-expansion remote units specified in appendix A to ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata, the liquid refrigerant measurements for direct-expansion remote units shall be: liquid refrigerant temperature shall be 30.0 °F with a tolerance for the average over test period of ±3.0 °F and a tolerance for the individual measurements of ±5.0 °F; liquid refrigerant pressure shall be the saturated liquid pressure corresponding to a condensing temperature in the range of 32.0 °F to 44.0 °F for the average over test period; and liquid refrigerant subcooling shall be greater than 2.0 °R for the average over test period. 2.6 Chef Base or Griddle Stand Test Conditions. For chef bases or griddle stands, instead of the dry-bulb temperature, wet-bulb temperature, and radiant heat temperature specified in appendix A to ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata: dry-bulb temperature shall be 86.0 °F with a tolerance for the average over test period of ±1.8 °F and a tolerance for the individual measurements of ±3.6 °F; wet-bulb temperature shall be 73.7 °F with a tolerance for the average over test period of ±1.8 °F and a tolerance for the individual measurements of ±3.6 °F; and radiant heat temperature shall be greater than or equal to 81.0 °F. 3. Volume and Total Display Area 3.1. Determination of Volume. Determine the volume of a commercial refrigerator, freezer, and refrigerator-freezer using the method set forth in AHRI 1200-2023, appendix C, “Commercial Refrigerated Display Merchandiser and Storage Cabinet Refrigerated Volume Calculation—Normative.” 3.2. Determination of Total Display Area. Determine the total display area of a commercial refrigerator, freezer, and refrigerator-freezer using the method set forth in AHRI 1200-2023, section 3.2.20, “Total Display Area (TDA),” and appendix D, “Commercial Refrigerated Display Merchandiser and Storage Cabinet Total Display Area (TDA) Calculation—Normative.” [88 FR 66225, Sept. 26, 2023] Appendix C to Subpart C of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Energy Consumption of Buffet Tables or Preparation Tables Note: On or after September 20, 2024, any representations, including for certification of compliance, made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of buffet tables or preparation tables must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.63 the entire standard for AHRI 1200-2023, ASHRAE 72-2022, ASHRAE 72-2022 Errata (the latter two collectively referenced as ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata), and ASTM F2143-16. However, only enumerated provisions of those documents are applicable to this appendix as follows: 0.1. AHRI 1200-2023 (a) Section 3.2.17, “Refrigerated Volume (Vr),” as referenced in section 2.2 of this appendix. (b) Normative Appendix C, “Commercial Refrigerated Display Merchandiser and Storage Cabinet Refrigerated Volume Calculation,” as referenced in section 2.2 of this appendix. 0.2 ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata (a) Section 5.1, “Installation and Settings,” as referenced in section 1.3 of this appendix. (b) Section 5.2, “Wall or Vertical Partition Placement,” as referenced in section 1.3 of this appendix. (c) Section 5.3, “Components and Accessories,” as referenced in section 1.3 of this appendix. (d) Section 6.1, “Ambient Temperature and Humidity,” as referenced in section 1.2 of this appendix. (e) Section 7.1, “Sequence of Operations,” as referenced in section 1.5 of this appendix. (f) Section 7.2, “Preparation Period” (excluding sections 7.2.1 and 7.2.2), as referenced in section 1.5 of this appendix. (g) Section 7.3, “Test Periods A and B” (excluding sections 7.3.1, 7.3.2, 7.3.3, and 7.3.4), as referenced in sections 1.5 and 1.5.1 of this appendix. (h) Section 7.4, “Test Alignment Period,” as referenced in section 1.5 of this appendix. (i) Section 7.5, “Determining Stability,” as referenced in sections 1.5 and 1.5.2 of this appendix. (j) Normative Appendix A, “Measurement Locations, Tolerances, Accuracies, and Other Characteristics,” (only the measured quantities specified in section 1.2 of this appendix) as referenced in sections 1.2 and 1.5.3 of this appendix. 0.3 ASTM F2143-16 (a) Section 3, “Terminology,” as referenced in section 1.1 of this appendix. (b) Section 6.1, “Analytical Balance Scale,” as referenced in section 1.1 of this appendix. (c) Section 6.2, “Pans,” as referenced in section 1.1 of this appendix. (d) Section 7, “Reagents and Materials,” as referenced in section 1.1 of this appendix. (e) Section 9, “Preparation of Apparatus” (section 9.6 only), as referenced in sections 1.1 and 1.4.2 of this appendix. (f) Section 10.1, “General” (section 10.1.1 only), as referenced in sections 1.1 and 1.5.3 of this appendix. (g) Section 10.2, “Pan Thermocouple Placement,” as referenced in section 1.1 of this appendix. (h) Section 10.5, “Test” (sections 10.5.5 and 10.5.6 only), as referenced in sections 1.1 and 1.5.1 of this appendix. (i) Section 11.4, “Energy Consumption” (section 11.4.1 only), as referenced in section 1.1 of this appendix. (j) Section 11.5, “Production Capacity,” as referenced in sections 1.1 and 2.1 of this appendix. 1. Test Procedure 1.1. Determination of Daily Energy Consumption. Determine the daily energy consumption of each buffet table or preparation table with a self-contained condensing unit by conducting the test procedure set forth in ASTM F2143-16 section 3, “Terminology,” section 6.1, “Analytical Balance Scale,” section 6.2, “Pans,” section 7, “Reagents and Materials,” section 9.6, “Preparation of Apparatus”, section 10.1, “General” (section 10.1.1 only), section 10.2, “Pan Thermocouple Placement,” section 10.5, “Test” (sections 10.5.5 and 10.5.6 only), section 11.4, “Energy Consumption” (section 11.4.1 only), and section 11.5, “Production Capacity,” with additional instructions as described in the following sections. 1.2. Test Conditions. Ambient conditions and instrumentation for testing shall be as specified in the “Chamber conditions” and “Electricity supply and consumption of unit under test and components metered separately” portions of appendix A to ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata and measured according to section 6.1 of ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata and the specifications in appendix A of ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata. The “highest point” of the buffet table or preparation table shall be determined as the highest point of the open-top refrigerated area of the buffet table or preparation table, without including the height of any lids or covers. The geometric center of the buffet table or preparation table is: for buffet tables or preparation tables without refrigerated compartments, the geometric center of the top surface of the open-top refrigerated area; and for buffet tables or preparation tables with refrigerated compartments, the geometric center of the door opening area for the refrigerated compartment. 1.3. Test Setup. Install the buffet table or preparation table according to sections 5.1, 5.2, and 5.3 of ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata. 1.4. Test Load. 1.4.1. Pan Loading. Fill pans with distilled water to within 0.5 in. of the top edge of the pan. For pans that are not configured in a horizontal orientation, only the lowest side of the pan is filled to within 0.5 in. of the top edge of the pan with distilled water. 1.4.2. Refrigerated Compartments. Measure the temperature of any refrigerated compartment(s) as specified in section 9.6 of ASTM F2143-16. The thermocouples for measuring compartment air temperature shall be in thermal contact with the center of a 1.6-oz (45-g) cylindrical brass slug with a diameter and height of 0.75 in. The brass slugs shall be placed at least 0.5 in from any heat-conducting surface. 1.5. Stabilization and Test Period. Prepare the unit for testing and conduct two test periods to determine stability according to sections 7.1 through 7.5 of ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata, excluding sections 7.2.1, 7.2.2, 7.3.1, 7.3.2, 7.3.3, and 7.3.4. The preparation period under section 7.2 of ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata includes loading the test unit pans with distilled water and adjusting the controls to maintain the desired performance. 1.5.1. Test Periods A and B. Conduct two test periods, A and B, as specified in section 7.3 of ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata (excluding sections 7.3.1, 7.3.2, 7.3.3, and 7.3.4). The 24-hour test periods shall begin with an 8-hour active period as specified in section 10.5.5 of ASTM F2143-16. Following the active period, the remaining 16 hours of the test period shall be a standby period with the pans remaining in place, any pan covers in the closed position, and with no additional door openings. 1.5.2. Stability. Average pan temperatures shall be used to determine stability, as specified in section 7.5 of ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata, rather than average test simulator temperatures. 1.5.3. Data Recording. For each test period, record data as specified in section 10.1.1 of ASTM F2143-16, except record wet-bulb temperature rather than relative humidity. Rather than voltage, current, and power as specified in section 10.1.1 of ASTM F2143-16, record the electrical supply potential and frequency and energy consumption as specified in appendix A of ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata. 1.6. Target Temperatures. 1.6.1. Average Pan Temperature. The average of all pan temperature measurements during the test period shall be 38 °F ±2 °F. If the unit under test is not able to be operated at this average temperature range, test the unit at the lowest application product temperature (LAPT), as defined in § 431.62. For units equipped with a thermostat, LAPT is measured at the lowest thermostat setting of the unit (for units that are only able to operate at temperatures above the specified test temperature) or the highest thermostat setting of the unit (for units that are only able to operate at temperatures below the specified test temperature). 1.6.2. Average Compartment Temperature. The average of all compartment temperature measurements during the test period shall be 38 °F ±2 °F. If the unit under test is not capable of maintaining both average pan temperature and average compartment temperature within the specified range, the average compartment temperature shall be the average temperature necessary to maintain average pan temperature within the specified range. If the unit is tested at the LAPT for the average pan temperature, as described in section 1.6.1 of this appendix, the average compartment temperature is the average of all compartment temperature measurements at that control setting. 2. Capacity Metrics 2.1. Pan Volume. Determine pan volume according to section 11.5 of ASTM F2143-16. 2.2. Refrigerated Volume. Determine the volume of any refrigerated compartments according to section 3.2.17 and appendix C of AHRI 1200-2023. The refrigerated volume excludes the volume occupied by pans loaded in the open-top display area for testing. 2.3. Pan Display Area. Determine the pan display area based on the total surface area of water in the test pans when filled to within 0.5 in. of the top edge of the pan, or for test pans that are not configured in a horizontal orientation, when the lowest side of the pan is filled to within 0.5 in. of the top edge of the pan with water. [88 FR 66227, Sept. 26, 2023] Appendix D to Subpart C of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Energy Consumption of Blast Chillers or Blast Freezers Note: On or after September 20, 2024, any representations, including for certification of compliance, made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of blast chillers or blast freezers must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.63 the entire standard for AHRI 1200-2023, ASHRAE 72-2022, and ASHRAE 72-2022 Errata (the latter two collectively referenced as ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata). However, only enumerated provisions of those documents are applicable to this appendix as follows: 0.1 AHRI 1200-2023 (a) Appendix C, “Commercial Refrigerated Display Merchandiser and Storage Cabinet Refrigerated Volume Calculation—Normative,” as referenced in section 1.1.1. of this appendix. (b) Reserved. 0.2 ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata (a) Section 4, “Instruments,” as referenced in section 1.2 of this appendix. (b) Section 5, “Preparation of Unit Under Test” (except section 5.4, “Loading of Test Simulators and Filler Material”), as referenced in section 1.2 of this appendix. (c) Section 6.1, “Ambient Temperature and Humidity,” as referenced in sections 1.2 and 1.4 of this appendix. (d) Figure 6, “Location of Ambient Temperature Indicators,” as referenced in sections 1.2 and 1.4 of this appendix. (e) Normative Appendix A, “Measurement Locations, Tolerances, Accuracies, and Other Characteristics,” (only the measured quantities specified in section 1.2.1 of this appendix) as referenced in sections 1.2 and 1.4 of this appendix. 1. Test Procedures 1.1. Scope. This section provides the test procedures for measuring the energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per pound (kWh/lb) for self-contained commercial blast chillers and blast freezers that have a refrigerated volume of up to 500 ft 3 1.1.1. Determination of Refrigerated Volume. Determine the refrigerated volume of a self-contained commercial blast chiller or blast freezer using the method set forth in AHRI 1200-2023, appendix C, “Commercial Refrigerated Display Merchandiser and Storage Cabinet Refrigerated Volume Calculation—Normative.” 1.2. Determination of Energy Consumption. Determine the energy consumption of each covered blast chiller or blast freezer by conducting the test procedure set forth in ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata section 4, “Instruments,” section 5, “Preparation of Unit Under Test” (except section 5.4, “Loading of Test Simulators and Filler Material”), section 6.1, “Ambient Temperature and Humidity,” Figure 6, “Location of Ambient Temperature Indicators,” and normative appendix A, “Measurement Locations, Tolerances, Accuracies, and Other Characteristics” (only the measured quantities specified in section 1.2.1 of this appendix), as well as the requirements of this appendix. 1.2.1. Measured Quantities in Normative Appendix A of ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata. The following measured quantities shall be in accordance with the specifications of normative appendix A of ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata: dry bulb temperature (except for deviations specified in sections 1.3 and 1.4 of this appendix), electrical supply frequency, electrical supply potential, energy consumed (except for deviations specified in section 1.3 of this appendix), extent of non-perforated surface beyond edges of unit under test, front clearance, rear or side clearance, and time measurements. 1.2.2. Additional Specifications for ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata. The term “refrigerator” used in ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata shall instead refer to “blast chiller” or “blast freezer,” as applicable. In section 5.3 of ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata, the phrase “all necessary components and accessories shall be installed prior to loading the storage and display areas with test simulators and filler material” shall be replaced with “all necessary components and accessories shall be installed prior to precooling the unit under test.” Section 5.3.5 shall also require that, prior to precooling the unit under test, the condensate pan shall be dry. 1.3. Data Recording Measurement Intervals. Measurements shall be continuously recorded during the test in intervals no greater than 10 seconds. 1.4. Test Conditions. The required test conditions shall have dry bulb temperature values according to Table D.1 when measured at point A in figure 6 of ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata and according to section 6.1 of ASHRAE 72-2022 with Errata. Table D.1—Test Condition Values and Tolerances Test condition Value Tolerance Dry Bulb 86.0 °F Average over test period: ±1.8 °F. 1.5. Product Pan. The product pan shall be a 12 in. by 20 in. by 2.5 in., 22 gauge or heavier, and 300 series stainless steel pan. If the blast chiller or blast freezer is not capable of holding the 12 in. by 20 in. by 2.5 in. product pan dimensions, the manufacturer's recommended pan size shall be used, conforming as closely as possible to the 12 in. by 20 in. by 2.5 in. pan dimensions. 1.6. Product Temperature Measurement. The product temperature shall be measured in the geometric center of the measured product pans using an unweighted thermocouple placed 5/8 1.7. Product Preparation. The product shall be made for each product pan and shall be loaded to 2 in. of product thickness ( i.e., 1.8. Product Pan Heating. Measured product pans shall be maintained at an average temperature of 160.0 °F ±1.8 °F and individual pan temperatures shall be maintained at 160 °F ±10 °F for a minimum of 8 hours prior to being loaded into the blast chiller or blast freezer. Non-measured product pans shall also be heated for a minimum of 8 hours prior to being loaded into the blast chiller or blast freezer and the non-measured product pans shall be placed in alternating positions with the measured product pans in the heating device. Data acquisition for the temperature of the measured product pans and time measurements shall begin to be recorded prior to the minimum of 8 hours heating period. 1.9. Product Pan Distribution. The product pans shall be spaced evenly throughout each vertical column of rack positions in the blast chiller or blast freezer without the product pans touching any other product pans and without the product pans touching the top and the bottom of the blast chiller or blast freezer cabinet. For blast chillers or blast freezers that have an additional product pan with a product thickness of less than 2 in., the additional product pan shall be placed as close to the middle rack position as possible while maintaining an even distribution of all product pans. If not all rack positions are occupied by product pans, the product pan locations shall be recorded. 1.10. Measured Product Pans. If multiple product pans are required per level of the blast chiller or blast freezer ( i.e., 1.11. Stabilization. The blast chiller or blast freezer shall stabilize at the test conditions specified in section 1.4 of this appendix for at least 24 hours without operating. 1.12. Pre-cool Cycle. Data acquisition for the test condition temperatures specified in section 1.4 of this appendix and time measurements shall begin to be recorded prior to the pre-cool cycle. The pre-cool cycle shall be initiated on a blast chiller or blast freezer once the stabilization specified in section 1.11 of this appendix is complete. The fastest pre-cool cycle shall be selected. The pre-cool cycle shall be complete when the blast chiller or blast freezer notifies the user that the pre-cool is complete. If the blast chiller or blast freezer does not notify the user that the pre-cool cycle is complete, the pre-cool cycle shall be deemed complete when the blast chiller or blast freezer reaches 40 °F or 2 °F based on the blast chiller's or blast freezer's sensing probe for blast chillers and blast freezers, respectively. For blast chillers or blast freezers without any defined pre-cool cycles, the fastest blast chilling or blast freezing cycle shall be run with an empty cabinet until the blast chiller or blast freezer reaches 40 °F or 2 °F based on the blast chiller's or blast freezer's sensing probe. During the pre-cool cycle, the blast chiller's or blast freezer's sensing probe shall remain in its default or holstered position. The pre-cool test data to be recorded are the test condition temperatures specified in section 1.4 of this appendix, pre-cool cycle selected, pre-cool duration, and final pre-cool cabinet temperature based on the blast chiller's or blast freezer's sensing probe. 1.13. Loading. The blast chiller or blast freezer door shall be fully open to an angle of not less than 75 °F for loading at 4.0 ±1.0 minutes after the blast chiller or blast freezer completes the pre-cool cycle as specified in section 1.12 of this appendix. The door shall remain open to load all of the product pans for the entirety of the loading procedure. The door shall remain open for 20 seconds per roll-in rack and 15 seconds per product pan for roll-in and standard blast chillers or blast freezers, respectively. The total door open period shall have a tolerance of ±5 seconds. The blast chiller's or blast freezer's sensing probe shall be inserted into the geometric center of a product pan approximately 1 in. deep in the product mixture at the median pan level in the blast chiller or blast freezer. If the product pan at the median level is the additional product pan with less than 2 in. of product thickness, the closest product pan or product pan level that is farthest away from the evaporator fan shall be used to insert the blast chiller's or blast freezer's sensing probe. If the median pan level has capacity for multiple product pans, the probed product pan shall be the furthest away from the evaporator. The sensing probe shall not touch the bottom of the product pan or be exposed to the air. The location of the product pan with the sensing probe shall be recorded. The sensing probe shall be placed so that there is no interference with the product pan thermocouple. The product pan thermocouple wiring shall not affect the energy performance of the blast chiller or blast freezer. The door shall remain closed for the remainder of the test. 1.14. Blast Chilling or Blast Freezing Cycle. Determine the blast chilling or blast freezing cycle that will conduct the most rapid product temperature pulldown that is designed for the densest food product, as stated in the blast chiller's or blast freezer's manufacturer literature. A blast chilling cycle shall have a target temperature of 38.0 °F and a blast freezing cycle shall have a target temperature of 0.0 °F. The test condition temperatures specified in section 1.4 of this appendix and the time measurements shall continue to be recorded from the pre-cool cycle. Measured product pan temperatures shall continue to be recorded from the minimum of 8-hour period of heating prior to the loading of the product pans into the blast chiller or blast freezer. Electrical supply frequency, electrical supply potential, and energy consumed shall start to be recorded as soon as the blast chiller or blast freezer door is opened to load the product pans. Once the blast chiller or blast freezer door is closed, the blast chilling cycle or blast freezing cycle shall be selected and initiated as soon as is practicable. The blast chilling cycle or blast freezing cycle selected shall be recorded. The blast chilling or blast freezing test period shall continue from the door opening until all individual measured pan temperatures are at or below 40.0 °F or 2.0 °F for blast chiller and blast freezer tests, respectively, regardless of whether the selected cycle program has terminated. If all individual measured pan temperatures do not reach 40.0 °F or 2.0 °F for blast chiller and blast freezer tests, respectively, two hours after the selected cycle program has terminated, the test shall be repeated with the target temperature lowered by 1.0 °F until all individual measured pan temperatures are at or below 40.0 °F or 2.0 °F for blast chiller and blast freezer tests, respectively, at the conclusion of the test. The duration of the blast chiller or blast freezer test shall be recorded. 1.15. Calculations. The measured energy consumption determined in section 1.14 of this appendix shall be reported in kilowatt-hours and shall be divided by the cumulative total weight of product determined in section 1.7 of this appendix in pounds. 2. Capacity Metric 2.1. Product Capacity. Determine the product capacity by reviewing all manufacturer literature that is included with the blast chiller or blast freezer. The largest product capacity by weight that is stated in the manufacturer literature shall be the product capacity. If the blast chiller or blast freezer is able to operate as both a blast chiller and a blast freezer when set to different operating modes by the user and the manufacturer literature specifies different product capacities for blast chilling and blast freezing, the largest capacity by weight stated for the respective operating mode shall be the product capacity. If no product capacity is stated in the manufacturer literature, the product capacity shall be the product capacity that fills the maximum number of 12 in. by 20 in. by 2.5 in. pans that can be loaded into the blast chiller or blast freezer according to section 1.7 of this appendix. If the blast chiller or blast freezer with no product capacity stated in the manufacturer literature is not capable of meeting the definition of a blast chiller or blast freezer according to § 431.62 upon testing according to section 1 of this appendix, one 12 in. by 20 in. by 2.5 in. pan shall be removed from the blast chiller or blast freezer until the definition of a blast chiller or blast freezer is met according to § 431.62 when testing according to section 1 of this appendix. [88 FR 66229, Sept. 26, 2023] Subpart D—Commercial Warm Air Furnaces Source: 69 FR 61939, Oct. 21, 2004, unless otherwise noted. § 431.71 Purpose and scope. This subpart contains energy conservation requirements for commercial warm air furnaces, pursuant to Part C of Title III of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 6311-6317. [69 FR 61939, Oct. 21, 2004, as amended at 70 FR 60415, Oct. 18, 2005] § 431.72 Definitions concerning commercial warm air furnaces. The following definitions apply for purposes of this subpart D, and of subparts J through M of this part. Any words or terms not defined in this Section or elsewhere in this part shall be defined as provided in Section 340 of the Act. Basic model Commercial warm air furnace Thermal efficiency Thermal efficiency two Warm air furnace [69 FR 61939, Oct. 21, 2004, as amended at 76 FR 12503, Mar. 7, 2011; 78 FR 79598, Dec. 31, 2013; 88 FR 36233, June 2, 2023] Test Procedures § 431.75 Materials incorporated by reference. (a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this subpart with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, DOE must publish a document in the Federal Register [email protected], www.energy.gov/eere/buildings/building-technologies-office. www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html [email protected]. (b) AHRI. www.ahrinet.org. (1) ANSI/AHRI 1500-2015 (“AHRI 1500-2015”), Performance Rating of Commercial Space Heating Boilers, (2) [Reserved] (c) ANSI. www.ansi.org. (1) CSA/ANSI Z21.47:21, (“ANSI Z21.47-2021”), Gas-fired central furnaces, (2) [Reserved] (d) ASHRAE. www.ashrae.org. (1) ANSI/ASHRAE 103-2022 (“ASHRAE 103-2022”), Method of Testing for Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency of Residential Central Furnaces and Boilers, (2) [Reserved] (e) ASME. www.asme.org. (1) ANSI/ASME PTC 19.3-1974 (R2004), Supplement to ASME Performance Test Codes: Part 3: Temperature Measurement, Instruments and Apparatus, (2) [Reserved] (f) ASTM. www.astm.org/. (1) ASTM D240-09, Standard Test Method for Heat of Combustion of Liquid Hydrocarbon Fuels by Bomb Calorimeter, (2) ASTM D396-14a, Standard Specification for Fuel Oils, (3) ASTM D4809-09a, Standard Test Method for Heat of Combustion of Liquid Hydrocarbon Fuels by Bomb Calorimeter (Precision Method); (4) ASTM D5291-10, Standard Test Methods for Instrumental Determination of Carbon, Hydrogen, and Nitrogen in Petroleum Products and Lubricants, (5) ASTM E230/E230M-17 (“ASTM E230/E230M-17”), Standard Specification for Temperature-Electromotive Force (emf) Tables for Standardized Thermocouples, (g) NFPA. www.nfpa.org. (1) NFPA 97 (“NFPA 97-2003”), Standard Glossary of Terms Relating to Chimneys, Vents, and Heat-Producing Appliances; (2) [Reserved] (h) UL. www.ul.com. (1) UL 727 (“UL 727-2018”), Standard for Safety Oil-Fired Central Furnaces, (2) [Reserved] [88 FR 36234, June 2, 2023] § 431.76 Uniform test method for the measurement of energy efficiency of commercial warm air furnaces. (a) Scope. (b) Testing and calculations Thermal efficiency. (2) Thermal efficiency two. [88 FR 36234, June 2, 2023] Energy Conservation Standards § 431.77 Energy conservation standards and their effective dates. (a) Gas-fired commercial warm air furnaces. (1) For gas-fired commercial warm air furnaces manufactured starting on January 1, 1994, until January 1, 2023, the TE at the maximum rated capacity (rated maximum input) must be not less than 80 percent; and (2) For gas-fired commercial warm air furnaces manufactured starting on January 1, 2023, the TE at the maximum rated capacity (rated maximum input) must be not less than 81 percent. (b) Oil-fired commercial warm air furnaces. (1) For oil-fired commercial warm air furnaces manufactured starting on January 1, 1994, until January 1, 2023, the TE at the maximum rated capacity (rated maximum input) must be not less than 81 percent; and (2) For oil-fired commercial warm air furnaces manufactured starting on January 1, 2023, the TE at the maximum rated capacity (rated maximum input) must be not less than 82 percent. [81 FR 2528, Jan. 15, 2016] Appendix A to Subpart D of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for Measurement of the Energy Efficiency of Commercial Warm Air Furnaces (Thermal Efficiency) Note: On and after May 28, 2024, any representations made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of commercial warm air furnaces must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this section. At that time, manufacturers must use the relevant procedures specified in this appendix, which reference ANSI Z21.47-2021, ASHRAE 103-2022, UL 727-2018, or AHRI 1500-2015. On and after July 3, 2023 and prior to May 28, 2024, manufacturers must test commercial warm air furnaces in accordance with this appendix or 10 CFR 431.76 as it appeared on January 1, 2023. DOE notes that, because testing under this section is required as of May 28, 2024, manufacturers may wish to begin using this amended test procedure as soon as possible. Any representations made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of such commercial warm air furnaces must be made in accordance with whichever version is selected. Manufacturers must use the results of testing under appendix B to this subpart to determine compliance with any standards for commercial warm air furnaces that use the thermal efficiency 2 (TE2) metric. 0. Incorporation by reference. In § 431.75, DOE incorporated by reference the entire standard for AHRI 1500-2015, ANSI Z21.47-2021, ASHRAE 103-2022, ASME PTC 19.3-1974 (R2004), ASTM D240-09, ASTM D396-14a, ASTM D4809-09a, ASTM D5291-10, ASTM E230/E230M-17, NFPA 97-2003, and UL 727-2018. However, for standards AHRI 1500-2015, ANSI Z21.47-2021, ASHRAE 103-2022, and UL 727-2018, only the enumerated provisions of those documents apply to this appendix, as follows: 0.1 ANSI Z21.47-2021 (a) Sections 5.1, 5.1.4, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.5.1, 5.6, and 7.2.1 as specified in section 1.1 of this appendix; (b) Section 5.40 as specified in sections 1.1 and 3.1 of this appendix; (c) Section 5.2.8 as specified in section 4.1 of this appendix; (d) Annex I as specified in section 3.1 of this appendix. 0.2 ASHRAE 103-2022 (a) Sections 7.2.2.4, 7.8, and 9.2 as specified in section 2.2 of this appendix; (b) Sections 11.3.7.1 and 11.3.7.2 as specified in section 4.1 of this appendix. 0.3 UL 727-2018 (a) Sections 2, 3, 37, 38 and 39, 40, 40.6, 41, 42, 43.2, 44, 45, and 46 as specified in section 1.2 of this appendix; (b) Figure 40.3 as specified in section 2.1 of this appendix. 0.4 AHRI 1500-2015 (a) Section C3.2.1.1 as specified in section 1.2 of this appendix; (b) Sections C7.2.4, C7.2.5, and C7.2.6.2 as specified in section 3.2 of this appendix. 1. Test setup and Testing. 1.1 Gas-fired commercial warm air furnaces. e.g., 1.2 Oil-fired commercial warm air furnaces. e.g., 1.3 Additional test setup requirements for gas-fired and oil-fired commercial warm air furnaces 1.3.1 Thermocouple setup for gas-fired and oil-fired commercial warm air furnaces with flue outlets that have a cross-sectional area of 3.14 square inches or less. 1.3.2 Procedure for flue gas measurements when testing units with multiple flue outlets. e.g., 2 i.e., 2. Additional test measurements 2.1 Determination of flue CO 2 (carbon dioxide) or O 2 (oxygen) for oil-fired commercial warm air furnaces. 2 2 2 2 2.2 Procedure for the measurement of condensate for a gas-fired condensing commercial warm air furnace. 3. Calculation of thermal efficiency 3.1 Gas-fired commercial warm air furnaces. 3.2 Oil-fired commercial warm air furnaces. 4. Procedure for the calculation of the additional heat gain and heat loss, and adjustment to the thermal efficiency, for a condensing commercial warm air furnace. 4.1 Calculate the latent heat gain from the condensation of the water vapor in the flue gas, and calculate heat loss due to the flue condensate down the drain, as specified in sections 11.3.7.1 and 11.3.7.2 of ASHRAE 103-2022, with the exception that in the equation for the heat loss due to hot condensate flowing down the drain in section 11.3.7.2, the assumed indoor temperature of 70 °F and the temperature term T OA 4.2 Adjustment to the thermal efficiency for condensing commercial warm air furnaces. [88 FR 36234, June 2, 2203] Appendix B to Subpart D of Part 431-Uniform Test Method for Measurement of the Energy Efficiency of Commercial Warm Air Furnaces (Thermal Efficiency Two) Note: Manufacturers must use the results of testing under this appendix B to determine compliance with any standards for commercial warm air furnaces that use the thermal efficiency 2 (TE2) metric. In addition, manufacturers may optionally make representations of energy use or efficiency of this equipment using TE2 as determined using this appendix starting on July 3, 2023. 0. Incorporation by Reference. In § 431.75, DOE incorporates by reference the entire standard ANSI Z21.47-2021. However, only section 5.40 and Appendix J of ANSI Z21.47-2021 apply, as specified in sections 1.2 and 1.6 of this appendix. 1. Testing 1.1 Set up and test the unit according to sections 0 through 4 of appendix A to this subpart, while operating the unit at the maximum nameplate input rate ( i.e., 1.2 For commercial warm air furnaces that are designed for outdoor installation (including but not limited to CWAFs that are weatherized, or approved for resistance to wind, rain, or snow), or indoor installation within an unheated space ( i.e., 1.3 For commercial warm air furnaces that are designed only for indoor installation within a heated space, jacket loss shall be zero. For commercial warm air furnaces that are designed for indoor installation within a heated or unheated space, multiply the jacket loss determined in section 1.2 of this appendix by 1.7. For all other commercial warm air furnaces, including commercial warm air furnaces that are designed for outdoor installation (including but not limited to CWAFs that are weatherized, or approved for resistance to wind, rain, or snow), multiply the jacket loss determined in section 1.2 of this appendix by 3.3. 1.4 Subtract the jacket loss determined in section 1.3 of this appendix from the TE determined in section 1.1 of this appendix to determine the full-load efficiency. 1.5 Set up and test the unit according to sections 0 through 4 of appendix A to this subpart, while operating the unit at the nameplate minimum input rate ( i.e., 1.6 For commercial warm air furnaces that are designed for outdoor installation (including but not limited to CWAFs that are weatherized, or approved for resistance to wind, rain, or snow), or indoor installation within an unheated space ( i.e., 1.7 For commercial warm air furnaces that are designed only for indoor installation within a heated space, jacket loss shall be zero. For commercial warm air furnaces that are designed for indoor installation within a heated or unheated space, multiply the jacket loss determined in section 1.6 of this appendix by 1.7. For all other commercial warm air furnaces, including commercial warm air furnaces that are designed for outdoor installation (including but not limited to CWAFs that are weatherized, or approved for resistance to wind, rain, or snow), multiply the jacket loss determined in section 1.6 of this appendix by 3.3. 1.8 Subtract the jacket loss determined in section 1.7 of this appendix from the TE determined in section 1.5 of this appendix to determine the part-load efficiency. 1.9 Calculate TE2 by taking the average of the full-load and part-load efficiencies as determined in sections 1.4 and 1.8 of this appendix, respectively. [88 FR 36235, June 2, 2023] Subpart E—Commercial Packaged Boilers Source: 69 FR 61960, Oct. 21, 2004, unless otherwise noted. § 431.81 Purpose and scope. This subpart contains energy conservation requirements for certain commercial packaged boilers, pursuant to Part C of Title III of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act. (42 U.S.C. 6311-6317) [69 FR 61960, Oct. 21, 2004, as amended at 70 FR 60415, Oct. 18, 2005] § 431.82 Definitions concerning commercial packaged boilers. The following definitions apply for purposes of this subpart E, and of subparts A and J through M of this part. Any words or terms not defined in this section or elsewhere in this part shall be defined as provided in 42 U.S.C. 6311. Basic model Btu/h Btu/hr Combustion efficiency Commercial packaged boiler (1) Has rated input of 300,000 Btu/h or greater; (2) Is, to any significant extent, distributed in commerce for space conditioning and/or service water heating in buildings but does not meet the definition of “hot water supply boiler” in this part; (3) Does not meet the definition of “field-constructed” in this section; and (4) Is designed to: (i) Operate at a steam pressure at or below 15 psig; (ii) Operate at or below a water pressure of 160 psig and water temperature of 250 °F; or (iii) Operate at the conditions specified in both paragraphs (4)(i) and (ii) of this definition. Condensing boiler Field-constructed Flue condensate Fuel input rate Manufacturer of a commercial packaged boiler (1) Manufactures, produces, assembles or imports a commercial packaged boiler in its entirety; (2) Manufactures, produces, assembles or imports a commercial packaged boiler in part, and specifies or approves the boiler's components, including burners or other components produced by others, as for example by specifying such components in a catalogue by make and model number or parts number; or (3) Is any vendor or installer who sells a commercial packaged boiler that consists of a combination of components that is not specified or approved by a person described in paragraph (1) or (2) of this definition. Packaged boiler Rated input Thermal efficiency [69 FR 61960, Oct. 21, 2004, as amended at 74 FR 36354, July 22, 2009; 76 FR 12503, Mar. 7, 2011; 78 FR 79598, Dec. 31, 2013; 81 FR 89304, Dec. 9, 2016] Test Procedures § 431.85 Materials incorporated by reference. (a) General. Federal Register. http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. http://www1.eere.energy.gov/buildings/appliance_standards/. (b) AHRI. http://www.ahrinet.org (1) AHRI Standard 1500-2015, (“ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015”), “2015 Standard for Performance Rating of Commercial Space Heating Boilers,” ANSI approved November 28, 2014, IBR approved for appendix A to subpart E as follows: (i) Section 3—Definitions (excluding introductory text to section 3, introductory text to 3.2, 3.2.4, 3.2.7, 3.6, 3.12, 3.13, 3.20, 3.23, 3.24, 3.26, 3.27, and 3.31); (ii) Section 5—Rating Requirements, 5.3 Standard Rating Conditions: (excluding introductory text to section 5.3, 5.3.5, 5.3.8, and 5.3.9); (iii) Appendix C—Methods of Testing for Rating Commercial Space Heating Boilers—Normative, excluding C2.1, C2.7.2.2.2, C3.1.3, C3.5-C3.7, C4.1.1.1.2, C4.1.1.2.3, C4.1.2.1.5, C4.1.2.2.2, C4.1.2.2.3, C4.2, C5, C7.1, C7.2.12, C7.2.20; (iv) Appendix D. Properties of Saturated Steam—Normative. (v) Appendix E. Correction Factors for Heating Values of Fuel Gases—Normative. (2) [Reserved]. [74 FR 36354, July 22, 2009, as amended at 81 FR 89305, Dec. 9, 2016] § 431.86 Uniform test method for the measurement of energy efficiency of commercial packaged boilers. (a) Scope. (b) Testing and Calculations. Table 1—Test Requirements for Commercial Packaged Boiler Equipment Classes Equipment category Subcategory Certified rated input Standards efficiency metric Test procedure Hot Water Gas-fired ≥300,000 and ≤2,500,000 Thermal Efficiency Appendix A, Section 2. Hot Water Gas-fired >2,500,000 Combustion Efficiency Appendix A, Section 3. Hot Water Oil-fired ≥300,000 and ≤2,500,000 Thermal Efficiency Appendix A, Section 2. Hot Water Oil-fired >2,500,000 Combustion Efficiency Appendix A, Section 3. Steam Gas-fired (all*) ≥300,000 and ≤2,500,000 Thermal Efficiency Appendix A, Section 2. Steam Gas-fired (all*) >2,500,000 and ≤5,000,000 Thermal Efficiency Appendix A, Section 2. >5,000,000 Thermal Efficiency Appendix A, Section 2. Steam Oil-fired ≥300,000 and ≤2,500,000 Thermal Efficiency Appendix A, Section 2. Steam Oil-fired >2,500,000 and ≤5,000,000 Thermal Efficiency Appendix A, Section 2. >5,000,000 Thermal Efficiency Appendix A, Section 2. * Equipment classes for commercial packaged boilers as of July 22, 2009 (74 FR 36355) distinguish between gas-fired natural draft and all other gas-fired (except natural draft). (c) Field Tests. [81 FR 89305, Dec. 9, 2016] Energy Efficiency Standards § 431.87 Energy conservation standards and their effective dates. (a) Each commercial packaged boiler listed in table 1 of this paragraph (a) and manufactured on or after the effective date listed must meet the indicated energy conservation standard. Table 1 to Paragraph (a) Equipment category Subcategory Certified rated input Efficiency level—effective date: March 2, 2012 * Hot Water Commercial Packaged Boilers Gas-fired ≥300,000 Btu/h and ≤2,500,000 Btu/h 80.0% E T Hot Water Commercial Packaged Boilers Gas-fired >2,500,000 Btu/h 82.0% E C Hot Water Commercial Packaged Boilers Oil-fired ≥300,000 Btu/h and ≤2,500,000 Btu/h 82.0% E T Hot Water Commercial Packaged Boilers Oil-fired >2,500,000 Btu/h 84.0% E C Steam Commercial Packaged Boilers Gas-fired, all, except natural draft ≥300,000 Btu/h and ≤2,500,000 Btu/h 79.0% E T Steam Commercial Packaged Boilers Gas-fired, all, except natural draft >2,500,000 Btu/h 79.0% E T Steam Commercial Packaged Boilers Gas-fired—natural draft ≥300,000 Btu/h and ≤2,500,000 Btu/h 77.0% E T Steam Commercial Packaged Boilers Gas-fired—natural draft >2,500,000 Btu/h 77.0% E T Steam Commercial Packaged Boilers Oil-fired ≥300,000 Btu/h and ≤2,500,000 Btu/h 81.0% E T Steam Commercial Packaged Boilers Oil-fired >2,500,000 Btu/h 81.0% E T * Where E C T (b) Each commercial packaged boiler listed in table 2 of this paragraph (b) and manufactured on or after the effective date listed in Table 2 must meet the indicated energy conservation standard. Table 2 to Paragraph (b) Equipment category Subcategory Certified rated input Efficiency level—effective date: March 2, 2022 * Steam Commercial Packaged Boilers Gas-fired—natural draft ≥300,000 Btu/h and ≤2,500,000 Btu/h 79.0% E T Steam Commercial Packaged Boilers Gas-fired—natural draft >2,500,000 Btu/h 79.0% E T * Where E T [88 FR 64352, Sept. 19, 2023] Appendix A to Subpart E of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Thermal Efficiency and Combustion Efficiency of Commercial Packaged Boilers Note: Prior to December 4, 2017, manufacturers must make any representations with respect to the energy use or efficiency of commercial packaged boilers in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this Appendix or the test procedures as they appeared in 10 CFR 431.86 revised as of January 1, 2016. On and after December 4, 2017, manufacturers must make any representations with respect to energy use or efficiency in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. 1. Definitions. For purposes of this appendix, the Department of Energy incorporates by reference the definitions established in section 3 of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) Standard 1500, “2015 Standard for Performance Rating of Commercial Space Heating Boilers,” beginning with 3.1 and ending with 3.35 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.85; hereafter “ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015”), excluding the introductory text to section 3, the introductory text to section 3.2, “Boiler”; 3.2.4, “Heating Boiler”; 3.2.7, “Packaged Boiler”; 3.6, “Combustion Efficiency”; 3.12, “Efficiency, Combustion”; 3.13, “Efficiency, Thermal”; 3.20, “Gross Output”; 3.23, “Input Rating”; 3.24, “Net Rating”; 3.26, “Published Rating”; 3.26.1, “Standard Rating”; 3.27, “Rating Conditions”; 3.27.1, “Standard Rating Conditions”; and 3.31, “Thermal Efficiency.” In cases where there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015. 1.1. In all incorporated sections of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015, references to the manufacturer's “specifications,” “recommendations,” “directions,” or “requests” mean the manufacturer's instructions in the installation and operation manual shipped with the commercial packaged boiler being tested or in supplemental instructions provided by the manufacturer pursuant to § 429.60(b)(4) of this chapter. For parameters or considerations not specified in this appendix, refer to the manual shipped with the commercial packaged boiler. Should the manual shipped with the commercial packaged boiler not provide the necessary information, refer to the supplemental instructions for the basic model pursuant to § 429.60(b)(4) of this chapter. The supplemental instructions provided pursuant to § 429.60(b)(4) of this chapter do not replace or alter any requirements in this appendix nor do they override the manual shipped with the commercial packaged boiler. In cases where these supplemental instructions conflict with any instructions or provisions provided in the manual shipped with the commercial packaged boiler, use the manual shipped with the commercial packaged boiler. 1.2. Unless otherwise noted, in all incorporated sections of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015, the term “boiler” means a commercial packaged boiler as defined in § 431.82. 1.3. Unless otherwise noted, in all incorporated sections of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015, the term “input rating” means “rated input” as defined in § 431.82. 2. Thermal Efficiency Test. 2. Test Setup. 2.1.1. Instrumentation. 2.1.2. Data collection and sampling. Table 2.1—Data To Be Recorded Before Testing Item recorded Additional Date of Test None. Manufacturer None. Commercial Packaged Boiler Model Number None. Burner Model Number & Manufacturer None. Nozzle description and oil pressure None. Oil Analysis—H, C, API Gravity, lb/gal and Btu/lb None. Gas Manifold Pressure Record at start and end of test. Gas line pressure at meter Measurement may be made manually. Gas temperature Measurement may be made manually. Barometric Pressure (Steam and Natural Gas Only) Measurement may be made manually. Gas Heating Value, Btu/ft 3 Record at start and end of test. * Multiplied by correction factors, as applicable, in accordance with Appendix E of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015. 2.1.3. Instrument Calibration. 2.1.4. Test Setup and Apparatus. 2.1.4.1. For tests of oil-fired commercial packaged boilers, determine the weight of fuel consumed using one of the methods specified in the following sections 2.1.4.1.1. or 2.1.4.1.2. of this appendix: 2.1.4.1.1. If using a scale, determine the weight of fuel consumed as the difference between the weight of the oil vessel before and after each measurement period, as specified in sections 2.1.4.1.3.1. or 2.1.4.1.3.2. of this appendix, determined using a scale meeting the accuracy requirements of Table C1 of Appendix C of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015. 2.1.4.1.2. If using a flow meter, first determine the volume of fuel consumed as the total volume over the applicable measurement period as specified in 2.1.4.1.3.1. or 2.1.4.1.3.2. of this appendix and as measured by a flow meter meeting the accuracy requirements of Table C1 of Appendix C of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015 upstream of the oil inlet port of the commercial packaged boiler. Then determine the weight of fuel consumed by multiplying the total volume of fuel over the applicable measurement period by the density of oil as determined pursuant to C3.2.1.1.3. of Appendix C of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015. 2.1.4.1.3. The applicable measurement period for the purposes of determining fuel input rate must be as specified in section 2.1.4.1.3.1. of this appendix for the “Warm-Up Period” or section 2.1.4.1.3.2. of this appendix for the “Test Period.” 2.1.4.1.3.1. For the purposes of confirming steady-state operation during the “Warm-Up Period,” the measurement period must be 15 minutes and t T 2.1.4.1.3.2. For the purposes of determining thermal efficiency during the “Test Period,” the measurement period and t T 2.1.4.2 For tests of gas-fired commercial packaged boilers, install a volumetric gas meter meeting the accuracy requirements of Table C1 of Appendix C of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015 upstream of the gas inlet port of the commercial packaged boiler. Record the accumulated gas volume consumed for each applicable measurement period. Use Equation C7.2.3.2. of Appendix C of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015 to calculate fuel input rate. 2.1.4.2.1. The applicable measurement period for the purposes of determining fuel input rate must be as specified in section 2.1.4.2.1.1. of this appendix for the “Warm-Up Period” and 2.1.4.2.1.2. of this appendix for the “Test Period.” 2.1.4.2.1.1. For the purposes of confirming steady-state operation during the “Warm-Up Period,” the measurement period must be 15 minutes and t T 2.1.4.2.1.2. For the purposes of determining thermal efficiency during the “Test Period,” the measurement period and t T 2.1.4.3 In addition to the provisions of Section C2.2.1.2 of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015, vent gases may alternatively be discharged vertically into a straight stack section without elbows. R-7 minimum insulation must extend 6 stack diameters above the flue collar, the thermocouple grid must be located at a vertical distance of 3 stack diameters above the flue collar, and the sampling tubes for flue gases must be installed within 1 stack diameter beyond the thermocouple grid. If dilution air is introduced into the flue gases before the plane of the thermocouple and flue gas sampling points, utilize an alternate plane of thermocouple grid and flue gas sampling point located downstream from the heat exchanger and upstream from the point of dilution air introduction. 2.1.5. Additional Requirements for Outdoor Commercial Packaged Boilers. 2.1.6. Additional Requirements for Steam Tests. 2.1.6.1. Insulate all steam piping from the commercial packaged boiler to the steam separator, and extend insulation at least one foot (1 ft.) beyond the steam separator, using insulation meeting the requirements specified in Table 2.3 of this appendix. 2.1.6.2. A temperature sensing device must be installed in the insulated steam piping prior to the water separator if the commercial packaged boiler produces superheated steam. 2.1.6.3. Water entrained in the steam and water condensing within the steam piping must be collected and used to calculate the quality of steam during the “Test Period.” Steam condensate must be collected and measured using either a cumulative (totalizing) flow rate or by measuring the mass of the steam condensate. Instrumentation used to determine the amount of steam condensate must meet the requirements identified in Table C1 in Appendix C of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015. 2.1.7. Additional Requirements for Water Tests. 2.1.7.1. Insulate all water piping between the commercial packaged boiler and the location of the temperature measuring equipment, including one foot (1 ft.) beyond the sensor, using insulation meeting the requirements specified in Table 2.3 of this appendix. 2.1.7.2. Install a temperature measuring device at Point B of Figure C9 of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.85). Water entering the commercial packaged boiler must first enter the run of a tee and exit from the top outlet of the tee. The remaining connection of the tee must be plugged. Measure the inlet water temperature at Point B in the run of a second tee located 12 ± 2 pipe diameters downstream from the first tee and no more than the greater of 12 inches or 6 pipe diameters from the inlet of the commercial packaged boiler. The temperature measuring device shall extend into the water flow at the point of exit from the side outlet of the second tee. All inlet piping between the temperature measuring device and the inlet of the commercial packaged boilers must be wrapped with R-7 insulation. 2.1.7.3. Do not use Section C2.7.2.2.2 or its subsections of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015 for water meter calibration. 2.1.8. Flue Gas Sampling. 1/4 1/2 3/4 2.2. Test Conditions. 2.2.1. General. (1) 5.3 Introductory text (2) 5.3.5 (and subsections; see sections 2.2.3. and 2.2.4. of this appendix) (3) 5.3.8 (see section 2.2.5. of this appendix) (4) 5.3.9 (see section 2.2.6. of this appendix) (5) C3.1.3 (and subsections) (6) C3.5 (including Table C2; see section 2.2.7. of this appendix) (7) C3.6 (see section 2.2.5. of this appendix) (8) C3.7 (see section 2.2.6. of this appendix) 2.2.2. Burners for Oil-Fired Commercial Packaged Boilers. 2.2.3. Water Temperatures. 2.2.4 Exceptions to Water Temperature Requirements. 2.2.5 Air Temperature. 2.2.6. Ambient Humidity. 2.2.7. Flue Gas Temperature. Table 2.4—Flue Gas Temperature Variation Limits During Test Period Fuel type Non-condensing Condensing Gas ± 2 percent Greater of ± 3 percent and ± 5 °F Light Oil ± 2 percent Heavy Oil Greater of ± 3 percent and ± 5 °F 2.3. Test Method. 2.3.1. General. (1) C4.1.1.1.2 (see section 2.3.1.1 of this appendix) (2) C4.1.1.2.3 (see 2.3.4 of this appendix) (3) C4.1.2.1.5 (see section 2.3.2. of this appendix) (4) C4.1.2.2.2 (5) C4.1.2.2.3 (see 2.3.5 of this appendix) (6) C4.2 (7) C4.2.1 (8) C4.2.2 2.3.1.1. Adjust oil or non-atmospheric gas to produce the required firebox pressure and CO 2 2 2.3.2. Water Test Steady-State. 2.3.3. Condensate Collection for Condensing Commercial Packaged Boilers. 2.3.4. Steam Test Duration. 2.3.5. Water Test Duration. 2.4. Calculations. 2.4.1. General. 2.4.2. Use of Steam Properties Table. 2.4.3. Alternative Thermal Efficiency Calculation for Large Steam Commercial Packaged Boilers. 2.4.3.1. Calculate the thermal efficiency of commercial packaged boiler models in steam mode in accordance with the provisions of section 2.4.1 of this appendix, or 2.4.3.2. Measure and calculate combustion efficiency Effy ss Combustion Efficiency Test Effy T ss where Effy T ss ss 2.4.4. Rounding. 3. Combustion Efficiency Test. 3.1. Test Setup. 3.1.1. Instrumentation. 3.1.2. Data collection and sampling. Table 3.1—Data To Be Recorded Before Testing Item recorded Additional instruction Date of Test None. Manufacturer None. Commercial Packaged Boiler Model Number None. Burner Model Number & Manufacturer None. Nozzle description and oil pressure None. Oil Analysis—H, C, API Gravity, lb/gal and Btu/lb None. Gas Manifold Pressure Record at start and end of test. Gas line pressure at meter Measurement may be made manually. Gas temperature Measurement may be made manually. Barometric Pressure (Steam and Natural Gas Only) Measurement may be made manually. Gas Heating Value, Btu/ft 3 Record at start and end of test. * Multiplied by correction factors, as applicable, in accordance with Appendix E of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015. 3.1.3. Instrument Calibration. 3.1.4. Test Setup and Apparatus. 3.1.4.1. For tests of oil-fired commercial packaged boilers, determine the weight of fuel consumed using one of the methods specified in sections 3.1.4.1.1. or 3.1.4.1.2. of this appendix: 3.1.4.1.1. If using a scale, determine the weight of fuel consumed as the difference between the weight of the oil vessel before and after each measurement period, as specified in sections 3.1.4.1.3.1. or 3.1.4.1.3.2. of this appendix, determined using a scale meeting the accuracy requirements of Table C1 of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015. 3.1.4.1.2. If using a flow meter, first determine the volume of fuel consumed as the total volume over the applicable measurement period, as specified in sections 3.1.4.1.3.1. or 3.1.4.1.3.2. of this appendix, and as measured by a flow meter meeting the accuracy requirements of Table C1 of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015 upstream of the oil inlet port of the commercial packaged boiler. Then determine the weight of fuel consumed by multiplying the total volume of fuel over the applicable measurement period by the density of oil, in pounds per gallon, as determined pursuant to Section C3.2.1.1.3. of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015. 3.1.4.1.3. The applicable measurement period for the purposes of determining fuel input rate must be as specified in section 3.1.4.1.3.1. of this appendix for the “Warm-Up Period” or 3.1.4.1.3.2. of this appendix for the “Test Period.” 3.1.4.1.3.1. For the purposes of confirming steady-state operation during the “Warm-Up Period,” the measurement period must be 15 minutes and t T 3.1.4.1.3.2. For the purposes of determining combustion efficiency during the “Test Period,” the measurement period and t T 3.1.4.2 For tests of gas-fired commercial packaged boilers, install a volumetric gas meter meeting the accuracy requirements of Table C1 of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015 upstream of the gas inlet port of the commercial packaged boiler. Record the accumulated gas volume consumed for each applicable measurement period. Use Equation C7.2.3.2. of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015 to calculate fuel input rate. 3.1.4.2.1. The applicable measurement period for the purposes of determining fuel input rate must be as specified in section 3.1.4.2.1.1. of this appendix for the “Warm-Up Period” and 3.1.4.2.1.2. of this appendix for the “Test Period.” 3.1.4.2.1.1. For the purposes of confirming steady-state operation during the “Warm-Up Period,” the measurement period must be 15 minutes and t T 3.1.4.2.1.2. For the purposes of determining combustion efficiency during the “Test Period,” the measurement period and t T 3.1.4.3. In addition to the provisions of Section C2.2.1.2 of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015, vent gases may alternatively be discharged vertically into a straight stack section without elbows. R-7 minimum insulation must extend 6 stack diameters above the flue collar, the thermocouple grid must be located at a vertical distance of 3 stack diameters above the flue collar, and the sampling tubes for flue gases must be installed within 1 stack diameter beyond the thermocouple grid. If dilution air is introduced into the flue gases before the plane of the thermocouple and flue gas sampling points, utilize an alternate plane of thermocouple grid and flue gas sampling point located downstream from the heat exchanger and upstream from the point of dilution air introduction. 3.1.5. Additional Requirements for Outdoor Commercial Packaged Boilers. 3.1.6. Additional Requirements for Field Tests. 3.1.6.1 Field tests are exempt from the requirements of Section C2.2 of Appendix C of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015. Measure the flue gas temperature according to Section C2.5.1 of Appendix C of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015 and the thermocouple grids identified in Figure C12 of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015, with the following modification: the thermocouple grid may be staggered vertically by up to 1.5 inches to allow the use of instrumented rods to be inserted through holes drilled in the venting. 3.1.6.2. Field tests are exempt from the requirements of Section C2.6.3 of Appendix C of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015. 3.1.7. Additional Requirements for Water Tests. 3.1.7.1. Insulate all water piping between the commercial packaged boiler and the location of the temperature measuring equipment, including one foot (1 ft.) beyond the sensor, using insulation meeting the requirements specified in Table 2.3 of this appendix. 3.1.7.2. Install a temperature measuring device at Point B of Figure C9 of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015. Water entering the commercial packaged boiler must first enter the run of a tee and exit from the top outlet of the tee. The remaining connection of the tee must be plugged. Measure the inlet water temperature at Point B in the run of a second tee located 12 ± 2 pipe diameters downstream from the first tee and no more than the greater of 12 inches or 6 pipe diameters from the inlet of the commercial packaged boiler. The temperature measuring device shall extend into the water flow at the point of exit from the side outlet of the second tee. All inlet piping between the temperature measuring device and the inlet of the commercial packaged boilers must be wrapped with R-7 insulation. Field tests must also measure the inlet water temperature at Point B in Figure C9, however they are not required to use the temperature measurement piping described in this section 3.1.7. of this appendix. 3.1.7.3. Do not use Section C2.7.2.2.2 or its subsections of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015 for water meter calibration. 3.1.8. Flue Gas Sampling. 1/4 1/2 3/4 3.2. Test Conditions. 3.2.1. General. (1) 5.3 Introductory text (2) 5.3.5 (and subsections; see sections 3.2.3, 3.2.3.1, and 3.2.3.2 of this appendix) (3) 5.3.7 (excluded for field tests only) (4) 5.3.8 (see section 3.2.4 of this appendix) (5) 5.3.9 (see section 3.2.5 of this appendix) (6) C3.1.3 (and subsections) (7) C3.5 (including Table C2; see section 3.2.6 of this appendix) (8) C3.6 (see section 3.2.4 of this appendix) (9) C3.7 (see section 3.2.5 of this appendix) 3.2.2. Burners for Oil-Fired Commercial Packaged Boilers. 3.2.3. Water Temperatures. 3.2.3.1. For field tests, the inlet temperature measured at Point A and Point B in Figure C9 and the outlet temperature measured and Point C in Figure C9 of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015 must be recorded in the data underlying that model's certification pursuant to § 429.71 of this chapter, and the difference between the inlet (measured at Point B) and outlet temperature (measured at Point C) must not be less than 20 °F at any point during the “Warm-up Period” and “Test Period,” after stabilization has been achieved, as indicated by 1-minute interval data pursuant to Table 3.2 of this appendix. 3.2.3.2 For commercial packaged boilers that require a higher flow rate than that resulting from the water temperature requirements of sections 3.2.3 of this appendix to prevent boiling, use a recirculating loop and maintain the inlet temperature at Point B of Figure C9 of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015 at 140 °F ± 5 °F during the “Warm-up Period” and “Test Period” as indicated by 1-minute interval data pursuant to Table 3.2 of this appendix. Each reading must meet these temperature requirements. 3.2.4. Air Temperature. 3.2.5. Ambient Humidity. 3.2.6. Flue Gas Temperature. Table 3.3—Flue Gas Temperature Variation Limits During Test Period Fuel type Non-condensing Condensing Gas ± 2 percent Greater of ± 3 percent and ± 5 °F. Light Oil ± 2 percent Heavy Oil Greater of ± 3 percent and ± 5 °F 3.3. Test Method. 3.3.1. General. (1) C4.1.1.1.2 (see section 3.3.1.2 of this appendix) (2) C4.1.1.2.3 (3) C4.1.2.1.5 (see section 3.3.2 of this appendix) (4) C4.1.2.2.2 (5) C4.1.2.2.3 (6) C4.2 (7) C4.2.1 (8) C4.2.2 3.3.1.1. The duration of the “Test Period” for combustion efficiency outlined in sections C4.1.1.2 of Appendix C of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.85) and C4.1.2.2 of Appendix C of ANSI/AHRI Standard 1500-2015 is 30 minutes. For condensing commercial packaged boilers, condensate must be collected for the 30 minute Test Period. 3.3.1.2. Adjust oil or non-atmospheric gas to produce the required firebox pressure and CO 2 2 3.3.2. Water Test Steady-State. 3.3.3. Procedure for the Measurement of Condensate for a Condensing Commercial Packaged Boiler. 3.4. Calculations. 3.4.1. General. 3.4.2. Rounding. [81 FR 89306, Dec. 9, 2016] Subpart F—Commercial Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps Source: 69 FR 61969, Oct. 21, 2004, unless otherwise noted. § 431.91 Purpose and scope. This subpart specifies test procedures and energy conservation standards for certain commercial air conditioners and heat pumps, pursuant to Part C of Title III of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 6311-6317. [69 FR 61969, Oct. 21, 2004, as amended at 70 FR 60415, Oct. 18, 2005] § 431.92 Definitions concerning commercial air conditioners and heat pumps. The following definitions apply for purposes of this subpart, and of subparts J through M of this part. Any words or terms not defined in this section or elsewhere in this part shall be defined as provided in 42 U.S.C. 6311. For definitions that reference the application for which the equipment is marketed, DOE will consider any publicly available document published by the manufacturer ( e.g., Applied Coefficient of performance, ACOP Basic model (1) For air-cooled, three-phase, small commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment with a cooling capacity of less than 65,000 Btu/h and air-cooled, three-phase, variable refrigerant flow multi-split air conditioners and heat pumps with a cooling capacity of less than 65,000 Btu/h. (i) For split systems manufactured by outdoor unit manufacturers (OUMs): all individual combinations having the same model of outdoor unit, which means comparably performing compressor(s) [a variation of no more than five percent in displacement rate (volume per time) as rated by the compressor manufacturer, and no more than five percent in capacity and power input for the same operating conditions as rated by the compressor manufacturer], outdoor coil(s) [no more than five percent variation in face area and total fin surface area; same fin material; same tube material], and outdoor fan(s) [no more than ten percent variation in airflow and no more than twenty percent variation in power input]; (ii) For split systems having indoor units manufactured by independent coil manufacturers (ICMs): all individual combinations having comparably performing indoor coil(s) [plus or minus one square foot face area, plus or minus one fin per inch fin density, and the same fin material, tube material, number of tube rows, tube pattern, and tube size]; and (iii) For single-package systems: all individual models having comparably performing compressor(s) [no more than five percent variation in displacement rate (volume per time) rated by the compressor manufacturer, and no more than five percent variations in capacity and power input rated by the compressor manufacturer corresponding to the same compressor rating conditions], outdoor coil(s) and indoor coil(s) [no more than five percent variation in face area and total fin surface area; same fin material; same tube material], outdoor fan(s) [no more than ten percent variation in outdoor airflow], and indoor blower(s) [no more than ten percent variation in indoor airflow, with no more than twenty percent variation in fan motor power input]; (iv) Except that: (A) For single-package systems and single-split systems, manufacturers may instead choose to make each individual model/combination its own basic model provided the testing and represented value requirements in 10 CFR 429.67 are met; and (B) For multi-split, multi-circuit, and multi-head mini-split combinations, a basic model may not include both individual small-duct, high velocity (SDHV) combinations and non-SDHV combinations even when they include the same model of outdoor unit. The manufacturer may choose to identify specific individual combinations as additional basic models. (2) For commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment (excluding air-cooled, three-phase, commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment with a cooling capacity of less than 65,000 Btu/h). (3) For computer room air conditioners. e.g., (4) For direct expansion-dedicated outdoor air system. e.g., (5) For packaged terminal air conditioner (PTAC) or packaged terminal heat pump (PTHP). e.g., (6) For single package vertical units. e.g., (7) For variable refrigerant flow systems (excluding air-cooled, three-phase, variable refrigerant flow air conditioners and heat pumps with a cooling capacity of less than 65,000 Btu/h). e.g., e.g., (8) For water-source heat pumps. e.g., Ceiling-mounted computer room air conditioner Ceiling-mounted ducted ceiling-mounted computer room air conditioner Ceiling-mounted non-ducted ceiling-mounted computer room air conditioner Coefficient of performance, COP, Coefficient of performance 2, COP2, e.g., 17 Commercial package air-conditioning and heating equipment Computer room air conditioner down-flow, horizontal-flow, up-flow ducted, up-flow non-ducted, ceiling-mounted ducted, ceiling mounted non-ducted, roof-mounted, wall-mounted. Direct expansion-dedicated outdoor air system, DX-DOAS, Double-duct air conditioner or heat pump (1) Is either a horizontal single package or split-system unit; or a vertical unit that consists of two components that may be shipped or installed either connected or split; or a vertical single package unit that is not intended for exterior mounting on, adjacent interior to, or through an outside wall; (2) Is intended for indoor installation with ducting of outdoor air from the building exterior to and from the unit ( e.g., (3) If it is a horizontal unit, the complete unit shall have a maximum height of 35 inches or the unit shall have components that do not exceed a maximum height of 35 inches. If it is a vertical unit, the complete (split, connected, or assembled) unit shall have components that do not exceed a maximum depth of 35 inches; and (4) Has a rated cooling capacity greater than or equal to 65,000 Btu/h and less than 300,000 Btu/h. Down-flow floor-mounted computer room air conditioner Ducted Condenser computer room air conditioner Energy efficiency ratio, EER, Energy efficiency ratio 2, EER2, Floor-mounted computer room air conditioner computer room air conditioners down-flow, horizontal-flow, up-flow. Fluid economizer computer room air conditioner Heat Recovery Heating seasonal performance factor, HSPF Horizontal-flow floor-mounted computer room air conditioner down-flow up-flow Integrated energy efficiency ratio, IEER, (1) Per appendix A to this subpart for commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment (excluding air-cooled equipment with a cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h); (2) Per appendix C1 to this subpart for water-source heat pumps; (3) Per appendix D1 to this subpart for variable refrigerant flow multi-split air conditioners and heat pumps (other than air-cooled with rated cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h); and (4) Per appendix G1 to this subpart for single package vertical air conditioners and single package vertical heat pumps. Integrated seasonal coefficient of performance 2 ISCOP2, Integrated seasonal moisture removal efficiency 2, ISMRE2, Integrated ventilation and heating efficiency, IVHE, C C Integrated ventilation, economizing, and cooling, IVEC, Large commercial package air-conditioning and heating equipment (1) At or above 135,000 Btu per hour; and (2) Below 240,000 Btu per hour (cooling capacity). Net sensible coefficient of performance, NSenCOP, computer room air conditioners, Non-standard size Packaged terminal air conditioner Packaged terminal heat pump Roof-mounted computer room air conditioner wall-mounted, Seasonal energy efficiency ratio SEER Sensible Coefficient of Performance, SCOP Single package unit Single package vertical air conditioner (1) Air-cooled commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment that— (i) Is factory-assembled as a single package that— (A) Has major components that are arranged vertically; (B) Is an encased combination of cooling and optional heating components; and (C) Is intended for exterior mounting on, adjacent interior to, or through an outside wall; (ii) Is powered by a single-or 3-phase current; (iii) May contain 1 or more separate indoor grilles, outdoor louvers, various ventilation options, indoor free air discharges, ductwork, well plenum, or sleeves; and (iv) Has heating components that may include electrical resistance, steam, hot water, or gas, but may not include reverse-cycle refrigeration as a heating means; and (2) Includes single-phase single package vertical air conditioner with cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h, as defined in this section. Single package vertical heat pump (1) A single package vertical air conditioner that— (i) Uses reverse-cycle refrigeration as its primary heat source; and (ii) May include secondary supplemental heating by means of electrical resistance, steam, hot water, or gas; and (2) Includes single-phase single package vertical heat pump with cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h, as defined in this section. Single-phase single package vertical air conditioner with cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h (1) Is weatherized, determined by a model being denoted for “Outdoor Use” or marked as “Suitable for Outdoor Use” on the equipment nameplate; or (2) Is non-weatherized and is a model that has optional ventilation air provisions available. When such ventilation air provisions are present on the unit, the unit must be capable of drawing in and conditioning outdoor air for delivery to the conditioned space at a rate of at least 400 cubic feet per minute, as determined in accordance with § 429.134(x)(3) of this chapter, while the equipment is operating with the same drive kit and motor settings used to determine the certified efficiency rating of the equipment (as required for submittal to DOE by § 429.43(b)(4)(xi) of this chapter). Single-phase single package vertical heat pump with cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h (1) Is weatherized, determined by a model being denoted for “Outdoor Use” or marked as “Suitable for Outdoor Use” on the equipment nameplate; or (2) Is non-weatherized and is a model that has optional ventilation air provisions available. When such ventilation air provisions are present on the unit, the unit must be capable of drawing in and conditioning outdoor air for delivery to the conditioned space at a rate of at least 400 cubic feet per minute, as determined in accordance with § 429.134(x)(3) of this chapter, while the equipment is operating with the same drive kit and motor settings used to determine the certified efficiency rating of the equipment (as required for submittal to DOE by § 429.43(b)(4)(xii) of this chapter). Small commercial package air-conditioning and heating equipment Small-duct, high-velocity commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment (1) Has a rated cooling capacity no greater than 65,000 Btu/h; (2) Is powered by three-phase current; (3) Is air-cooled; and (4) Is paired with an indoor unit that: (i) Includes an indoor blower housed with the coil; (ii) Is designed for, and produces, at least 1.2 inches of external static pressure when operated at the certified air volume rate of 220-350 CFM per rated ton cooling in the highest default cooling airflow-controls setting; and (iii) When applied in the field, uses high velocity room outlets generally greater than 1,000 fpm that have less than 6.0 square inches of free area. Space-constrained commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment (1) Is air-cooled; (2) Is powered by three-phase current; (3) Is not a single package vertical air conditioner or a single package vertical heat pump; (4) Has a rated cooling capacity no greater than 30,000 Btu/h; (5) Has an outdoor or indoor unit having at least two overall exterior dimensions or an overall displacement that: (i) Is substantially smaller than those of other units that are: (A) Currently usually installed in site-built single-family homes; and (B) Of a similar cooling, and, if a heat pump, heating capacity; and (ii) If increased, would certainly result in a considerable increase in the usual cost of installation or would certainly result in a significant loss in the utility of the product to the consumer; and (6) Of a product type that was available for purchase in the United States as of December 1, 2000. Split system Standard size Unitary dedicated outdoor air system, unitary DOAS, Up-flow floor-mounted computer room air conditioner Up-flow ducted up-flow computer room air conditioner Up-flow non-ducted up-flow computer room air conditioner Variable Refrigerant Flow Multi-Split Air Conditioner Variable Refrigerant Flow Multi-Split Heat Pump Ventilation energy recovery system, VERS, Very large commercial package air-conditioning and heating equipment (1) At or above 240,000 Btu per hour; and (2) Below 760,000 Btu per hour (cooling capacity). Wall-mounted computer room air conditioner Water-source heat pump [69 FR 61969, Oct. 21, 2004, as amended at 70 FR 60415, Oct. 18, 2005; 73 FR 58828, Oct. 7, 2008; 74 FR 12073, Mar. 23, 2009; 76 FR 12503, Mar. 7, 2011; 77 FR 28988, May 16, 2012; 78 FR 79598, Dec. 31, 2013; 80 FR 42664, July 17, 2015; 80 FR 79669, Dec. 23, 2015; 81 FR 2529, Jan. 15, 2016; 87 FR 45197, July 27, 2022; 87 FR 63896, Oct. 20, 2022; 87 FR 75167, Dec. 7, 2022; 87 FR 77325, Dec. 16, 2022; 88 FR 21838, Apr. 11, 2023; 88 FR 36386, 36424, June 2, 2023; 88 FR 84228, Dec. 4, 2023; 89 FR 44035, May 20, 2024] Test Procedures § 431.95 Materials incorporated by reference. (a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this subpart with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, DOE must publish a document in the Federal Register [email protected], https://www.energy.gov/eere/buildings/building-technologies-office. [email protected], www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html. (b) AHRI. www.ahrinet.org. (1) ANSI/AHRI Standard 210/240-2008 (AHRI 210/240-2008), 2008 Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning & Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment, (2) AHRI Standard 210/240-2023 (AHRI 210/240-2023), 2023 Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air-conditioning & Air-source Heat Pump Equipment, (3) AHRI Standard 310/380-2014 (“AHRI 310/380-2014”), “Standard for Packaged Terminal Air-Conditioners and Heat Pumps,” February 2014; IBR approved for § 431.96. (4) AHRI Standard 340/360-2022 (I-P) (“AHRI 340/360-2022”), 2022 Standard for Performance Rating of Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment, (5) AHRI Standard 390(I-P)-2021 (“AHRI 390-2021”), 2021 Standard for Performance Rating of Single Package Vertical Air-Conditioners and Heat Pumps, (6) AHRI Standard 600-2023 (I-P) (“AHRI 600-2023”), 2023 Standard for Performance Rating of Water/Brine to Air Heat Pump Equipment, (7) AHRI Standard 920 (I-P) with Addendum 1 (“AHRI 920-2020”), “2020 Standard for Performance Rating of Direct Expansion-Dedicated Outdoor Air System Units,” copyright 2021; IBR approved for § 431.92; appendix B to this subpart. (8) AHRI Standard 1060 (I-P) (“AHRI 1060-2018”), “2018 Standard for Performance Rating of Air-to-Air Exchangers for Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment,” copyright 2018; IBR approved for appendix B to this subpart. (9) ANSI/AHRI Standard 1230-2010 (AHRI 1230-2010), 2010 Standard for Performance Rating of Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) Multi-Split Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment, (10) AHRI Standard 1230 (I-P), (“AHRI 1230-2021'), “ 2021 Standard for Performance Rating of Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) Multi-Split Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment”, (11) AHRI Standard 1340-2023 (I-P) (“AHRI 1340-2023”), 2023 Standard for Performance Rating of Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment, (12) AHRI Standard 1360-2022 (I-P) (“AHRI 1360-2022”), 2022 Standard for Performance Rating of Computer and Data Processing Room Air Conditioners, (c) ASHRAE. www.ashrae.org. (1) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 16-1983 (RA 2014), (“ANSI/ASHRAE 16”), “Method of Testing for Rating Room Air Conditioners and Packaged Terminal Air Conditioners,” ASHRAE reaffirmed July 3, 2014, IBR approved for § 431.96. (2) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 37-2009 (“ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009”), Methods of Testing for Rating Electrically Driven Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment, (3) Errata Sheet for ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 37-2009, Methods of Testing for Rating Electrically Driven Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment, (4) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 41.1- 2013 (“ANSI/ASHRAE 41.1-2013”), “Standard Method for Temperature Measurement,” ANSI-approved January 30, 2013; IBR approved for appendix B to this subpart. (5) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 41.6- 2014 (“ANSI/ASHRAE 41.6-2014”), “Standard Method for Humidity Measurement,” ANSI-approved July 3, 2014; IBR approved for appendix B to this subpart. (6) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 58-1986 (RA 2014), (“ANSI/ASHRAE 58”), “Method of Testing for Rating Room Air-Conditioner and Packaged Terminal Air-Conditioner Heating Capacity,” ASHRAE reaffirmed July 3, 2014, IBR approved for § 431.96. (7) ASHRAE Standard 127-2007, “ Method of Testing for Rating Computer and Data Processing Room Unitary Air Conditioners, (8) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 127-2020 (“ANSI/ASHRAE 127-2020”), Method of Rating Air-Conditioning Units Serving Data Center (DC) and Other Information Technology Equipment (ITE) Spaces, (9) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 198- 2013 (“ANSI/ASHRAE 198-2013”), “Method of Test for Rating DX-Dedicated Outdoor Air Systems for Moisture Removal Capacity and Moisture Removal Efficiency,” ANSI-approved January 30, 2013; IBR approved for appendix B to this subpart. (d) IIR. www.iifiir.org. (1) Properties of Secondary Working Fluids for Indirect Systems, (2) [Reserved] (e) ISO. www.iso.org/store.html (1) ISO Standard 13256-1 (“ISO 13256-1:1998”), “ Water-source heat pumps—Testing and rating for performance—Part 1: Water-to-air and brine-to-air heat pumps, (2) [Reserved] [77 FR 28989, May 16, 2012, as amended at 80 FR 37148, June 30, 2015; 80 FR 79669, Dec. 23, 2015; 87 FR 45198, July 27, 2022; 87 FR 63896, Oct. 20, 2022; 87 FR 75168, Dec. 7, 2022; 87 FR 77325, Dec. 16, 2022; 88 FR 21839, Apr. 11, 2023; 88 FR 84228, Dec. 4, 2023; 89 FR 44037, May 20, 2024] § 431.96 Uniform test method for the measurement of energy efficiency of commercial air conditioners and heat pumps. (a) Scope. (b) Testing and calculations. (2) After June 24, 2016, any representations made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of packaged terminal air conditioners and heat pumps (PTACs and PTHPs) must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this section. Manufacturers conducting tests of PTACs and PTHPs after July 30, 2015 and prior to June 24, 2016, must conduct such test in accordance with either table 1 to this section or § 431.96 as it appeared at 10 CFR part 431, subpart F, in the 10 CFR parts 200 to 499 edition revised as of January 1, 2014. Any representations made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of such packaged terminal air conditioners and heat pumps must be in accordance with whichever version is selected. Table 1 to Paragraph ( b Equipment Category Cooling capacity or moisture removal capacity 1 Energy efficiency descriptor Use tests, conditions, and procedures in Additional test procedure provisions as indicated in the listed paragraphs of this section Commercial Package Air Conditioning and Heating Equipment Air-Cooled, 3-Phase, AC and HP <65,000 Btu/h SEER and HSPF Appendix F to this subpart 2 None. Commercial Package Air Conditioning and Heating Equipment Air-Cooled, 3-Phase, AC and HP <65,000 Btu/h SEER2 and HSPF2 Appendix F1 to this subpart 2 None. Commercial Package Air Conditioning and Heating Equipment Air-Cooled AC and HP (excluding double-duct AC and HP) ≥65,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h EER, IEER, and COP Appendix A to this subpart 2 None. Commercial Package Air Conditioning and Heating Equipment Air-Cooled AC and HP (excluding double-duct AC and HP) ≥65,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h EER2, COP2, IVEC, and IVHE Appendix A1 to this subpart 2 None. Commercial Package Air Conditioning and Heating Equipment Double-duct AC and HP ≥65,000 Btu/h and <300,000 Btu/h EER, IEER, and COP Appendix A to this subpart 2 None. Commercial Package Air Conditioning and Heating Equipment Double-duct AC and HP ≥65,000 Btu/h and <300,000 Btu/h EER2, COP2, IVEC, and IVHE Appendix A1 to this subpart 2 None. Commercial Package Air Conditioning and Heating Equipment Water-Cooled and Evaporatively-Cooled AC <760,000 Btu/h EER and IEER Appendix A to this subpart 2 None. Commercial Package Air Conditioning and Heating Equipment Water-Cooled and Evaporatively-Cooled AC <760,000 Btu/h EER2 and IVEC Appendix A1 to this subpart 2 None. Water-Source Heat Pumps HP <760,000 Btu/h EER and COP Appendix C to this subpart 2 None. Water-Source Heat Pumps HP <760,000 Btu/h IEER and ACOP Appendix C1 to this subpart 2 None. Packaged Terminal Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps AC and HP <760,000 Btu/h EER and COP Paragraph (g) of this section Paragraphs (c), (e), and (g). Computer Room Air Conditioners AC <760,000 Btu/h SCOP Appendix E to this subpart 2 None. Computer Room Air Conditioners AC <760,000 Btu/h or <930,000 Btu/h 3 NSenCOP Appendix E1 to this subpart 2 None. Variable Refrigerant Flow Multi-split Systems AC <65,000 Btu/h (3-phase) SEER Appendix F to this subpart 2 None. Variable Refrigerant Flow Multi-split Systems AC <65,000 Btu/h (3-phase) SEER2 Appendix F1 to this subpart 2 None. Variable Refrigerant Flow Multi-split Systems, Air-cooled HP <65,000 Btu/h (3-phase) SEER and HSPF Appendix F to this subpart 2 None. Variable Refrigerant Flow Multi-split Systems, Air-cooled HP <65,000 Btu/h (3-phase) SEER2 and HSPF2 Appendix F1 to this subpart 2 None. Variable Refrigerant Flow Multi-split Systems, Air-cooled AC and HP ≥65,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h EER and COP Appendix D to this subpart 2 None. Variable Refrigerant Flow Multi-split Systems, Air-cooled AC and HP ≥65,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h IEER and COP Appendix D1 to this subpart 2 None. Variable Refrigerant Flow Multi-split Systems, Water-source HP <760,000 Btu/h EER and COP Appendix D to this subpart 2 None. Variable Refrigerant Flow Multi-split Systems, Water-source HP <760,000 Btu/h IEER and COP Appendix D1 to this subpart 2 None. Single Package Vertical Air Conditioners and Single Package Vertical Heat Pumps AC and HP <760,000 Btu/h EER and COP Appendix G to this subpart 2 None. Single Package Vertical Air Conditioners and Single Package Vertical Heat Pumps AC and HP <760,000 Btu/h EER, IEER, and COP Appendix G1 to this subpart 2 None. Direct Expansion-Dedicated Outdoor Air Systems All <324 lbs. of moisture removal/hr ISMRE2 and ISCOP2 Appendix B to this subpart None. 1 2 3 (c) Optional break-in period for tests conducted using AHRI 210/240-2008, AHRI 1230-2010, and ASHRAE 127-2007. (d) Refrigerant line length corrections for tests conducted using AHRI 1230-2010. Table 2 to Paragraph ( d Piping length beyond minimum, X Piping length beyond minimum, Y Cooling capacity correction 0>X ≤20 0>Y ≤6.1 1 20>X ≤40 6.1>Y ≤12.2 2 40>X ≤60 12.2>Y ≤18.3 3 60>X ≤80 18.3>Y ≤24.4 4 80>X ≤100 24.4>Y ≤30.5 5 100 >X ≤120 30.5>Y ≤36.6 6 (e) Additional provisions for equipment set-up. (1) If a manufacturer specifies a range of superheat, sub-cooling, and/or refrigerant pressure in its installation and operation manual for a given basic model, any value(s) within that range may be used to determine refrigerant charge or mass of refrigerant, unless the manufacturer clearly specifies a rating value in its installation and operation manual, in which case the specified rating value shall be used. (2) The air flow rate used for testing must be that set forth in the installation and operation manuals being shipped to the commercial customer with the basic model and clearly identified as that used to generate the DOE performance ratings. If a rated air flow value for testing is not clearly identified, a value of 400 standard cubic feet per minute (scfm) per ton shall be used. (3) For VRF systems, the test set-up and the fixed compressor speeds ( i.e., (f) Manufacturer involvement in assessment or enforcement testing for variable refrigerant flow systems. (g) Test Procedures for Packaged Terminal Air Conditioners and Packaged Terminal Heat Pumps Cooling mode testing. (2) Heating mode testing. (3) Wall sleeves. (4) Optional pre-filling of the condensate drain pan. (5) Filter selection. [77 FR 28989, May 16, 2012; 80 FR 11857, Mar. 5, 2015, as amended at 80 FR 37148, June 30, 2015; 80 FR 79669, Dec. 23, 2015; 87 FR 45198, July 27, 2022; 87 FR 63897, Oct. 20, 2022; 87 FR 75168, Dec. 7, 2022; 87 FR 77325, Dec. 16, 2022; 88 FR 21839, Apr. 11, 2023; 88 FR 36424, June 2, 2023; 88 FR 84228, Dec. 4, 2023; 89 FR 44037, May 20, 2024; 90 FR 6794, Jan. 21, 2025] Energy Efficiency Standards § 431.97 Energy efficiency standards and their compliance dates. (a) All basic models of commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment must be tested for performance using the applicable DOE test procedure in § 431.96, be compliant with the applicable standards set forth in paragraphs (b) through (i) of this section, and be certified to the Department under 10 CFR part 429. (b) Each air-cooled commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment (excluding air-cooled equipment with cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h and double-duct air conditioners or heat pumps) manufactured on or after January 1, 2023, and before January 1, 2029, must meet the applicable minimum energy efficiency standard level(s) set forth in table 1 to this paragraph (b). Each air-cooled commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment (excluding air-cooled equipment with cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h and double-duct air conditioners or heat pumps) manufactured on or after January 1, 2029, must meet the applicable minimum energy efficiency standard level(s) set forth in table 2 to this paragraph (b). Each water-cooled commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment manufactured on or after the compliance date listed in table 3 to this paragraph (b) must meet the applicable minimum energy efficiency standard level(s) set forth in table 3. Each evaporatively-cooled commercial air conditioning and heating equipment manufactured on or after the compliance date listed in table 4 to this paragraph (b) must meet the applicable minimum energy efficiency standard level(s) set forth in table 4. Each double-duct air conditioner or heat pump manufactured on or after January 1, 2010, must meet the applicable minimum energy efficiency standard level(s) set forth in table 5 to this paragraph (b). Table 1 to Paragraph ( b h Cooling capacity Subcategory Supplementary heating type Minimum 1 Compliance date: equipment Air-Cooled Commercial Package Air Conditioning and Heating Equipment With a Cooling Capacity Greater Than or Equal to 65,000 Btu/h (Excluding Double-Duct Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps) ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h AC Electric Resistance Heating or No Heating IEER = 14.8 January 1, 2023. ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h AC All Other Types of Heating IEER = 14.6 January 1, 2023. ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h HP Electric Resistance Heating or No Heating IEER = 14.1 January 1, 2023. ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h HP All Other Types of Heating IEER = 13.9 January 1, 2023. ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h AC Electric Resistance Heating or No Heating IEER = 14.2 January 1, 2023. ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h AC All Other Types of Heating IEER = 14.0 January 1, 2023. ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h HP Electric Resistance Heating or No Heating IEER = 13.5 January 1, 2023. ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h HP All Other Types of Heating IEER = 13.3 January 1, 2023. ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h AC Electric Resistance Heating or No Heating IEER = 13.2 January 1, 2023. ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h AC All Other Types of Heating IEER = 13.0 January 1, 2023. ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h HP Electric Resistance Heating or No Heating IEER = 12.5 January 1, 2023. ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h HP All Other Types of Heating IEER = 12.3 January 1, 2023. 1 Table 2 to Paragraph ( b h Cooling capacity Subcategory Supplementary heating type Minimum efficiency Compliance date: equipment Air-Cooled Commercial Package Air Conditioning and Heating Equipment With a Cooling Capacity Greater Than or Equal to 65,000 Btu/h (Excluding Double-Duct Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps) ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h AC Electric Resistance Heating or No Heating IVEC = 14.3 January 1, 2029. ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h AC All Other Types of Heating IVEC = 13.8 January 1, 2029. ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h HP All Types of Heating IVEC = 13.4 January 1, 2029. ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h AC Electric Resistance Heating or No Heating IVEC = 13.8 January 1, 2029. ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h AC All Other Types of Heating IVEC = 13.3 January 1, 2029. ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h HP All Types of Heating IVEC = 13.1 January 1, 2029. ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h AC Electric Resistance Heating or No Heating IVEC = 12.9 January 1, 2029. ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h AC All Other Types of Heating IVEC = 12.2 January 1, 2029. ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h HP All Types of Heating IVEC = 12.1 January 1, 2029. Table 3 to Paragraph ( b Cooling capacity Supplementary heating type Minimum efficiency Compliance date: equipment Water-Cooled Commercial Package Air Conditioning Equipment <65,000 Btu/h All EER = 12.1 October 29, 2003. ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h No Heating or Electric Resistance Heating EER = 12.1 June 1, 2013. ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h All Other Types of Heating EER = 11.9 June 1, 2013. ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h No Heating or Electric Resistance Heating EER = 12.5 June 1, 2014. ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h All Other Types of Heating EER = 12.3 June 1, 2014. ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h No Heating or Electric Resistance Heating EER = 12.4 June 1, 2014. ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h All Other Types of Heating EER = 12.2 June 1, 2014. Table 4 to Paragraph ( b Cooling capacity Supplementary heating type Minimum efficiency Compliance date: equipment Evaporatively-Cooled Commercial Package Air Conditioning Equipment <65,000 Btu/h All EER = 12.1 October 29, 2003. ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h No Heating or Electric Resistance Heating EER = 12.1 June 1, 2013. ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h All Other Types of Heating EER = 11.9 June 1, 2013. ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h No Heating or Electric Resistance Heating EER = 12.0 June 1, 2014. ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h All Other Types of Heating EER = 11.8 June 1, 2014. ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h No Heating or Electric Resistance Heating EER = 11.9 June 1, 2014. ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h All Other Types of Heating EER = 11.7 June 1, 2014. Table 5 to Paragraph ( b Cooling capacity Subcategory Supplementary heating type Minimum 1 Compliance date: equipment Double-Duct Air Conditioners or Heat Pumps ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h AC Electric Resistance Heating or No Heating EER = 11.2 January 1, 2010. ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h AC All Other Types of Heating EER = 11.0 January 1, 2010. ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h HP Electric Resistance Heating or No Heating EER = 11.0 January 1, 2010. ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h HP All Other Types of Heating EER = 10.8 January 1, 2010. ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h AC Electric Resistance Heating or No Heating EER = 11.0 January 1, 2010. ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h AC All Other Types of Heating EER = 10.8 January 1, 2010. ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h HP Electric Resistance Heating or No Heating EER = 10.6 January 1, 2010. ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h HP All Other Types of Heating EER = 10.4 January 1, 2010. ≥240,000 Btu/h and <300,000 Btu/h AC Electric Resistance Heating or No Heating EER = 10.0 January 1, 2010. ≥240,000 Btu/h and <300,000 Btu/h AC All Other Types of Heating EER = 9.8 January 1, 2010. ≥240,000 Btu/h and <300,000 Btu/h HP Electric Resistance Heating or No Heating EER = 9.5 January 1, 2010. ≥240,000 Btu/h and <300,000 Btu/h HP All Other Types of Heating EER = 9.3 January 1, 2010. 1 (c) Each water-source heat pump manufactured starting on the compliance date listed in table 6 to this paragraph (c) must meet the applicable minimum energy efficiency standard level(s) set forth in this paragraph (c). Table 6 to Paragraph ( c Cooling capacity Minimum efficiency Compliance date: equipment Water-Source Heat Pumps (Water-to-Air, Water-Loop) <17,000 Btu/h EER = 12.2 October 9, 2015. ≥17,000 Btu/h and <65,000 Btu/h EER = 13.0 October 9, 2015. ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h EER = 13.0 October 9, 2015. (d) Each non-standard size packaged terminal air conditioner (PTAC) and packaged terminal heat pump (PTHP) manufactured on or after October 7, 2010, must meet the applicable minimum energy efficiency standard level(s) set forth in table 7 to this paragraph (d). Each standard size PTAC manufactured on or after October 8, 2012, and before January 1, 2017, must meet the applicable minimum energy efficiency standard level(s) set forth in table 7. Each standard size PTHP manufactured on or after October 8, 2012, must meet the applicable minimum energy efficiency standard level(s) set forth in table 7. Each standard size PTAC manufactured on or after January 1, 2017, must meet the applicable minimum energy efficiency standard level(s) set forth in table 8 to this paragraph (d). Table 7 to Paragraph ( d Equipment type Category Cooling capacity Minimum efficiency Compliance date: products PTAC Standard Size <7,000 Btu/h EER = 11.7 October 8, 2012. 2 ≥7,000 Btu/h and ≤15,000 Btu/h EER = 13.8−(0.3 × Cap 1 October 8, 2012. 2 >15,000 Btu/h EER = 9.3 October 8, 2012. 2 Non-Standard Size <7,000 Btu/h EER = 9.4 October 7, 2010. ≥7,000 Btu/h and ≤15,000 Btu/h EER = 10.9−(0.213 × Cap 1 October 7, 2010. >15,000 Btu/h EER = 7.7 October 7, 2010. PTHP Standard Size <7,000 Btu/h EER = 11.9 October 8, 2012. ≥7,000 Btu/h and ≤15,000 Btu/h EER = 14.0−(0.3 × Cap 1 1 October 8, 2012. >15,000 Btu/h EER = 9.5 October 8, 2012. Non-Standard Size <7,000 Btu/h EER = 9.3 October 7, 2010. ≥7,000 Btu/h and ≤15,000 Btu/h EER = 10.8−(0.213 × Cap 1 1 October 7, 2010. >15,000 Btu/h EER = 7.6 October 7, 2010. 1 2 Table 8 to Paragraph ( d Equipment type Category Cooling capacity Minimum efficiency Compliance date: products PTAC Standard Size <7,000 Btu/h EER = 11.9 January 1, 2017. ≥7,000 Btu/h and ≤15,000 Btu/h EER = 14.0−(0.3 × Cap 1 January 1, 2017. >15,000 Btu/h EER = 9.5 January 1, 2017. 1 (e)(1) Each single package vertical air conditioner and single package vertical heat pump manufactured on or after January 1, 2010, but before October 9, 2015 (for models ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h), or October 9, 2016 (for models ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h), must meet the applicable minimum energy conservation standard level(s) set forth in this paragraph (e)(1). Table 9 to Paragraph ( e Equipment type Cooling capacity Sub- Efficiency level Compliance date: products Single package vertical air conditioners and single package vertical heat pumps, single-phase and three-phase <65,000 Btu/h AC EER = 9.0 January 1, 2010. Single package vertical air conditioners and single package vertical heat pumps ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h AC EER = 8.9 January 1, 2010. Single package vertical air conditioners and single package vertical heat pumps ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h AC EER = 8.6 January 1, 2010. (2) Each single package vertical air conditioner and single package vertical heat pump manufactured on and after October 9, 2015 (for models ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h), or October 9, 2016 (for models ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h), but before September 23, 2019, must meet the applicable minimum energy conservation standard level(s) set forth in this paragraph (e)(2). Table 10 to Paragraph ( e Equipment type Cooling capacity Sub- Efficiency level Compliance date: products Single package vertical air conditioners and single package vertical heat pumps, single-phase and three-phase <65,000 Btu/h AC EER = 9.0 January 1, 2010. Single package vertical air conditioners and single package vertical heat pumps ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h AC EER = 10.0 October 9, 2015. Single package vertical air conditioners and single package vertical heat pumps ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h AC EER = 10.0 October 9, 2016. (3) Each single package vertical air conditioner and single package vertical heat pump manufactured on and after September 23, 2019, must meet the applicable minimum energy conservation standard level(s) set forth in this paragraph (e)(3). Table 11 to Paragraph ( e Equipment type Cooling capacity Sub- Efficiency level Compliance date: products Single package vertical air conditioners and single package vertical heat pumps, single-phase and three-phase <65,000 Btu/h AC EER = 11.0 September 23, 2019. Single package vertical air conditioners and single package vertical heat pumps ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h AC EER = 10.0 October 9, 2015. Single package vertical air conditioners and single package vertical heat pumps ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h AC EER = 10.0 October 9, 2016. (f)(1) Each computer room air conditioner with a net sensible cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h manufactured on or after October 29, 2012, and before May 28, 2024 and each computer room air conditioner with a net sensible cooling capacity greater than or equal to 65,000 Btu/h and less than 760,000 Btu/h manufactured on or after October 29, 2013, and before May 28, 2024 must meet the applicable minimum energy efficiency standard level(s) set forth in this paragraph (f)(1). Table 12 to Paragraph (f)(1) Equipment type Net sensible cooling capacity Minimum SCOP efficiency Downflow Upflow Air-Cooled <65,000 Btu/h 2.20 2.09 ≥65,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h 2.10 1.99 ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h 1.90 1.79 Water-Cooled <65,000 Btu/h 2.60 2.49 ≥65,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h 2.50 2.39 ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h 2.40 2.29 Water-Cooled with Fluid Economizer <65,000 Btu/h 2.55 2.44 ≥65,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h 2.45 2.34 ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h 2.35 2.24 Glycol-Cooled <65,000 Btu/h 2.50 2.39 ≥65,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h 2.15 2.04 ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h 2.10 1.99 Glycol-Cooled with Fluid Economizer <65,000 Btu/h 2.45 2.34 ≥65,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h 2.10 1.99 ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h 2.05 1.94 (2) Each computer room air conditioner manufactured on or after May 28, 2024, must meet the applicable minimum energy efficiency standard level(s) set forth in this paragraph (f)(2). Table 13 to Paragraph (f)(2) Equipment type Downflow and upflow ducted Upflow non-ducted and horizontal flow Net sensible cooling capacity Minimum NSenCOP Net sensible cooling capacity Minimum NSenCOP Downflow Upflow ducted Upflow Horizontal flow Air-Cooled <80,000 Btu/h 2.70 2.67 <65,000 Btu/h 2.16 2.65 ≥80,000 Btu/h and <295,000 Btu/h 2.58 2.55 ≥65,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h 2.04 2.55 ≥295,000 Btu/h and <930,000 Btu/h 2.36 2.33 ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h 1.89 2.47 Air-Cooled with Fluid Economizer <80,000 Btu/h 2.70 2.67 <65,000 Btu/h 2.09 2.65 ≥295,000 Btu/h and <930,000 Btu/h 2.36 2.33 ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h 1.81 2.47 Water-Cooled <80,000 Btu/h 2.82 2.79 <65,000 Btu/h 2.43 2.79 ≥80,000 Btu/h and <295,000 Btu/h 2.73 2.70 ≥65,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h 2.32 2.68 ≥295,000 Btu/h and <930,000 Btu/h 2.67 2.64 ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h 2.20 2.60 Water-Cooled with Fluid Economizer <80,000 Btu/h 2.77 2.74 <65,000 Btu/h 2.35 2.71 ≥295,000 Btu/h and <930,000 Btu/h 2.61 2.58 ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h 2.12 2.54 Glycol-Cooled <80,000 Btu/h 2.56 2.53 <65,000 Btu/h 2.08 2.48 ≥80,000 Btu/h and <295,000 Btu/h 2.24 2.21 ≥65,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h 1.90 2.18 ≥295,000 Btu/h and <930,000 Btu/h 2.21 2.18 ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h 1.81 2.18 Glycol-Cooled with Fluid Economizer <80,000 Btu/h 2.51 2.48 <65,000 Btu/h 2.00 2.44 ≥295,000 Btu/h and <930,000 Btu/h 2.15 2.12 ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h 1.73 2.10 Table 14 to Paragraph (f)(2) Equipment type Net sensible cooling capacity Minimum NSenCOP Ducted Non-ducted Air-Cooled with Free Air Discharge Condenser <29,000 Btu/h 2.05 2.08 ≥29,000 Btu/h and <65,000 Btu/h 2.02 2.05 ≥65,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h 1.92 1.94 Air-Cooled with Free Air Discharge Condenser and Fluid Economizer <29,000 Btu/h 2.01 2.04 ≥29,000 Btu/h and <65,000 Btu/h 1.97 2 ≥65,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h 1.87 1.89 Air-Cooled with Ducted Condenser <29,000 Btu/h 1.86 1.89 ≥29,000 Btu/h and <65,000 Btu/h 1.83 1.86 ≥65,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h 1.73 1.75 Air-Cooled with Fluid Economizer and Ducted Condenser <29,000 Btu/h 1.82 1.85 ≥29,000 Btu/h and <65,000 Btu/h 1.78 1.81 ≥65,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h 1.68 1.7 Water-Cooled <29,000 Btu/h 2.38 2.41 ≥29,000 Btu/h and <65,000 Btu/h 2.28 2.31 ≥65,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h 2.18 2.2 Water-Cooled with Fluid Economizer <29,000 Btu/h 2.33 2.36 ≥29,000 Btu/h and <65,000 Btu/h 2.23 2.26 ≥65,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h 2.13 2.16 Glycol-Cooled <29,000 Btu/h 1.97 2 ≥29,000 Btu/h and <65,000 Btu/h 1.93 1.98 ≥65,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h 1.78 1.81 Glycol-Cooled with Fluid Economizer <29,000 Btu/h 1.92 1.95 ≥29,000 Btu/h and <65,000 Btu/h 1.88 1.93 ≥65,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h 1.73 1.76 (g)(1) Each variable refrigerant flow air conditioner or heat pump manufactured on or after the compliance date listed in table 15 to this paragraph (g)(1) and prior to January 1, 2024, must meet the applicable minimum energy efficiency standard level(s) set forth in this paragraph (g)(1). Table 15 to Paragraph ( g Equipment type Cooling Heating type 1 Efficiency level Compliance date: equipment VRF Multi-Split Air Conditioners (Air-Cooled) ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h No Heating or Electric Resistance Heating 11.2 EER January 1, 2010. All Other Types of Heating 11.0 EER January 1, 2010. ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h No Heating or Electric Resistance Heating 11.0 EER January 1, 2010. All Other Types of Heating 10.8 EER January 1, 2010. ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h No Heating or Electric Resistance Heating 10.0 EER January 1, 2010. All Other Types of Heating 9.8 EER January 1, 2010. VRF Multi-Split Heat Pumps (Air-Cooled) ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h No Heating or Electric Resistance Heating 11.0 EER, 3.3 COP January 1, 2010. All Other Types of Heating 10.8 EER, 3.3 COP January 1, 2010. ≥135,000 Btu/h and <240,000 Btu/h No Heating or Electric Resistance Heating 10.6 EER, 3.2 COP January 1, 2010. All Other Types of Heating 10.4 EER, 3.2 COP January 1, 2010. ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h No Heating or Electric Resistance Heating 9.5 EER, 3.2 COP January 1, 2010. All Other Types of Heating 9.3 EER, 3.2 COP January 1, 2010. VRF Multi-Split Heat Pumps (Water-Source) <17,000 Btu/h Without Heat Recovery 12.0 EER, October 29, 2012. With Heat Recovery 11.8 EER October 29, 2012. ≥17,000 Btu/h and <65,000 Btu/h All 12.0 EER, 4.2 COP October 29, 2003. ≥65,000 Btu/h and <135,000 Btu/h All 12.0 EER, 4.2 COP October 29, 2003. ≥135,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h Without Heat Recovery 10.0 EER, 3.9 COP October 29, 2013. With Heat Recovery 9.8 EER, 3.9 COP October 29, 2013. 1 (2) Each variable refrigerant flow air conditioner or heat pump (except air-cooled systems with cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h) manufactured on or after January 1, 2024, must meet the applicable minimum energy efficiency standard level(s) set forth in this paragraph (g)(2). Table 16 to Paragraph ( g Equipment type Size category Heating type Minimum efficiency VRF Multi-Split Air Conditioners (Air-Cooled) ≥65,000 and <135,000 Btu/h All 15.5 IEER. ≥135,000 and <240,000 Btu/h All 14.9 IEER. ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h All 13.9 IEER. VRF Multi-Split Heat Pumps (Air-Cooled) ≥65,000 and <135,000 Btu/h Heat Pump without Heat Recovery 14.6 IEER, 3.3 COP. Heat Pump with Heat Recovery 14.4 IEER, 3.3 COP. ≥135,000 and <240,000 Btu/h Heat Pump without Heat Recovery 13.9 IEER, 3.2 COP. ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h Heat Pump without Heat Recovery 12.7 IEER, 3.2 COP. VRF Multi-Split Heat Pumps (Water-Source) <65,000 Btu/h Heat Pump without Heat Recovery 16.0 IEER, 4.3 COP. ≥65,000 and <135,000 Btu/h Heat Pump without Heat Recovery 16.0 IEER, 4.3 COP. ≥135,000 and <240,000 Btu/h Heat Pump without Heat Recovery 14.0 IEER, 4.0 COP. ≥240,000 Btu/h and <760,000 Btu/h Heat Pump without Heat Recovery 12.0 IEER, 3.9 COP. (h) Each direct expansion-dedicated outdoor air system manufactured on or after the compliance date listed in table 17 to this paragraph (h) must meet the applicable minimum energy efficiency standard level(s) set forth in this paragraph (h). Table 17 to Paragraph ( h Equipment Subcategory Efficiency level Compliance date: equipment manufactured starting on . . . Direct expansion-dedicated outdoor air systems (AC)—Air-cooled without ventilation energy recovery systems ISMRE2 = 3.8 May 1, 2024. (AC w/VERS)—Air-cooled with ventilation energy recovery systems ISMRE2 = 5.0 May 1, 2024. (ASHP)—Air-source heat pumps without ventilation energy recovery systems ISMRE2 = 3.8 May 1, 2024. (ASHP w/VERS)—Air-source heat pumps with ventilation energy recovery systems ISMRE2 = 5.0 May 1, 2024. (WC)—Water-cooled without ventilation energy recovery systems ISMRE2 = 4.7 May 1, 2024. (WC w/VERS)—Water-cooled with ventilation energy recovery systems ISMRE2 = 5.1 May 1, 2024. (WSHP)—Water-source heat pumps without ventilation energy recovery systems ISMRE2 = 3.8 May 1, 2024. (WSHP w/VERS)—Water-source heat pumps with ventilation energy recovery systems ISMRE2 = 4.6 May 1, 2024. (i) Air-cooled, three-phase, commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment with a cooling capacity of less than 65,000 Btu/h and air-cooled, three-phase variable refrigerant flow multi-split air conditioning and heating equipment with a cooling capacity of less than 65,000 Btu/h manufactured on or after the compliance date listed in tables 18 and 19 to this paragraph (i) must meet the applicable minimum energy efficiency standard level(s) set forth in this paragraph (i). Table 18 to Paragraph ( i h h Equipment type Cooling Subcategory Minimum efficiency Compliance date: equipment Commercial Package Air Conditioning Equipment <65,000 Btu/h Split-System 13.0 SEER June 16, 2008. 1 Commercial Package Air Conditioning Equipment <65,000 Btu/h Single-Package 14.0 SEER January 1, 2017. 1 Commercial Package Air Conditioning and Heating Equipment <65,000 Btu/h Split-System 14.0 SEER January 1, 2017. 1 Commercial Package Air Conditioning and Heating Equipment <65,000 Btu/h Single-Package 14.0 SEER January 1, 2017. 1 VRF Air Conditioners <65,000 Btu/h 13.0 SEER June 16, 2008. 1 VRF Heat Pumps <65,000 Btu/h 13.0 SEER June 16, 2008. 1 1 Table 19 to Paragraph ( i h h Equipment type Cooling Subcategory Minimum efficiency Compliance date: equipment Commercial Package Air Conditioning Equipment <65,000 Btu/h Split-System 13.4 SEER2 January 1, 2025. Commercial Package Air Conditioning Equipment <65,000 Btu/h Single-Package 13.4 SEER2 January 1, 2025. Commercial Package Air Conditioning and Heating Equipment <65,000 Btu/h Split-System 14.3 SEER2 January 1, 2025. Commercial Package Air Conditioning and Heating Equipment <65,000 Btu/h Single-Package 13.4 SEER2 January 1, 2025. Space-Constrained Commercial Package Air Conditioning Equipment ≤30,000 Btu/h Split-System 12.7 SEER2 January 1, 2025. Space-Constrained Commercial Package Air Conditioning Equipment ≤30,000 Btu/h Single-Package 13.9 SEER2 January 1, 2025. Space-Constrained Commercial Package Air Conditioning and Heating Equipment ≤30,000 Btu/h Split-System 13.9 SEER2 January 1, 2025. Space-Constrained Commercial Package Air Conditioning and Heating Equipment ≤30,000 Btu/h Single-Package 13.9 SEER2 January 1, 2025. Small-Duct, High-Velocity Commercial Package Air Conditioning <65,000 Btu/h Split-System 13.0 SEER2 January 1, 2025. Small-Duct, High-Velocity Commercial Package Air Conditioning and Heating Equipment <65,000 Btu/h Split-System 14.0 SEER2 January 1, 2025. VRF Air Conditioners <65,000 Btu/h 13.4 SEER2 January 1, 2025. VRF Heat Pumps <65,000 Btu/h 13.4 SEER2 January 1, 2025. [89 FR 44134, May 20, 2024] Appendix A to Subpart F of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Energy Consumption of Commercial Package Air Conditioning and Heating Equipment (Excluding Air-Cooled Equipment With a Cooling Capacity Less Than 65,000 Btu/h) Note: Prior to May 15, 2025, representations with respect to the energy use or efficiency of commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment (excluding air-cooled equipment with a cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h), including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with: (a) The applicable provisions (appendix A to subpart F of part 431 for air-cooled equipment, and table 1 to § 431.96 for water-cooled and evaporatively-cooled equipment) as they appeared in subpart F of 10 CFR part 431, revised as of January 1, 2024; or (b) This appendix. Beginning May 15, 2025, and prior to the compliance date of amended standards for commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment (excluding air-cooled equipment with a cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h) based on integrated ventilation, economizing, and cooling (IVEC) and integrated ventilation and heating efficiency (IVHE) (see § 431.97), representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment (excluding air-cooled equipment with a cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h), including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with this appendix. Beginning on the compliance date of amended standards for commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment (excluding equipment with a cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h) based on IVEC and IVHE (see § 431.97), representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment (excluding air-cooled equipment with a cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h), including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with appendix A1 to this subpart. Manufacturers may also certify compliance with any amended energy conservation standards for commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment (excluding air-cooled equipment with a cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h) based on IVEC or IVHE prior to the applicable compliance date for those standards (see § 431.97), and those compliance certifications must be based on testing in accordance with appendix A1 to this subpart. 1. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.95, the entire standard for AHRI 340/360-2022 and ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009. However, certain enumerated provisions of AHRI 340/360-2022 and ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009, as set forth in this section 1 are inapplicable. To the extent there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of a referenced industry standard and the CFR, the CFR provisions control. 1.1. AHRI 340/360-2022: (a) Section 1 Purpose is inapplicable, (b) Section 2 Scope is inapplicable, (c) The following subsections of Section 3 Definitions are inapplicable: 3.2 (Basic Model), 3.4 (Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-conditioning Equipment), 3.5 (Commercial and Industrial Unitary Heat Pump), 3.7 (Double-duct System), 3.8 (Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER)), 3.12 (Heating Coefficient of Performance (COP H (d) Section 7 Minimum Data Requirements for Published Ratings is inapplicable, (e) Section 8 Operating Requirements is inapplicable, (f) Section 9 Marking and Nameplate Data is inapplicable, (g) Section 10 Conformance Conditions is inapplicable, (h) Appendix B References—Informative is inapplicable, (i) Appendix D Unit Configuration for Standard Efficiency Determination—Normative is inapplicable, (j) Appendix F International Rating Conditions—Normative is inapplicable, (k) Appendix G Examples of IEER Calculations—Informative is inapplicable, (l) Appendix H Example of Determination of Fan and Motor Efficiency for Non-standard Integrated Indoor Fan and Motors—Informative is inapplicable, and (m) Appendix I Double-duct System Efficiency Metrics with Non-Zero Outdoor Air External Static Pressure (ESP)—Normative is inapplicable. 1.2. ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009: (a) Section 1 Purpose is inapplicable (b) Section 2 Scope is inapplicable, and (c) Section 4 Classifications is inapplicable. 2. General Determine the applicable energy efficiency metrics (IEER, EER, and COP) in accordance with this appendix and the applicable sections of AHRI 340/360-2022 and ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009. Section 3 of this appendix provides additional instructions for testing. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of this appendix takes highest precedence, followed by AHRI 340/360-2022, followed by ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009. Any subsequent amendment to a referenced document by the standard-setting organization will not affect the test procedure in this appendix, unless and until the test procedure is amended by DOE. 3. Test Conditions The following conditions specified in Table 6 of AHRI 340/360-2022 apply when testing to certify to the energy conservation standards in § 431.97. For cooling mode tests for equipment subject to standards in terms of EER, test using the “Standard Rating Conditions Cooling”. For cooling mode tests for equipment subject to standards in terms of IEER, test using the “Standard Rating Conditions Cooling” and the “Standard Rating Part-Load Conditions (IEER)”. For heat pump heating mode tests for equipment subject to standards in terms of COP, test using the “Standard Rating Conditions (High Temperature Steady State Heating)”. For equipment subject to standards in terms of EER, representations of IEER made using the “Standard Rating Part-Load Conditions (IEER)” in Table 6 of AHRI 340/360-2022 are optional. For equipment subject to standards in terms of IEER, representations of EER made using the “Standard Rating Conditions Cooling” in Table 6 of AHRI 340/360-2022 are optional. Representations of COP made using the “Standard Rating Conditions (Low Temperature Steady State Heating)” in Table 6 of AHRI 340/360-2022 are optional and are not to be used as the basis for determining compliance with energy efficiency standards in terms of COP. [89 FR 44046, May 20, 2024] Appendix A1 to Subpart F of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Energy Consumption of Commercial Package Air Conditioning and Heating Equipment (Excluding Air-Cooled Equipment With a Cooling Capacity Less Than 65,000 Btu/h) Note: Prior to May 15, 2025, representations with respect to the energy use or efficiency of commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment (excluding air-cooled equipment with a cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h), including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with: (a) The applicable provisions (appendix A to subpart F of part 431 for air-cooled equipment, and table 1 to § 431.96 for water-cooled and evaporatively-cooled equipment) as it appeared in subpart F of 10 CFR part 431, revised as of January 1, 2024; or (b) Appendix A to this subpart. Beginning May 15, 2025, and prior to the compliance date of amended standards for commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment (excluding air-cooled equipment with a cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h) based on integrated ventilation, economizing, and cooling (IVEC) and integrated ventilation and heating efficiency (IVHE) (see § 431.97), representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment (excluding air-cooled equipment with a cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h), including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with appendix A to this subpart. Beginning on the compliance date of amended standards for commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment (excluding air-cooled equipment with a cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h) based on IVEC and IVHE (see § 431.97), representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment (excluding air-cooled equipment with a cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h), including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with this appendix. Manufacturers may also certify compliance with any amended energy conservation standards for commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment (excluding air-cooled equipment with a cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h) based on IVEC or IVHE prior to the applicable compliance date for those standards (see § 431.97), and those compliance certifications must be based on testing in accordance with this appendix. 1. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.95, the entire standard for AHRI 1340-2023 and ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009. However, certain enumerated provisions of AHRI 1340-2023 and ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009, as listed in this section 1 are inapplicable. To the extent there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of a referenced industry standard and the CFR, the CFR provisions control. 1.1. AHRI 1340-2023: (a) Section 1 Purpose is inapplicable, (b) Section 2 Scope is inapplicable, (c) The following subsections of section 3 Definitions are inapplicable: 3.2.2 (Barometric Relief Damper), 3.2.3 (Basic Model), 3.2.5 (Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-conditioner and Heat Pump Equipment), 3.2.5.1 (Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning System), 3.2.5.2 (Commercial and Industrial Unitary Heat Pump System), 3.2.7 (Double-duct System), 3.2.9 (Desiccant Dehumidification Component), 3.2.10 (Drain Pan Heater), 3.2.11.1 (Air Economizer), 3.2.12 (Energy Efficiency Ratio 2), 3.2.13 (Evaporative Cooling), 3.2.13.1 (Direct Evaporative Cooling System), 3.2.13.2 (Indirect Evaporative Cooling System), 3.2.14 (Fresh Air Damper), 3.2.15 (Fire, Smoke, or Isolation Damper), 3.2.17 (Hail Guard), 3.2.19 (Heating Coefficient of Performance 2 (COP2 H (d) Subsection 5.2 (Optional System Features) of section 5 Test Requirements is inapplicable, (e) The following subsections of section 6 Rating Requirements are inapplicable: 6.4 (Rating Values), 6.5 (Uncertainty), and 6.6 (Verification Testing), (f) Section 7 Minimum Data Requirements for Published Ratings is inapplicable, (g) Section 8 Operating Requirements is inapplicable, (h) Section 9 Marking and Nameplate Data is inapplicable, (i) Section 10 Conformance Conditions is inapplicable, (j) Appendix B References—Informative is inapplicable, (k) Sections D.1 (Purpose) and D.2 (Configuration Requirements) of Appendix D Unit Configuration for Standard Efficiency Determination—Normative are inapplicable, (l) Appendix F International Rating Conditions—Normative is inapplicable, (m) Appendix G Example of Determination of Fan and Motor Efficiency for Non-standard Integrated Indoor Fan and Motors—Informative is inapplicable, and (n) Appendix H Determination of Low-temperature Cut-in and Cut-out Temperatures—Normative is inapplicable. 1.2. ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009: (a) Section 1 Purpose is inapplicable (b) Section 2 Scope is inapplicable, and (c) Section 4 Classifications is inapplicable. 2. General For air conditioners and heat pumps, determine IVEC and IVHE (as applicable) in accordance with this appendix and the applicable sections of AHRI 1340-2023 and ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009. Representations of energy efficiency ratio 2 (EER2) and IVHE C Sections 3 and 4 of this appendix provide additional instructions for testing. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of this appendix takes highest precedence, followed by AHRI 1340-2023, followed by ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009. Any subsequent amendment to a referenced document by the standard-setting organization will not affect the test procedure in this appendix, unless and until the test procedure is amended by DOE. 3. Test Conditions The following conditions specified in AHRI 1340-2023 apply when testing to certify to the energy conservation standards in § 431.97. For cooling mode, use the rating conditions in Table 7 of AHRI 1340-2023. For heat pump heating mode tests, use the rating conditions in Table 23 of AHRI 1340-2023 and the IVHE building load profile in Table 22 of AHRI 1340-2023. Representations of EER2 made using the “Cooling Bin A” conditions in Table 7 of AHRI 1340-2023 are optional. Representations of IVHE C C 47 17 5 4. Tower Fan and Pump Power Rate (TFPPR) Where equations 8, 10, 11, and 13 to AHRI 1340-2023 call for using the cooling tower fan and condenser water pump power rate (TFPPR) for the cooling bin specified in Table 7 to AHRI 1340-2023, instead use the TFPPR value for the cooling bin specified in table 1 to this appendix. Where equation 22 to AHRI 1340-2023 calls for using a value of 0.0094 W/(Btu/h) for TFPPR, instead use a value of 0.0102 W/(Btu/h). Table 1—Tower Fan and Pump Power Rate [TFPPR] Cooling bin Cooling Bin A Cooling Bin B Cooling Bin C Cooling Bin D Tower Fan and Pump Power Rate (TFPPR), W/(Btu/h) 0.0102 0.0099 0.0121 0.0430 5. Additional Heating Operating Level Provisions 5.1. Boost2 Heating Operating Level Definition In place of the boost2 heating operating level definition in section 3.2.31.2 of AHRI 1340-2023, use the following definition: An operating level allowed by the controls at 5.0 °F outdoor dry-bulb temperature with a capacity at 5.0 °F outdoor dry-bulb temperature that is less than or equal to the maximum capacity allowed by the controls at 5.0 °F outdoor dry-bulb temperature and greater than the capacity of: (a) The boost heating operating level at 5.0 °F outdoor dry-bulb temperature, if there is an operating level that meets the definition for boost heating operating level specified in section 3.2.31.1 of AHRI 1340-2023; or (b) The high heating operating level at 5.0 °F outdoor dry-bulb temperature, if there is not an operating level that meets the definition for boost heating operating level specified in section 3.2.31.1 of AHRI 1340-2023. 5.2. Requirements for H5B2 Test in Table 23 to AHRI 1340-2023 In place of the third to last paragraph of section 6.3.6 of AHRI 1340-2023, use the following provisions. Run the H5B2 test in Table 23 of AHRI 1340-2023 only if there is an operating level allowed by the controls at 5.0 °F that meets the definition of the boost2 heating operating level specified in section 5.1 of this appendix, and the H5B2 test is being used to determine the capacity at 5.0 °F outdoor dry-bulb temperature and/or COP2 5 If the unit has a boost heating operating level, run the H5B2 test in Table 23 of AHRI 1340-2023 with an operating level allowed by the controls at 5.0 °F outdoor dry-bulb temperature that has a capacity at 5.0 °F outdoor dry-bulb temperature that is greater than the capacity of the boost heating operating level at 5.0 °F outdoor dry-bulb temperature and less than or equal to the maximum capacity allowed by the controls at 5.0 °F outdoor dry-bulb temperature. If the unit does not have a boost heating operating level, run the H5B2 test in Table 23 of AHRI 1340-2023 with an operating level allowed by the controls at 5.0 °F outdoor dry-bulb temperature that has a capacity at 5.0 °F outdoor dry-bulb temperature that is greater than the capacity of the high heating operating level at 5.0 °F outdoor dry-bulb temperature and less than or equal to the maximum capacity allowed by the controls at 5.0 °F outdoor dry-bulb temperature. Use the indoor airflow that is used by the controls at 5.0 °F outdoor dry-bulb temperature when operating at the chosen operating level. The H5B2 test shall not be used in the calculation of IVHE or IVHE C 5.3. Operating Level Requirements for COP2 Any references to COP2 H To determine COP2 47 To determine COP2 17 To determine COP2 5 6. Set-Up and Test Provisions for Specific Components When testing equipment that includes any of the features listed in table 2 to this appendix, test in accordance with the set-up and test provisions specified in table 2. Table 2—Test Provisions for Specific Components Component Description Test provisions Air Economizers An automatic system that enables a cooling system to supply outdoor air to reduce or eliminate the need for mechanical cooling during mild or cold weather For any air economizer that is factory-installed, place the economizer in the 100% return position and close and seal the outside air dampers for testing. For any modular air economizer shipped with the unit but not factory-installed, do not install the economizer for testing. Barometric Relief Dampers An assembly with dampers and means to automatically set the damper position in a closed position and one or more open positions to allow venting directly to the outside a portion of the building air that is returning to the unit, rather than allowing it to recirculate to the indoor coil and back to the building For any barometric relief dampers that are factory-installed, close and seal the dampers for testing. For any modular barometric relief dampers shipped with the unit but not factory-installed, do not install the dampers for testing. Desiccant Dehumidification Components An assembly that reduces the moisture content of the supply air through moisture transfer with solid or liquid desiccants Disable desiccant dehumidification components for testing. Drain Pan Heaters A heater that heats the drain pan to make certain that water shed from the outdoor coil during a defrost does not freeze Disconnect drain pan heaters for testing. Evaporative Pre-cooling of Air-cooled Condenser Intake Air Water is evaporated into the air entering the air-cooled condenser to lower the dry-bulb temperature and thereby increase efficiency of the refrigeration cycle Disconnect the unit from a water supply for testing i.e., Fire/Smoke/Isolation Dampers A damper assembly including means to open and close the damper mounted at the supply or return duct opening of the equipment For any fire/smoke/isolation dampers that are factory-installed, set the dampers in the fully open position for testing. For any modular fire/smoke/isolation dampers shipped with the unit but not factory-installed, do not install the dampers for testing. Fresh Air Dampers An assembly with dampers and means to set the damper position in a closed and one open position to allow air to be drawn into the equipment when the indoor fan is operating For any fresh air dampers that are factory-installed, close and seal the dampers for testing. For any modular fresh air dampers shipped with the unit but not factory-installed, do not install the dampers for testing. Hail Guards A grille or similar structure mounted to the outside of the unit covering the outdoor coil to protect the coil from hail, flying debris and damage from large objects Remove hail guards for testing. High-Effectiveness Indoor Air Filtration Indoor air filters with greater air filtration effectiveness than the filters used for testing Test with the standard filter. Power Correction Capacitors A capacitor that increases the power factor measured at the line connection to the equipment Remove power correction capacitors for testing. Process Heat recovery/Reclaim Coils/Thermal Storage A heat exchanger located inside the unit that conditions the equipment's supply air using energy transferred from an external source using a vapor, gas, or liquid Disconnect the heat exchanger from its heat source for testing. Refrigerant Reheat Coils A heat exchanger located downstream of the indoor coil that heats the supply air during cooling operation using high pressure refrigerant in order to increase the ratio of moisture removal to cooling capacity provided by the equipment De-activate refrigerant reheat coils for testing so as to provide the minimum (none if possible) reheat achievable by the system controls. Steam/Hydronic Heat Coils Coils used to provide supplemental heating Test with steam/hydronic heat coils in place but providing no heat. UV Lights A lighting fixture and lamp mounted so that it shines light on the indoor coil, that emits ultraviolet light to inhibit growth of organisms on the indoor coil surfaces, the condensate drip pan, and/other locations within the equipment Turn off UV lights for testing. Ventilation Energy Recovery System (VERS) An assembly that preconditions outdoor air entering the equipment through direct or indirect thermal and/or moisture exchange with the exhaust air, which is defined as the building air being exhausted to the outside from the equipment For any VERS that is factory-installed, place the VERS in the 100% return position and close and seal the outside air dampers and exhaust air dampers for testing, and do not energize any VERS subcomponents ( e.g., [89 FR 44047, May 20, 2024] Appendix B to Subpart F of Part 431—Uniform Test Method For Measuring the Energy Consumption of Direct Expansion-Dedicated Outdoor Air Systems Note: Beginning July 24, 2023, representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of direct expansion-dedicated outdoor air systems must be based on testing conducted in accordance with this appendix. Manufacturers may elect to use this appendix early. 1. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.95, the entire standard for AHRI 920-2020, AHRI 1060-2018; ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009, ANSI/ASHRAE 41.1-2013, ANSI/ASHRAE 41.6-2014, and ANSI/ASHRAE 198-2013. However, only enumerated provisions of AHRI 920-2020, ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009, ANSI/ASHRAE 41.6-2014, and ANSI/ASHRAE 198-2013, as listed in this section 1 are required. To the extent there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of a referenced industry standard and the CFR, the CFR provisions control. 1.1. AHRI 920-2020 (a) Section 3—Definitions, as specified in section 2.2.1(a) of this appendix; (b) Section 5—Test Requirements, as specified in section 2.2.1(b) of this appendix; (c) Section 6—Rating Requirements, as specified in section 2.2.1(c) of this appendix, omitting section 6.1.2 (but retaining sections 6.1.2.1-6.1.2.8) and 6.6.1; (d) Section 11—Symbols and Subscripts, as specified in section 2.2.1(d) of this appendix; (e) Appendix A—References—Normative, as specified in section 2.2.1(e) of this appendix; and (f) Appendix C—ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 198 and ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 37 Additions, Clarifications and Exceptions—Normative, as specified in section 2.2.1(f) of this appendix. 1.2. ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (a) Section 5.1—Temperature Measuring Instruments (excluding sections 5.1.1 and 5.1.2), as specified in sections 2.2.1(b) and (f) of this appendix; (b) Section 5.2—Refrigerant, Liquid, and Barometric Pressure Measuring Instruments, as specified in section 2.2.1(b) of this appendix; (c) Sections 5.3—Air Differential Pressure and Airflow Measurements, as specified in section 2.2.1(b) of this appendix; (d) Sections 5.5(b)—Volatile Refrigerant Measurement, as specified in section 2.2.1(b) of this appendix; (e) Section 6.1—Enthalpy Apparatus (excluding 6.1.1 and 6.1.3 through 6.1.6), as specified in section 2.2.1(b) of this appendix; (f) Section 6.2—Nozzle Airflow Measuring Apparatus, as specified in section 2.2.1(b) of this appendix; (g) Section 6.3—Nozzles, as specified in section 2.2.1(b) of this appendix; (h) Section 6.4—External Static Pressure Measurements, as specified in section 2.2.1(b) of this appendix; (i) Section 6.5—Recommended Practices for Static Pressure Measurements, as specified in section 2.2.1(f) of this appendix; (j) Section 7.3—Indoor and Outdoor Air Enthalpy Methods, as specified in section 2.2.1(f) of this appendix; (k) Section 7.4—Compressor Calibration Method, as specified in section 2.2.1(f) of this appendix; (l) Section 7.5—Refrigerant Enthalpy Method, as specified in section 2.2.1(f) of this appendix; (m) Section 7.6—Outdoor Liquid Coil Method, as specified in section 2.2.1(f) of this appendix; (n) Section 7.7—Airflow Rate Measurement (excluding sections 7.7.1.2, 7.7.3, and 7.7.4), as specified in section 2.2.1(b) of this appendix; (o) Table 1—Applicable Test Methods, as specified in section 2.2.1(f) of this appendix; (p) Section 8.6—Additional Requirements for the Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method, as specified in section 2.2.1(f) of this appendix; (q) Table 2b—Test Tolerances (I-P Units), as specified in sections 2.2.1(c) and 2.2(f) of this appendix; and (r) Errata sheet issued on October 3, 2016, as specified in section 2.2.1(f) of this appendix. 1.3. ANSI/ASHRAE 41.6-2014 (a) Section 4—Classifications, as specified in section 2.2.1(f) of this appendix; (b) Section 5—Requirements, as specified in section 2.2.1(f) of this appendix; (c) Section 6—Instruments and Calibration, as specified in section 2.2.1(f) of this appendix; (d) Section 7.1—Standard Method Using the Cooled-Surface Condensation Hygrometer as specified in section 2.2.1(f) of this appendix; and (e) Section 7.4—Electronic and Other Humidity Instruments. As specified in section 2.2.1(f) of this appendix. 1.4. ANSI/ASHRAE 198-2013 (a) Section 4.4—Temperature Measuring Instrument, as specified in section 2.2.1(b) of this appendix; (b) Section 4.5—Electrical Instruments, as specified in section 2.2.1(b) of this appendix; (c) Section 4.6—Liquid Flow Measurement, as specified in section 2.2.1(b) of this appendix; (d) Section 4.7—Time and Mass Measurements, as specified in section 2.2.1(b) of this appendix; (e) Section 6.1—Test Room Requirements, as specified in section 2.2.1(b) of this appendix; (f) Section 6.6—Unit Preparation, as specified in section 2.2.1(b) of this appendix; (g) Section 7.1—Preparation of the Test Room(s), as specified in section 2.2.1(b) of this appendix; (h) Section 7.2—Equipment Installation, as specified in section 2.2.1(b) of this appendix; (i) Section 8.2—Equilibrium, as specified in section 2.2.1(b) of this appendix; and (j) Section 8.4—Test Duration and Measurement Frequency, as specified in section 2.2.1(b) of this appendix. 2. Test Method 2.1. Capacity Moisture removal capacity (in pounds per hour) and supply airflow rate (in standard cubic feet per minute) are determined according to AHRI 920-2020 as specified in section 2.2 of this appendix. 2.2. Efficiency 2.2.1. Determine the ISMRE2 for all DX-DOASes and the ISCOP2 for all heat pump DX-DOASes in accordance with the following sections of AHRI 920-2020 and the additional provisions described in this section. (a) Section 3—Definitions, including the references to AHRI 1060-2018; (i) Non-standard Low-static Fan Motor. A supply fan motor that cannot maintain external static pressure as high as specified in Table 7 of AHRI 920-2020 when operating at a manufacturer-specified airflow rate and that is distributed in commerce as part of an individual model within the same basic model of a DX-DOAS that is distributed in commerce with a different motor specified for testing that can maintain the required external static pressure. (ii) Manufacturer-specified. Information provided by the manufacturer through manufacturer's installation instructions, as defined in Section 3.14 of AHRI 920-2020. (iii) Reserved (b) Section 5—Test Requirements, including the references to Sections 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.5, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, and 7.7 (not including Sections 7.7.1.2, 7.7.3, and 7.7.4) of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009, and Sections 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 5.1, 6.1, 6.6, 7.1, 7.2, 8.2, and 8.4 of ANSI/ASHRAE 198-2013; (i) All control settings are to remain unchanged for all Standard Rating Conditions once system set up has been completed, except as explicitly allowed or required by AHRI 920-2020 or as indicated in the supplementary test instructions (STI). Component operation shall be controlled by the unit under test once the provisions in section 2.2.1(c) of this appendix are met. (ii) Break-in. The break-in conditions and duration specified in section 5.6 of AHRI 920-2020 shall be manufacturer-specified values. (iii) Reserved (c) Section 6—Rating Requirements (omitting sections 6.1.2 and 6.6.1), including the references to Table 2b of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009, and ANSI/ASHRAE 198-2013. (i) For water-cooled DX-DOASes, the “Condenser Water Entering Temperature, Cooling Tower Water” conditions specified in Table 4 of AHRI 920-2020 shall be used. For water-source heat pump DX-DOASes, the “Water-Source Heat Pumps” conditions specified in Table 5 of AHRI 920-2020 shall be used. (ii) For water-cooled or water-source DX- DOASes with integral pumps, set the external head pressure to 20 ft. of water column, with a −0/+1 ft. condition tolerance and a 1 ft. operating tolerance. (iii) When using the degradation coefficient method as specified in Section 6.9.2 of AHRI 920-2020, Equation 20 applies to DX- DOAS without VERS, with deactivated VERS (see Section 5.4.3 of AHRI 920-2020), or sensible-only VERS tested under Standard Rating Conditions other than D. (iv) Rounding requirements for representations are to be followed as stated in Sections 6.1.2.1 through 6.1.2.8 of AHRI 920-2020; (d) Section 11—Symbols and Subscripts, including references to AHRI 1060-2018; (e) Appendix A—References—Normative; (f) Appendix C—ANSI/ASHRAE 198-2013 and ANSI/ASHRAE 37 Additions, Clarifications and Exceptions—Normative, including references to Sections 5.1, 6.5, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 8.6, Table 1, Table 2b, and the errata sheet of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009, ANSI/ASHRAE 41.1-2013, Sections 4, 5, 6, 7.1, and 7.4 of ANSI/ASHRAE 41.6-2014, and AHRI 1060-2018; (g) Appendix E—Typical Test Unit Installations—Informative, for information only. 2.2.2. Set-Up and Test Provisions for Specific Components. When testing a DX-DOAS that includes any of the features listed in Table 2.1 of this section, test in accordance with the set-up and test provisions specified in Table 2.1 of this section. Table 2.1—Test Provisions for Specific Components Component Description Test provisions Return and Exhaust Dampers An automatic system that enables a DX-DOAS Unit to supply and use some return air (even if an optional VERS is not utilized) to reduce or eliminate the need for mechanical dehumidification or heating when ventilation air requirements are less than design All dampers that allow return air to pass into the supply airstream shall be closed and sealed. Exhaust air dampers of DOAS units with VERS shall be open. Gravity dampers activated by exhaust fan discharge airflow shall be allowed to open by action of the exhaust airflow. VERS Bypass Dampers An automatic system that enables a DX-DOAS Unit to let outdoor ventilation air and return air bypass the VERS when preconditioning of outdoor ventilation is not beneficial Test with the VERS bypass dampers installed, closed, and sealed. However, VERS bypass dampers may be opened if necessary for testing with deactivated VERS for Standard Rating Condition D. Fire/Smoke/Isolation Dampers A damper assembly including means to open and close the damper mounted at the supply or return duct opening of the equipment The fire/smoke/isolation dampers shall be removed for testing. If it is not possible to remove such a damper, test with the damper fully open. For any fire/smoke/isolation dampers shipped with the unit but not factory-installed, do not install the dampers for testing. Furnaces and Steam/Hydronic Heat Coils Furnaces and steam/hydronic heat coils used to provide primary or supplementary heating Test with the coils in place but providing no heat. Power Correction Capacitors A capacitor that increases the power factor measured at the line connection to the equipment. These devices are a requirement of the power distribution system supplying the unit Remove power correction capacitors for testing. Hail Guards A grille or similar structure mounted to the outside of the unit covering the outdoor coil to protect the coil from hail, flying debris and damage from large objects Remove hail guards for testing. Ducted Condenser Fans A condenser fan/motor assembly designed for optional external ducting of condenser air that provides greater pressure rise and has a higher rated motor horsepower than the condenser fan provided as a standard component with the equipment Test with the ducted condenser fan installed and operating using zero external static pressure, unless the manufacturer specifies use of an external static pressure greater. than zero, in which case, use the manufacturer-specified external static pressure. Sound Traps/Sound Attenuators An assembly of structures through which the supply air passes before leaving the equipment or through which the return air from the building passes immediately after entering the equipment for which the sound insertion loss is at least 6 dB for the 125 Hz octave band frequency range Removable sound traps/sound attenuators shall be removed for testing. Otherwise, test with sound traps/attenuators in place. Humidifiers A device placed in the supply air stream for moisture evaporation and distribution. The device may require building steam or water, hot water, electric or gas to operate Remove humidifiers for testing. UV Lights A lighting fixture and lamp mounted so that it shines light on the conditioning coil, that emits ultraviolet light to inhibit growth of organisms on the conditioning coil surfaces, the condensate drip pan, and/other locations within the equipment Remove UV lights for testing. High-Effectiveness Indoor Air Filtration Indoor air filters with greater air filtration effectiveness than MERV 8 or the lowest MERV filter distributed in commerce, whichever is greater Test with a MERV 8 filter or the lowest MERV filter distributed in commerce, whichever is greater 2.2.3. Optional Representations. Test provisions for the determination of the metrics indicated in paragraphs (a) through (d) of this section are optional and are determined according to the applicable provisions in section 2.2.1 of this appendix. The following metrics in AHRI 920-2020 are optional: (a) ISMRE2 70 (b) COP Full,x (c) COP DOAS,x (d) ISMRE2 and ISCOP2 for water-cooled DX-DOASes using the “Condenser Water Entering Temperature, Chilled Water” conditions specified in Table 4 of AHRI 920-2020 and for water-source heat pump DX-DOASes using the “Water-Source Heat Pump, Ground-Source Closed Loop” conditions specified in Table 5 of AHRI 920-2020. 2.3 Synonymous Terms (a) Any references to energy recovery or energy recovery ventilator (ERV) in AHRI 920-2020 and ANSI/ASHRAE 198-2013 shall be considered synonymous with ventilation energy recovery system (VERS) as defined in § 431.92. (b) Reserved [87 FR 45199, July 27, 2022] Appendix C to Subpart F of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Water-Source Heat Pumps Note: Manufacturers must use the results of testing under this appendix to determine compliance with the relevant standard at § 431.97 as that standard appeared in the January 1, 2023 edition of 10 CFR parts 200-499. Specifically, representations must be based on testing according to either this appendix or 10 CFR 431.96 as it appeared in the 10 CFR parts 200-499 edition revised as of January 1, 2023. Starting on November 29, 2024, voluntary representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of water-source heat pumps with cooling capacity greater than or equal to 135,000 Btu/h and less than 760,000 Btu/h must be based on testing according to this appendix. Manufacturers may also use this appendix to make voluntary representations with respect to energy use or efficiency prior to November 29, 2024. Starting on November 29, 2024, voluntary representations with respect to the integrated energy efficiency ratio (IEER) and applied coefficient of performance (ACOP) of water-source heat pumps must be based on testing according to appendix C1 of this subpart. Manufacturers may also use appendix C1 to make voluntary representations with respect to IEER and ACOP prior to November 29, 2024. Starting on the compliance date for any amended energy conservation standards for water-source heat pumps based on IEER and ACOP, any representations, including compliance certifications, made with respect to the energy use or energy efficiency of water-source heat pumps must be based on testing according to appendix C1 of this subpart. Manufacturers may also certify compliance with any amended energy conservation standards for water-source heat pumps based on IEER and ACOP prior to the applicable compliance date for those standards, and those compliance certifications must be based on testing according to appendix C1 of this subpart. 1. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.95, the entire standard for ISO 13256-1:1998. To the extent there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of a referenced industry standard and this appendix, the appendix provisions control. 2. General Determine the energy efficiency ratio (EER) and coefficient of performance (COP) in accordance with ISO 13256-1:1998. Section 3 of this appendix provides additional instructions for determining EER and COP. 3. Additional Provisions for Equipment Set-Up The only additional specifications that may be used in setting up the basic model for testing are those set forth in the installation and operation manual shipped with the unit. Each unit should be set up for test in accordance with the manufacturer installation and operation manuals. Sections 3.1 through 3.2 of this appendix provide specifications for addressing key information typically found in the installation and operation manuals. 3.1. If a manufacturer specifies a range of superheat, sub-cooling, and/or refrigerant pressure in its installation and operation manual for a given basic model, any value(s) within that range may be used to determine refrigerant charge or mass of refrigerant, unless the manufacturer clearly specifies a rating value in its installation and operation manual, in which case the specified rating value must be used. 3.2. The airflow rate used for testing must be that set forth in the installation and operation manuals being shipped to the commercial customer with the basic model and clearly identified as that used to generate the DOE performance ratings. If a rated airflow value for testing is not clearly identified, a value of 400 standard cubic feet per minute (scfm) per ton must be used. [88 FR 84230, Dec. 4, 2023] Appendix C1 to Subpart F of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Water-Source Heat Pumps Note: Prior to the compliance date of amended standards for water-source heat pumps that rely on integrated energy efficiency ratio (IEER) and applied coefficient of performance (ACOP) published after January 1, 2023, representations with respect to the energy use or energy efficiency of water-source heat pumps, including compliance certifications, must be based on testing according to appendix C of this subpart. Starting on November 29, 2024, voluntary representations with respect to the IEER and ACOP of water-source heat pumps must be based on testing according to this appendix. Manufacturers may also use this appendix to make voluntary representations with respect to IEER and ACOP prior to November 29, 2024. Starting on the compliance date for any amended energy conservation standards for water-source heat pumps based on IEER and ACOP, any representations, including compliance certifications, made with respect to the energy use or energy efficiency of water-source heat pumps must be based on testing according to this appendix. Manufacturers may also certify compliance with any amended energy conservation standards for water-source heat pumps based on IEER and ACOP prior to the applicable compliance date for those standards, and those compliance certifications must be based on testing according to this appendix. 1. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.95 the entire standards for AHRI 600-2023, ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (as corrected by the Errata sheet for ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009), and Melinder 2010. However, certain enumerated provisions of AHRI 600-2023 and ASHRAE 37-2009, as listed in this section 1, are inapplicable. To the extent there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of a referenced industry standard and the CFR, the CFR provisions control. 1.1. AHRI 600-2023 (a) Section 1 Purpose is inapplicable, (b) Section 2 Scope is inapplicable, (c) The following subsections of section 3 Definitions are inapplicable: (1) 3.2.1 (Air Economizer), (2) 3.2.3 (Barometric Relief Dampers), (3) 3.2.4 (Basic Model), (4) 3.2.5 (Coated Coils), (5) 3.2.6 (Coefficients of Performance), (6) 3.2.9 (Condenser Pump/Valves/Fittings), (7) 3.2.10 (Condenser Water Reheat), (8) 3.2.13 (Desiccant Dehumidification Components), (9) 3.2.14 (Desuperheater), (10) 3.2.15.1 (Energy Efficiency Ratio), (11) 3.2.16 (Evaporative Cooling of Ventilation Air), (12) 3.2.17 (Fire/Smoke/Isolation Dampers), (13) 3.2.19 (Fresh Air Dampers), (14) 3.2.21 (Grill Options), (15) 3.2.23 (High-effectiveness Indoor Air Filtration), (16) 3.2.24 (Hot Gas Bypass), (17) 3.2.27 (Integrated Energy Efficiency Ratio), (18) 3.2.28 (Low-static Heat Pump), (19) 3.2.35 (Power Correction Capacitors), (20) 3.2.36 (Powered Exhaust Air Fan), (21) 3.2.37 (Powered Return Air Fan), (22) 3.2.38 (Process Heat Recovery/Reclaim Coils/Thermal Storage), (23) 3.2.40 (Published Rating), (24) 3.2.42 (Refrigerant Reheat Coils), (25) 3.2.43 (Single Package Heat Pumps), (26) 3.2.44 (Sound Traps/Sound Attenuators), (27) 3.2.45 (Split System Heat Pump), (28) 3.2.51 (Steam/Hydronic Heat Coils), (29) 3.2.53 (UV Lights), (30) 3.2.54 (Ventilation Energy Recovery System), (31) 3.2.55 (Water/Brine to Air Heat Pump Equipment), and (32) 3.2.56 (Waterside Economizer), (d) The following subsections of section 6 Rating Requirements are inapplicable: (1) 6.5 (Residential Cooling Capacity and Efficiency), (2) 6.6 (Residential Heating Capacity and Efficiency), (3) 6.7 (Test Data vs Computer Simulation), (4) 6.8 (Rounding and Precision), (5) 6.9 (Uncertainty), and (6) 6.10 (Verification Testing), (e) Section 7 Minimum Data Requirements for Published Ratings is inapplicable (f) Section 8 Operating Requirements is inapplicable, (g) Section 9 Marking and Nameplate Data is inapplicable, (h) Section 10 Conformance Conditions is inapplicable, (i) Appendix B References—Informative is inapplicable, (j) Sections D.1 (Purpose), D.2 (Configuration Requirements), and D.3 (Optional System Features) of Appendix D Unit Configuration For Standard Efficiency Determination—Normative are inapplicable, and (k) Appendix F Example of Determination of Fan and Motor Efficiency for Non-standard Integrated Indoor Fan and Motors—Informative is inapplicable. 1.2. ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (Even if Corrected by the Errata Sheet) (a) Section 1 Purpose is inapplicable. (b) Section 2 Scope is inapplicable. (c) Section 4 Classification is inapplicable. 2. General Determine integrated energy efficiency ratio (IEER) and heating applied coefficient of performance (ACOP) in accordance with this appendix and the applicable sections of AHRI 600-2023, ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009, and Melinder 2010. Representations of AEER, EER, and COP may optionally be made. Section 3 of this appendix provides additional instructions for testing. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of this appendix takes highest precedence, followed by AHRI 600-2023, followed by ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009. Any subsequent amendment to a referenced document by the standard-setting organization will not affect the test procedure in this appendix, unless and until the test procedure is amended by DOE. Material is incorporated as it exists on the date of the approval, and a notification of any change in the incorporation must be published in the Federal Register 3. Setup and Test Provisions for Specific Components When testing a water-source heat pump that includes any of the features listed in table 1 to this appendix, test in accordance with the setup and test provisions specified in table 1 to this appendix. Table 1 to Appendix C1—Setup and Test Provisions for Specific Components Component Description Setup and test provisions Air Economizers An automatic system that enables a cooling system to supply outdoor air to reduce or eliminate the need for mechanical cooling during mild or cold weather For any air economizer that is factory-installed, place the economizer in the 100 percent return position and close and seal the outside air dampers for testing. For any modular air economizer shipped with the unit but not factory-installed, do not install the economizer for testing. Barometric Relief Dampers An assembly with dampers and means to automatically set the damper position in a closed position and one or more open positions to allow venting directly to the outside a portion of the building air that is returning to the unit, rather than allowing it to recirculate to the indoor coil and back to the building For any barometric relief dampers that are factory-installed, close and seal the dampers for testing. For any modular barometric relief dampers shipped with the unit but not factory-installed, do not install the dampers for testing. Desiccant Dehumidification Components An assembly that reduces the moisture content of the supply air through moisture transfer with solid or liquid desiccants Disable desiccant dehumidification components for testing. Fire/Smoke/Isolation Dampers A damper assembly including means to open and close the damper mounted at the supply or return duct opening of the equipment For any fire/smoke/isolation dampers that are factory-installed, set the dampers in the fully open position for testing. For any modular fire/smoke/isolation dampers shipped with the unit but not factory-installed, do not install the dampers for testing. Fresh Air Dampers An assembly with dampers and means to set the damper position in a closed and one open position to allow air to be drawn into the equipment when the indoor fan is operating For any fresh air dampers that are factory-installed, close and seal the dampers for testing. For any modular fresh air dampers shipped with the unit but not factory-installed, do not install the dampers for testing. Power Correction Capacitors A capacitor that increases the power factor measured at the line connection to the equipment Remove power correction capacitors for testing. Process Heat recovery/Reclaim Coils/Thermal Storage A heat exchanger located inside the unit that conditions the equipment's supply air using energy transferred from an external source using a vapor, gas, or liquid Disconnect the heat exchanger from its heat source for testing. Refrigerant Reheat Coils A heat exchanger located downstream of the indoor coil that heats the supply air during cooling operation using high-pressure refrigerant in order to increase the ratio of moisture removal to cooling capacity provided by the equipment De-activate refrigerant reheat coils for testing so as to provide the minimum (none if possible) reheat achievable by the system controls. Steam/Hydronic Heat Coils Coils used to provide supplemental heating Test with steam/hydronic heat coils in place but providing no heat. UV Lights A lighting fixture and lamp mounted so that it shines light on the indoor coil, that emits ultraviolet light to inhibit growth of organisms on the indoor coil surfaces, the condensate drip pan, and/other locations within the equipment Turn off UV lights for testing. Ventilation Energy Recovery System (VERS) An assembly that preconditions outdoor air entering the equipment through direct or indirect thermal and/or moisture exchange with the exhaust air, which is defined as the building air being exhausted to the outside from the equipment For any VERS that is factory-installed, place the VERS in the 100 percent return position and close and seal the outside air dampers and exhaust air dampers for testing, and do not energize any VERS subcomponents ( e.g., [88 FR 84230, Dec. 4, 2023] Appendix D to Subpart F of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Variable Refrigerant Flow Multi-Split Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps (Other Than Air-Cooled With Rated Cooling Capacity Less Than 65,000 Btu/h) Note: Manufacturers must use the results of testing under this appendix to determine compliance with the relevant standard from § 431.97 as that standard appeared in the January 1, 2022 edition of 10 CFR parts 200-499. Specifically, representations must be based upon results generated either under this appendix or under 10 CFR 431.96 as it appeared in the 10 CFR parts 200-499 edition revised as of January 1, 2022. For any amended standards for variable refrigerant flow multi-split air conditioners and heat pumps that rely on integrated energy efficiency ratio (IEER) published after January 1, 2022, manufacturers must use the results of testing under appendix D1 of this subpart to determine compliance. Representations related to energy consumption must be made in accordance with the appropriate appendix that applies ( i.e., 1. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.95, the entire standard for ANSI/AHRI 1230-2010. However, enumerated provisions of ANSI/AHRI 1230-2010, as listed in this section 1, are excluded. To the extent there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of a referenced industry standard and the CFR, the CFR provisions control. 1.1 ANSI/AHRI 1230-2010: (a) Section 5.1.2—Manufacturer involvement. (b) Section 6.6—Verification testing and uncertainty is inapplicable as specified in section 2.2 of this appendix. 1.2 [Reserved.] 2. General. Note: Sections 3 through 6 of this appendix provide additional instructions for determining EER and COP. 3. Optional break-in period. 4. Refrigerant line length corrections. Piping length beyond minimum, X Piping length beyond minimum, Y Cooling capacity correction 0> X ≤20 0> Y ≤6.1 1 20> X ≤40 6.1> Y ≤12.2 2 40> X ≤60 12.2> Y ≤18.3 3 60> X ≤80 18.3> Y ≤24.4 4 80> X ≤100 24.4> Y ≤30.5 5 100> X ≤120 30.5>Y ≤36.6 6 5. Additional provisions for equipment set-up. 5.1. If a manufacturer specifies a range of superheat, sub-cooling, and/or refrigerant pressure in its installation and operation manual for a given basic model, any value(s) within that range may be used to determine refrigerant charge or mass of refrigerant, unless the manufacturer clearly specifies a rating value in its installation and operation manual, in which case the specified rating value must be used. 5.2. The airflow rate used for testing must be that set forth in the installation and operation manual being shipped to the commercial customer with the basic model and clearly identified as that used to generate the DOE performance ratings. If a rated airflow value for testing is not clearly identified, a value of 400 standard cubic feet per minute (scfm) per ton must be used. 5.3. The test set-up and the fixed compressor speeds ( i.e., 6. Manufacturer involvement in assessment or enforcement testing. [87 FR 63898, Oct. 20, 2022] Appendix D1 to Subpart F of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Variable Refrigerant Flow Multi-Split Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps (Other Than Air-Cooled With Rated Cooling Capacity Less Than 65,000 Btu/h) Note: Manufacturers must use the results of testing under this appendix to determine compliance with any amended standards for variable refrigerant flow multi-split air conditioners and heat pumps provided in § 431.97 that are published after January 1, 2022, and that rely on integrated energy efficiency ratio (IEER). Representations related to energy consumption must be made in accordance with the appropriate appendix that applies ( i.e., 1. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.95, the entire standard for AHRI 1230-2021 and ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009, as corrected by the Errata sheet for ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 issued on March 27, 2019 (“ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (as corrected)”). However, only enumerated provisions of AHRI 1230-2021 and ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 are required or excluded, as listed in this section 1. To the extent there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of a referenced industry standard and the CFR, the CFR provisions control. 1.1 Provisions Required 1.1.1 AHRI 1230-2021 (a) Section 3—Definitions, except section 3.11, as specified in section 2 of this appendix, (b) Section 5—Test Requirements, except section 5.1.2, as specified in sections 2 and 5.1 of this appendix, (c) Section 6—Rating Requirements, except sections 6.3.3 and 6.5, as specified in sections 2, 4.1, 4.1.1, 4.2, 4.2.1, and 5.1 of this appendix, (d) Section 11—Calculations is applicable as specified in sections 2, 5.2.1.2, and 5.2.2 of this appendix, (e) Section 12—Symbols, Subscripts, and Superscripts as specified in section 2 of this appendix, (f) Appendix E—ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 37-2009 Clarifications/Exceptions—Normative as specified in section 2 of this appendix. 1.1.2 [Reserved] 1.2 Provisions Excluded 1.2.1 ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (as Corrected) (a) Section 1—Purpose, (b) Section 2—Scope, and (c) Section 4—Classification. 2. General. Note: The controls verification procedure specified in Appendix C of AHRI 1230-2021 is referenced as part of DOE's certification provisions at § 429.43(b) and product-specific enforcement provisions located at § 429.134(v)(3). 3. Definitions 3.1. Critical Parameter(s) 4. Test Conditions 4.1 Test Conditions for Air-Cooled VRF Multi-split Systems with Rated Cooling Capacity Greater Than 65,000 Btu/h. 4.1.1 Representations of COP for air-cooled VRF multi-split systems with rated cooling capacity greater than 65,000 Btu/h made using the “Low Temperature Operation, Heating” condition specified in Table 9 in Section 6 of AHRI 1230-2021 are optional. 4.2 Test Conditions for Water-source VRF Multi-split Systems. 4.2.1 For water-source VRF multi-split systems, representations of EER made using the “Standard Rating Test” conditions specified for “Ground-loop Heat pumps” in Table 10 of Section 6 of AHRI 1230-2021 and representations of COP made using the “Standard Rating Test” conditions specified for “Ground-loop Heat Pumps” in Table 11 of Section 6 of AHRI 1230-2021 are optional. 5. Test Procedure 5.1 Control Settings. 5.2 Allowable Critical Parameter Adjustments for IEER Cooling Tests. 5.2.1 Critical Parameter Adjustments for Meeting Cooling Capacity Targets. i.e., 5.2.1.1. Cooling Capacity is Below Lower Tolerance. (a) The STI specifies a non-zero compressor speed for the compressor for that test and (b) The compressor has not yet reached its maximum capable operating speed. The compressor speed(s) must not be less than the STI-certified value(s) at any point during the test. Upward adjustments to compressor speed are not constrained by a budget on RSS Points Total (See section 5.2.1.2.1 of this appendix). 5.2.1.2 Cooling Capacity is Above Upper Tolerance. (a) The STI specifies a non-zero compressor speed for the compressor for that test and (b) The compressor has not yet reached minimum speed. Continue reducing cooling capacity in this manner until one of the following occurs: (1) The unit operates within 3% of the target cooling capacity; or (2) The RSS point total reaches a budget of 70 points (see section 5.2.1.2.1 of this appendix). For the 75%, 50%, and 25% part-load cooling test points, if the RSS point total reaches 70 during critical parameter adjustments before the capacity operates within 3% of the target cooling capacity, stop adjustment and follow cyclic degradation procedures in accordance with Section 11.2.2.1 of AHRI 1230-2021. 5.2.1.2.1 Measuring Critical Parameter Variation During Adjustment Period. (a) First, use equation 5.2-1 to calculate the absolute parameter percent difference () between each adjusted critical parameter and the value for that parameter certified in the STI. Where: “i” identifies the critical parameter—either compressors speed(s), outdoor fan speed(s), or outdoor variable valve position(s) CP i Adj CP i Adj CP i STI CP i STI CP Max (b) Next, use equation 5.2-2 to this section to determine the accrued points for each critical parameter: Where: “i” identifies the critical parameter—either compressors speed(s), outdoor fan speed(s), or outdoor variable valve position(s) NPV i Table 5.1—Critical Parameter Nominal Point Values Critical parameter Nominal point value Compressor Speed(s) 13 Outdoor Fan Speed(s) 7 Outdoor Variable Valve Position(s) 1 (c) Finally, use equation 5.2-3 to this section to calculate the root-sum-squared (RSS) Points Total across all critical parameters. 5.2.2 Critical Parameter Adjustments for Meeting SHR Limits. (a) The STI specifies a non-zero compressor speed for the compressor for that test and (b) The compressor has not yet reached maximum speed. Upwards adjustments to compressor speed are not constrained by a budget on RSS Points Total. Should the SHR remain above the maximum limit when the cooling capacity reaches its upper 3% tolerance, no further compressor adjustments shall be made, and the calculation procedures specified in Section 11.2.2.2 of AHRI 1230-2021 must be applied using the adjusted SHR value obtained after increasing the compressor speed(s). 6. Set-Up and Test Provisions for Specific Components. Table 6.1—Test Provisions for Specific Components Component Description Test provisions Desiccant Dehumidification Components An assembly that reduces the moisture content of the supply air through moisture transfer with solid or liquid desiccants Disable desiccant dehumidification components for testing. Air Economizers An automatic system that enables a cooling system to supply outdoor air to reduce or eliminate the need for mechanical cooling during mild or cold weather For any air economizer that is factory-installed, place the economizer in the 100% return position and close and seal the outside air dampers for testing. For any modular air economizer shipped with the unit but not factory-installed, do not install the economizer for testing. Fresh Air Dampers An assembly with dampers and means to set the damper position in a closed and one open position to allow air to be drawn into the equipment when the indoor fan is operating For any fresh air dampers that are factory-installed, close and seal the dampers for testing. For any modular fresh air dampers shipped with the unit but not factory-installed, do not install the dampers for testing. Hail Guards A grille or similar structure mounted to the outside of the unit covering the outdoor coil to protect the coil from hail, flying debris, and damage from large objects Remove hail guards for testing. Low Ambient Cooling Dampers An assembly with dampers and means to set the dampers in a position to recirculate the warmer condenser discharge air to allow for reliable operation at low outdoor ambient conditions Remove low ambient cooling dampers for testing. Power Correction Capacitors A capacitor that increases the power factor measured at the line connection to the equipment. These devices are a requirement of the power distribution system supplying the unit Remove power correction capacitors for testing. Ventilation Energy Recovery Systems (VERS) An assembly that preconditions outdoor air entering the equipment through direct or indirect thermal and/or moisture exchange with the exhaust air, which is defined as the building air being exhausted to the outside from the equipment For any VERS that is factory-installed, place the VERS in the 100% return position and close and seal the outside air dampers and exhaust air dampers for testing, and do not energize any VERS subcomponents (e.g., energy recovery wheel motors). For any VERS module shipped with the unit but not factory-installed, do not install the VERS for testing. [87 FR 63898, Oct. 20, 2022] Appendix E to Subpart F of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Computer Room Air Conditioners Note: Manufacturers must use the results of testing under this appendix to determine compliance with the relevant energy conservation standards for computer room air conditioners from § 431.97 as that standard appeared in the January 1, 2022 edition of 10 CFR parts 200 through 499. Specifically, representations, including compliance certifications, must be based upon results generated either under this appendix or under 10 CFR 431.96 as it appeared in the 10 CFR parts 200 through 499 edition revised as of January 1, 2022. For any amended standards for computer room air conditioners that rely on net sensible coefficient of performance (NSenCOP) published after January 1, 2022, manufacturers must use the results of testing under appendix E1 to this subpart to determine compliance. Manufacturers may use appendix E1 to certify compliance with any amended standards prior to the applicable compliance date for those standards. Specifically, representations, including compliance certifications, related to energy consumption must be based upon results generated under the appropriate appendix that applies ( i.e., 1. Incorporation by Reference. DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.95 the entire standard for ASHRAE 127-2007. However, certain enumerated provisions of ASHRAE 127-2007, as listed in section 1.1, are inapplicable. To the extent that there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of a referenced industry standard and the CFR, the CFR provisions control. 1.1 ASHRAE 127-2007: (a) Section 5.11 is inapplicable as specified in section 2 of this appendix. (b) [Reserved] 1.2 [Reserved] 2. General. 3. Optional break-in period. 4. Additional provisions for equipment set-up. 4.1. If a manufacturer specifies a range of superheat, sub-cooling, and/or refrigerant pressure in its installation and operation manual for a given basic model, any value(s) within that range may be used to determine refrigerant charge or mass of refrigerant, unless the manufacturer clearly specifies a rating value in its installation and operation manual, in which case the specified rating value must be used. 4.2. The airflow rate used for testing must be that set forth in the installation and operation manuals being shipped to the commercial customer with the basic model and clearly identified as that used to generate the DOE performance ratings. If a rated airflow value for testing is not clearly identified, a value of 400 standard cubic feet per minute (scfm) per ton must be used. [88 FR 21840, Apr. 11, 2023] Appendix E1 to Subpart F of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Computer Room Air Conditioners Note: Prior to the compliance date for any amended energy conservation standards based on NSenCOP for computer room air conditioners, representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of this equipment, including compliance certifications, must be based on testing pursuant to appendix E to this subpart. Subsequently, manufacturers must use the results of testing under this appendix to determine compliance with any amended energy conservation standards for computer room air conditioners provided in § 431.97 that are published after January 1, 2022, and that rely on net sensible coefficient of performance (NSenCOP). Specifically, representations, including compliance certifications, related to energy consumption must be based upon results generated under the appropriate appendix that applies ( i.e., 1. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.95 the entire standards for AHRI 1360-2022, ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009, and ANSI/ASHRAE 127-2020. However, as listed in sections 1.1, 1.2, and 1.3 of this appendix, only certain enumerated provisions of AHRI 1360-2022 and ANSI/ASHRAE 127-2020 are applicable, and only certain enumerated provisions of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 are not applicable. To the extent that there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of a referenced industry standard and the CFR, the CFR provisions control. 1.1 AHRI 1360-2022: (a) The following sections of Section 3. Definitions—3.1 (Expressions of Provision), 3.2.2 (Air Sampling Device(s)), 3.2.7 (Computer and Data Processing Room Air Conditioner), 3.2.22 (Indoor Unit), 3.2.25 (Manufacturer's Installation Instruction), 3.2.27 (Net Sensible Cooling Capacity), 3.2.28 (Net Total Cooling Capacity), 3.2.37 (Standard Air) and 3.2.38 (Standard Airflow) are applicable. (b) Section 5. Test Requirements, is applicable. (c) The following sections of Section 6. Rating Requirements—6.1-6.3, 6.5 and 6.7 are applicable. (d) Appendix C. Standard Configurations—Normative, is applicable. (e) Section D2 of Appendix D. Non-Standard Indoor Fan Motors for CRAC units, is applicable. (f) Appendix E. Method of Testing Computer and Data Processing Room Air Conditioners—Normative, is applicable. (g) Appendix F. Indoor and Outdoor Air Condition Measurement—Normative is applicable. 1.2 ANSI/ASHRAE 127-2020: (a) Appendix A—Figure A-1, Test duct for measuring air flow and static pressure on downflow units, is applicable. (b) [Reserved]. 1.3 ASHRAE 37-2009: (a) Section 1 Purpose is inapplicable. (b) Section 2 Scope is inapplicable. (c) Section 4 Classification is inapplicable. 2. General. Federal Register 3. Test Conditions 3.1. Test Conditions for Certification. 4. Set-Up and Test Provisions for Specific Components. Table 4.1—Test Provisions for Specific Components Component Description Test provisions Air Economizers An automatic system that enables a cooling system to supply outdoor air to reduce or eliminate the need for mechanical cooling during mild or cold weather For any air economizer that is factory-installed, place the economizer in the 100% return position and close and seal the outside air dampers for testing. For any modular air economizer shipped with the unit but not factory-installed, do not install the economizer for testing. Process Heat Recovery/Reclaim Coils/Thermal Storage A heat exchanger located inside the unit that conditions the equipment's supply air using energy transferred from an external source using a vapor, gas, or liquid Disconnect the heat exchanger from its heat source for testing. Evaporative Pre-cooling of Condenser Intake Air Water is evaporated into the air entering the air-cooled condenser to lower the dry-bulb temperature and thereby increase efficiency of the refrigeration cycle Disconnect the unit from the water supply for testing ( i.e., Steam/Hydronic Heat Coils Coils used to provide supplemental heat Test with steam/hydronic heat coils in place but providing no heat. Refrigerant Reheat Coils A heat exchanger located downstream of the indoor coil that heats the supply air during cooling operation using high pressure refrigerant in order to increase the ratio of moisture removal to cooling capacity provided by the equipment De-activate refrigerant re-heat coils so as to provide the minimum (none if possible) reheat achievable by the system controls. Fire/Smoke/Isolation Dampers A damper assembly including means to open and close the damper mounted at the supply or return duct opening of the equipment For any fire/smoke/isolation dampers that are factory-installed, close and seal the dampers for testing. For any modular fire/smoke/isolation dampers shipped with the unit but not factory-installed, do not install the dampers for testing. Harmonic Distortion Mitigation Devices A high voltage device that reduces harmonic distortion measured at the line connection of the equipment that is created by electronic equipment in the unit Remove harmonic distortion mitigation devices for testing. Humidifiers A device placed in the supply air stream for moisture evaporation and distribution. The device may require building steam or water, hot water, electricity, or gas to operate Test with humidifiers in place but providing no humidification. Electric Reheat Elements Electric reheat elements and controls that are located downstream of the cooling coil that may heat the air using electrical power during the dehumidification process Test with electric reheat elements in place but providing no heat. Non-standard Power Transformer A device applied to a high voltage load that transforms input electrical voltage to that voltage necessary to operate the load Disable the non-standard power transformer during testing. Chilled Water Dual Cooling Coils A secondary chilled water coil added in the indoor air stream for use as the primary or secondary cooling circuit in conjunction with a separate chiller Test with chilled water dual cooling coils in place but providing no cooling. High-Effectiveness Indoor Air Filtration Indoor air filters with greater air filtration effectiveness than Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) 8 for ducted units and MERV 1 for non-ducted units Test with the filter offered by the manufacturer with the least air filtration effectiveness that meets or exceeds MERV 8 for ducted units and MERV 1 for non-ducted units. [88 FR 21841, Apr. 11, 2023] Appendix F to Subpart F of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Energy Consumption of Air-Cooled, Three-Phase, Small Commercial Package Air Conditioning and Heating Equipment With a Cooling Capacity of Less Than 65,000 Btu/h and Air-Cooled, Three-Phase, Variable Refrigerant Flow Multi-Split Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps With a Cooling Capacity of Less Than 65,000 Btu/h Note: Manufacturers must use the results of testing under this appendix to determine compliance with the relevant standard from § 431.97 as that standard appeared in the January 1, 2022, edition of 10 CFR parts 200-499. Specifically, representations must be based upon results generated either under this appendix or under 10 CFR 431.96 as it appeared in the 10 CFR parts 200-499 edition revised as of January 1, 2021. For any amended standards for air-cooled, three-phase, small commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment with a cooling capacity of less than 65,000 Btu/h and air-cooled, three-phase, variable refrigerant flow multi-split air conditioners and heat pumps with a cooling capacity of less than 65,000 Btu/h that rely on SEER2 and HSPF2 published after January 1, 2021, manufacturers must use the results of testing under appendix F1 to determine compliance. Representations related to energy consumption must be made in accordance with the appropriate appendix that applies ( i.e., 1. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.95, the entire standard for ANSI/AHRI 210/240-2008 and ANSI/AHRI 1230-2010. However, certain enumerated provisions of those standards, as set forth in this section 1, are inapplicable. To the extent there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of a referenced industry standard and the CFR, the CFR provisions control. 1.1 ANSI/AHRI 210/240-2008: (a) Section 6.5— Tolerances (b) Reserved. 1.2 ANSI/AHRI 1230-2010: (a) Section 5.1.2— Manufacturer involvement (b) Section 6.6— Verification testing and uncertainty 2. General 2.1 Air-cooled, three-phase, small commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment with a cooling capacity of less than 65,000 Btu/h. Determine the seasonal energy efficiency ratio (SEER) and heating seasonal performance factor (HSPF) (as applicable) in accordance with ANSI/AHRI 210/240-2008. Sections 3 to 6 of this appendix provide additional instructions for determining SEER and HSPF. 2.2 Air-cooled, three-phase, variable refrigerant flow multi-split air conditioners and heat pumps with a cooling capacity of less than 65,000 Btu/h. Determine the SEER and HSPF (as applicable) in accordance with ANSI/AHRI 1230-2010. Sections 3 through 6 of this appendix provide additional instructions for determining SEER and HSPF. 3. Optional break-in period. 4. Additional provisions for equipment set-up. 4.1. If a manufacturer specifies a range of superheat, sub-cooling, and/or refrigerant pressure in its installation and operation manual for a given basic model, any value(s) within that range may be used to determine refrigerant charge or mass of refrigerant, unless the manufacturer clearly specifies a rating value in its installation and operation manual, in which case the specified rating value shall be used. 4.2. The airflow rate used for testing must be that set forth in the installation and operation manuals being shipped to the commercial customer with the basic model and clearly identified as that used to generate the DOE performance ratings. If a rated airflow value for testing is not clearly identified, a value of 400 standard cubic feet per minute (scfm) per ton shall be used. 4.3. For air-cooled, three-phase, variable refrigerant flow multi-split air conditioners and heat pumps with a cooling capacity of less than 65,000 Btu/h, the test set-up and the fixed compressor speeds ( i.e., 5. Refrigerant line length corrections for air-cooled, three-phase, variable refrigerant flow multi-split air conditioners and heat pumps with a cooling capacity of less than 65,000 Btu/h. Piping length beyond Piping length beyond Cooling 0>X ≤20 0>Y ≤6.1 1 20>X ≤40 6.1>Y ≤12.2 2 40>X ≤60 12.2>Y ≤18.3 3 60>X ≤80 18.3>Y ≤24.4 4 80>X ≤100 24.4>Y ≤30.5 5 100 >X ≤120 30.5>Y ≤36.6 6 6. Manufacturer involvement in assessment or enforcement testing for air-cooled, three-phase, variable refrigerant flow multi-split air conditioners and heat pumps with a cooling capacity of less than 65,000 Btu/h. [87 FR 77327, Dec. 16, 2022; 87 FR 78513, Dec. 22, 2022] Appendix F1 to Subpart F of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Energy Consumption of Air-Cooled, Three-Phase, Small Commercial Package Air Conditioning and Heating Equipment With a Cooling Capacity of Less Than 65,000 Btu/h and Air-Cooled, Three-Phase, Variable Refrigerant Flow Multi-Split Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps With a Cooling Capacity of Less Than 65,000 Btu/h Note: Manufacturers must use the results of testing under this appendix to determine compliance with any amended standards for air-cooled, three-phase, small commercial package air conditioning and heating equipment with a cooling capacity of less than 65,000 Btu/h and air-cooled, three-phase, variable refrigerant flow multi-split air conditioners and heat pumps with a cooling capacity of less than 65,000 Btu/h provided in § 431.97 that are published after January 1, 2021, and that rely on seasonal energy efficiency ratio 2 (SEER2) and heating seasonal performance factor 2 (HSPF2). Representations related to energy consumption must be made in accordance with the appropriate appendix that applies ( i.e., 1. Incorporation by Reference. 1.1. AHRI 210/240-2023: (a) Section 6 Rating Requirements—6.1 Standard Ratings—6.1.8 Tested Combinations or Tested Units (b) Section 6 Rating Requirements—6.2 Application Ratings (c) Section 6 Rating Requirements—6.4 Ratings (d) Section 6 Rating Requirements—6.5 Uncertainty and Variability (e) Section 7—Minimum Data Requirements for Published Ratings (f) Section 8—Operating Requirements (g) Section 9—Marking and Nameplate Data (h) Section 10—Conformance Conditions (i) Appendix C—Certification of Laboratory Facilities Used to Determine Performance of Unitary Air-Conditioning & Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment—Informative (j) Appendix F—ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 116-2010 Clarifications/Exceptions—Normative—F15.2 and F17 (k) Appendix G—Unit Configuration for Standard Efficiency Determination—Normative (l) Appendix H—Off-Mode Testing—Normative (m) Appendix I Verification Testing—Normative 1.2. ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009: (a) Section 1—Purpose (b) Section 2—Scope (c) Section 4—Classification 2. General. 3. Energy Measurement Accuracy. 4. Cycle Stability Requirements. [87 FR 77328, Dec. 16, 2022] Appendix G to Subpart F of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Single Package Vertical Air Conditioners and Single Package Vertical Heat Pumps Note: Prior to December 4, 2023, manufacturers must use the results of testing under either this appendix or § 431.96 as it appeared in the 10 CFR parts 200-499 edition revised as of January 1, 2021, to determine compliance with the relevant standard from § 431.97 as that standard appeared in the January 1, 2021, edition of 10 CFR parts 200-499. On or after December 4, 2023, manufacturers must use the results of testing generated under this appendix to demonstrate compliance with the relevant standard from § 431.97 as that standard appeared in the January 1, 2021, edition of 10 CFR parts 200-499. Beginning December 4, 2023, if manufacturers make voluntary representations with respect to the integrated energy efficiency ratio (IEER) of single packaged vertical air conditioners and single package vertical heat pumps, such representations must be based on testing conducted in accordance with appendix G1 to this subpart. For any amended standards for single packaged vertical air conditioners and single package vertical heat pumps based on IEER published after January 1, 2021, manufacturers must use the results of testing under appendix G1 to this subpart to determine compliance. Representations related to energy consumption must be made in accordance with the appropriate appendix that applies ( i.e., 1. Incorporation by Reference. DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.95 the entire standard for AHRI 390-2021 and ASHRAE 37-2009. However, only certain enumerated provisions of AHRI 390-2021 and ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 are required or excluded as listed in this section 1. To the extent there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of a referenced industry standard and this appendix, the appendix provisions control, followed by AHRI 390-2021, followed by ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009. 1.1. Only the following provisions of AHRI 390-2021 apply: (a) Section 3—Definitions (omitting sections 3.1, 3.2, 3.5, 3.12, and 3.15) (b) Section 5—Test Requirements (omitting section 5.8.5) (c) Section 6—Rating Requirements (omitting sections 6.1.1 and 6.2 through 6.5) (d) Appendix A. “References—Normative” (e) Appendix D. “Indoor and Outdoor Air Condition Measurement—Normative” (f) Appendix E. “Method of Testing Single Package Vertical Units—Normative” 1.2. All provisions of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 apply except for the following provisions: (a) Section 1—Purpose (b) Section 2—Scope (c) Section 4—Classifications 2. General. 3. Test Conditions. 3.1. Optional Representations. 3.2. [Reserved] [87 FR 75169, Dec. 7, 2022] Appendix G1 to Subpart F of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Single Package Vertical Air Conditioners and Single Package Vertical Heat Pumps Note: Beginning December 4, 2023, if manufacturers make voluntary representations with respect to the integrated energy efficiency ratio (IEER) of single packaged vertical air conditioners and single package vertical heat pumps, such representations must be based on testing conducted in accordance with this appendix. Manufacturers must use the results of testing under this appendix to determine compliance with any amended standards for single packaged vertical air conditioners and single package vertical heat pumps based on IEER provided in § 431.97 that are published after January 1, 2021. Representations related to energy consumption must be made in accordance with the appropriate appendix that applies ( i.e., 1. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.95 the entire standard for AHRI 390-2021 and ASHRAE 37-2009. However, only certain enumerated provisions of AHRI 390-2021 and ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 are required or excluded as listed in this section 1. To the extent there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of a referenced industry standard and this appendix, the appendix provisions control, followed by AHRI 390-2021, followed by ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009. 1.1. Only the following provisions of AHRI 390-2021 apply: (a) Section 3—Definitions (omitting sections 3.1, 3.2, 3.5, 3.12, and 3.15) (b) Section 5—Test Requirements (omitting section 5.8.5) c) Section 6—Rating Requirements (omitting sections 6.1.1 and 6.3 through 6.5) (d) Appendix A. “References—Normative” (e) Appendix D. “Indoor and Outdoor Air Condition Measurement—Normative” (f) Appendix E. “Method of Testing Single Package Vertical Units—Normative” 1.2. All provisions of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 apply except for the following provisions: (a) Section 1—Purpose (b) Section 2—Scope (c) Section 4—Classifications 2. General. 3. Test Conditions. 3.1. Optional Representations. 4. Set-Up and Test Provisions for Specific Components. Table 4.1—Test Provisions for Specific Components Component Description Test provisions Desiccant Dehumidification Components An assembly that reduces the moisture content of the supply air through moisture transfer with solid or liquid desiccants Disable desiccant dehumidification components for testing. Air Economizers An automatic system that enables a cooling system to supply outdoor air to reduce or eliminate the need for mechanical cooling during mid or cold weather For any air economizer that is factory-installed, place the economizer in the 100% return position and close and seal the outside air dampers for testing. For any modular air economizer shipped with the unit but not factory-installed, do not install the economizer for testing. Fresh Air Dampers An assembly with dampers and means to set the damper position in a closed and one open position to allow air to be drawn into the equipment when the indoor fan is operating For any fresh air dampers that are factory-installed, close and seal the dampers for testing. For any modular fresh air dampers shipped with the unit but not factory-installed, do not install the dampers for testing. Hail Guards A grille or similar structure mounted to the outside of the unit covering the outdoor coil to protect the coil from hail, flying debris and damage from large objects Remove hail guards for testing. Power Correction Capacitors A capacitor that increases the power factor measured at the line connection to the equipment Remove power correction capacitors for testing. Ventilation Energy Recovery System (VERS) An assembly that preconditions outdoor air entering the equipment through direct or indirect thermal and/or moisture exchange with the exhaust air, which is defined as the building air being exhausted to the outside from the equipment For any VERS that is factory-installed, place the VERS in the 100% return position and close and seal the outside air dampers and exhaust air dampers for testing, and do not energize any VERS subcomponents ( e.g., Barometric Relief Dampers An assembly with dampers and means to automatically set the damper position in a closed position and one or more open positions to allow venting directly to the outside a portion of the building air that is returning to the unit, rather than allowing it to recirculate to the indoor coil and back to the building For any barometric relief dampers that are factory-installed, close and seal the dampers for testing. For any modular barometric relief dampers shipped with the unit but not factory-installed, do not install the dampers for testing. UV Lights A lighting fixture and lamp mounted so that it shines light on the indoor coil, that emits ultraviolet light to inhibit growth of organisms on the indoor coil surfaces, the condensate drip pan, and/other locations within the equipment Turn off UV lights for testing. Steam/Hydronic Heat Coils Coils used to provide supplemental heating Test with steam/hydronic heat coils in place but providing no heat. Hot Gas Reheat A heat exchanger located downstream of the indoor coil that heats the Supply Air during cooling operation using high pressure refrigerant in order to increase the ratio of moisture removal to Cooling Capacity provided by the equipment De-activate refrigerant reheat coils for testing so as to provide the minimum (none if possible) reheat achievable by the system controls. Sound Traps/Sound Attenuators An assembly of structures through which the Supply Air passes before leaving the equipment or through which the return air from the building passes immediately after entering the equipment for which the sound insertion loss is at least 6 dB for the 125 Hz octave band frequency range Removable sound traps/sound attenuators shall be removed for testing. Otherwise, test with sound traps/attenuators in place. Fire/Smoke/Isolation Dampers A damper assembly including means to open and close the damper mounted at the supply or return duct opening of the equipment For any fire/smoke/isolation dampers that are factory-installed, set the dampers in the fully open position for testing. For any modular fire/smoke/isolation dampers shipped with the unit but not factory-installed, do not install the dampers for testing. [87 FR 75170, Dec. 7, 2022] Subpart G—Commercial Water Heaters, Hot Water Supply Boilers and Unfired Hot Water Storage Tanks Source: 69 FR 61983, Oct. 21, 2004, unless otherwise noted. § 431.101 Purpose and scope. This subpart contains energy conservation requirements for certain commercial water heaters, hot water supply boilers and unfired hot water storage tanks, pursuant to Part C of Title III of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 6311-6317. [69 FR 61983, Oct. 21, 2004, as amended at 70 FR 60415, Oct. 18, 2005] § 431.102 Definitions concerning commercial water heaters, hot water supply boilers, unfired hot water storage tanks, and commercial heat pump water heaters. The following definitions apply for purposes of this subpart G, and of subparts J through M of this part. Any words or terms not defined in this section or elsewhere in this part shall be defined as provided in section 340 of the Act, 42 U.S.C. 6311. Air-source commercial heat pump water heater Basic model Coefficient of performance (COP h ) Commercial heat pump water heater (CHPWH) Direct geo-exchange commercial heat pump water heater Flow-activated instantaneous water heater Fuel input rate Ground-source closed-loop commercial heat pump water heater Ground water-source commercial heat pump water heater Hot water supply boiler (1) Has a rated input from 300,000 Btu/h to 12,500,000 Btu/h and of at least 4,000 Btu/h per gallon of stored water; (2) Is suitable for heating potable water; and (3) Meets either or both of the following conditions: (i) It has the temperature and pressure controls necessary for heating potable water for purposes other than space heating; or (ii) The manufacturer's product literature, product markings, product marketing, or product installation and operation instructions indicate that the boiler's intended uses include heating potable water for purposes other than space heating. Indoor water-source commercial heat pump water heater Instantaneous water heater (1) Gas-fired instantaneous water heaters with a rated input both greater than 200,000 Btu/h and not less than 4,000 Btu/h per gallon of stored water; (2) Oil-fired instantaneous water heaters with a rated input both greater than 210,000 Btu/h and not less than 4,000 Btu/h per gallon of stored water; and (3) Electric instantaneous water heaters with a rated input both greater than 12 kW and not less than 4,000 Btu/h per gallon of stored water. Rated input R-value 2 Residential-duty commercial water heater (1) For models requiring electricity, uses single-phase external power supply; (2) Is not designed to provide outlet hot water at temperatures greater than 180 °F; and (3) Does not meet any of the following criteria: Water heater type Indicator of non-residential application Gas-fired Storage Rated input >105 kBtu/h; Rated storage volume >120 gallons. Oil-fired Storage Rated input >140 kBtu/h; Rated storage volume >120 gallons. Electric Instantaneous Rated input >58.6 kW; Rated storage volume >2 gallons. Standby loss (1) For electric commercial water heating equipment (not including commercial heat pump water heaters), the average hourly energy required to maintain the stored water temperature expressed as a percent per hour (%/h) of the heat content of the stored water above room temperature and determined in accordance with appendix B or D to subpart G of part 431 (as applicable), denoted by the term “S”; or (2) For gas-fired and oil-fired commercial water heating equipment, the average hourly energy required to maintain the stored water temperature expressed in British thermal units per hour (Btu/h) based on a 70 °F temperature differential between stored water and ambient room temperature and determined in accordance with appendix A or C to subpart G of part 431 (as applicable), denoted by the term “SL.” Storage-type instantaneous water heater Storage water heater (1) Gas-fired storage water heaters with a rated input both greater than 75,000 Btu/h and less than 4,000 Btu/h per gallon of stored water; (2) Oil-fired storage water heaters with a rated input both greater than 105,000 Btu/h and less than 4,000 Btu/h per gallon of stored water; and (3) Electric storage water heaters with a rated input both greater than 12 kW and less than 4,000 Btu/h per gallon of stored water. Tank surface area Thermal efficiency Unfired hot water storage tank [69 FR 61983, Oct. 21, 2004, as amended at 76 FR 12503, Mar. 7, 2011; 78 FR 79599, Dec. 31, 2013; 79 FR 40586, July 11, 2014; 81 FR 79321, Nov. 10, 2016; 88 FR 40494, June 21, 2023; 88 FR 69821, Oct. 6, 2023] Test Procedures § 431.105 Materials incorporated by reference. (a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this subpart with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, the DOE must publish a document in the Federal Register [email protected], www.energy.gov/eere/buildings/building-technologies-office. www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html [email protected]. (b) ASHRAE. https://www.ashrae.org. (1) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 118.1-2012, “Method of Testing for Rating Commercial Gas, Electric, and Oil Service Water-Heating Equipment,” approved by ASHRAE on October 26, 2012, IBR approved for appendix E to this subpart, as follows: (i) Section 3—Definitions and Symbols; (ii) Section 4—Classifications by Mode of Operation (sections 4.4, and 4.5 only); (iii) Section 6—Instruments (except sections 6.3, 6.4 and 6.6); (iv) Section 7—Apparatus (except section 7.4, Figures 1 through 4, section 7.7.5, Table 2, and section 7.7.7.4); (v) Section 8—Methods of Testing: (A) Section 8.2—Energy Supply, Section 8.2.1—Electrical Supply; (B) Section 8.7—Water Temperature Control; (vi) Section 9—Test Procedures: 9.1—Input Rating, Heating Capacity, Thermal Efficiency, Coefficient of Performance (COP), and Recovery Rating; 9.1.1—Full Input Rating; (vii) Section 10—Calculation of Results: Section 10.3—Heat-Pump Water Heater Water-Heating Capacity, Coefficient of Performance (COP), and Recovery Rating; Section 10.3.1—Type IV and Type V Full-Capacity Test Method. (2) [Reserved] (c) ASTM. http://www.astm.org. (1) ASTM C177-13, “Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus,” approved September 15, 2013, IBR approved for § 431.102. (2) ASTM C518-15, “Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus,” approved September 1, 2015, IBR approved for § 431.102t. (3) ASTM D2156-09 (Reapproved 2013), “Standard Test Method for Smoke Density in Flue Gases from Burning Distillate Fuels,” approved October 1, 2013, IBR approved for appendices A and C to this subpart. (d) CSA Group, 5060 Spectrum Way, Suite 100, Mississauga, Ontario, Canada L4W 5N6, 800-463-6727, or go to http://www.csagroup.org/. (1) ANSI Z21.10.3-2015 * CSA 4.3-2015 (“ANSI Z21.10.3-2015”), “Gas-fired water heaters, volume III, storage water heaters with input ratings above 75,000 Btu per hour, circulating and instantaneous,” approved by ANSI on October 5, 2015, IBR approved for appendices A, B, and C to this subpart, as follows: (i) Annex E (normative) Efficiency test procedures—E.1—Method of test for measuring thermal efficiency, paragraph c—Vent requirements; and (ii) Annex E (normative) Efficiency test procedures—E.1—Method of test for measuring thermal efficiency, paragraph f—Installation of temperature sensing means. (2) [Reserved] [77 FR 28996, May 16, 2012, as amended at 81 FR 79322, Nov. 10, 2016; 88 FR 69821, Oct. 6, 2023] § 431.106 Uniform test method for the measurement of energy efficiency of commercial water heating equipment. (a) Scope. (b) Testing and calculations. (1) Residential-duty commercial water heaters. (2) Commercial water heating equipment other than residential-duty commercial water heaters. (i) Gas-fired and oil-fired storage water heaters and storage-type instantaneous water heaters. (ii) Electric storage water heaters and storage-type instantaneous water heaters. (iii) Gas-fired and oil-fired instantaneous water heaters and hot water supply boilers (other than storage-type instantaneous water heaters). (iv) Electric instantaneous water heaters (other than storage-type instantaneous water heaters). (v) Commercial heat pump water heaters. [81 FR 79322, Nov. 10, 2016] Energy Conservation Standards § 431.110 Energy conservation standards and their effective dates. (a) Each commercial storage water heater, instantaneous water heater, and hot water supply boiler (excluding residential-duty commercial water heaters) must meet the applicable energy conservation standard level(s) as specified in the table to this paragraph. Any packaged boiler that provides service water that meets the definition of “commercial packaged boiler” in subpart E of this part, but does not meet the definition of “hot water supply boiler” in subpart G of this part, must meet the requirements that apply to it under subpart E of this part. Table 1 to § 431.110( a Equipment Size Energy conservation standards a Minimum thermal Minimum thermal Maximum standby loss b Maximum standby loss b Electric storage water heaters All N/A N/A 0.30 + 27/V m 0.30 + 27/V m Gas-fired storage water heaters and storage-type instantaneous water heaters All 80 95 Q/800 + 110(V r 1/2 0.86 × [Q/800 + 110(V r 1/2 Oil-fired storage water heaters All 80 80 Q/800 + 110(V r 1/2 Q/800 + 110(V r 1/2 Electric instantaneous water heaters c <10 gal 80 80 N/A m N/A m Gas-fired instantaneous water heaters and hot water supply boilers <10 gal 80 96 N/A r 1/2 N/A r 1/2 Oil-fired instantaneous water heater and hot water supply boilers <10 gal 80 80 N/A r 1/2 N/A r 1/2 a m r b (1) The tank surface area is thermally insulated to R-12.5 or more, with the R-value as defined in § 431.102 (2) A standing pilot light is not used; and (3) For gas-fired or oil-fired storage water heaters, they have a flue damper or fan-assisted combustion. c (b) Each unfired hot water storage tank manufactured on and after October 29, 2003, must have a minimum thermal insulation of R-12.5. (c) Each residential-duty commercial water heater must meet the applicable energy conservation standard level(s) as follows: Table 2 to § 431.110( c Equipment Specifications a Draw pattern Uniform energy factor b Equipment manufactured before October 6, 2026 Equipment manufactured after October 6, 2026 Gas-fired storage >75 kBtu/hr and ≤105 kBtu/hr and ≤120 gal Very Small 0.2674−(0.0009 × V r r r r 0.5374−(0.0009 × V r r r r Oil-fired storage >105 kBtu/hr and ≤140 kBtu/hr and ≤120 gal Very Small 0.2932−(0.0015 × V r r r r 0.2932−(0.0015 × V r r r r Electric instantaneous >12 kW and ≤58.6 kW and ≤2 gal Very Small 0.80 0.80 a b r [88 FR 69822, Oct. 6, 2023] Appendix A to Subpart G of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Thermal Efficiency and Standby Loss of Gas-Fired and Oil-Fired Storage Water Heaters and Storage-Type Instantaneous Water Heaters Note: Prior to November 6, 2017, manufacturers must make any representations with respect to the energy use or efficiency of the subject commercial water heating equipment in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix or the procedures in 10 CFR 431.106 that were in place on January 1, 2016. On and after November 6, 2017, manufacturers must make any representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of gas-fired and oil-fired storage water heaters and storage-type instantaneous water heaters in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix to demonstrate compliance with the energy conservation standards at 10 CFR 431.110. 1. General Determine the thermal efficiency and standby loss (as applicable) in accordance with the following sections of this appendix. Certain sections reference sections of Annex E.1 of ANSI Z21.10.3-2015 (incorporated by reference; see § 431.105). Where the instructions contained in the sections below conflict with instructions in Annex E.1 of ANSI Z21.10.3-2015, the instructions contained in this appendix control. 2. Test Set-Up 2.1. Placement of Water Heater. 3/4 2.2. Installation of Temperature Sensors. The water heater must meet the requirements shown in Figure 2.1, 2.2, or 2.3 (as applicable) at all times during the conduct of the thermal efficiency and standby loss tests. Any factory-supplied heat traps must be installed per the installation instructions while ensuring the requirements in Figure 2.1, 2.2, or 2.3 are met. All dimensions specified in Figure 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3 and in this section are measured from the outer surface of the pipes and water heater outer casing (as applicable). 2.3 Installation of Temperature Sensors for Measurement of Mean Tank Temperature. 2.4. Piping Insulation. 2 2.5. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve Insulation. 2.6. Vent Requirements. 2.7. Energy Consumption. 2.7.1. The quantity and rate of fuel consumed. 2.7.2. The quantity of electricity consumed by factory-supplied water heater components. 3. Test Conditions 3.1. Water Supply 3.1.1. Water Supply Pressure. 3.1.2. Water Supply Temperature. 3.1.3. Isolate the water heater using a shutoff valve in the supply line with an expansion tank installed in the supply line downstream of the shutoff valve. There must be no shutoff means between the expansion tank and the appliance inlet. 3.2. Gas Pressure for Gas-Fired Equipment. 3.3. Ambient Room Temperature. 3.4. Test Air Temperature. 3.5. Maximum Air Draft. 3.6. Setting the Tank Thermostat. 3.6.1. With the supply water temperature set as per section 3.1.2 of this appendix ( i.e., 3.6.2. After the water supply is turned off and the thermostat reduces the fuel supply to a minimum, the maximum water temperature measured by the topmost tank temperature sensor ( i.e., 3.7. Additional Requirements for Oil-Fired Equipment. 3.7.1. Venting Requirements. 3.7.2. Oil Supply. 3.7.2.1. The CO 2 3.7.2.2. The fuel pump pressure is within ± 10 percent of manufacturer's specifications; 3.7.2.3. If either the fuel pump pressure or range for CO 2 2 3.7.2.4. Smoke in the flue does not exceed No. 1 smoke as measured by the procedure in ASTM D2156-09 (Reapproved 2013) (incorporated by reference, see § 431.105). To determine the smoke spot number, connect the smoke measuring device to an open-ended tube. This tube must project into the flue 1/4 1/2 3.7.2.5. If no settings on the water heater have been changed and the water heater has not been turned off since the end of a previously run thermal efficiency or standby loss test, measurement of the CO 2 2 3.8. Data Collection Intervals. 3.8.1. Soak-In Period. 3.8.2. Steady-State Verification Period and Thermal Efficiency Test. Table 3.1—Data To Be Recorded Before and During the Steady-State Verification Period and Thermal Efficiency Test Item recorded Before steady-state Every 1 a Every 10 Gas supply pressure, in w.c. X Gas outlet pressure, in w.c. X Barometric pressure, in Hg X Fuel higher heating value, Btu/ft 3 X Oil pump pressure, psig (oil only) X CO 2 X b Oil smoke spot reading (oil only) X b Air draft, ft/min X Time, minutes/seconds X Fuel weight or volume, lb (oil) or ft 3 X c Supply water temperature (T SWT X Outlet water temperature (T OWT X Ambient room temperature, °F X Test air temperature, °F X Water flow rate, (gpm) X Notes: a b 2 i.e., c 3. Standby Loss Test. Table 3.2—Data To Be Recorded Before and During the Standby Loss Test Item recorded Before test Every 1 minute a Gas supply pressure, in w.c. X Gas outlet pressure, in w.c. X Barometric pressure, in Hg X Fuel higher heating value, Btu/ft 3 X Oil pump pressure, psig (oil only) X CO 2 X b Oil smoke spot reading (oil only) X b Air draft, ft/min X Time, minutes/seconds X Mean tank temperature, °F X c Ambient room temperature, °F X Test air temperature, °F X Notes: a b 2 i.e., c 4. Determination of Storage Volume. 5. Thermal Efficiency Test. i.e., i.e., 5. Steady-State Conditions. 5.1.1. The water flow rate must be maintained within ± 0.25 gallons per minute (gpm) of the initial reading at the start of the steady-state verification period; 5.1.2. Outlet water temperature must be maintained at 70 °F ± 2 °F above supply water temperature; 5.1.3. Fuel input rate must be maintained within ± 2 percent of the rated input certified by the manufacturer; 5.1.4. The supply water temperature must be maintained within ± 0.50 °F of the initial reading at the start of the steady-state verification period; and 5.1.5. The rise between the supply and outlet water temperatures must be maintained within ± 0.50 °F of its initial value taken at the start of the steady-state verification period for units with rated input less than 500,000 Btu/h, and maintained within ± 1.00 °F of its initial value for units with rated input greater than or equal to 500,000 Btu/h. 5.2. Water Flow Measurement. 5. Determination of Fuel Input Rate. 5. Fuel Input Rate Calculation. Where, Q = Fuel input rate, expressed in Btu/h Q s 3 C s H = Higher heating value of fuel, expressed in Btu/ft 3 t = Duration of measurement of fuel consumption 5. Thermal Efficiency Calculation. t Where, K = 1.004 Btu/lb· °F, the nominal specific heat of water at 105 °F W = Total weight of water heated, expressed in lb θ 1 θ 2 Q = Total fuel flow as metered, expressed in ft 3 C s s H. = Higher heating value of the fuel, expressed in Btu/ft 3 E c 6. Standby Loss Test 6.1. If no settings on the water heater have changed and the water heater has not been turned off since a previously run thermal efficiency or standby loss test, skip to section 6.3 of this appendix. Otherwise, conduct the soak-in period according to section 6.2 of this appendix. 6.2. Soak-In Period. 6.3. Begin the standby loss test at the first cut-out following the end of the soak-in period (if applicable); or at a cut-out following the previous thermal efficiency or standby loss test (if applicable). Allow the water heater to remain in standby mode. Do not change any settings on the water heater at any point until measurements for the standby loss test are finished. Begin recording the applicable parameters specified in section 3.8.3 of this appendix. 6. 6. 6. 6. Standby Loss Calculation. 6. Where, ΔT 3 ΔT 4 k = 8.25 Btu/gallon· °F, the nominal specific heat of water V a E t E c t = Total duration of the test in hours C s s Q s 3 H = Higher heating value of fuel, expressed in Btu/ft 3 S = Standby loss, the average hourly energy required to maintain the stored water temperature expressed as a percentage of the heat content of the stored water above room temperature 6.7.2. The standby loss expressed in Btu per hour must be calculated as follows: SL (Btu per hour) = S (% per hour) × 8.25 (Btu/gal- °F) × Measured Volume (gal) × 70 ( °F). Where, SL refers to the standby loss of the water heater, defined as the amount of energy required to maintain the stored water temperature expressed in Btu per hour [81 FR 79323, Nov. 10, 2016] Appendix B to Subpart G of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Standby Loss of Electric Storage Water Heaters and Storage-Type Instantaneous Water Heaters Note: 1. General Determine the standby loss in accordance with the following sections of this appendix. Certain sections reference sections of Annex E.1 of ANSI Z21.10.3-2015 (incorporated by reference; see § 431.105). Where the instructions contained in the sections below conflict with instructions in Annex E.1 of ANSI Z21.10.3-2015, the instructions contained in this appendix control. 2. Test Set-Up 2. Placement of Water Heater. 3/4 2. Installation of Temperature Sensors. The water heater must meet the requirements shown in either Figure 2.1, 2.2, or 2.3 (as applicable) at all times during the conduct of the standby loss test. Any factory-supplied heat traps must be installed per the installation instructions while ensuring the requirements in Figure 2.1, 2.2, or 2.3 are met. All dimensions specified in Figure 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3 are measured from the outer surface of the pipes and water heater outer casing (as applicable). 2.3. Installation of Temperature Sensors for Measurement of Mean Tank Temperature. 2. Piping Insulation. 2 2.5. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve Insulation. 2. Energy Consumption. 3. Test Conditions 3.1. Water Supply 3. Water Supply Pressure. 3.1.2. Water Supply Temperature. 3.1.3. Isolate the water heater using a shutoff valve in the supply line with an expansion tank installed in the supply line downstream of the shutoff valve. There must be no shutoff means between the expansion tank and the appliance inlet. 3.2. Electrical Supply. 3. Ambient Room Temperature. 3. Maximum Air Draft. 3. Setting the Tank Thermostat(s). 3.5.1. For water heaters with a single thermostat, the thermostat setting must be set so that the maximum mean tank temperature after cut-out is 140 °F ± 5 °F. 3.5.2. For water heaters with multiple adjustable thermostats, set only the topmost and bottommost thermostats, and turn off any other thermostats for the duration of the standby loss test. Set the topmost thermostat first to yield a maximum mean water temperature after cut-out of 140 °F ± 5 °F, as calculated using only the temperature readings measured at locations in the tank higher than the heating element corresponding to the topmost thermostat (the lowermost heating element corresponding to the topmost thermostat if the thermostat controls more than one element). While setting the topmost thermostat, all lower thermostats must be turned off so that no elements below that (those) corresponding to the topmost thermostat are in operation. After setting the topmost thermostat, set the bottommost thermostat to yield a maximum mean water temperature after cut-out of 140 °F ± 5 °F. When setting the bottommost thermostat, calculate the mean tank temperature using all the temperature sensors installed in the tank as per section 2.3 of this appendix. 3.6. Data Collection Intervals. 3. Soak-In Period. 3. Standby Loss Test. Table 3.1—Data To Be Recorded Before and During the Standby Loss Test Item recorded Before test Every 1 a Air draft, ft/min X Time, minutes/seconds X Mean tank temperature, °F X b Ambient room temperature, °F X Notes: a b 4. Determination of Storage Volume. 5. Standby Loss Test 5. 5.2. Soak-In Period. 5.3. Begin the standby loss test at the first cut-out following the end of the soak-in period (if applicable), or at a cut-out following the previous standby loss test (if applicable). Allow the water heater to remain in standby mode. At this point, do not change any settings on the water heater until measurements for the standby loss test are finished. Begin recording applicable parameters as specified in section 3.6.2 of this appendix. 5.4. At the second cut-out, record the time and ambient room temperature, and begin measuring the electric consumption. Record the initial mean tank temperature and initial ambient room temperature. For the remainder of the test, continue recording the applicable parameters specified in section 3.6.2 of this appendix. 5.5. Stop the test after the first cut-out that occurs after 24 hours, or at 48 hours, whichever comes first. 5. 5. Standby Loss Calculation. 5. Where, ΔT 3 ΔT 4 k = 8.25 Btu/gallon· °F, the nominal specific heat of water V a E t E c t = Total duration of the test in hours S = Standby loss, the average hourly energy required to maintain the stored water temperature expressed as a percentage of the heat content of the stored water above room temperature [81 FR 79328, Nov. 10, 2016] Appendix C to Subpart G of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Thermal Efficiency and Standby Loss of Gas-Fired and Oil-Fired Instantaneous Water Heaters and Hot Water Supply Boilers (Other Than Storage-Type Instantaneous Water Heaters) Note: Prior to November 6, 2017, manufacturers must make any representations with respect to the energy use or efficiency of the subject commercial water heating equipment in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix or the procedures in 10 CFR 431.106 that were in place on January 1, 2016. On and after November 6, 2017, manufacturers must make any representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of gas-fired and oil-fired instantaneous water heaters and hot water supply boilers (other than storage-type instantaneous water heaters) in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix to demonstrate compliance with the energy conservation standards at 10 CFR 431.110. 1. General Determine the thermal efficiency and standby loss (as applicable) in accordance with the following sections of this appendix. Certain sections reference sections of Annex E.1 of ANSI Z21.10.3-2015 (incorporated by reference; see § 431.105). Where the instructions contained in the sections below conflict with instructions in Annex E.1 of ANSI Z21.10.3-2015, the instructions contained in this appendix control. 2. Test Set-Up 2. Placement of Water Heater. 3/4 2. Test Configuration. 2.2.1. If the instantaneous water heater or hot water supply boiler does not have any external piping, install an outlet water valve within 10 inches of piping length of the water heater jacket or enclosure. If the instantaneous water heater or hot water supply boiler includes external piping assembled at the manufacturer's premises prior to shipment, install water valves in the outlet piping within 5 inches of the end of the piping supplied with the unit. 2. OWT 2.2.2.1. If a recirculating loop with a pump is used, then ensure that the inlet water temperature labeled as T IWT 2.3. Installation of Temperature Sensors 2.3.1. Without Recirculating Loop. 2.3.1.1. Vertical Connections. 2.3.1.2. Horizontal Connections. 2.3.2. With Recirculating Loop. 2.3.3. For water heaters with multiple outlet water connections leaving the water heater jacket that are required to be operated to achieve the rated input, temperature sensors must be installed for each outlet water connection leaving the water heater jacket or enclosure that is used during testing, in accordance with the provisions in sections 2.3.1 and 2.3.2 of this appendix (as applicable). 2. Piping Insulation. 2 2.5. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve Insulation. 2. Vent Requirements. 2. Energy Consumption. 2. 2.7.2. The quantity of electricity consumed by factory-supplied water heater components, and of the test loop recirculating pump, if used. 3. Test Conditions 3.1. Water Supply 3.1.1. Water Supply Pressure. 3. Water Supply Temperature. SWT 3. Gas Pressure for Gas-Fired Equipment. 3.3. Ambient Room Temperature. 3.4. Test Air Temperature. 3. Maximum Air Draft. 3.6. Primary Control 3.6.1. Thermostatically-Activated Water Heaters With an Internal Thermostat. 3.6.1.1. With supply water temperature set as per section 3.1.2 of this appendix ( i.e., 3.6.1.2. After the water supply is turned off and the thermostat reduces the fuel supply to a minimum, the maximum heat exchanger outlet water temperature (T OHX 3.6.1.3. If the water heater includes a built-in safety mechanism that prevents it from achieving a heat exchanger outlet water temperature of 140 °F ± 5 °F, adjust the thermostat to its maximum setting. 3.6.2. Flow-Activated Instantaneous Water Heaters and Thermostatically-Activated Instantaneous Water Heaters With an External Thermostat. i.e., OWT 3.7. Units With Multiple Outlet Water Connections 3.7.1. For each connection leaving the water heater that is required for the unit to achieve the rated input, the outlet water temperature must not differ from that of any other outlet water connection by more than 2 °F during the steady-state verification period and thermal efficiency test. 3.7.2. Determine the outlet water temperature representative for the entire unit at every required measurement interval by calculating the average of the outlet water temperatures measured at each connection leaving the water heater jacket or enclosure that is used during testing. Use the outlet water temperature representative for the entire unit in all calculations for the thermal efficiency and standby loss tests, as applicable. 3.8. Additional Requirements for Oil-Fired Equipment. 3. Venting Requirements. 3.8.2. Oil Supply. 3.8.2.1. The CO 2 3.8.2.2. The fuel pump pressure is within ± 10 percent of manufacturer's specifications; 3.8.2.3. If either the fuel pump pressure or range for CO 2 2 3.8.2.4. Smoke in the flue does not exceed No. 1 smoke as measured by the procedure in ASTM D2156-09 (Reapproved 2013) (incorporated by reference, see § 431.105). To determine the smoke spot number, the smoke measuring device shall be connected to an open-ended tube. This tube must project into the flue 1/4 1/2 3.8.2.5. If no settings on the water heater have been changed and the water heater has not been turned off since the end of a previously run thermal efficiency (or standby loss test for thermostatically-activated instantaneous water heaters with an internal thermostat), measurement of the CO 2 2 2 3. Data Collection Intervals. 3. Steady-State Verification Period and Thermal Efficiency Test. Table 3.1—Data To Be Recorded Before and During the Steady-State Verification Period and Thermal Efficiency Test Item recorded Before Every 1 a Every 10 Gas supply pressure, in w.c. X Gas outlet pressure, in w.c. X Barometric pressure, in Hg X Fuel higher heating value, Btu/ft 3 X Oil pump pressure, psig (oil only) X CO 2 X b Oil smoke spot reading (oil only) X b Air draft, ft/min X Time, minutes/seconds X Fuel weight or volume, lb (oil) or ft 3 X c Supply water temperature (T SWT X Inlet water temperature (T IWT X d Outlet water temperature (T OWT X Ambient room temperature, °F X Test air temperature, °F X Water flow rate, gpm X Notes: a b 2 i.e., c d 3.9.2. Standby Loss Test. Table 3.2—Data To Be Recorded Before and During the Standby Loss Test Item recorded Before test Every 1 a Gas supply pressure, in w.c. X Gas outlet pressure, in w.c. X Barometric pressure, in Hg X Fuel higher heating value, Btu/ft 3 X Oil pump pressure, psig (oil only) X Air draft, ft/min X Time, minutes/seconds X Heat exchanger outlet water temperature (T OHX X Ambient room temperature, °F X Test air temperature, °F X Water flow rate, gpm X b Inlet water temperature (T IWT X b Notes: a b 4. Determination of Storage Volume. 5. Fuel Input Rate 5.1. Determination of Fuel Input Rate. 5.2. Fuel Input Rate Calculation. Where: Q = Fuel input rate, expressed in Btu/h Q s 3 C s s H = Higher heating value of the fuel, expressed as Btu/ft 3 t = Duration of measurement of fuel consumption 6. Thermal Efficiency Test. i.e., i.e., 6.1. Steady-State Conditions. 6.1.1. The water flow rate must be maintained within ± 0.25 gallons per minute (gpm) of the initial reading at the start of the steady-state verification period. 6.1.2. Outlet water temperature must be maintained at 70 °F ± 2 °F above supply water temperature. 6.1.3. Fuel input rate must be maintained within ± 2 percent of the rated input certified by the manufacturer. 6.1.4. The supply water temperature (T SWT IWT 6.1.5. The rise between supply (or inlet if a recirculating loop is used) and outlet water temperatures must be maintained within ± 0.50 °F of its initial value taken at the start of the steady-state verification period for units with rated input less than 500,000 Btu/h, and maintained within ± 1.00 °F of its initial value for units with rated input greater than or equal to 500,000 Btu/h. 6.2. Water Flow Measurement. 6.3. Thermal Efficiency Calculation. t Where: K = 1.004 Btu/lb· °F, the nominal specific heat of water at 105 °F W = Total weight of water heated, lb θ 1 θ 2 Q = Total fuel flow as metered, expressed in ft 3 C s s H = Higher heating value of the fuel, expressed in Btu/ft 3 E c 7. Standby Loss Test. 7.1. Steady-State Verification Period. i.e., 7.1.1. Steady-State Conditions. 7.1.1.1. The water flow rate must be maintained within ± 0.25 gallons per minute (gpm) of the initial reading at the start of the steady-state verification period; 7.1.1.2. Fuel input rate must be maintained within ± 2 percent of the rated input certified by the manufacturer; 7.1.1.3. The supply water temperature (T SWT IWT 7.1.1.4. The rise between the supply (or inlet if a recirculating loop is used) and outlet water temperatures must be maintained within ± 0.50 °F of its initial value taken at the start of the steady-state verification period for units with rated input less than 500,000 Btu/h, and maintained within ± 1.00 °F of its initial value for units with rated input greater than or equal to 500,000 Btu/h. 7.2. Thermostatically-Activated Instantaneous Water Heaters with an Internal Thermostat. 7.2.1. Immediately after the thermal efficiency test or the steady-state verification period (as applicable), turn off the outlet water valve(s) (installed as per the provisions in section 2.2 of this appendix), and the water pump (if applicable) simultaneously and ensure that there is no flow of water through the water heater. 7 7 OHX 7 7 7 Standby Loss Calculation. 7 Where: ΔT 3 OHX ΔT 4 OHX OHX K = 8.25 Btu/gallon· °F, the nominal specific heat of water V a E t E c T = Total duration of the test in hours C s s Q s 3 H = Higher heating value of gas or oil, expressed in Btu/ft 3 S = Standby loss, the average hourly energy required to maintain the stored water temperature expressed as a percentage of the initial heat content of the stored water above room temperature 7.2.6.2. The standby loss expressed in Btu per hour must be calculated as follows: SL (Btu per hour) = S (% per hour) × 8.25 (Btu/gal- °F) × Measured Volume (gal) × 70 ( °F). Where, SL refers to the standby loss of the water heater, defined as the amount of energy required to maintain the stored water temperature expressed in Btu per hour. 7.3. Flow-Activated and Thermostatically-Activated Instantaneous Water Heaters with an External Thermostat. 7.3.1. Immediately after the thermal efficiency test or the steady-state verification period (as applicable), de-energize the primary control to end the call for heating. If the main burners do not cut out, then turn off the fuel supply. 7. 7.3.1.2. If the unit has an integral pump purge functionality, allow the pump purge operation to continue. After the pump purge operation is complete, immediately turn off the outlet water valve and water pump and continue recording the required parameters for the remainder of the test. 7.3.2. Recording Data 7.3.2.1. For units with pump purge functionality, record the initial heat exchanger outlet water temperature (T OHX OHX 7.3.2.2. For unit s OHX OHX 7.3.3. Stopping Criteria. 7.3.3.1. The heat exchanger outlet water temperature (T OHX 7.3.3.2. 24 hours have elapsed from the start of the test. 7.3.4. At the end of the test, record the final heat exchanger outlet water temperature (T OHX 7.3.5. Standby Loss Calculation 7.3.5.1. Once the test is complete, use the following equation to calculate the standby loss as a percentage (per hour) of the heat content of the stored water above room temperature: Where, ΔT 1 OHX OHX ΔT 2 OHX K = 8.25 Btu/gallon· °F, the nominal specific heat of water V a E t E c t = Total duration of the test in hours S = Standby loss, the average hourly energy required to maintain the stored water temperature expressed as a percentage of the initial heat content of the stored water above room temperature 7.3.5.2. The standby loss expressed in terms of Btu per hour must be calculated as follows: SL (Btu per hour) = S (% per hour) × 8.25 (Btu/gal- °F) × Measured Volume (gal) × 70 ( °F) Where, SL refers to the standby loss of the water heater, defined as the amount of energy required to maintain the stored water temperature expressed in Btu per hour. [81 FR 79332, Nov. 10, 2016] Appendix D to Subpart G of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Standby Loss of Electric Instantaneous Water Heaters (Other Than Storage-Type Instantaneous Water Heaters) Note: 1. General Determine the standby loss (as applicable) in accordance with the following sections of this appendix. 2. Test Set-Up 2. Placement of Water Heater. 3/4 2. Test Configuration. 2.2.1. If the instantaneous water heater does not have any external piping, install an outlet water valve within 10 inches of the piping length of the water heater jacket or enclosure. If the instantaneous water heater includes external piping assembled at the manufacturer's premises prior to shipment, install water valves in the outlet piping within 5 inches of the end of the piping supplied with the unit. 2.2.2. If the water heater is not able to achieve an outlet water temperature of 70 °F ± 2 °F above the supply water temperature at a constant maximum electricity input rate, a recirculating loop with pump as shown in Figure 2.4 of this appendix must be used. 2. IWT 2.3. Installation of Temperature Sensors 2.3.1. Without Recirculating Loop 2.3.1.1. Vertical Connections. 2.3.1.2. Horizontal Connections. 2.3.2. With Recirculating Loop. 2.3.3. For water heaters with multiple outlet water connections leaving the water heater jacket that are required to be operated to achieve the rated input, temperature sensors must be installed for each outlet water connection leaving the water heater jacket or enclosure that is used during testing, in accordance with sections 2.3.1 and 2.3.2 of this appendix. 2.4. Piping Insulation. t2 2.5. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve Insulation. 2. Energy Consumption. 3. Test Conditions 3.1. Water Supply 3.1.1. Water Supply Pressure. 3.1.2. Water Supply Temperature. SWT .2. Electrical Supply. 3. Ambient Room Temperature. 3.4. Maximum Air Draft. 3.5. Primary Control 3.5.1. Thermostatically-Activated Water Heaters with an Internal Thermostat. 3.5.1.1. With supply water temperature as per section 3.1.2 of this appendix ( i.e., 3.5.1.2. After the water supply is turned off and the thermostat reduces the electricity supply to the heating element to a minimum, the maximum heat exchanger outlet water temperature (T OHX 3.5.1.3. If the water heater includes a built-in safety mechanism that prevents it from achieving a heat exchanger outlet water temperature of 140 °F ± 5 °F, adjust the thermostat to its maximum setting. 3.5.2. Flow-Activated Instantaneous Water Heaters and Thermostatically-Activated Instantaneous Water Heaters with an External Thermostat. i.e., OWT 3.6. For Units With Multiple Outlet Water Connections 3.6.1. For each connection leaving the water heater that is required for the unit to achieve the rated input, the outlet water temperature must not differ from that of any other outlet water connection by more than 2 °F during the steady-state verification period prior to the standby loss test. 3.6.2. Determine the outlet water temperature representative for the entire unit at every required measurement interval by calculating the average of the outlet water temperatures measured at each connection leaving the water heater jacket or enclosure that is used during testing. Use the outlet water temperature representative for the entire unit in all calculations for the standby loss test. 3.7. Data Collection Intervals. 3.7.1. Steady-State Verification Period. Table 3.1—Data to be Recorded Before and During the Steady-State Verification Period Item recorded Before Every 1 a Every 10 Air draft, ft/min X Time, minutes/seconds X Electricity Consumed, Btu X Supply water temperature (T SWT X Inlet water temperature (T IWT X b Outlet water temperature (T OWT X Ambient room temperature, °F X Water flow rate, (gpm) X Notes: a b 3.7.2. Standby Loss Test. Table 3.2—Data to be Recorded Before and During the Standby Loss Test Item recorded Before test Every 1 a Air draft, ft/min X Time, minutes/seconds X Heat exchanger outlet water temperature, °F (T OHX X Ambient room temperature, °F X Note: a 4. Determination of Storage Volume. 5. Standby Loss Test. Set the primary control in accordance with section 3.5 of this appendix, such that the primary control is always calling for heat and the water heater is operating at its full rated input. Begin drawing water from the unit by opening the main supply and the outlet water valve, and adjust the water flow rate to achieve an outlet water temperature of 70 °F ± 2 °F above supply water temperature. At this time, begin recording the parameters specified in section 3.7.1 of this appendix. The steady-state verification period is complete when there is a continuous 30-minute period where the steady-state conditions specified in section 5.1 of this appendix are met, as confirmed by consecutive readings of the relevant parameters recorded at 1-minute intervals (except for electric power input rate, which is determined at 10-minute intervals, as specified in section 3.7.1 of this appendix). 5.1. Steady-State Conditions. 5.1.1. The water flow rate must be maintained within ± 0.25 gallons per minute (gpm) of the initial reading at the start of the steady-state verification period; 5.1.2. Electric power input rate must be maintained within 2 percent of the rated input certified by the manufacturer. 5.1.3. The supply water temperature (or inlet water temperature if a recirculating loop is used) must be maintained within ± 0.50 °F of the initial reading at the start of the steady-state verification period; and 5.1.4. The rise between the supply (or inlet if a recirculating loop is used) and outlet water temperatures is maintained within ± 0.50 °F of its initial value taken at the start of the steady-state verification period for units with rated input less than 500,000 Btu/h, and maintained within ± 1.00 °F of its initial value for units with rated input greater than or equal to 500,000 Btu/h. 5.2. Thermostatically-Activated Instantaneous Water Heaters with an Internal Thermostat. 5.2.1. Immediately after the steady-state verification period, turn off the outlet water valve(s) (installed as per the provisions in section 2.2 of this appendix), and the water pump (if applicable) simultaneously and ensure that there is no flow of water through the water heater. 5. 5. OHX 5. 5. 5. Standby Loss Calculation. Where, ΔT 3 OHX ΔT 4 OHX OHX k = 8.25 Btu/gallon· °F, the nominal specific heat of water V a E t E c t = Total duration of the test in hours S = Standby loss, the average hourly energy required to maintain the stored water temperature expressed as a percentage of the initial heat content of the stored water above room temperature 5.3. Flow-Activated and Thermostatically-Activated Instantaneous Water Heaters with an External Thermostat. 5.3.1. Immediately after the steady-state verification period, de-energize the primary control to end the call for heating. If the heating elements do not cut out, then turn off the electricity supply to the heating elements. After the heating elements have cut-out, or the electricity supply to the heating elements is turned off, begin recording the measurements as per the requirements in section 3.7.2 of this appendix. 5.3.1.1. If the unit does not have an integral pump purge functionality, then turn off the outlet water valve and water pump immediately after the main burners cut-out. 5.3.1.2. If the unit has an integral pump purge functionality, allow the pump purge operation to continue. After the pump purge operation is complete, immediately turn off the outlet water valve and water pump and continue recording the required parameters for the remainder of the test. 5.3.2. Recording Data 5.3.2.1. For units with pump purge functionality, record the initial heat exchanger outlet water temperature (T OHX OHX 5.3.2.2. For units not equipped with pump purge functionality, begin recording the measurements as per the requirements of section 3.7.2 of this appendix when the main heating element(s) cut-out or the electricity supply to the heating element(s) is turned off. Specifically, record the time as t = 0, and record the initial heat exchanger outlet water temperature (T OHX OHX 5.3.3. Stopping Criteria. 5.3.3.1. The heat exchanger outlet water temperature (T OHX 5.3.3.2. 24 hours have elapsed from the start of the test. 5. OHX 5.3.5. Standby Loss Calculation. Where, ΔT 1 OHX OHX ΔT 2 OHX k = 8.25 Btu/gallon· °F, the nominal specific heat of water V a E t E c t = Total duration of the test in hours S = Standby loss, the average hourly energy required to maintain the stored water temperature expressed as a percentage of the initial heat content of the stored water above room temperature [81 FR 79340, Nov. 10, 2016] Appendix E to Subpart G of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Energy Efficiency of Commercial Heat Pump Water Heaters Note: 1. General. h 2. Definitions and Symbols. 3. Instrumentation. 4. Test Set-Up. 4. 4.1.1. For air-source CHPWHs, set up the unit for testing as per section 7.1 and Figure 5a of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012 for CHPWHs without an integral storage tank, and as per Figure 6 in section 7.7.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012 for CHPWHs with an integral storage tank. 4. 4. 4. 2 4.3. Install the thermocouples, including the room thermocouples, as per the instructions in sections 7.3.1, 7.3.2, and 7.3.3 (as applicable) of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012. 4.4. Section 7.6 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012 must be used if the manufacturer neither submits nor specifies a water pump applicable for the unit for laboratory testing. 4.5. Install the temperature sensors at the locations specified in Figure 5a, 5b, 5c, 6, 7, or 8 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012, as applicable as per section 4.1 of this appendix. The sensor shall be installed in such a manner that the sensing portion of the device is positioned within the water flow and as close as possible to the center line of the pipe. Follow the instructions provided in sections 7.7.7.1 and 7.7.7.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012 to install the temperature and flow-sensing instruments. 4.6. Use the following evaporator side rating conditions as applicable for each category of CHPWHs. These conditions are also mentioned in Table 5.1 of this appendix: 4.6.1. For air-source CHPWHs, maintain the evaporator air entering dry-bulb temperature at 80.6 °F ± 1 °F and wet-bulb temperature at 71.2 °F ± 1 °F throughout the conduct of the test. 4.6.2. For direct geo-exchange CHPWHs, maintain the evaporator refrigerant temperature at 32 °F ± 1 °F. 4.6.3. For indoor water-source CHPWHs, maintain the evaporator entering water temperature at 68 °F ± 1 °F. 4.6.4. For ground water-source CHPWHs, maintain the evaporator entering water temperature at

50 °F ± 1 °F. 4.6.5. For ground-source closed-loop CHPWHs, maintain the evaporator entering water temperature at 32 °F ± 1 °F. 4.6.5.1. For ground-source closed-loop CHPWHs, the evaporator water must be mixed with 15-percent methanol by-weight to allow the solution to achieve the rating conditions required in section 4.6.5. 4.7. The CHPWH being tested must be installed as per the instructions specified in sections 4.1 to 4.6 (as applicable) of this appendix. For all other installation requirements, use section 7.7.4 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012 to resolve any issues related to installation (other than what is specified in this test procedure) of the equipment for testing. Do not make any alterations to the equipment except as specified in this appendix for installation, testing, and the attachment of required test apparatus and instruments. 4. 4.9. If the CHPWH is equipped with a thermostat that is used to control the throttling valve of the equipment, then use the provisions in section 7.7.7.3 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012 to set up the thermostat. 4.10. For CHPWHs equipped with an integral storage tank, supplemental heat inputs such as electric resistance elements must be disabled as per section 7.7.8 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012. 4.11. Install instruments to measure the electricity supply to the equipment as specified in section 7.5 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012. 5. Test Procedure Test all CHPWHs that are not equipped with an integral storage tank as per the provisions described in ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012 for “Type IV” equipment as defined in section 4.4 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012. Test all CHPWHs that are equipped with an integral storage tank as per the provisions described in ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012 for “Type V” equipment as defined in section 4.5 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012. Tests for all CHPWHs must follow the steps described below. 5.1. Supply the CHPWH unit with electricity at the voltage specified by the manufacturer. Follow the provisions in section 8.2.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012 to maintain the electricity supply at the required level. 5.1.1. For models with multiple voltages specified by the manufacturer, use the minimum voltage specified by the manufacturer to conduct the test. Maintain the voltage as per the limits specified in section 8.2.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012. The test may be repeated at other voltages at the manufacturer's discretion. 5.2. Set the condenser supply water temperature and outlet water temperature per the following provisions and as set forth in Table 5.1 of this section: Table 5.1—Evaporator and Condenser Side Rating Conditions Category of CHPWH Evaporator side rating conditions Condenser side rating conditions Air-source commercial heat pump water heater Evaporator entering air conditions: Entering water temperature: 70 °F ± 1 °F. Vary water flow rate (if needed) to achieve the outlet water temperature as specified in section 8.7.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012. If the required outlet water temperature as specified in section 8.7.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012 is not met even after varying the flow rate, then change the condenser entering water temperature to 110 °F ± 1 °F. Vary flow rate to achieve the conditions in section 8.7.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012. Direct geo-exchange commercial heat pump water heater Evaporator refrigerant temperature: 32 °F ± 1 °F Entering water temperature: 110 °F ± 1 °F. Indoor water-source commercial heat pump water heater Evaporator entering water temperature: 68 °F ± 1 °F Entering water temperature: 110 °F ± 1 °F. Ground water-source commercial heat pump water heater Evaporator entering water temperature: 50 °F ± 1 °F Entering water temperature: 110 °F ± 1 °F. Ground-source closed-loop commercial heat pump water heater Evaporator entering water temperature: 32 °F ± 1 °F Entering water temperature: 110 °F ± 1 °F. 5.2.1. For air-source CHPWHs: 5.2.1.1. Set the supply water temperature to 70 °F ± 1 °F. The water pressure must not exceed the maximum working pressure rating for the equipment under test. 5.2.1.2. Use the provisions in section 8.7.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012 to set the tank thermostat for CHPWHs equipped with an integral storage tank. 5.2.1.3. Initiate operation at the rated pump flow rate and measure the outlet water temperature. If the outlet water temperature is maintained at 120 °F ± 5 °F with no variation in excess of 2 °F over a three-minute period, as required by section 8.7.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012, skip to section 5.3 of this appendix. 5.2.1.4. If the outlet water temperature condition as specified in section 8.7.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012 is not achieved, adjust the water flow rate over the range of the pump's capacity. If, after varying the water flow rate, the outlet water temperature is maintained at 120 °F ± 5 °F with no variation in excess of 2 °F over a three-minute period, as required by section 8.7.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012, skip to section 5.3 of this appendix. 5.2.1.5. If, after adjusting the water flow rate within the range that is achievable by the pump, the outlet water temperature condition as specified in section 8.7.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012 is still not achieved, then change the supply water temperature to 110 °F ± 1 °F and repeat the instructions from sections 5.2.1.2 and 5.2.1.4 of this appendix. 5.2.1. 6. If the outlet water temperature condition cannot be met, then a test procedure waiver is necessary to specify an alternative set of test conditions. 5.2.2. For direct geo-exchange, indoor water-source, ground-source closed-loop, and ground water-source CHPWHs use the following steps: 5.2.2.1. Set the condenser supply water temperature to 110 °F ± 1 °F. The water pressure must not exceed the maximum working pressure rating for the equipment under test. 5.2.2.2. Use the provisions in section 8.7.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012 to set the tank thermostat for CHPWHs equipped with an integral storage tank. 5.2.2.3. Follow the steps specified in section 8.7.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012 to obtain an outlet water temperature of 120 °F ± 5 °F with no variation in excess of 2 °F over a three-minute period. 5.3. Conduct the test as per section 9.1.1, “Full Input Rating,” of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012. The flow rate, “FR,” referred to in section 9.1.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012 is the flow rate of water through the CHPWH expressed in gallons per minute obtained after following the steps in section 5.2 of this appendix. Use the evaporator side rating conditions specified in section 4.6 of this appendix to conduct the test as per section 9.1.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE 118.1-2012. 5.4. Calculate the COP h [81 FR 79346, Nov. 10, 2016] Subpart H—Automatic Commercial Ice Makers Source: 70 FR 60415, Oct. 18, 2005, unless otherwise noted. § 431.131 Purpose and scope. This subpart contains energy conservation requirements for commercial ice makers, pursuant to Part C of Title III of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 6311-6317. § 431.132 Definitions concerning automatic commercial ice makers. Automatic commercial ice maker (1) Consists of a condensing unit and ice-making section operating as an integrated unit, with means for making and harvesting ice; and (2) May include means for storing ice, dispensing ice, or storing and dispensing ice. Baffle Basic model Batch type ice maker Condenser water use Continuous type ice maker Energy use Harvest rate Ice hardness factor Ice-making head Portable automatic commercial ice maker Potable water use Refrigerated storage automatic commercial ice maker Remote compressor Remote condensing Self-contained [70 FR 60415, Oct. 18, 2005, as amended at 71 FR 71371, Dec. 8, 2006; 76 FR 12503, Mar. 7, 2011; 77 FR 1613, Jan. 11, 2012; 87 FR 65899, Nov. 1, 2022] Test Procedures § 431.133 Materials incorporated by reference. Certain material is incorporated by reference into this subpart with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, the U.S. Department of Energy (DOE) must publish a document in the Federal Register [email protected], www.energy.gov/eere/buildings/building-technologies-office. [email protected], www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html. (a) AHRI. [email protected]; www.ahrinet.org. (1) AHRI Standard 810 (I-P)-2016 with Addendum 1, Performance Rating of Automatic Commercial Ice-Makers, (2) [Reserved] (b) ASHRAE. [email protected]; www.ashrae.org. (1) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 29-2015, Method of Testing Automatic Ice Makers, (2) [Reserved] [87 FR 65900, Nov. 1, 2022] § 431.134 Uniform test methods for the measurement of harvest rate, energy consumption, and water consumption of automatic commercial ice makers. Note 1 to § 431.134: On or after October 27, 2023, any representations, including certifications of compliance for automatic commercial ice makers, made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of automatic commercial ice makers must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this section. Prior to October 27, 2023, any representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of automatic commercial ice makers must be made either in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this section or with the results of testing pursuant to this section as it appeared in 10 CFR 431.134 in the 10 CFR parts 200-499 edition revised as of January 1, 2022. (a) Scope. (b) Testing and calculations. see (c) Test setup and equipment configurations Baffles. (2) Clearances. (3) Purge settings. (4) Ambient conditions measurement Ambient temperature sensors. (ii) Ambient relative humidity measurement. (iii) Ambient conditions sensors shielding. (iv) Alternate ambient conditions measurement location. (5) Collection container for batch type automatic commercial ice makers with harvest rates less than or equal to 50 lb/24 h. (d) Test conditions Relative humidity. (2) Inlet water pressure. (e) Stabilization Percent difference calculation. (2) Automatic commercial ice makers with harvest rates greater than 50lb/24 h. (3) Automatic commercial ice makers with harvest rates less than or equal to 50 lb/24 h. (f) Calculations. (g) Rounding. (h) Continuous type automatic commercial ice makers Ice hardness adjustment Calorimeter constant. (ii) Ice hardness factor. (iii) Ice hardness adjustment calculation. (2) [Reserved] (i) Automatic commercial ice makers with automatic dispensers. (j) Portable automatic commercial ice makers. (k) Self-contained refrigerated storage automatic commercial ice makers. i.e., [87 FR 65900, Nov. 1, 2022] Energy Conservation Standards § 431.136 Energy conservation standards and their effective dates. (a) All basic models of commercial ice makers must be tested for performance using the applicable DOE test procedure in § 431.134, be compliant with the applicable standards set forth in paragraphs (b) through (d) of this section, and be certified to the Department of Energy under 10 CFR part 429 of this chapter. (b) Each cube type automatic commercial ice maker with capacities between 50 and 2,500 pounds per 24-hour period manufactured on or after January 1, 2010 and before January 28, 2018, shall meet the following standard levels: Equipment type Type of cooling Harvest rate Maximum Maximum 1 Ice-Making Head Water <500 7.8-0.0055H 2 200-0.022H. Ice-Making Head Water ≥500 and <1,436 5.58-0.0011H 200-0.022H. Ice-Making Head Water ≥1,436 4.0 200-0.022H. Ice-Making Head Air <450 10.26-0.0086H Not Applicable. Ice-Making Head Air ≥450 6.89-0.0011H Not Applicable. Remote Condensing (but not remote compressor) Air <1,000 8.85-0.0038H Not Applicable. Remote Condensing (but not remote compressor) Air ≥1,000 5.1 Not Applicable. Remote Condensing and Remote Compressor Air <934 8.85-0.0038H Not Applicable. Remote Condensing (but not remote compressor) Air ≥934 5.3 Not Applicable. Self-Contained Water <200 11.40-0.019H 191-0.0315H. Self-Contained Water ≥200 7.6 191-0.0315H. Self-Contained Air <175 18.0-0.0469H Not Applicable. Self-Contained Air ≥175 9.8 Not Applicable. 1 2 Source: 42 U.S.C. 6313(d). (c) Each batch type automatic commercial ice maker with capacities between 50 and 4,000 pounds per 24-hour period manufactured on or after January 28, 2018, shall meet the following standard levels: Equipment type Type of cooling Harvest rate Maximum 1 Maximum 2 Ice-Making Head Water < 300 6.88-0.0055H 200-0.022H. Ice-Making Head Water ≥300 and <850 5.80-0.00191H 200-0.022H. Ice-Making Head Water ≥850 and <1,500 4.42-0.00028H 200-0.022H. Ice-Making Head Water ≥1,500 and <2,500 4.0 200-0.022H. Ice-Making Head Water ≥2,500 and <4,000 4.0 145. Ice-Making Head Air < 300 10-0.01233H NA. Ice-Making Head Air ≥ 300 and < 800 7.05-0.0025H NA. Ice-Making Head Air ≥ 800 and < 1,500 5.55-0.00063H NA. Ice-Making Head Air ≥ 1500 and < 4,000 4.61 NA. Remote Condensing (but not remote compressor) Air < 988 7.97-0.00342H NA. Remote Condensing (but not remote compressor) Air ≥ 988 and < 4,000 4.59 NA. Remote Condensing and Remote Compressor Air < 930 7.97-0.00342H NA. Remote Condensing and Remote Compressor Air ≥ 930 and < 4,000 4.79 NA. Self-Contained Water < 200 9.5-0.019H 191-0.0315H. Self-Contained Water ≥ 200 and < 2,500 5.7 191-0.0315H. Self-Contained Water ≥ 2,500 and < 4,000 5.7 112. Self-Contained Air < 110 14.79-0.0469H NA. Self-Contained Air ≥ 110 and < 200 12.42-0.02533H NA. Self-Contained Air ≥ 200 and < 4,000 7.35 NA. 1 2 (d) Each continuous type automatic commercial ice maker with capacities between 50 and 4,000 pounds per 24-hour period manufactured on or after January 28, 2018, shall meet the following standard levels: Equipment type Type of cooling Harvest rate Maximum 1 Maximum 2 Ice-Making Head Water <801 6.48-0.00267H 180-0.0198H. Ice-Making Head Water ≥801 and <2,500 4.34 180-0.0198H. Ice-Making Head Water ≥2,500 and <4,000 4.34 130.5. Ice-Making Head Air <310 9.19-0.00629H NA. Ice-Making Head Air ≥310 and <820 8.23-0.0032H NA. Ice-Making Head Air ≥820 and <4,000 5.61 NA. Remote Condensing (but not remote compressor) Air <800 9.7-0.0058H NA. Remote Condensing (but not remote compressor) Air ≥800 and <4,000 5.06 NA. Remote Condensing and Remote Compressor Air <800 9.9-0.0058H NA. ≥800 and <4,000 5.26 NA. Self-Contained Water <900 7.6-0.00302H 153-0.0252H. Self-Contained Water ≥900 and <2,500 4.88 153-0.0252H. Self-Contained Water ≥2,500 and <4,000 4.88 90. Self-Contained Air <200 14.22-0.03H NA. Self-Contained Air ≥200 and <700 9.47-0.00624H NA. Self-Contained Air ≥700 and <4,000 5.1 NA. 1 2 [80 FR 4754, Jan. 28, 2015] Subpart I—Commercial Clothes Washers Source: 70 FR 60416, Oct. 18, 2005, unless otherwise noted. § 431.151 Purpose and scope. This subpart contains energy conservation requirements for commercial clothes washers, pursuant to Part C of Title III of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 6311-6317. § 431.152 Definitions concerning commercial clothes washers. AEER Basic model Commercial clothes washer (1) Has a clothes container compartment that— (i) For horizontal-axis clothes washers, is not more than 3.5 cubic feet; and (ii) For vertical-axis clothes washers, is not more than 4.0 cubic feet; and (2) Is designed for use in— (i) Applications in which the occupants of more than one household will be using the clothes washer, such as multi-family housing common areas and coin laundries; or (ii) Other commercial applications. IWF MEF J2 WER [87 FR 33405, June 1, 2022] Test Procedures § 431.154 Test procedures. The test procedures for clothes washers in appendix J2 to subpart B of part 430 must be used to determine compliance with the energy conservation standards at § 431.156(b). [87 FR 33405, June 1, 2022] Energy Conservation Standards § 431.156 Energy and water conservation standards and effective dates. (a) Each commercial clothes washer manufactured on or after January 8, 2013, and before January 1, 2018, shall have a modified energy factor no less than and a water factor no greater than: Equipment class Modified energy factor (MEF), cu. ft./kWh/cycle Water factor (WF), gal./cu. ft./cycle Top-Loading 1.60 8.5 Front-Loading 2.00 5.5 (b) Each commercial clothes washer manufactured on or after January 1, 2018 shall have a modified energy factor no less than and an integrated water factor no greater than: Equipment class Modified energy factor (MEF J2 cu. ft./kWh/cycle Integrated Water gal./cu. ft./cycle Top-Loading 1.35 8.8 Front-Loading 2.00 4.1 [76 FR 69123, Nov. 8, 2011, as amended at 79 FR 74541, Dec. 15, 2014; 81 FR 20529, Apr. 8, 2016] Subpart J—Fans and Blowers Source: 86 FR 46590, Aug. 19, 2021, unless otherwise noted. § 431.171 Purpose and scope. This subpart contains provisions regarding fans and blowers, pursuant to Part C of Title III of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 6311-6317. This subpart does not cover “ceiling fans” as that term is defined and addressed in part 430 this chapter, nor does it cover “furnace fans” as that term is defined and addressed in part 430 of this chapter. § 431.172 Definitions. Air circulating axial panel fan Air circulating fan Air circulating fan discharge area Air circulating fan outlet area Air-cooled steam condenser Axial inline fan Axial panel fans Basic model, e.g., (1) All variations of blade pitches of an adjustable-pitch axial fan may be considered a single basic model; and (2) All variations of impeller widths and impeller diameters of a given full-width impeller and full-diameter impeller centrifugal fan may be considered a single basic model. Box fan Centrifugal housed fan Centrifugal inline fan Centrifugal unhoused fan Cross-flow fan Cylindrical air circulating fan Evaporative field erected closed-circuit cooling tower Evaporative field erected open-circuit cooling tower Fan blower Fan static air power Fan total air power Field erected air-cooled (dry) cooler Field erected evaporative condenser Full-diameter impeller Full-width impeller Housed air circulating fan head means Housed centrifugal air circulating fan Induced flow fan Jet fan Packaged air-cooled (dry) cooler Packaged evaporative closed-circuit cooling tower Packaged evaporative condenser Packaged evaporative open-circuit cooling tower Power roof ventilator Radial-housed fan Safety Fan (1) A reversible axial fan in cylindrical housing that is designed and marketed for use in ducted tunnel ventilation that will reverse operation under emergency ventilation conditions; (2) A fan for use in explosive atmospheres tested and marked according to the English version of ISO 80079-36:2016 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.173); (3) An electric-motor-driven-Positive Pressure Ventilator as defined in AMCA 240-15 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.173); (4) A fan bearing a listing for “Power Ventilators for Smoke Control Systems” in compliance with UL 705 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.173); or (5) A laboratory exhaust fan designed and marketed specifically for exhausting contaminated air vertically away from a building using a high-velocity discharge. Unhoused air circulating fan head [88 FR 27389, May 1, 2023, as amended at 88 FR 53375, Aug. 8, 2023] § 431.173 Materials incorporated by reference. (a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this subpart with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, DOE must publish a document in the Federal Register [email protected] https://www.energy.gov/eere/buildings/building-technologies-office. www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html [email protected]. (b) AMCA. www.amca.org. (1) ANSI/AMCA Standard 210-16 (“AMCA 210-16”), Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating, ANSI-approved August 26, 2016; IBR approved for § 431.172; appendix A to this subpart. (Co-published as ASHRAE 51-16). (2) ANSI/AMCA Standard 214-21 (“AMCA 214-21”), Test Procedure for Calculating Fan Energy Index (FEI) for Commercial and Industrial Fans and Blowers, (3) ANSI/AMCA Standard 230-23 (“AMCA 230-23”), Laboratory Methods of Testing Air Circulating Fans for Rating and Certification, (4) ANSI/AMCA Standard 240-15 (“AMCA 240-15”), Laboratory Methods of Testing Positive Pressure Ventilators for Aerodynamic Performance Rating, (c) ISO. www.iso.org. (1) ISO 5801:2017(E) (“ISO 5801:2017”), Fans—Performance testing using standardized airways, (2) ISO 80079-36:2016, Explosive atmospheres—Part 36: Non-electrical equipment for explosive atmospheres—Basic method and requirements, (d) UL. www.shopulstandards.com. (1) UL 705, Standard for Safety for Power Ventilators, (2) [Reserved]. [88 FR 27390, May 1, 2023, as amended at 88 FR 53375, Aug. 8, 2023] § 431.174 Test Procedure for fans or blowers. (a) Scope for fans and blowers other than air circulating fans. (1) Is a centrifugal housed fan; radial housed fan; centrifugal inline fan; centrifugal unhoused fan; centrifugal power roof ventilator exhaust fan; centrifugal power roof ventilator supply fan; axial inline fan; axial panel fan; or axial power roof ventilator fan; (2) Is not: (i) A radial housed unshrouded fan with blade diameter at tip less than 30 inches or a blade width of less than 3 inches; (ii) A safety fan; (iii) An induced flow fan; (iv) A jet fan; (v) A cross-flow fan; (vi) A fan manufactured exclusively to be powered by internal combustion engines; (vii) A fan that create a vacuum of 30 inches water gauge or greater; (viii) A fan that is designed and marketed to operate at or above 482 degrees Fahrenheit (250 degrees Celsius); or (ix) A fan and blower embedded in the equipment listed in paragraph (a)(3) of this section; (3) Is not an embedded fan subject to the following exclusions: (i) The test procedure in this section does not apply to fans or blowers that are embedded in: (A) Single phase central air conditioners and heat pumps rated with a certified cooling capacity less than 65,000 British thermal units per hour (“Btu/h”) cooling capacity, that are subject to DOE's energy conservation standard at 10 CFR 430.32(c); (B) Three phase, air-cooled, small commercial packaged air-conditioning and heating equipment rated with a certified cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu/h cooling capacity, that are subject to DOE's energy conservation standard at § 431.97(b); (C) Transport refrigeration ( i.e., (D) Vacuum cleaners; (E) Heat Rejection Equipment: Packaged evaporative open-circuit cooling towers; Evaporative field-erected open-circuit cooling towers; Packaged evaporative closed-circuit cooling towers; Evaporative field-erected closed-circuit cooling towers; Packaged evaporative condensers; Field-erected evaporative condensers; Packaged air-cooled (dry) coolers; Field-erected air-cooled (dry) cooler; Air-cooled steam condensers; Hybrid (water saving) versions of all of the previously listed equipment that contain both evaporative and air-cooled heat exchange sections; (F) Air curtains; and (G) Direct expansion-dedicated outdoor air system that are subject to any of DOE's test procedures in appendix B to subpart F of this part. (ii) The test procedure in this section does not apply to supply or condenser fans or blowers that are embedded in: (A) Air-cooled commercial package air conditioners and heat pumps (“CUAC,” “CUHP”) with a certified cooling capacity between 5.5 ton (65,000 Btu/h) and 63.5 ton (760,000 Btu/h) that are subject to DOE's energy conservation standard at § 431.97(b); (B) Water-cooled and evaporatively-cooled commercial air conditioners that are subject to DOE's energy conservation standard at § 431.97(b); (C) Water-source heat pumps that are subject to DOE's energy conservation standard at § 431.97(b); (D) Single package vertical air conditioners and heat pumps that are subject to DOE's energy conservation standard at § 431.97(d); (E) Packaged terminal air conditioners (“PTAC”) and packaged terminal heat pumps (PTHP) that are subject to DOE's energy conservation standard at § 431.97(c); (F) Computer room air conditioners that are subject to DOE's energy conservation standard at § 431.97(e); and (G) Variable refrigerant flow multi-split air conditioners and heat pumps that are subject to DOE's energy conservation standard at § 431.97(f); and (4) In addition, the test procedure is only applicable to fan or blower duty points with the following characteristics, measured or calculated in accordance with the test procedure set forth in appendix A of this subpart: (i)(A) Fan shaft input power equal to or greater than 1 horsepower; or (B) Fan electrical power equal to or greater than 0.89 kW; and (ii)(A) Fan static air power equal to or less than 150 horsepower for fans using a static pressure basis fan energy index (“FEI”) in accordance with the required test configuration listed in table 7.1 of AMCA 214-21 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.173); or (B) Fan total air power equal to or less than 150 horsepower for fans using a total pressure basis FEI in accordance with the required test configuration listed in table 7.1 of AMCA 214-21; (b) Scope for air circulating fans. (c) Testing and calculations for fans and blowers other than air circulating fans. (d) Testing and calculations for air circulating fan. [88 FR 27391, May 1, 2023, as amended at 88 FR 53375, Aug. 8, 2023] §§ 431.175-431.176 [Reserved] Appendix A to Subpart J of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Energy Consumption of Fans and Blowers Other Than Air Circulating Fans After October 30, 2023, any representations made with respect to energy use or efficiency of fans and blowers subject to testing pursuant to § 431.174 must be made in accordance with this appendix. Any optional representations of fan energy index in the optional test configuration listed in table 7.1 of AMCA 214-21 (FEI optional 0. Incorporation by Reference In § 431.173, DOE incorporated by reference the entire standard for AMCA 210-16, AMCA 214-21, and ISO 5801:2017; however, only enumerated provisions of those documents are applicable as follows. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of this appendix takes precedence over those documents. 0.1 AMCA 210-16: (a) Section 3, “Definitions/Units of Measure/Symbols”; (b) Section 4, “Instruments and Methods of Measurement” ; (c) Section 5, “Test Setups and Equipment”; (d) Section 6, “Observation and Conduct of Test”; (e) Section 7, “Calculations” excluding Section 7.9.2, “Conversion to other rotational speeds and air densities with compressible flow” and Section 7.9.3, “Conversion formulae for new densities and new rotational speeds”; 0.2. AMCA 214-21: (a) Section 2, “References (Normative),” as referenced in section 2.2 of this appendix; (b) Section 3, “Definitions,” as referenced in section 1 of this appendix; (c) Section 4, “Calculation of the FEI for a Single Duty Point,” as referenced in section 2.6 of this appendix; (d) Section 5, “Reference Fan Electrical Power (FEP ref (e) Section 6.1, “Wire-to-Air Testing at the Required Duty Point,” as referenced in section 2.2 of this appendix; (f) Section 6.2, “Calculated Ratings Based on Wire-to-Air Testing,” as referenced in section 2.2 of this appendix; (g) Section 6.3, “Bare Shaft Fans,” as referenced in section 2.2 of this appendix; (h) Section 6.4, “Fans with Polyphase Regulated Motor”, excluding Section 6.4.1.4, “Requirements for the VFD, if included” and Section 6.4.2.4, “Combined motor-VFD efficiency” as referenced in section 2.2 of this appendix; (i) Section 7, “Testing,” as referenced in sections 2.2 and 2.3 of this appendix; (j) Section 8, “Rating Development”, excluding Section 8.2.2, “Separate Fan and Motor Tests” and Section 8.3, “Appurtenances” as referenced in section 2.2 of this appendix; (k) Annex D, “Motor Performance Constants (Normative),” as referenced in section 2.2 of this appendix; (l) Annex E, “Calculation Methods for Fans Tested Shaft-to-Air,” as referenced in section 2.2 of this appendix; (m) Annex G, “Wire-to-Air Measurement—Calculation to Other Speeds and Densities (Normative),” as referenced in section 2.2 of this appendix; (n) Annex J, “Other data and calculations to be retained,” as referenced in section 2.2 of this appendix; and (o) Annex K, “Proportionality and Dimensional Requirements (Normative),” as referenced in section 2.2 of this appendix. 0.3. ISO 5801:2017: (a) Section 3, “Terms and Definitions”; (b) Section 4, “Symbols, Abbreviated Terms and Subscripts”; (c) Section 5, “General”; (d) Section 6, “Test Configurations”; (e) Section 7, “Carrying out the Test”; (f) Section 8, “Airways for Duct Configuration”; (g) Section 9, “Standardized Test Chambers”; (h) Section 10, “Various Component Parts for a Laboratory Setup”; (i) Section 11, “Standard Test Configurations”; (j) Section 12, “Measurements”; (k) Section 13, “Reference Conditions”; (l) Section 15, “Calculations”; (m) Section 16, “Fan Characteristic Curves”; and (n) Section 17, “Uncertainty Analysis”. 1. Definitions The definitions applicable to this appendix are defined in § 431.172 and in section 3, “Definitions,” of AMCA 214-21. In cases where there is a conflict, the definitions in § 431.172 take precedence over AMCA 214-21. 2. Test Procedure for Fans and Blowers Other Than Air Circulating Fans 2.1. General. This section describes the test procedure for fans and blowers other than air circulating fans. In cases where there is a conflict, the provisions in this appendix take precedence over AMCA 214-21. Where AMCA 214-21 refers to Annex A, “Polyphase Regulated Motor Efficiencies (Normative),” of AMCA 214-21, Table 5 of § 431.25 or the currently applicable standards in § 431.25 must be used instead. 2.2. Testing 2.2.1. General. The fan electrical power (FEPact) in kilowatts must be determined at every duty point specified by the manufacturer in accordance with one of the test methods listed in table 1, and the following sections of AMCA 214-21: Section 2, “References (Normative)”; Section 7, “Testing,” including the provisions of AMCA 210-16 and ISO 5801:2017 as referenced by Section 7 and implicated by sections 2.2.2 and 2.2.3 of this appendix; Section 8.1, “Laboratory Measurement Only” (as applicable); and Annex J, “Other data and calculations to be retained.” Table 1 to Appendix A to Subpart J of Part 431 Driver Motor Transmission Test method Applicable section(s) of AMCA 214-21 Electric motor Yes or No Any Wire-to-air 6.1 “Wire-to-Air Testing at the Required Duty Point”. Electric motor Yes or No Any Calculation based on Wire-to-air testing 6.2 “Calculated Ratings Based on Wire to Air Testing” (references Section 8.2.3, “Calculation to other speeds and densities for wire-to-air testing,” and Annex G, “Wire-to-Air Measurement—Calculation to Other Speeds and Densities (Normative)”). Regulated polyphase motor No Direct drive, V-belt drive, flexible coupling or synchronous belt drive Shaft-to-air 6.4 “Fans with Polyphase Regulated Motors,” (references Annex D, “Motor Performance Constants (Normative)”) *. None or non-electric No None Shaft-to-air Section 6.3, “Bare Shaft Fans”. Regulated polyphase motor No Direct drive, V-belt drive, flexible coupling or synchronous belt drive Calculation based on Shaft-to-air testing Section 8.2.1, “Fan laws and other calculation methods for shaft-to-air testing”(references Annex D, “Motor Performance Constants (Normative),” Annex E, “Calculation Methods for Fans Tested Shaft-to-Air,” and Annex K, “Proportionality and Dimensional Requirements (Normative)”). None or non-electric No None Calculation based on Shaft-to-air testing Section 8.2.1, “Fan laws and other calculation methods for shaft-to-air testing” (references Annex E, “Calculation Methods for Fans Tested Shaft-to-Air,” and Annex K, “Proportionality and Dimensional Requirements (Normative)”). * Excluding Section 6.4.1.4, “Requirements for the VFD, if included” and Section 6.4.2.4, “Combined motor-VFD efficiency.” Testing must be performed in accordance with the required test configuration listed in Table 7.1 of AMCA 214-21. The following values must be determined in accordance with this appendix at each duty point specified by the manufacturer: fan airflow in cubic feet per minute; fan air density; fan total pressure in inches of water gauge for fans using a total pressure basis FEI in accordance with Table 7.1 of AMCA 214-21; fan static pressure in inches of water gauge for fans using a static pressure basis FEI in accordance with Table 7.1 of AMCA 214-21; fan speed in revolutions per minute; and fan shaft input power in horsepower for fans tested in accordance with sections 6.3 or 6.4 of AMCA 214-21. In addition, if applying the equations in Section E.2 of Annex E of AMCA 214-21 for compressible flows, the compressibility coefficients must be included in the equations as applicable. All measurements must be recorded at the resolution of the test instrumentation and calculations must be rounded to the number of significant digits present at the resolution of the test instrumentation. In cases where there is a conflict, the provisions in AMCA 214-21 take precedence over AMCA 210-16 and ISO 5801:2017. In addition, the provisions in this appendix apply. 2.2.2 Power Roof Ventilators Centrifugal Power Roof Ventilators that are both supply and exhaust must be tested in both supply and exhaust configurations as listed in table 7.1 of AMCA 214-21. 2.2.3 Embedded Fans Embedded fans that are not manufactured in a standalone configuration must be tested in a standalone configuration. If some components of the bare shaft fan are not removable without causing irreversible damage to the equipment into which the fan is embedded, testing must be performed using additional fan components, except for the fan impeller, that are geometrically identical to that of the fan embedded inside the larger piece of equipment for testing. 2.3. Power Supply Any wire-to-air testing must be conducted at the supply frequency, phase, and voltages specified in this section. The frequency and voltage must be selected in accordance with section 7.8. of AMCA 214-21. Fans and blowers rated for operation for single- or multi-phase power supply must be tested with single- or multi-phase electricity, respectively. Fans and blowers, capable of operating with single- and multi-phase power supply, must be tested using multi-phase electricity. 2.4. Stability Conditions. The following conditions must be met to establish system stability prior to collecting test data: (a) Barometric pressure, dry bulb temperature and wet bulb temperature in the general test area must be captured at least every five seconds after the run-in period is completed and the ambient air density calculated from these values shall not vary by more than ±1 percent during verification of fan speed and fan input power stability. (b) After the fan has been run-in, record the fan speed in rpm and the input power (in horsepower or watts) at least every 5 seconds for at least three 60-second intervals. Readings shall be made simultaneously. Repeat these measurements over 60-second intervals until: (1) The average fan speed from the last 60-second interval varies by less than the absolute value of 1 percent or 1 rpm, whichever is greater, when compared to the average fan speed measured during the previous 60-second test interval; (2) The average input power from the last 60-second interval by reaction dynamometer, torque meter or calibrated motor must be ±4 percent, or the average input power by electrical meter must be ±2 percent of the mean or 1 watt, whichever is greater, compared to the average input power measured during the previous 60-second test interval; and (3) The slopes of a linear fit trendline calculated from the individual data collected for fan speed and input power during at least three 60-second sampling intervals include both positive and negative values ( e.g., 2.5. Sampling Intervals for Testing. A test measurement must meet the following conditions: (a) The sampling interval over which average test values are determined shall not exceed 60 seconds; (b) The average fan speed from the most recent 60-second interval varies by less than the absolute value of 1 percent or 1 rpm, whichever is greater, when compared to the average fan speed measured during the previous 60-second test interval; and (c) the average input power from the last 60-second interval by reaction dynamometer, torque meter or calibrated motor must be ±4 percent, or the average input power by electrical meter must be ±2 percent of the mean or 1 watt, whichever is greater, compared to the average input power measured during the previous 60-second test interval. 2.6. FEI calculation The FEI must be determined at every duty point in accordance with Section 4, “Calculation of the FEI for a single duty point,” and Section 5, “Reference Fan Electrical Power (FEP ref [88 FR 27391, May 1, 2023, as amended at 88 FR 53375, Aug. 8, 2023] Appendix B to Subpart J of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Energy Consumption of Air Circulating Fans After October 30, 2023, any representations made with respect to energy use or efficiency of air circulating fans subject to testing pursuant to § 431.174 must be made in accordance with this appendix. Any optional representations of air circulating fan efficacy at speeds less than the air circulating fan's maximum speed must be accompanied by a representation of the air circulating fan efficacy at maximum speed. 0. Incorporation by Reference In § 431.173, DOE incorporated by reference the entire standard for AMCA 230-23; however, only enumerated provisions of those documents are applicable as follows. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of this appendix takes precedence over those documents. 0.1 AMCA 230-23: (a) Section 4, “Definitions/Units of Measurement/Symbols,”; (b) Section 5, “Instruments and Methods of Measurement,”; (c) Section 6, “Equipment and Setup,”; (d) Section 7, “Observations and Conduct of Test,”; (e) Section 8, “Calculations,” excluding equations 8.5 and 8.6; and (f) Section 9, “Report and Results of Test,” 1. Definitions The definitions applicable to this appendix are defined in § 431.172 and in Section 4, “Definitions/Units of Measurement/Symbols,” of AMCA 230-23. In cases where there is a conflict, the definitions in § 431.172 take precedence over AMCA 230-23. 2. Test Procedure for Air Circulating Fans 2.1. General This section describes the test procedure for air circulating fans. 2.2. Testing 2.2.1. General The air circulating fan efficacy ( E circ e.g., e.g., E circ,50 All measurements must be recorded at the resolution of the test instrumentation and calculations must be rounded to the number of significant digits of the resolution of the test instrumentation. 2.3. Air circulating fans without motors Air circulating fans distributed in commerce without an electric motor must be tested using an electric motor as recommended in the manufacturer's catalogs or distributed in commerce with the air circulating fan. If more than one motor is available in manufacturer's catalogs or distributed in commerce with the air circulating fan, testing must be conducted using the least efficient motor capable of running the fan at the fan's maximum allowable speed. 2.4. Power Supply. The test must be conducted at the frequency, phase, and voltages specified in this section. 2.4.1. Frequency. Air circulating fans rated for operation with only 60 Hz power supply must be tested with 60 Hz electricity. Air circulating fans capable of operating with 50 Hz and 60 Hz electricity must be tested with 60 Hz electricity. 2.4.2. Phase. Air circulating fans rated for operation for single- or multi-phase power supply must be tested with single- or multi-phase power electricity, respectively. Air circulating fans, capable of operating with single- and multi-phase power supply, must be tested using multi-phase electricity. 2.4.3. Voltage. Select the supply voltage as follows: (a) For air circulating fans tested with single-phase electricity, the supply voltage must be: (1) 120 V if the air circulating fan's minimum rated voltage is 120 V or the lowest rated voltage range contains 120 V, (2) 240 V if the air circulating fan's minimum rated voltage is 240 V or the lowest rated voltage range contains 240 V, or (3) The air circulating fan's minimum rated voltage (if a voltage range is not given) or the mean of the lowest rated voltage range, in all other cases. (b) For air circulating fans tested with multi-phase electricity, the supply voltage must be (1) 240 V if the air circulating fan's minimum rated voltage is 240 V or the lowest rated voltage range contains 240 V, or (2) The air circulating fan's minimum rated voltage (if a voltage range is not given) or the mean of the lowest rated voltage range, in all other cases. 2.5. Stability Conditions. In addition to the test requirements specified in sections 7.1 and 7.3 of AMCA 230-23, the following conditions must be met to establish system stability prior to collecting test data: (a) Test voltage shall be captured at least every five seconds and shall not vary by more than ±1 percent during each test. Barometric pressure, dry bulb temperature and wet bulb temperature in the general test area for calculation of air density must be captured at least every five seconds and the calculated ambient air density shall not vary by more than ±1 percent during each test. (b) After a run-in time of at least 15 minutes, record the fan speed in rpm, the input power in watts, and load differential in pound-force for at least 3 120-second intervals. Repeat these measurements over additional 120-second intervals until: (1) The average fan speed of the last 120-second interval varies by less than the absolute value of 1 percent or 1 rpm, whichever is greater, when compared to the average fan speed measured during the previous 120-second test interval; (2) The average input power of the last 120-second interval varies by less than the absolute value of 1 percent or 1 watt, whichever is greater, compared to the average input power measured during the previous 120-second test interval; (3) The average load differential of the last 120-second interval varies by less than the absolute value of 1 percent compared to the average load differential during the previous 120-second test interval; and (4) The slopes of a linear fit trendline calculated from the individual data collected for fan speed, input power, and load differential during at least three 120-second intervals include both positive and negative values (e.g., two positive and one negative slope value or one positive and two negative slope values). If three positive or three negative slopes are determined in succession, additional sampling intervals are required until slopes from three successive 120-second intervals include both positive and negative values. 2.6. Calculation of Ambient Air Density. For any references to ambient air density, ρ0, in AMCA 230-23, calculate ρ0, expressed in kg/m3 when using SI units or lbm/ft3 when using I-P units, as follows: where p b d0 p [88 FR 27393, May 1, 2023, as amended at 88 FR 53376, Aug. 8, 2023] Subpart K—Distribution Transformers Source: 70 FR 60416, Oct. 18, 2005, unless otherwise noted. § 431.191 Purpose and scope. This subpart contains energy conservation requirements for distribution transformers, pursuant to Parts B and C of Title III of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 6291-6317. [71 FR 24995, Apr. 27, 2006] § 431.192 Definitions. The following definitions apply for purposes of this subpart: Autotransformer (1) Has one physical winding that consists of a series winding part and a common winding part; (2) Has no isolation between its primary and secondary circuits; and (3) During step-down operation, has a primary voltage that is equal to the total of the series and common winding voltages, and a secondary voltage that is equal to the common winding voltage. Auxiliary device Basic model i.e., i.e., Distribution transformer (1) Has an input line voltage of 34.5 kV or less; (2) Has an output line voltage of 600 V or less; (3) Is rated for operation at a frequency of 60 Hz; and (4) Has a capacity of 10 kVA to 5000 kVA for liquid-immersed units and 15 kVA to 5000 kVA for dry-type units; but (5) The term “distribution transformer” does not include a transformer that is an— (i) Autotransformer; (ii) Drive (isolation) transformer; (iii) Grounding transformer; (iv) Machine-tool (control) transformer; (v) Nonventilated transformer; (vi) Rectifier transformer; (vii) Regulating transformer; (viii) Sealed transformer; (ix) Special-impedance transformer; (x) Testing transformer; (xi) Transformer with tap range of 20 percent or more; (xii) Uninterruptible power supply transformer; or (xiii) Welding transformer. Drive (isolation) transformer (1) Isolates an electric motor from the line; (2) Accommodates the added loads of drive-created harmonics; (3) Is designed to withstand the additional mechanical stresses resulting from an alternating current adjustable frequency motor drive or a direct current motor drive; and (4) Has a rated output voltage that is neither “208Y/120” nor “480Y/277”. Efficiency Excitation current no-load current Grounding transformer (1) A grounded wye primary winding and a delta secondary winding; or (2) A transformer with its primary winding in a zig-zag winding arrangement, and with no secondary winding. Liquid-immersed distribution transformer Load loss Low-voltage dry-type distribution transformer Machine-tool (control) transformer Medium-voltage dry-type distribution transformer Mining distribution transformer No-load loss Nonventilated transformer Per-unit load Phase angle (1) Two voltages; (2) Two currents; or (3) A voltage and a current of an alternating current circuit. Phase angle correction Phase angle error Rectifier transformer Reference temperature Regulating transformer Sealed transformer Special-impedance transformer Table 1 to the Definition of “Special-Impedance Transformer”—Normal Impedance Ranges for Liquid-Immersed Transformers Single-phase transformers Three-phase transformers kVA Impedance kVA Impedance 10 <= kVA < 50 1.0-4.5 15 <= kVA < 75 1.0-4.5 50 <= kVA < 250 1.5-4.5 75 <= kVA < 112.5 1.0-5.0 250 <= kVA < 500 1.5-6.0 112.5 <= kVA < 500 1.2-6.0 500 <= kVA < 667 1.5-7.0 500 <= kVA < 750 1.5-7.0 667 <= kVA <= 833 5.0-7.5 750 <= kVA <= 5000 5.0-7.5 Table 2 to the Definition of “Special-Impedance Transformer”—Normal Impedance Ranges for Dry-Type Transformers Single-phase transformers Three-phase transformers kVA Impedance kVA Impedance 10 <= kVA < 50 1.0-4.5 15 <= kVA < 75 1.0-4.5 50 <= kVA < 250 1.5-4.5 75 <= kVA < 112.5 1.0-5.0 250 <= kVA < 500 1.5-6.0 112.5 <= kVA < 500 1.2-6.0 500 <= kVA < 667 1.5-7.0 500 <= kVA < 750 1.5-7.0 667 <= kVA <= 833 5.0-7.5 750 <= kVA <= 5000 5.0-7.5 Submersible distribution transformer (1) Has sealed-tank construction; and (2) Has the tank, cover, and all external appurtenances made of corrosion-resistant material or with appropriate corrosion resistant surface treatment to induce the components surface to be corrosion resistant. Temperature correction Terminal Test current Test frequency Test voltage Testing transformer Total loss Transformer Transformer with tap range of 20 percent or more Uninterruptible power supply transformer Waveform correction Welding transformer [70 FR 60416, Oct. 18, 2005, as amended at 71 FR 24995, Apr. 27, 2006; 71 FR 60662, Oct. 16, 2006; 72 FR 58239, Oct. 12, 2007; 78 FR 23433, Apr. 18, 2013; 86 FR 51252, Sept. 14, 2021; 89 FR 30039, Apr. 22, 2024; 90 FR 6795, Jan. 21, 2025] Test Procedures § 431.193 Test procedure for measuring energy consumption of distribution transformers. The test procedure for measuring the energy efficiency of distribution transformers for purposes of EPCA is specified in appendix A to this subpart. The test procedure specified in appendix A to this subpart applies only to distribution transformers subject to energy conservation standards at § 431.196. [86 FR 51252, Sept. 14, 2021] Energy Conservation Standards § 431.196 Energy conservation standards and their effective dates. (a) Low-Voltage Dry-Type Distribution Transformers. Single-phase Three-phase kVA % kVA % 15 97.7 15 97.0 25 98.0 30 97.5 37.5 98.2 45 97.7 50 98.3 75 98.0 75 98.5 112.5 98.2 100 98.6 150 98.3 167 98.7 225 98.5 250 98.8 300 98.6 333 98.9 500 98.7 750 98.8 1000 98.9 Note 1 to paragraph ( a All efficiency values are at 35 percent per-unit load. (2) The efficiency of a low-voltage, dry-type distribution transformer manufactured on or after January 1, 2016, but before April 23, 2029, shall be no less than that required for the applicable kVA rating in the following table. Low-voltage dry-type distribution transformers with kVA ratings not appearing in the table shall have their minimum efficiency level determined by linear interpolation of the kVA and efficiency values immediately above and below that kVA rating. Table 2 to Paragraph ( a Single-phase Three-phase kVA kVA 15 97.70 15 97.89 25 98.00 30 98.23 37.5 98.20 45 98.40 50 98.30 75 98.60 75 98.50 112.5 98.74 100 98.60 150 98.83 167 98.70 225 98.94 250 98.80 300 99.02 333 98.90 500 99.14 750 99.23 1000 99.28 Note: (3) The efficiency of a low-voltage dry-type distribution transformer manufactured on or after April 23, 2029, shall be no less than that required for their kVA rating in the following table. Low-voltage dry-type distribution transformers with kVA ratings not appearing in the table shall have their minimum efficiency level determined by linear interpolation of the kVA and efficiency values immediately above and below that kVA rating. Table 3 to Paragraph ( a Single-phase Three-phase kVA Efficiency kVA Efficiency 15 98.39 15 98.31 25 98.60 30 98.58 37.5 98.74 45 98.72 50 98.81 75 98.88 75 98.95 112.5 98.99 100 99.02 150 99.06 167 99.09 225 99.15 250 99.16 300 99.22 333 99.23 500 99.31 750 99.38 1000 99.42 Note: (b) Liquid-Immersed Distribution Transformers. Single-phase Three-phase kVA Efficiency kVA Efficiency 10 98.62 15 98.36 15 98.76 30 98.62 25 98.91 45 98.76 37.5 99.01 75 98.91 50 99.08 112.5 99.01 75 99.17 150 99.08 100 99.23 225 99.17 167 99.25 300 99.23 250 99.32 500 99.25 333 99.36 750 99.32 500 99.42 1000 99.36 667 99.46 1500 99.42 833 99.49 2000 99.46 2500 99.49 Note 3 to paragraph ( b All efficiency values are at 50 percent per-unit load. (2) The efficiency of a liquid-immersed distribution transformer, including submersible distribution transformers, manufactured on or after January 1, 2016, but before April 23, 2029, shall be no less than that required for their kVA rating in the following table. Liquid-immersed distribution transformers, including submersible distribution transformers, with kVA ratings not appearing in the table shall have their minimum efficiency level determined by linear interpolation of the kVA and efficiency values immediately above and below that kVA rating. Table 5 to Paragraph ( b Single-phase Three-phase kVA Efficiency kVA Efficiency 10 98.70 15 98.65 15 98.82 30 98.83 25 98.95 45 98.92 37.5 99.05 75 99.03 50 99.11 112.5 99.11 75 99.19 150 99.16 100 99.25 225 99.23 167 99.33 300 99.27 250 99.39 500 99.35 333 99.43 750 99.40 500 99.49 1000 99.43 667 99.52 1500 99.48 833 99.55 2000 99.51 2500 99.53 Note: (3) The efficiency of a liquid-immersed distribution transformer, that is not a submersible distribution transformer, manufactured on or after April 23, 2029, shall be no less than that required for their kVA rating in the following table. Liquid-immersed distribution transformers with kVA ratings not appearing in the table shall have their minimum efficiency level determined by linear interpolation of the kVA and efficiency values immediately above and below that kVA rating. Table 6 to Paragraph ( b Single-phase Three-phase kVA Efficiency kVA Efficiency 10 98.77 15 98.92 15 98.88 30 99.06 25 99.00 45 99.14 37.5 99.10 75 99.22 50 99.15 112.5 99.29 75 99.23 150 99.33 100 99.29 225 99.38 167 99.46 300 99.42 250 99.51 500 99.38 333 99.54 750 99.43 500 99.59 1000 99.46 667 99.62 1500 99.51 833 99.64 2000 99.53 2500 99.55 3750 99.54 5000 99.53 Note: (4) The efficiency of a submersible distribution transformer, manufactured on or after April 23, 2029, shall be no less than that required for their kVA rating in the following table. Submersible distribution transformers with kVA ratings not appearing in the table shall have their minimum efficiency level determined by linear interpolation of the kVA and efficiency values immediately above and below that kVA rating. Table 7 to Paragraph ( b Single-phase Three-phase kVA Efficiency kVA Efficiency 10 98.70 15 98.65 15 98.82 30 98.83 25 98.95 45 98.92 37.5 99.05 75 99.03 50 99.11 112.5 99.11 75 99.19 150 99.16 100 99.25 225 99.23 167 99.33 300 99.27 250 99.39 500 99.35 333 99.43 750 99.40 500 99.49 1000 99.43 667 99.52 1500 99.48 833 99.55 2000 99.51 2500 99.53 Note: (c) Medium-Voltage Dry-Type Distribution Transformers. Single-phase Three-phase kVA BIL* kVA BIL 20-45 kV 46-95 kV ≥96 kV 20-45 kV 46-95 kV ≥96 kV Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency 15 98.10 97.86 15 97.50 97.18 25 98.33 98.12 30 97.90 97.63 37.5 98.49 98.30 45 98.10 97.86 50 98.60 98.42 75 98.33 98.12 75 98.73 98.57 98.53 112.5 98.49 98.30 100 98.82 98.67 98.63 150 98.60 98.42 167 98.96 98.83 98.80 225 98.73 98.57 98.53 250 99.07 98.95 98.91 300 98.82 98.67 98.63 333 99.14 99.03 98.99 500 98.96 98.83 98.80 500 99.22 99.12 99.09 750 99.07 98.95 98.91 667 99.27 99.18 99.15 1000 99.14 99.03 98.99 833 99.31 99.23 99.20 1500 99.22 99.12 99.09 2000 99.27 99.18 99.15 2500 99.31 99.23 99.20 * BIL means basic impulse insulation level. Note 5 to paragraph ( c All efficiency values are at 50 percent per-unit load. (2) The efficiency of a medium-voltage dry-type distribution transformer manufactured on or after January 1, 2016, but before April 23, 2029, shall be no less than that required for their kVA and BIL rating in the following table. Medium-voltage dry-type distribution transformers with kVA ratings not appearing in the table shall have their minimum efficiency level determined by linear interpolation of the kVA and efficiency values immediately above and below that kVA rating. Table 9 to Paragraph ( c kVA Single-phase kVA Three-phase BIL 1 BIL 20-45 kV 46-95 kV ≥96 kV 20-45 kV 46-95 kV ≥96 kV Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency 15 98.10 97.86 15 97.50 97.18 25 98.33 98.12 30 97.90 97.63 37.5 98.49 98.30 45 98.10 97.86 50 98.60 98.42 75 98.33 98.13 75 98.73 98.57 98.53 112.5 98.52 98.36 100 98.82 98.67 98.63 150 98.65 98.51 167 98.96 98.83 98.80 225 98.82 98.69 98.57 250 99.07 98.95 98.91 300 98.93 98.81 98.69 333 99.14 99.03 98.99 500 99.09 98.99 98.89 500 99.22 99.12 99.09 750 99.21 99.12 99.02 667 99.27 99.18 99.15 1000 99.28 99.20 99.11 833 99.31 99.23 99.20 1500 99.37 99.30 99.21 2000 99.43 99.36 99.28 2500 99.47 99.41 99.33 1 Note: (3) The efficiency of a medium-voltage dry-type distribution transformer manufactured on or after April 23, 2029, shall be no less than that required for their kVA and BIL rating in the following table. Medium-voltage dry-type distribution transformers with kVA ratings not appearing in the table shall have their minimum efficiency level determined by linear interpolation of the kVA and efficiency values immediately above and below that kVA rating. Table 10 to Paragraph ( c kVA Single-phase kVA Three-phase BIL 1 BIL 20-45 kV 46-95 kV ≥96 kV 20-45 kV 46-95 kV ≥96 kV Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency Efficiency 15 98.29 98.07 15 97.75 97.46 25 98.50 98.31 30 98.11 97.87 37.5 98.64 98.47 45 98.29 98.07 50 98.74 98.58 75 98.50 98.32 75 98.86 98.71 98.68 112.5 98.67 98.52 100 98.94 98.80 98.77 150 98.79 98.66 167 99.06 98.95 98.92 225 98.94 98.82 98.71 250 99.16 99.06 99.02 300 99.04 98.93 98.82 333 99.23 99.13 99.09 500 99.18 99.09 99.00 500 99.30 99.21 99.18 750 99.29 99.21 99.12 667 99.34 99.26 99.24 1000 99.35 99.28 99.20 833 99.38 99.31 99.28 1500 99.43 99.37 99.29 2000 99.49 99.42 99.35 2500 99.52 99.47 99.40 3750 99.50 99.44 99.40 5000 99.48 99.43 99.39 1 Note: (d) Mining Distribution Transformers. (e) Severability. [78 FR 23433, Apr. 18, 2013, as amended at 86 FR 51252, Sept. 14, 2021; 89 FR 30040, Apr. 22, 2024] Compliance and Enforcement Source: 71 FR 24997, Apr. 27, 2006, unless otherwise noted. Appendix A to Subpart K of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Distribution Transformers 1.0 Definitions. The definitions contained in §§ 431.2 and 431.192 are applicable to this appendix A. 2.0 Per-Unit Load, Reference Temperature, and Accuracy Requirements. 2.1 Per-Unit Load In conducting the test procedure in this appendix for the purpose of: (a) Certification to an energy conservation standard, the applicable per-unit load in Table 2.1 must be used; or (b) Making voluntary representations as provided in section 7.0 at an additional per-unit load, select the per-unit load of interest. Table 2.1—Per-unit Load for Certification to Energy Conservation Standards Distribution transformer category Per-unit load Liquid-immersed 50 Medium-voltage dry-type 50 Low-voltage dry-type 35 2.2 Reference Temperature In conducting the test procedure in this appendix for the purpose of: (a) Certification to an energy conservation standard, the applicable reference temperature in Table 2.2 must be used; or (b) Making voluntary representations as provided in section 7.0 at an additional reference temperature, select the reference temperature of interest. Table 2.2—Reference Temperature for Certification to Energy Conservation Standards Distribution transformer category Reference temperature Liquid-immersed 20 °C for no-load loss. Medium-voltage dry-type 20 °C for no-load loss. Low-voltage dry-type 20 °C for no-load loss. 2.3 Accuracy Requirements (a) Equipment and methods for loss measurement must be sufficiently accurate that measurement error will be limited to the values shown in Table 2.3. Table 2.3—Test System Accuracy Requirements for Each Measured Quantity Measured Test system Power Losses ±3.0%. Voltage ±0.5%. Current ±0.5%. Resistance ±0.5%. Temperature ±1.5 °C for liquid-immersed distribution transformers, and ±2.0 °C for low-voltage dry-type and medium-voltage dry-type distribution transformers. (b) Only instrument transformers meeting the 0.3 metering accuracy class, or better, may be used under this test method. 3.0 Resistance Measurements 3.1 General Considerations (a) Measure or establish the winding temperature at the time of the winding resistance measurement. (b) Measure the direct current resistance (R dc (c) Measure the direct current resistance (R dc 3.2 Temperature Determination of Windings and Pre-conditions for Resistance Measurement. Make temperature measurements in protected areas where the air temperature is stable and there are no drafts. Determine the winding temperature (T dc 3.2.1 Liquid-Immersed Distribution Transformers. 3.2.1.1 Methods Record the winding temperature (T dc (a) The measurements from two temperature sensing devices (for example, thermocouples) applied to the outside of the transformer tank and thermally insulated from the surrounding environment, with one located at the level of the insulating liquid and the other located near the tank bottom or at the lower radiator header if applicable; or (b) The measurements from two temperature sensing devices immersed in the insulating liquid, with one located directly above the winding and other located directly below the winding. 3.2.1.2 Conditions Make this determination under either of the following conditions: (a) The windings have been under insulating liquid with no excitation and no current in the windings for four hours before the dc resistance is measured; or (b) The temperature of the insulating liquid has stabilized, and the difference between the top and bottom temperature does not exceed 5 °C. The temperature of the insulating liquid is considered stable if the top liquid temperature does not vary more than 2 °C in a 1-h period. 3.2.2 Dry-Type Distribution Transformers. Record the winding temperature (T dc (a) For ventilated dry-type units, use the average of readings of four or more thermometers, thermocouples, or other suitable temperature sensors inserted within the coils. Place the sensing points of the measuring devices as close as possible to the winding conductors; or (b) For sealed units, such as epoxy-coated or epoxy-encapsulated units, use the average of four or more temperature sensors located on the enclosure and/or cover, as close to different parts of the winding assemblies as possible; or (c) For ventilated units or sealed units, use the ambient temperature of the test area, only if the following conditions are met: (1) All internal temperatures measured by the internal temperature sensors must not differ from the test area ambient temperature by more than 2 °C. Enclosure surface temperatures for sealed units must not differ from the test area ambient temperature by more than 2 °C. (2) Test area ambient temperature must not have changed by more than 3 °C for 3 hours before the test. (3) Neither voltage nor current has been applied to the unit under test for 24 hours. In addition, increase this initial 24-hour period by any added amount of time necessary for the temperature of the transformer windings to stabilize at the level of the ambient temperature. However, this additional amount of time need not exceed 24 hours ( i.e., 3.3 Resistance Measurement Methods. Make resistance measurements using either the resistance bridge method (section 3.3.1), the voltmeter-ammeter method (section 3.3.2) or resistance meters (section 3.3.3). In each instance when this appendix is used to test more than one unit of a basic model to determine the efficiency of that basic model, the resistance of the units being tested may be determined from making resistance measurements on only one of the units. 3.3.1 Resistance Bridge Methods. If the resistance bridge method is selected, use either the Wheatstone or Kelvin bridge circuit (or the equivalent of either). 3.3.1.1 Wheatstone Bridge (a) This bridge is best suited for measuring resistances larger than ten ohms. A schematic diagram of a Wheatstone bridge with a representative transformer under test is shown in Figure 3.1. Where: R dc R s s R a b a b R t D is a null detector, which may be either a micro ammeter or microvoltmeter or equivalent instrument for observing that no signal is present when the bridge is balanced, and V dc (b) In the measurement process, turn on the source (V dc a b 3.3.1.2 Kelvin Bridge (a) This bridge separates the resistance of the connecting conductors to the transformer winding being measured from the resistance of the winding, and therefore is best suited for measuring resistances of ten ohms and smaller. A schematic diagram of a Kelvin bridge with a representative transformer under test is shown in Figure 3.2. (b) The Kelvin Bridge has seven of the same type of components as in the Wheatstone Bridge. It has two more resistors than the Wheatstone bridge, R a1 b1 a b a1 b1 as with the Wheatstone bridge, with an additional condition that: (c) The Kelvin bridge provides two sets of leads, current-carrying and voltage-sensing, to the transformer terminals and the standard resistor, thus eliminating voltage drops from the measurement in the current-carrying leads as represented by R d 3.3.2 Voltmeter-Ammeter Method. (a) Employ the voltmeter-ammeter method only if the test current is limited to 15 percent of the winding current. Connect the transformer winding under test to the circuit shown in Figure 3.3 of this appendix. Where: A is an ammeter or a voltmeter-shunt combination for measuring the current (I mdc V is a voltmeter with sensitivity in the millivolt range for measuring the voltage (V mdc R dc R t V dc (b) To perform the measurement, turn on the source to produce current no larger than 15 percent of the rated current for the winding. Wait until the current and voltage readings have stabilized and then take a minimum of four readings of voltage and current. Voltage and current readings must be taken simultaneously for each of the readings. Calculate the average voltage and average current using the readings. Determine the winding resistance R dc Where: V mdc I mdc (c) As shown in Figure 3.3, separate current and voltage leads must be brought to the transformer terminals. (This eliminates the errors due to lead and contact resistance.) 3.3.3 Resistance Meters. Resistance meters may be based on voltmeter-ammeter, or resistance bridge, or some other operating principle. Any meter used to measure a transformer's winding resistance must have specifications for resistance range, current range, and ability to measure highly inductive resistors that cover the characteristics of the transformer being tested. Also, the meter's specifications for accuracy must meet the applicable criteria of Table 2.3 in section 2.3 of this appendix. 3.4 Precautions in Measuring Winding Resistance. 3.4.1 Required actions. The following requirements must be observed when making resistance measurements: (a) Use separate current and voltage leads when measuring small (<10 ohms) resistance. (b) Use null detectors in bridge circuits, and measuring instruments in voltmeter-ammeter circuits, that have sensitivity and resolution sufficient to enable observation of at least 0.1 percent change in the measured resistance. (c) Maintain the dc test current at or below 15 percent of the rated winding current. (d) Inclusion of a stabilizing resistor R t (e) Disconnect the null detector (if a bridge circuit is used) and voltmeter from the circuit before the current is switched off, and switch off current by a suitable insulated switch. (f) Keep the polarity of the core magnetization constant during all resistance measurements. (g) For single-phase windings, measure the resistance from terminal to terminal. The total winding resistance is the terminal-to-terminal measurement. For series-parallel windings, the total winding resistance is the sum of the series terminal-to-terminal section measurements. (h) For wye windings, measure the resistance from terminal to terminal or from terminal to neutral. For the total winding resistance, the resistance of the lead from the neutral connection to the neutral bushing may be excluded. For terminal-to-terminal measurements, the total resistance reported is the sum of the three measurements divided by two. (i) For delta windings, measure resistance from terminal to terminal with the delta closed or from terminal to terminal with the delta open to obtain the individual phase readings. The total winding resistance is the sum of the three-phase readings if the delta is open. If the delta is closed, the total winding resistance is the sum of the three phase-to-phase readings times 1.5. 3.4.2 Guideline for Time Constant. (a) The following guideline is suggested for the tester as a means to facilitate the measurement of resistance in accordance with the accuracy requirements of section 2.3: (b) The accurate reading of resistance R dc t Where: T c L tc R tc t dc s (c) Because R tc tc tc 3.5 Conversion of Resistance Measurements. (a) Resistance measurements must be corrected from the temperature at which the winding resistance measurements were made, to the reference temperature. (b) Correct the measured resistance to the resistance at the reference temperature using equation 3-6 as follows: Where: R ts s R dc dc T s T dc T k 4.0 Loss Measurement 4.1 General Considerations. The efficiency of a transformer is computed from the total transformer losses, which are determined from the measured value of the no-load loss and load loss power components. Each of these two power loss components is measured separately using test sets that are identical, except that shorting straps are added for the load-loss test. The measured quantities need correction for instrumentation losses and may need corrections for known phase angle errors in measuring equipment and for the waveform distortion in the test voltage. Any power loss not measured at the applicable reference temperature must be adjusted to that reference temperature. The measured load loss must also be adjusted to a specified output loading level if not measured at the specified output loading level. Test all distribution transformers using a sinusoidal waveform (k = 1). Measure losses with the transformer energized by a 60 Hz supply. 4.2 Measurement of Power Losses. 4.2.1 No-Load Loss. Measure the no-load loss and apply corrections as described in section 4.4, using the appropriate test set as described in section 4.3. 4.2.2 Load Loss. Measure the load loss and apply corrections as described in section 4.5, using the appropriate test set as described in section 4.3. 4.3 Test Sets. (a) The same test set may be used for both the no-load loss and load loss measurements provided the range of the test set encompasses the test requirements of both tests. Calibrate the test set to national standards to meet the tolerances in Table 2.3 in section 2.3 of this appendix. In addition, the wattmeter, current measuring system and voltage measuring system must be calibrated separately if the overall test set calibration is outside the tolerance as specified in section 2.3 or the individual phase angle error exceeds the values specified in section 4.5.3. (b) A test set based on the wattmeter-voltmeter-ammeter principle may be used to measure the power loss and the applied voltage and current of a transformer where the transformer's test current and voltage are within the measurement capability of the measuring instruments. Current and voltage transformers, known collectively as instrument transformers, or other scaling devices such as resistive or capacitive dividers for voltage, may be used in the above circumstance, and must be used together with instruments to measure current, voltage, or power where the current or voltage of the transformer under test exceeds the measurement capability of such instruments. Thus, a test set may include a combination of measuring instruments and instrument transformers (or other scaling devices), so long as the current or voltage of the transformer under test does not exceed the measurement capability of any of the instruments. (c) Both load loss and no-load loss measurements must be made from terminal to terminal. 4.3.1 Single-Phase Test Sets. Use these for testing single-phase distribution transformers. 4.3.1.1 Without Instrument Transformers. (a) A single-phase test set without an instrument transformer is shown in Figure 4.1. Where: W is a wattmeter used to measure P nm lm V rms r(nm) lm V av a(nm) A is an rms ammeter used to measure test current, especially I lm (SC) is a conductor for providing a short-circuit across the output windings for the load loss measurements. (b) Either the primary or the secondary winding can be connected to the test set. However, more compatible voltage and current levels for the measuring instruments are available if for no-load loss measurements the secondary (low voltage) winding is connected to the test set, and for load loss measurements the primary winding is connected to the test set. Use the average-sensing voltmeter, V av 4.3.1.2 With Instrument Transformers. A single-phase test set with instrument transformers is shown in Figure 4.2. This circuit has the same four measuring instruments as that in Figure 4.1. The current and voltage transformers, designated as (CT) and (VT), respectively, are added. 4.3.2 Three-Phase Test Sets. Use these for testing three-phase distribution transformers. Use in a four-wire, three-wattmeter test circuit. 4.3.2.1 Without Instrument Transformers. (a) A three-phase test set without instrument transformers is shown in Figure 4.3. This test set is essentially the same circuit shown in Figure 4.1 repeated three times, and the instruments are individual devices as shown. As an alternative, the entire instrumentation system of a three-phase test set without transformers may consist of a multi-function analyzer. (b) Either group of windings, the primary or the secondary, can be connected in wye or delta configuration. If both groups of windings are connected in the wye configuration for the no-load test, the neutral of the winding connected to the test set must be connected to the neutral of the source to provide a return path for the neutral current. (c) In the no-load loss measurement, the voltage on the winding must be measured. Therefore a provision must be made to switch the voltmeters for line-to-neutral measurements for wye-connected windings and for line-to-line measurements for delta-connected windings. 4.3.2.2 With Instrument Transformers. A three-phase test set with instrument transformers is shown in Figure 4.4. This test set is essentially the same circuit shown in Figure 4.2 repeated three times. Provision must be made to switch the voltmeters for line-to-neutral and line-to-line measurements as in section 4.3.2.1. The voltage sensors (“coils”) of the wattmeters must always be connected in the line-to-neutral configuration. 4.3.2.3 Test Set Neutrals. If the power source in the test circuit is wye-connected, ground the neutral. If the power source in the test circuit is delta-connected, use a grounding transformer to obtain neutral and ground for the test. 4.4 No-Load Losses: Measurement and Calculations. 4.4.1 General Considerations. Measurement corrections are permitted but not required for instrumentation losses and for losses from auxiliary devices. Measurement corrections are required: (a) When the waveform of the applied voltage is non-sinusoidal; and (b) When the core temperature or liquid temperature is outside the 20 °C ±10 °C range. 4.4.2 No-Load Loss Test. (a) The purpose of the no-load loss test is to measure no-load losses at a specified excitation voltage and a specified frequency. The no-load loss determination must be based on a sine-wave voltage corrected to the reference temperature. Connect either of the transformer windings, primary or secondary, to the appropriate test set of Figures 4.1 to 4.4, giving consideration to section 4.4.2(a)(2). Leave the unconnected winding(s) open circuited. Apply the rated voltage at rated frequency, as measured by the average-sensing voltmeter, to the transformer. Take the readings of the wattmeter(s) and the average-sensing and true rms voltmeters. Observe the following precautions: (1) Voltmeter connections. When correcting to a sine-wave basis using the average-voltmeter method, the voltmeter connections must be such that the waveform applied to the voltmeters is the same as the waveform across the energized windings. (2) Energized windings. Energize either the high voltage or the low voltage winding of the transformer under test. (3) Voltage and frequency. The no-load loss test must be conducted with rated voltage impressed across the transformer terminals using a voltage source at a frequency equal to the rated frequency of the transformer under test. (b) Adjust the voltage to the specified value as indicated by the average-sensing voltmeter. Record the values of rms voltage, rms current, electrical power, and average voltage as close to simultaneously as possible. For a three-phase transformer, take all of the readings on one phase before proceeding to the next, and record the average of the three rms voltmeter readings as the rms voltage value. Note: When the tester uses a power supply that is not synchronized with an electric utility grid, such as a dc/ac motor-generator set, check the frequency and maintain it within ±0.5 percent of the rated frequency of the transformer under test. A power source that is directly connected to, or synchronized with, an electric utility grid need not be monitored for frequency. 4.4.3 Corrections. 4.4.3.1 Correction for Instrumentation Losses. Measured losses attributable to the voltmeters and wattmeter voltage circuit, and to voltage transformers if they are used, may be deducted from the total no-load losses measured during testing. 4.4.3.2 Correction for Non-Sinusoidal Applied Voltage. (a) The measured value of no-load loss must be corrected to a sinusoidal voltage, except when waveform distortion in the test voltage causes the magnitude of the correction to be less than 1 percent. In such a case, no correction is required. (b) To make a correction where the distortion requires a correction of 5 percent or less, use equation 4-1. If the distortion requires a correction to be greater than 5 percent, improve the test voltage and re-test. Repeat until the distortion requires a correction of 5 percent or less. (c) Determine the no-load losses of the transformer corrected for sine-wave basis from the measured value by using equation 4-1 as follows: Where: P ncl nm P nm nm P 1 P 2 P 1 2 V r(nm) V a(nm) (d) The two loss components (P 1 2 4.4.3.3 Correction of No-Load Loss to Reference Temperature. After correcting the measured no-load loss for waveform distortion, correct the loss to the reference temperature. For both certification to energy conservation standards and voluntary representations, if the correction to reference temperature is applied, then the core temperature of the transformer during no-load loss measurement (T nm Where: P nc P nc1 nm T nm T nr 4.5 Load Losses: Measurement and Calculations. 4.5.1 General Considerations. (a) The load losses of a transformer are those losses incident to a specified load carried by the transformer. Load losses consist of ohmic loss in the windings due to the load current and stray losses due to the eddy currents induced by the leakage flux in the windings, core clamps, magnetic shields, tank walls, and other conducting parts. The ohmic loss of a transformer varies directly with temperature, whereas the stray losses vary inversely with temperature. (b) For a transformer with a tap changer, conduct the test at the rated current and rated-voltage tap position. For a transformer that has a configuration of windings which allows for more than one nominal rated voltage, determine its load losses either in the winding configuration in which the highest losses occur or in each winding configuration in which the transformer can operate. 4.5.2 Tests for Measuring Load Losses. (a) Connect the transformer with either the high-voltage or low-voltage windings to the appropriate test set. Then short-circuit the winding that was not connected to the test set. Apply a voltage at the rated frequency (of the transformer under test) to the connected windings to produce the rated current in the transformer. Take the readings of the wattmeter(s), the ammeters(s), and rms voltmeter(s). (b) Regardless of the test set selected, the following preparatory requirements must be satisfied for accurate test results: (1) Determine the temperature of the windings using the applicable method in section 3.2.1 or section 3.2.2. (2) The conductors used to short-circuit the windings must have a cross-sectional area equal to, or greater than, the corresponding transformer leads, or, if the tester uses a different method to short-circuit the windings, the losses in the short-circuiting conductor assembly must be less than 10 percent of the transformer's load losses. (3) When the tester uses a power supply that is not synchronized with an electric utility grid, such as a dc/ac motor-generator set, follow the provisions of the “Note” in section 4.4.2. 4.5.3 Corrections. 4.5.3.1 Correction for Losses from Instrumentation and Auxiliary Devices. 4.5.3.1.1 Instrumentation Losses. Measured losses attributable to the voltmeters, wattmeter voltage circuit and short-circuiting conductor (SC), and to the voltage transformers if they are used, may be deducted from the total load losses measured during testing. 4.5.3.1.2 Losses from Auxiliary Devices. Measured losses attributable to auxiliary devices (e.g., circuit breakers, fuses, switches) installed in the transformer, if any, that are not part of the winding and core assembly, may be excluded from load losses measured during testing. To exclude these losses, either (1) measure transformer losses without the auxiliary devices by removing or by-passing them, or (2) measure transformer losses with the auxiliary devices connected, determine the losses associated with the auxiliary devices, and deduct these losses from the load losses measured during testing. 4.5.3.2 Correction for Phase Angle Errors. (a) Corrections for phase angle errors are not required if the instrumentation is calibrated over the entire range of power factors and phase angle errors. Otherwise, determine whether to correct for phase angle errors from the magnitude of the normalized per unit correction, β n (b) The correction must be applied if β n n (c) If the correction for phase angle errors is to be applied, first examine the total system phase angle (β w v c (d) The symbols in this section (4.5.3.2) have the following meanings: P lc1 P lm V lm I lm is the measured phase angle between V lm lm β w β v β c (e) The instrumentation phase angle errors used in the correction equations must be specific for the test conditions involved. 4.5.3.3 Temperature Correction of Load Loss. (a) When the measurement of load loss is made at a temperature T lm (b) Calculate the ohmic loss (P e (c) Obtain the stray loss by subtracting the calculated ohmic loss from the measured load loss, by using equation 4-7 as follows: (d) Correct the ohmic and stray losses to the reference temperature for the load loss by using equations 4-8 and 4-9, respectively, as follows: (e) Add the ohmic and stray losses, corrected to the reference temperature, to give the load loss, P lc2 (f) The symbols in this section (4.5.3.3) have the following meanings: I lm(p) I lm(s) P e lm P e(p) lm P e(s) lm P er P lc1 lm P lc2 P s lm P sr R dc(p) R dc(s) T k k k k T k(p) T k(s) T lm T lr T dc N 1 2 1 2 1 5.0 Determining the Efficiency Value of the Transformer This section presents the equations to use in determining the efficiency value of the transformer at the required reference conditions and at the specified loading level. The details of measurements are described in sections 3.0 and 4.0. For a transformer that has a configuration of windings which allows for more than one nominal rated voltage, determine its efficiency either at the voltage at which the highest losses occur or at each voltage at which the transformer is rated to operate. 5.1 Output Loading Level Adjustment. If the per-unit load selected in section 2.1 is different from the per-unit load at which the load loss power measurements were made, then adjust the corrected load loss power, P lc2 Where: P lc P lc2 P or P os P os = P or L L e.g., L” 5.2 Total Loss Power Calculation. Calculate the corrected total loss power by using equation 5-2 as follows: Where: P ts P nc P lc 5.3 Energy Efficiency Calculation. Calculate efficiency (η) in percent at specified energy efficiency load level, P os Where: P os P ts 5.4 Significant Figures in Power Loss and Efficiency Data. In measured and calculated data, retain enough significant figures to provide at least 1 percent resolution in power loss data and 0.01 percent resolution in efficiency data. 6.0 Test Equipment Calibration and Certification. Maintain and calibrate test equipment and measuring instruments, maintain calibration records, and perform other test and measurement quality assurance procedures according to the following sections. The calibration of the test set must confirm the accuracy of the test set to that specified in section 2.3, Table 2.3 of this appendix. 6.1 Test Equipment. The party performing the tests must control, calibrate, and maintain measuring and test equipment, whether or not it owns the equipment, has the equipment on loan, or the equipment is provided by another party. Equipment must be used in a manner which assures that measurement uncertainty is known and is consistent with the required measurement capability. 6.2 Calibration and Certification. The party performing the tests must: (a) Identify the measurements to be made, the accuracy required (section 2.3) and select the appropriate measurement and test equipment; (b) At prescribed intervals, or prior to use, identify, check and calibrate, if needed, all measuring and test equipment systems or devices that affect test accuracy, against certified equipment having a known valid relationship to nationally recognized standards; where no such standards exist, the basis used for calibration must be documented; (c) Establish, document and maintain calibration procedures, including details of equipment type, identification number, location, frequency of checks, check method, acceptance criteria and action to be taken when results are unsatisfactory; (d) Ensure that the measuring and test equipment is capable of the accuracy and precision necessary, taking into account the voltage, current and power factor of the transformer under test; (e) Identify measuring and test equipment with a suitable indicator or approved identification record to show the calibration status; (f) Maintain calibration records for measuring and test equipment; (g) Assess and document the validity of previous test results when measuring and test equipment is found to be out of calibration; (h) Ensure that the environmental conditions are suitable for the calibrations, measurements and tests being carried out; (i) Ensure that the handling, preservation and storage of measuring and test equipment is such that the accuracy and fitness for use is maintained; and (j) Safeguard measuring and test facilities, including both test hardware and test software, from adjustments which would invalidate the calibration setting. 7.0 Test Procedure for Voluntary Representations Follow sections 1.0 through 6.0 of this appendix using the per-unit load and/or reference temperature of interest for voluntary representations of efficiency, and corresponding values of load loss and no-load loss at additional per-unit load and/or reference temperature. Representations made at a per-unit load and/or reference temperature other than those required to comply with the energy conservation standards at § 431.196 must be in addition to, and not in place of, a representation at the required DOE settings for per-unit load and reference temperature. As a best practice, the additional settings of per-unit load and reference temperature should be provided with the voluntary representations. [71 FR 24999, Apr. 27, 2006; 71 FR 60662, Oct. 16, 2006; 86 FR 51252, Sept. 14, 2021] Effective Date Note: At 71 FR 24999, Apr. 27, 2006, appendix A to subpart K of part 431 was added. Section 6.2(f) contains information collection requirements and will not become effective until approval has been given by the Office of Management and Budget. Subpart L—Illuminated Exit Signs Source: 70 FR 60417, Oct. 18, 2005, unless otherwise noted. § 431.201 Purpose and scope. This subpart contains energy conservation requirements for illuminated exit signs, pursuant to Part B of Title III of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 6291-6309. § 431.202 Definitions concerning illuminated exit signs. Basic model Face Illuminated exit sign (1) Is designed to be permanently fixed in place to identify an exit; and (2) Consists of an electrically powered integral light source that— (i) Illuminates the legend “EXIT” and any directional indicators; and (ii) Provides contrast between the legend, any directional indicators, and the background. Input power demand [70 FR 60417, Oct. 18, 2005, as amended at 71 FR 71372, Dec. 8, 2006; 76 FR 12504, Mar. 7, 2011] Test Procedures § 431.203 Materials incorporated by reference. (a) General. Federal Register. (b) Test procedure incorporated by reference. (c) Availability of reference Inspection of test procedure. (i) National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call (202) 741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (ii) U.S. Department of Energy, Forrestal Building, Room 1J-018 (Resource Room of the Building Technologies Program), 1000 Independence Avenue, SW., Washington, DC 20585-0121, (202) 586-9127, between 9 a.m. and 4 p.m., Monday through Friday, except Federal holidays. (2) Obtaining copies of the standard. http://www.epa.gov. [71 FR 71373, Dec. 8, 2006] § 431.204 Uniform test method for the measurement of energy consumption of illuminated exit signs. (a) Scope. (b) Testing and Calculations. [71 FR 71373, Dec. 8, 2006] Energy Conservation Standards § 431.206 Energy conservation standards and their effective dates. An illuminated exit sign manufactured on or after January 1, 2006, shall have an input power demand of 5 watts or less per face. Subpart M—Traffic Signal Modules and Pedestrian Modules Source: 70 FR 60417, Oct. 18, 2005, unless otherwise noted. § 431.221 Purpose and scope. This subpart contains energy conservation requirements for traffic signal modules and pedestrian modules, pursuant to Part B of Title III of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 6291-6309. § 431.222 Definitions concerning traffic signal modules and pedestrian modules. Basic model Maximum wattage Nominal wattage Pedestrian module Traffic signal module (1) Consists of a light source, a lens, and all other parts necessary for operation; and (2) Communicates movement messages to drivers through red, amber, and green colors. [70 FR 60417, Oct. 18, 2005, as amended at 71 FR 71373, Dec. 8, 2006; 76 FR 12504, Mar. 7, 2011] Test Procedures § 431.223 Materials incorporated by reference. (a) General. Federal Register. (b) List of test procedures incorporated by reference. (2) Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE), “Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads: Light Emitting Diode (LED) Circular Signal Supplement,” June 27, 2005. (c) Availability of references Inspection of test procedures. (i) National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call (202) 741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. (ii) U.S. Department of Energy, Forrestal Building, Room 1J-018 (Resource Room of the Building Technologies Program), 1000 Independence Avenue, SW., Washington, DC 20585-0121, (202) 586-9127, between 9 a.m. and 4 p.m., Monday through Friday, except Federal holidays. (2) Obtaining copies of standards. (i) Copies of the Environmental Protection Agency “ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for Traffic Signals,” Version 1.1, may be obtained from the Environmental Protection Agency, Ariel Rios Building, 1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20460, (202) 272-0167 or at http://www.epa.gov. (ii) Institute of Transportation Engineers, 1099 14th Street, NW., Suite 300 West, Washington, DC 20005-3438, (202) 289-0222, or [email protected]. [71 FR 71373, Dec. 8, 2006] § 431.224 Uniform test method for the measurement of energy consumption for traffic signal modules and pedestrian modules. (a) Scope. (b) Testing and Calculations. [71 FR 71373, Dec. 8, 2006] Energy Conservation Standards § 431.226 Energy conservation standards and their effective dates. Any traffic signal module or pedestrian module manufactured on or after January 1, 2006, shall meet both of the following requirements: (a) Have a nominal wattage and maximum wattage no greater than: Maximum wattage Nominal Traffic Signal Module Type: 12″ Red Ball 17 11 8″ Red Ball 13 8 12″ Red Arrow 12 9 12″ Green Ball 15 15 8″ Green Ball 12 12 12″ Green Arrow 11 11 Pedestrian Module Type: Combination Walking Man/Hand 16 13 Walking Man 12 9 Orange Hand 16 13 (b) Be installed with compatible, electrically connected signal control interface devices and conflict monitoring systems. [70 FR 60417, Oct. 18, 2005, as amended at 71 FR 71374, Dec. 8, 2006] Subpart N—Unit Heaters Source: 70 FR 60418, Oct. 18, 2005, unless otherwise noted. § 431.241 Purpose and scope. This subpart contains energy conservation requirements for unit heaters, pursuant to Part B of Title III of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 6291-6309. § 431.242 Definitions concerning unit heaters. Automatic flue damper Automatic vent damper Basic model Intermittent ignition device Power venting Unit heater Warm air furnace [70 FR 60418, Oct. 18, 2005, as amended at 71 FR 71374, Dec. 8, 2006; 76 FR 12504, Mar. 7, 2011] Test Procedures [Reserved] Energy Conservation Standards § 431.246 Energy conservation standards and their effective dates. A unit heater manufactured on or after August 8, 2008, shall: (a) Be equipped with an intermittent ignition device; and (b) Have power venting or an automatic flue damper. An automatic vent damper is an acceptable alternative to an automatic flue damper for those unit heaters where combustion air is drawn from the conditioned space. [70 FR 60418, Oct. 18, 2005, as amended at 71 FR 71374, Dec. 8, 2006] Subpart O—Commercial Prerinse Spray Valves Source: 70 FR 60418, Oct. 18, 2005, unless otherwise noted. § 431.261 Purpose and scope. This subpart contains energy conservation requirements for commercial prerinse spray valves, pursuant to section 135 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005, Pub. L. 109-58. § 431.262 Definitions. As used in this subpart: Basic model Commercial prerinse spray valve (1) Equipment design and representations (for example, whether equipment is represented as being capable of rinsing dishes as compared to equipment that is represented exclusively for washing walls and floors or animal washing); (2) Channels of marketing and sales (for example, whether equipment is marketed or sold through outlets that market or sell to food service entities); (3) Actual sales (including whether the end-users are restaurants or commercial or institutional kitchens, even if those sales are indirectly through an entity such as a distributor). Spray force [80 FR 81453, Dec. 30, 2015, as amended at 87 FR 13909, Mar. 11, 2022] § 431.263 Materials incorporated by reference. (a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this subpart with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, the U.S. Department of Energy (DOE) must publish a document in the Federal Register [email protected], https://www.energy.gov/eere/buildings/building-technologies-office. [email protected], www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html. (b) ASTM. www.astm.org. (1) ASTM F2324-13 (R2019) (“ASTM F2324”),”Standard Test Method for Prerinse Spray Valves”, Approved May 1, 2019; IBR approved for § 431.264. (2) [Reserved] [87 FR 13910, Mar. 11, 2022] Test Procedures § 431.264 Uniform test method to measure flow rate and spray force of commercial prerinse spray valves. (a) Scope. (b) Testing and calculations for a unit with a single spray setting Flow rate. water 1 1 (ii) Perform calculations in accordance with Section 11.3.1 (Calculation and Report) of ASTM F2324. Record the water temperature ( °F) and dynamic water pressure (psi) once at the start for each run of the test. Record the time (min), the normalized weight of water in the carboy (lb) and the resulting flow rate (gpm) once at the end of each run of the test. Record flow rate measurements of time (min) and weight (lb) at the resolutions of the test instrumentation. Perform three runs on each unit, as specified in Section 10.2.5 of ASTM F2324, but disregard any references to Annex A1. Then, for each unit, calculate the mean of the three flow rate values determined from each run. Round the final value for flow rate to two decimal places and record that value. (2) Spray force. (c) Testing and calculations for a unit with multiple spray settings. (1) Measure both the flow rate and spray force according to paragraphs (b)(1) and (2) of this section (including calculating the mean flow rate and mean spray force) for each spray setting; and (2) Record the mean flow rate for each spray setting, rounded to two decimal places. Record the mean spray force for each spray setting, rounded to one decimal place. (d) Test procedure for voluntary representations. [80 FR 81453, Dec. 30, 2015, as amended at 87 FR 13910, Mar. 11, 2022] Energy Conservation Standards § 431.266 Energy conservation standards and their effective dates. (a) Commercial prerinse spray valves manufactured on or after January 1, 2006 and before January 28, 2019, shall have a flow rate of not more than 1.6 gallons per minute. For the purposes of this standard, a commercial prerinse spray valve (b) Commercial prerinse spray valves manufactured on or after January 28, 2019 shall have a flow rate that does not exceed the following: Product class Flow rate Product Class 1 (≤5.0 ozf) 1.00 Product Class 2 (>5.0 ozf and ≤8.0 ozf) 1.20 Product Class 3 (>8.0 ozf) 1.28 (1) For the purposes of this standard, the definition of commercial prerinse spray valve (2) [Reserved] [81 FR 4801, Jan. 27, 2016] Subpart P—Mercury Vapor Lamp Ballasts Source: 70 FR 60418, Oct. 18, 2005, unless otherwise noted. § 431.281 Purpose and scope. This subpart contains energy conservation requirements for mercury vapor lamp ballasts, pursuant to section 135 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005, Pub. L. 109-58. § 431.282 Definitions concerning mercury vapor lamp ballasts. Ballast High intensity discharge lamp (1) The light-producing arc is stabilized by the arc tube wall temperature; and (2) The arc tube wall loading is in excess of 3 Watts/cm 2 Mercury vapor lamp Mercury vapor lamp ballast Specialty application mercury vapor lamp ballast (1) Is designed and marketed for operation of mercury vapor lamps used in quality inspection, industrial processing, or scientific use, including fluorescent microscopy and ultraviolet curing; and (2) In the case of a specialty application mercury vapor lamp ballast, the label of which— (i) Provides that the specialty application mercury vapor lamp ballast is ‘For specialty applications only, not for general illumination’; and (ii) Specifies the specific applications for which the ballast is designed. [74 FR 12074, Mar. 23, 2009] Test Procedures [Reserved] Energy Conservation Standards § 431.286 Energy conservation standards and their effective dates. Mercury vapor lamp ballasts, other than specialty application mercury vapor lamp ballasts, shall not be manufactured or imported after January 1, 2008. [74 FR 12074, Mar. 23, 2009] Subpart Q—Refrigerated Bottled or Canned Beverage Vending Machines Source: 71 FR 71375, Dec. 8, 2006, unless otherwise noted. § 431.291 Scope. This subpart specifies test procedures and energy conservation standards for certain commercial refrigerated bottled or canned beverage vending machines, pursuant to part A of Title III of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 6291-6309. The regulatory provisions of §§ 430.33 and 430.34 and subparts D and E of part 430 of this chapter are applicable to refrigerated bottled or canned beverage vending machines. [80 FR 45792, July 31, 2015] § 431.292 Definitions concerning refrigerated bottled or canned beverage vending machines. Basic model Bottled or canned beverage Class A Class B Combination A Combination B Combination vending machine Refrigerated bottled or canned beverage vending machine Transparent V 3 [71 FR 71375, Dec. 8, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 44967, Aug. 31, 2009; 76 FR 12504, Mar. 7, 2011; 80 FR 45792, July 31, 2015; 81 FR 1112, Jan. 8, 2016] Test Procedures § 431.293 Materials incorporated by reference. (a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this subpart with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, the DOE must publish a document in the Federal Register [email protected], https://www.energy.gov/eere/buildings/building-technologies-office. www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html [email protected]. (b) AHAM. www.aham.org. (1) AHAM HRF-1-2016, Energy and Internal Volume of Refrigerating Appliances, (2) [Reserved] (c) ASHRAE. www.ashrae.org. (1) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 32.1-2022 (ANSI/ASHRAE 32.1), Methods of Testing for Rating Refrigerated Vending Machines for Sealed Beverages, (2) [Reserved] (d) ASTM. www.astm.org. (1) ASTM E 1084-86 (Reapproved 2009), Standard Test Method for Solar Transmittance (Terrestrial) of Sheet Materials Using Sunlight, (2) [Reserved] [88 FR 28400, May 4, 2023] § 431.294 Uniform test method for the measurement of energy consumption of refrigerated bottled or canned beverage vending machines. (a) Scope. (b) Testing and Calculations. [71 FR 71375, Dec. 8, 2006, as amended at 80 FR 45793, July 31, 2015] Energy Conservation Standards § 431.296 Energy conservation standards and their effective dates. (a) Each refrigerated bottled or canned beverage vending machine manufactured on or after August 31, 2012 and before January 8, 2019, shall have a daily energy consumption (in kilowatt hours per day), when measured in accordance with the DOE test procedure at § 431.294, that does not exceed the following: Equipment class Maximum daily energy consumption Class A 0.055 × V † + 2.56. Class B 0.073 × V † + 3.16. Combination Vending Machines [Reserved]. † “V” is the representative value of refrigerated volume (ft 3 (b) Each refrigerated bottled or canned beverage vending machine manufactured on or after January 8, 2019, shall have a daily energy consumption (in kilowatt hours per day), when measured in accordance with the DOE test procedure at § 431.294, that does not exceed the following: Equipment class Maximum daily energy consumption Class A 0.052 × V † + 2.43. Class B 0.052 × V † + 2.20. Combination A 0.086 × V † + 2.66. Combination B 0.111 × V † + 2.04. † “V” is the representative value of refrigerated volume (ft 3 [81 FR 1113, Jan. 8, 2016] Appendix A to Subpart Q of Part 431 [Reserved] Appendix B to Subpart Q of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Energy Consumption of Refrigerated Bottled or Canned Beverage Vending Machines Note: Manufacturers must use the results of testing under this appendix to determine compliance with the relevant standards for refrigerated bottled or canned beverage vending machines at 10 CFR 431.296, revised as of January 1, 2023. Specifically, before October 31, 2023, representations must be based upon results generated either under this appendix as codified on June 5, 2023, or under 10 CFR part 431, subpart Q, appendix B, revised as of January 1, 2023. Any representations made on or after October 31, 2023, must be made based upon results generated using this appendix as codified on June 5, 2023. 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.293 the entire standard for AHAM HRF-1-2016 and ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 32.1-2022; however, only enumerated provisions of those documents are applicable to this appendix as follows: 0.1. AHAM HRF-1-2016 (a) Section 4, “Method for Computing Refrigerated Volume of Refrigerators, Refrigerator-Freezer, Wine Chillers, and Freezers” as referenced in section 3.1 of this appendix. (b) Reserved. 0.2. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 32.1-2022 (a) Section 3, “Definitions,” as referenced in section 1 of this appendix. (b) Section 4, “Instruments,” as referenced in section 2 of this appendix. (c) Section 5, “Vending Machine Capacity,” and Normative Appendix C, “Measurement of Volume,” as referenced in sections 2 and 3.1 of this appendix. (d) Section 6, “Test Conditions,” as referenced in section 2 of this appendix. (e) Section 7.1, “Test Procedures—General Requirements” (except Section 7.1.2, “Functionality,” and Section 7.1.5.1, “Beverage Temperature Test Packages”), and Section 7.2, “Energy Consumption Test,” (except Section 7.2.2.6), as referenced in sections 1 and 2 of this appendix. 1. General. 1.1 Definitions. Accessory low power mode External accessory standby mode Low power mode Lowest application product temperature (a) For units that operate only at temperatures above the integrated average temperature specified in Table 1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 32.1-2022, the lowest integrated average temperature a given basic model is capable of maintaining so as to comply with the temperature stabilization requirements specified in section 7.2.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 32.1-2022; or (b) For units that operate only at temperatures below the integrated average temperature specified in Table 1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 32.1-2022, the highest integrated average temperature a given basic model is capable of maintaining so as to comply with the temperature stabilization requirements specified in section 7.2.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 32.1-2022. Refrigeration low power mode 1.2 [Reserved] 2. Test Procedure. 2.1. Lowest Application Product Temperature. 2.2. Equipment Installation and Test Setup. 2.2.1. Equipment Loading. 2.2.1.1. Non-Beverage Shelves. 2.2.1.2. Standard Products. i.e., 2.2.1.3. Standard Test Packages. 2.2.2. Sensor Placement. 2.2.3. Vending Mode Test Period. 2.2.4. Accessory Low Power Mode Test Period. 2.2.5. Accessories. i.e., 2.2.5.1. Payment Mechanisms. 2.2.5.2. Internal Lighting. 2.2.5.3. External Customer Display Signs, Lights, and Digital Screens. 2.2.5.4. Anti-sweat or Other Electric Resistance Heaters. 2.2.5.5. Condensate Pan Heaters and Pumps. 2.2.5.6. Illuminated Temperature Displays. 2.2.5.7. Condenser Filters. 2.2.5.8. Security Covers. 2.2.5.9. General Purpose Outlets. 2.2.5.10. Crankcase Heaters and Other Electric Resistance Heaters for Cold Weather. 2.2.5.11. Refrigerant Leak Mitigation Controls. 2.3. Determination of Daily Energy Consumption. 2.3.1. Refrigeration Low Power Mode. 2.3.1.1. Refrigeration Low Power Mode Validation Test Method. (a) The following three requirements have been satisfied: (1) The instantaneous average next-to-vend beverage temperature must reach at least 4 °F above the integrated average temperature or lowest application product temperature, as applicable, within 6 hours. (2) The instantaneous average next-to-vend beverage temperature must be maintained at least 4 °F above the integrated average temperature or lowest application product temperature, as applicable, for at least 1 hour. (3) After the instantaneous average next-to-vend beverage temperature is maintained at or above 4 °F above the integrated average temperature or lowest application product temperature, as applicable, for at least 1 hour, the refrigerated beverage vending machine must return to the specified integrated average temperature or lowest application product temperature, as applicable, automatically without direct physical intervention. (b) The compressor does not cycle on for the entire 6-hour period, in which case the instantaneous average beverage temperature does not have to reach 4 °F above the integrated average temperature or lowest application product temperature, as applicable, but, the equipment must still automatically return to the integrated average temperature or lowest application product temperature, as applicable, after the 6-hour period without direct physical intervention. 2.3.2. Calculations and Rounding. 3. Determination of Refrigeration Volume and Surface Area. 3.1. Refrigerated Volume. 3.2. Determination of Surface Area. Note: [88 FR 28400, May 4, 2023] Subpart R—Walk-in Coolers and Walk-in Freezers Source: 74 FR 12074, Mar. 23, 2009, unless otherwise noted. § 431.301 Purpose and scope. This subpart contains energy conservation requirements for walk-in coolers and walk-in freezers, pursuant to Part C of Title III of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 6311-6317. § 431.302 Definitions concerning walk-in coolers and walk-in freezers. Adaptive defrost e.g., Attached split system Basic model (1) With respect to panels, which do not have any differing features or characteristics that affect U-factor. (2) [Reserved] CO 2 unit cooler 2 Dedicated condensing unit (1) Includes 1 or more compressors, a condenser, and one refrigeration circuit; and (2) Is designed to serve one refrigerated load. Dedicated condensing refrigeration system (1) A dedicated condensing unit; (2) A single-package dedicated system; or (3) A matched refrigeration system. Detachable single-packaged dedicated system Display door (1) Is designed for product display; or (2) Has 75 percent or more of its surface area composed of glass or another transparent material. Display panel Door Door leaf Door surface area A dd A nd Ducted fan coil unit Ducted multi-circuit single-packaged dedicated system Ducted single-packaged dedicated system Envelope (1) The portion of a walk-in cooler or walk-in freezer that isolates the interior, refrigerated environment from the ambient, external environment; and (2) All energy-consuming components of the walk-in cooler or walk-in freezer that are not part of its refrigeration system. Freight door High-temperature refrigeration system Indoor dedicated condensing refrigeration system K-factor Manufacturer of a walk-in cooler or walk-in freezer (1) Manufactures a component of a walk-in cooler or walk-in freezer that affects energy consumption, including, but not limited to, refrigeration, doors, lights, windows, or walls; or (2) Manufactures or assembles the complete walk-in cooler or walk-in freezer. Matched condensing unit Matched refrigeration system Multi-circuit single-packaged dedicated system Non-display door Outdoor dedicated condensing refrigeration system Panel Passage door Refrigerated Refrigerated storage space Refrigeration system (1) A dedicated condensing refrigeration system (as defined in this section); or (2) A unit cooler. Single-packaged dedicated system U-factor Unit cooler Walk-in cooler and walk-in freezer Walk-in process cooling refrigeration system (1) Be distributed in commerce with an insulated enclosure consisting of panels and door(s) such that the assembled product has a refrigerating capacity of at least 100 Btu/h per cubic foot of enclosed internal volume; (2) Be a unit cooler having an evaporator coil that is at least four-and-one-half (4.5) feet in height and whose height is at least one-and-one-half (1.5) times the width. The height of the evaporator coil is measured perpendicular to the tubes and is also the fin height, while its width is the finned length parallel to the tubes, as illustrated in Figure 1; or (3) Be a dedicated condensing unit that is distributed in commerce exclusively with a unit cooler meeting description (2) or with an evaporator that is not a unit cooler, i.e., [74 FR 12074, Mar. 23, 2009, as amended at 76 FR 12504, Mar. 7, 2011; 76 FR 21604, Apr. 15, 2011; 76 FR 33631, June 9, 2011; 79 FR 32123, June 3, 2014; 81 FR 95801, Dec. 28, 2016; 88 FR 28838, May 4, 2023] Test Procedures § 431.303 Materials incorporated by reference. (a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this subpart with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, the U.S. Department of Energy (DOE) must publish a document in the Federal Register [email protected], www.energy.gov/eere/buildings/building-technologies-office. [email protected], www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html. (b) AHRI. www.ahrinet.org. (1) ANSI/AHRI Standard 420-2008 (“AHRI 420-2008”), Performance Rating of Forced-Circulation Free-Delivery Unit Coolers for Refrigeration, (2) AHRI Standard 1250P (I-P)-2009 (“AHRI 1250-2009”), Standard for Performance Rating of Walk-in Coolers and Freezers, (3) AHRI Standard 1250 (“AHRI 1250-2020”), Standard for Performance Rating of Walk-in Coolers and Freezers, (c) ASHRAE. www.ashrae.org. (1) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 16-2016 (“ANSI/ASHRAE 16”), Method of Testing for Rating Room Air Conditioners, Packaged Terminal Air Conditioners, and Packaged Terminal Heat Pumps for Cooling and Heating Capacity, (2) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 23.1-2010 (“ASHRAE 23.1-2010”), Methods of Testing for Rating the Performance of Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors and Condensing Units that Operate at Subcritical Temperatures of the Refrigerant, (3) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 37-2009 (“ANSI/ASHRAE 37”), Methods of Testing for Rating Electrically Driven Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment, (4) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 41.1-2013 (“ANSI/ASHRAE 41.1”), Standard Method for Temperature Measurement, (5) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 41.3-2014 (“ANSI/ASHRAE 41.3”), Standard Methods for Pressure Measurement, (6) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 41.6-2014 (“ANSI/ASHRAE 41.6”), Standard Method for Humidity Measurement, (7) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 41.10-2013 (“ANSI/ASHRAE 41.10”), Standard Methods for Refrigerant Mass Flow Measurement Using Flowmeters, (d) ASTM. www.astm.org. (1) ASTM C518-17, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus, (2) ASTM C1199-14, Standard Test Method for Measuring the Steady-State Thermal Transmittance of Fenestration Systems Using Hot Box Methods, (e) NFRC. www.nfrc.org/. (1) NFRC 102-2020 [E0A0] (“NFRC 102-2020”), Procedure for Measuring the Steady-State Thermal Transmittance of Fenestration Systems, (2) [Reserved] [88 FR 28838, May 4, 2023] § 431.304 Uniform test method for the measurement of energy consumption of walk-in coolers and walk-in freezers. (a) Scope. (b) Testing and calculations. (1) Display panels. (2) Display doors and non-display doors. (3) Non-display panels and non-display doors. (4) Refrigeration systems. (i) For unit coolers: (ii) For dedicated condensing units: (iii) For single-packaged dedicated systems: [74 FR 12074, Mar. 23, 2009, as amended at 76 FR 21605, Apr. 15, 2011; 76 FR 33631, June 9, 2011; 76 FR 65365, Oct. 21, 2011; 79 FR 27412, May 13, 2014; 79 FR 32123, June 3, 2014; 81 FR 95802, Dec. 28, 2016; 88 FR 28839, May 4, 2023] § 431.305 Walk-in cooler and walk-in freezer labeling requirements. (a) Panel nameplate— (1) Required information. (i) The panel brand or manufacturer; and (ii) One of the following statements, as appropriate: (A) “This panel is designed and certified for use in walk-in cooler applications.” (B) “This panel is designed and certified for use in walk-in freezer applications.” (C) “This panel is designed and certified for use in walk-in cooler and walk-in freezer applications.” (2) Display of required information. All orientation, spacing, type sizes, typefaces, and line widths to display this required information must be the same as or similar to the display of the other performance data included on the panel's permanent nameplate. The permanent nameplate must be visible unless the panel is assembled into a completed walk-in. (b) Door nameplate— (1) Required information. (i) The door brand or manufacturer; and (ii) One of the following statements, as appropriate: (A) “This door is designed and certified for use in walk-in cooler applications.” (B) “This door is designed and certified for use in walk-in freezer applications.” (C) “This door is designed and certified for use in walk-in cooler and walk-in freezer applications.” (2) Display of required information. All orientation, spacing, type sizes, typefaces, and line widths to display this required information must be the same as or similar to the display of the other performance data included on the door's permanent nameplate. The permanent nameplate must be visible unless the door is assembled into a completed walk-in. (c) Refrigeration system nameplate—(1) Required information. The permanent nameplate of a walk-in cooler or walk-in freezer refrigeration system for which standards are prescribed in § 431.306 must be marked clearly with the following information: (i) The refrigeration system brand or manufacturer; (ii) The refrigeration system model number; (iii) The date of manufacture of the refrigeration system (if the date of manufacture is embedded in the unit's serial number, then the manufacturer of the refrigeration system must retain any relevant records to discern the date from the serial number); (iv) If the refrigeration system is a dedicated condensing refrigeration system, and is not designated for outdoor use, the statement, “Indoor use only” (for a matched pair this must appear on the condensing unit); and (v) One of the following statements, as appropriate: (A) “This refrigeration system is designed and certified for use in walk-in cooler applications.” (B) “This refrigeration system is designed and certified for use in walk-in freezer applications.” (C) “This refrigeration system is designed and certified for use in walk-in cooler and walk-in freezer applications.” (2) Process cooling refrigeration systems. The permanent nameplate of a process cooling refrigeration system (as defined in § 431.302) must be marked clearly with the statement, “This refrigeration system is designed for use exclusively in walk-in cooler and walk-in freezer process cooling refrigeration applications.” (3) Display of required information. All orientation, spacing, type sizes, typefaces, and line widths to display this required information must be the same as or similar to the display of the other performance data included on the refrigeration system's permanent nameplate. The model number must be in one of the following forms: “Model ______” or “Model number ______” or “Model No. ______.” The permanent nameplate must be visible unless the refrigeration system is assembled into a completed walk-in. (d) A manufacturer may not mark the nameplate of a component with the required information if the manufacturer has not submitted a certification of compliance for the relevant model. (e) Disclosure of efficiency information in marketing materials. Each catalog that lists the component and all materials used to market the component must include: (1) For panels—The R-value in the form “R-value____.” (2) For doors—The energy consumption in the form “EC____kWh/day.” (3) For those refrigeration system for which standards are prescribed—The AWEF in the form “AWEF ____.” (4) The information that must appear on a walk-in cooler or walk-in freezer component's permanent nameplate pursuant to paragraphs (a)-(c) of this section must also be prominently displayed in each catalog that lists the component and all materials used to market the component. [81 FR 95802, Dec. 28, 2016, as amended at 89 FR 82071, Oct. 9, 2024; 90 FR 43384, Sept. 9, 2025] Energy Conservation Standards § 431.306 Energy conservation standards and their effective dates. (a) Each walk-in cooler or walk-in freezer manufactured on or after January 1, 2009, shall— (1) Have automatic door closers that firmly close all walk-in doors that have been closed to within 1 inch of full closure, except that this paragraph shall not apply to doors wider than 3 feet 9 inches or taller than 7 feet; (2) Have strip doors, spring hinged doors, or other method of minimizing infiltration when doors are open; (3) Contain wall, ceiling, and door insulation of at least R-25 for coolers and R-32 for freezers, except that this paragraph shall not apply to: (i) Glazed portions of doors not to structural members and (ii) A walk-in cooler or walk-in freezer component if the component manufacturer has demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Secretary in a manner consistent with applicable requirements that the component reduces energy consumption at least as much as if such insulation requirements of subparagraph (a)(3) were to apply. (4) Contain floor insulation of at least R-28 for freezers; (5) For evaporator fan motors of under 1 horsepower and less than 460 volts, use— (i) Electronically commutated motors (brushless direct current motors); or (ii) 3-phase motors; (6) For condenser fan motors of under 1 horsepower, use— (i) Electronically commutated motors (brushless direct current motors); (ii) Permanent split capacitor-type motors; or (iii) 3-phase motors; and (7) For all interior lights, use light sources with an efficacy of 40 lumens per watt or more, including ballast losses (if any), except that light sources with an efficacy of 40 lumens per watt or less, including ballast losses (if any), may be used in conjunction with a timer or device that turns off the lights within 15 minutes of when the walk-in cooler or walk-in freezer is not occupied by people. (b) Each walk-in cooler or walk-in freezer with transparent reach-in doors manufactured on or after January 1, 2009, shall also meet the following specifications: (1) Transparent reach-in doors for walk-in freezers and windows in walk-in freezer doors shall be of triple-pane glass with either heat-reflective treated glass or gas fill. (2) Transparent reach-in doors for walk-in coolers and windows in walk-in cooler doors shall be— (i) Double-pane glass with heat-reflective treated glass and gas fill; or (ii) Triple-pane glass with either heat-reflective treated glass or gas fill. (3) If the walk-in cooler or walk-in freezer has an antisweat heater without antisweat heat controls, the walk-in cooler and walk-in freezer shall have a total door rail, glass, and frame heater power draw of not more than 7.1 watts per square foot of door opening (for freezers) and 3.0 watts per square foot of door opening (for coolers). (4) If the walk-in cooler or walk-in freezer has an antisweat heater with antisweat heat controls, and the total door rail, glass, and frame heater power draw is more than 7.1 watts per square foot of door opening (for freezers) and 3.0 watts per square foot of door opening (for coolers), the antisweat heat controls shall reduce the energy use of the antisweat heater in a quantity corresponding to the relative humidity in the air outside the door or to the condensation on the inner glass pane. (c) Walk-in cooler and freezer display doors. Class descriptor Class Equations for Display Door, Medium Temperature DD.M 0.04 × A dd Display Door, Low Temperature DD.L 0.15 × A dd *A dd (d) Walk-in cooler and freezer non-display doors. Class descriptor Class Equations for Passage door, Medium Temperature PD.M 0.05 × A nd Passage Door, Low Temperature PD.L 0.14 × A nd Freight Door, Medium Temperature FD.M 0.04 × A nd Freight Door, Low Temperature FD.L 0.12 × A nd *A nd (e) Walk-in cooler refrigeration systems. Equipment class Minimum AWEF Compliance date: equipment manufactured starting on . . . Dedicated Condensing System—Medium, Indoor 5.61 June 5, 2017. Dedicated Condensing System—Medium, Outdoor 7.60 Dedicated Condensing System—Low, Indoor with a Net Capacity (q net < 6,500 Btu/h 9.091 × 10 −5 net July 10, 2020. ≥ 6,500 Btu/h 2.40 Dedicated Condensing System—Low, Outdoor with a Net Capacity (q net < 6,500 Btu/h 6.522 × 10 −5 net ≥ 6,500 Btu/h 3.15 Unit Cooler—Medium 9.00 Unit Cooler—Low with a Net Capacity (q net < 15,500 Btu/h 1.575 × 10 −5 net ≥ 15,500 Btu/h 4.15 * Where q net [74 FR 12074, Mar. 23, 2009, as amended at 78 FR 62993, Oct. 23, 2013; 79 FR 32123, June 3, 2014; 80 FR 69838, Nov. 12, 2015; 82 FR 31885, July 10, 2017] Appendix A to Subpart R of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Energy Consumption of the Components of Envelopes of Walk-In Coolers and Walk-In Freezers Note: Prior to October 31, 2023, representations with respect to the energy use of envelope components of walk-in coolers and walk-in freezers, including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with the applicable provisions of 10 CFR part 431, subpart R, appendix A, revised as of January 1, 2022. Beginning October 31, 2023, representations with respect to energy use of envelope components of walk-in coolers and walk-in freezers, including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with this appendix. 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.303 the entire standard for ASTM C1199-14 and NFRC 102-2020. However, certain enumerated provisions of these standards, as set forth in sections 0.1 and 0.2 of this appendix are inapplicable. To the extent that there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of a referenced industry standard and the CFR, the CFR provisions control. 0.1 ASTM C1199-14 (a) Section 1 Scope, is inapplicable, (b) Section 4 Significance and Use is inapplicable, (c) Section 7.3 Test Conditions, is inapplicable, (d) Section 10 Report, is inapplicable, and (e) Section 11 Precision and Bias, is inapplicable. 0.2 NFRC 102-2020 (a) Section 1 Scope, is inapplicable, (b) Section 4 Significance and Use, is inapplicable, (c) Section 7.3 Test Conditions, is inapplicable, (d) Section 10 Report, is inapplicable, (e) Section 11 Precision and Bias, is inapplicable, (f) Annex A3 Standard Test Method for Determining the Thermal Transmittance of Tubular Daylighting Devices, is inapplicable, and (g) Annex A5 Tables and Figures, is inapplicable. 1. General. Federal Register 2. Scope This appendix covers the test requirements used to measure the energy consumption of the components that make up the envelope of a walk-in cooler or walk-in freezer. 3. Definitions The definitions contained in § 431.302 are applicable to this appendix. 4. Additional Definitions 4.1 Automatic door opener/closer 4.2 Percent time off (PTO) 4.3 Rated power 4.4 Rating conditions Table A.1—Temperature Conditions Internal Temperatures (cooled space within the envelope) Cooler Dry-Bulb Temperature 35 °F Freezer Dry-Bulb Temperature −10 °F External Temperatures (space external to the envelope) Freezer and Cooler Dry-Bulb Temperatures 75 °F 5. Test Methods and Measurements 5.1 U-Factor Test of Doors and Display Panels Determine the U-factor of the entire door or display panel, including the frame, in accordance with the specified sections of NFRC 102-2020 and ASTM C1199-14 at the temperature conditions listed in table A.1 of this appendix. 5.2 Required Test Measurements 5.2.1 For display doors and display panels, thermal transmittance, U dd dp ST 5.2.2 For non-display doors, thermal transmittance, U nd ST 5.2.3 Projected area of the test specimen, A s , 2 6. Calculations 6.1 Display Panels 6.1.1 Determine the U-factor of the display panel in accordance with section 5.1 of this appendix, in units of Btu/(h-ft 2 6.1.2 Calculate the temperature differential, ΔT dp Where: T DB,ext,dp T DB,int,dp 6.1.3 Calculate the conduction load through the display panel, Q cond-dp Where: A s 2 ΔT dp U dp 2 6.1.4 Calculate the total daily energy consumption, E dp Where: Q cond,dp EER = Energy Efficiency Ratio of walk-in (cooler or freezer), Btu/W-h. For coolers, use EER = 12.4 Btu/W-h. For freezers, use EER = 6.3 Btu/W-h. 6.2 Display Doors 6.2.1 Conduction Through Display Doors 6.2.1.1 Determine the U-factor of the display door in accordance with section 5.1 of this appendix, in units of Btu/(h-ft 2 6.2.1.2 Calculate the temperature differential, ΔT dd Where: T DB,ext,dd T DB,int,dd 6.2.1.3 Calculate the conduction load through the display doors, Q cond,dd Where: A s 2 ΔT dd U dd 2 6.2.1.4 Calculate the total daily energy consumption due to conduction thermal load, E dd,thermal Where: Q cond,dd EER = EER of walk-in (cooler or freezer), Btu/W-h. For coolers, use EER = 12.4 Btu/(W-h). For freezers, use EER = 6.3 Btu/(W-h). 6.2.2 Direct Energy Consumption of Electrical Component(s) of Display Doors Electrical components associated with display doors could include but are not limited to: heater wire (for anti-sweat or anti-freeze application); lights; door motors; control system units; and sensors. 6.2.2.1 Select the required value for percent time off (PTO) for each type of electricity-consuming device per table A.2 of this appendix, PTO t Table A.2—Percent Time Off Values Device Temperature Controls, timer, or other auto-shut-off system Percent time Lights All Without 25 Anti-sweat heaters All Without 0 Door motors All 97 All other electricity-consuming devices All Without 0 6.2.2.2 Calculate the power usage for each type of electricity-consuming device, P dd,comp,u,t Where: u = the index for each of type of electricity-consuming device located on either (1) the interior facing side of the display door or within the inside portion of the display door, (2) the exterior facing side of the display door, or (3) any combination of (1) and (2). For purposes of this calculation, the interior index is represented by u = int and the exterior index is represented by u = ext. If the electrical component is both on the interior and exterior side of the display door then use u = int. For anti-sweat heaters sited anywhere in the display door, 75 percent of the total power is be attributed to u = int and 25 percent of the total power is attributed to u = ext; t = index for each type of electricity-consuming device with identical rated power; P rated,u,t PTO u,t n u,t 6.2.2.3 Calculate the total electrical energy consumption for interior and exterior power, P dd,tot,int dd,tot,ext Where: t = index for each type of electricity-consuming device with identical rated input power; P dd,comp,int,t P dd,comp,ext,t 6.2.2.4 Calculate the total electrical energy consumption, P dd,tot Where: P dd,tot,int P dd,tot,ext 6.2.3 Total Indirect Electricity Consumption Due to Electrical Devices Calculate the additional refrigeration energy consumption due to thermal output from electrical components sited inside the display door, C dd,load Where: P dd,tot,int EER = EER of walk-in cooler or walk-in freezer, Btu/W-h. For coolers, use EER = 12.4 Btu/(W-h). For freezers, use EER = 6.3 Btu/(W-h). 6.2.4 Total Display Door Energy Consumption Calculate the total energy, E dd,tot Where: E dd,thermal P dd,tot C dd,load 6.3 Non-Display Doors 6.3.1 Conduction Through Non-Display Doors 6.3.1.1 Determine the U-factor of the non-display door in accordance with section 5.1 of this appendix, in units of Btu/(h-ft 2 6.3.1.2 Calculate the temperature differential of the non-display door, ΔT nd Where: T DB,ext,nd T DB,int,nd 6.3.1.3 Calculate the conduction load through the non-display door: Q cond,nd Where: A s 2 ΔT nd U nd 2 6.3.1.4 Calculate the total daily energy consumption due to thermal load, E nd,thermal Where: Q cond,nd EER = EER of walk-in (cooler or freezer), Btu/W-h. For coolers, use EER = 12.4 Btu/(W-h). For freezers, use EER = 6.3 Btu/(W-h). 6.3.2 Direct Energy Consumption of Electrical Components of Non-Display Doors Electrical components associated with non-display doors comprise could include, but are not limited to: heater wire (for anti-sweat or anti-freeze application), lights, door motors, control system units, and sensors. 6.3.2.1 Select the required value for percent time off for each type of electricity-consuming device per table A.2 of this appendix, PTO t 6.3.2.2 Calculate the power usage for each type of electricity-consuming device, P nd,comp,u,t Where: u = the index for each of type of electricity-consuming device located on either (1) the interior facing side of the non-display door or within the inside portion of the non-display door, (2) the exterior facing side of the non-display door, or (3) any combination of (1) and (2). For purposes of this calculation, the interior index is represented by u = int and the exterior index is represented by u = ext. If the electrical component is both on the interior and exterior side of the non-display door then use u = int. For anti-sweat heaters sited anywhere in the non-display door, 75 percent of the total power is be attributed to u = int and 25 percent of the total power is attributed to u = ext; t = index for each type of electricity-consuming device with identical rated input power; P rated,u,t PTO u,t n u,t 6.3.2.3 Calculate the total electrical energy consumption for interior and exterior power, P nd,tot,int nd,tot,ext Where: t = index for each type of electricity-consuming device with identical rated input power; P nd,comp,int,t P nd,comp,ext,t 6.3.2.4 Calculate the total electrical energy consumption, P nd,tot Where: P nd,tot,int P nd,tot,ext 6.3.3 Total Indirect Electricity Consumption Due to Electrical Devices Calculate the additional refrigeration energy consumption due to thermal output from electrical components associated with the non-display door, C nd,load Where: P nd,tot,int EER = EER of walk-in cooler or freezer, Btu/W-h. For coolers, use EER = 12.4 Btu/(W-h). For freezers, use EER = 6.3 Btu/(W-h). 6.3.4 Total Non-Display Door Energy Consumption Calculate the total energy, E nd,tot Where: E nd,thermal P nd,tot C nd,load [88 FR 28839, May 4, 2023, as amended at 88 FR 73216, Oct. 25, 2023] Appendix B to Subpart R of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of R-Value of Insulation for Envelope Components of Walk-In Coolers and Walk-In Freezers Note: Prior to October 31, 2023, representations with respect to the R-value for insulation of envelope components of walk-in coolers and walk-in freezers, including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with the applicable provisions of 10 CFR part 431, subpart R, appendix B, revised as of January 1, 2022. Beginning October 31, 2023, representations with respect to R-value for insulation of envelope components of walk-in coolers and walk-in freezers, including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with this appendix. 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.303 the entire standard for ASTM C518-17. However, certain enumerated provisions of ASTM C518-17, as set forth in paragraph 0.1 of this appendix, are inapplicable. To the extent there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of a referenced industry standard and the CFR, the CFR provisions control. 0.1 ASTM C518-17 (a) Section 1 Scope, is inapplicable, (b) Section 4 Significance and Use, is inapplicable, (c) Section 7.3 Specimen Conditioning, is inapplicable, (d) Section 9 Report, is inapplicable, (e) Section 10 Precision and Bias, is inapplicable, (f) Section 11 Keywords, is inapplicable, (g) Annex A2 Equipment Error Analysis, is inapplicable, (h) Appendix X1 is inapplicable, (i) Appendix X2 Response of Heat Flux Transducers, is inapplicable, and (j) Appendix X3 Proven Performance of a Heat Flow Apparatus, is inapplicable. 0.2 [Reserved] 1. General The following sections of this appendix provide additional instructions for testing. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of this appendix takes highest precedence, followed by ASTM C518-17. Any subsequent amendment to a referenced document by the standard-setting organization will not affect the test procedure in this appendix, unless and until the test procedure is amended by DOE. Material is incorporated as it exists on the date of the approval, and a notification of any change in the incorporation will be published in the Federal Register 2. Scope This appendix covers the test requirements used to measure the R-value of non-display panels and non-display doors of a walk-in cooler or walk-in freezer. 3. Definitions The definitions contained in § 431.302 apply to this appendix. 4. Additional Definitions 4.1 Edge region 5. Test Methods, Measurements, and Calculations 5.1 General. 5.2 Specimen Preparation 5.2.1 Determining the thickness around the perimeter of the envelope component, t p 5.2.1.1 At least 8 thickness measurements shall be taken around the perimeter of the envelope component, at least 2 inches from the edge region, and avoiding any regions with hardware or fixtures. 5.2.1.2 The average of the thickness measurements taken around the perimeter of the envelope component shall be the thickness around the perimeter of the envelope component, t p 5.2.1.3 Measure and record the width, w p , h p , A p , Where: w p h p 5.2.2. Removing the sample from the envelope component. 5.2.2.1. Determine the center of the envelope component relative to its height and its width. 5.2.2.2. Cut a sample from the envelope component that is at least the length and width dimensions of the heat flow meter, and where the marked center of the sample is at least 3 inches from any cut edge. 5.2.2.3. If the center of the envelope component contains any non-foam components (excluding facers), additional samples may be cut adjacent to the previous cut that is at least the length and width dimensions of the heat flow meter and is greater than 12 inches from the edge region. 5.2.3. Determining the thickness at the center of the envelope component, t c 5.2.3.1. At least 2 thickness measurements shall be taken in each quadrant of the cut sample removed from the envelope component per section 5.2.2 of this appendix, for a total of at least 8 measurements. 5.2.3.2. The average of the thickness measurements of the cut sample removed from the envelope component shall be the overall thickness of the cut sample, t c 5.2.3.3. Measure and record the width and height of the cut sample removed from the envelope component. The surface area of the cut sample removed from the envelope component, A c Where: w c h c 5.2.4. Determining the total thickness of the foam within the envelope component, t foam 5.2.4.1. Remove the facers on the envelope component sample, while minimally disturbing the foam. 5.2.4.2. Measure the thickness of each facer in 4 locations for a total of 4 measurements if 1 facer is removed, and a total of 8 measurements if 2 facers are removed. The average of all facer measurements shall be the thickness of the facers, t facers 5.2.4.3. The average total thickness of the foam, t foam Where: t c A c 2 t p A p 2 t facers 5.2.5. Cutting, measuring, and determining parallelism and flatness of a 1-inch-thick specimen for test from the center of the cut envelope component sample 5.2.5.1. Cut a 1 ± 0.1-inch-thick specimen from the center of the cut envelope sample. The 1-inch-thick test specimen shall be cut from the point that is equidistant from both edges of the sample ( i.e., 5.2.5.2. Document through measurement or photographs with measurement indicators that the specimen was taken from the center of the sample. 5.2.5.3 After the 1-inch specimen has been cut, and prior to testing, place the specimen on a flat surface and allow gravity to determine the specimen's position on the surface. This will be side 1. 5.2.5.4 To determine the flatness of side 1, take at least nine height measurements at equidistant positions on the specimen ( i.e., 5.2.5.5 To determine the flatness of side 2, turn the specimen over and allow gravity to determine the specimen's position on the surface. Repeat section 5.2.5.4 to determine the flatness of side 2. 5.2.5.6 To determine the parallelism of the specimen for side 1, calculate the theoretical height of the least squares plane at the furthest corners ( i.e., 5.2.5.7 To determine the parallelism of the specimen for side 2, repeat section 5.2.5.6 of this appendix. 5.2.5.8 The average thickness of the test specimen, L, i.e., 5.3 K-factor Test. 5.3.1 Test Conditions. 5.3.1.1 For freezer envelope components, the K-factor of the specimen shall be determined at an average specimen temperature of 20 ± 1 degrees Fahrenheit. 5.3.1.2 For cooler envelope components, the K-factor of the specimen shall be determined at an average specimen temperature of 55 ± 1 degrees Fahrenheit. 5.4 R-value Calculation. 5.4.1 For envelope components consisting of one homogeneous layer of insulation, calculate the R-value, h-ft 2 Where: t foam λ = K-factor, Btu-in/(h-ft 2 5.4.2 For envelope components consisting of two or more layers of dissimilar insulating materials (excluding facers or protective skins), determine the K-factor of each material as described in sections 5.1 through 5.3 of this appendix. For an envelope component with N layers of insulating material, the overall R-value shall be calculated as follows: Where: t i λ i 2 N is the total number of material layers that appears in the envelope component. 5.4.3 K-factor test results from a test sample 1 ± 0.1-inches in thickness may be used to determine the R-value of envelope components with various foam thicknesses as long as the foam throughout the panel depth is of the same final chemical form and the test was completed at the same test conditions that the other envelope components would be used at. For example, a K-factor test result conducted at cooler conditions cannot be used to determine R-value of a freezer envelope component. [88 FR 28843, May 4, 2023, as amended at 88 FR 73217, Oct. 25, 2023] Appendix C to Subpart R of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Net Capacity and AWEF of Walk-In Cooler and Walk-In Freezer Refrigeration Systems Note: Prior to October 31, 2023, representations with respect to the energy use of refrigeration components of walk-in coolers and walk-in freezers, including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with the applicable provisions of 10 CFR part 431, subpart R, appendix C, revised as of January 1, 2022. Beginning October 31, 2023, representations with respect to energy use of refrigeration components of walk-in coolers and walk-in freezers, including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with this appendix. For any amended standards for walk-in coolers and freezers published after January 1, 2022, manufacturers must use the results of testing under appendix C1 to this subpart to determine compliance. Representations related to energy consumption must be made in accordance with appendix C1 when determining compliance with the relevant standard. Manufacturers may also use appendix C1 to certify compliance with any amended standards prior to the applicable compliance date for those standards. 1.0 Scope This appendix covers the test requirements used to determine the net capacity and the AWEF of the refrigeration system of a walk-in cooler or walk-in freezer. 2.0 Definitions The definitions contained in § 431.302 and AHRI 1250-2009 (incorporated by reference; see § 431.303) apply to this appendix. When definitions contained in the standards DOE has incorporated by reference are in conflict or when they conflict with this section, the hierarchy of precedence shall be in the following order: § 431.302, AHRI 1250-2009, and then either AHRI 420-2008 (incorporated by reference; see § 431.303) for unit coolers or ASHRAE 23.1-2010 (incorporated by reference; see § 431.303) for dedicated condensing units. The term “unit cooler” used in AHRI 1250-2009, AHRI 420-2008, and this subpart shall be considered to address both “unit coolers” and “ducted fan coil units,” as appropriate. 3.0 Test Methods, Measurements, and Calculations Determine the Annual Walk-in Energy Factor (AWEF) and net capacity of walk-in cooler and walk-in freezer refrigeration systems by conducting the test procedure set forth in AHRI 1250-2009 (incorporated by reference; see § 431.303), with the modifications to that test procedure provided in this section. When standards that are incorporated by reference are in conflict or when they conflict with this section, the hierarchy of precedence shall be in the following order: § 431.302, AHRI 1250-2009, and then either AHRI 420-2008 (incorporated by reference; see § 431.303) or ASHRAE 23.1-2010 (incorporated by reference; see § 431.303). 3.1. General modifications: Test Conditions and Tolerances. When conducting testing in accordance with AHRI 1250-2009 (incorporated by reference; see § 431.303), the following modifications must be made. 3.1.1. In Table 1, Instrumentation Accuracy, refrigerant temperature measurements shall have an accuracy of ±0.5 °F for unit cooler in/out. When testing high-temperature refrigeration systems, measurements used to determine temperature or water vapor content of the air ( i.e., 3.1.2. In Table 2, Test Operating and Test Condition Tolerances for Steady-State Test, electrical power frequency shall have a Test Condition Tolerance of 1 percent. 3.1.3. In Table 2, the Test Operating Tolerances and Test Condition Tolerances for Air Leaving Temperatures shall be deleted. 3.1.4. In Tables 2 through 14, the Test Condition Outdoor Wet Bulb Temperature requirement and its associated tolerance apply only to units with evaporative cooling. 3.1.5. Tables 15 and 16 shall be modified to read as follows: Table 15—Refrigerator Unit Cooler Test Unit cooler air entering Unit cooler air entering Saturated Liquid inlet saturation temp, °F Liquid inlet subcooling temp, °F Compressor Test objective Off Cycle Fan Power 35 <50 — — — Compressor Off Measure fan input power during compressor off cycle. Refrigeration Capacity Suction A 35 <50 25 105 9 Compressor On Determine Net Refrigeration Capacity of Unit Cooler. Refrigeration Capacity Suction B 35 <50 20 105 9 Compressor On Determine Net Refrigeration Capacity of Unit Cooler. Note: Table 16—Freezer Unit Cooler Test Unit cooler air entering Unit cooler air entering Saturated Liquid inlet saturation temp, °F Liquid inlet subcooling temp, °F Compressor Test objective Off Cycle Fan Power −10 <50 — — — Compressor Off Measure fan input power during compressor off cycle. Refrigeration Capacity Suction A −10 <50 −20 105 9 Compressor On Determine Net Refrigeration Capacity of Unit Cooler. Refrigeration Capacity Suction B −10 <50 −26 105 9 Compressor On Determine Net Refrigeration Capacity of Unit Cooler. Defrost −10 Various — — — Compressor Off Test according to Appendix C Section C11. Note: 3.1.6. Test Operating Conditions for CO 2 For medium-temperature CO 2 2 Table C.1—Test Operating Conditions for Medium-Temperature CO 2 Test description Unit cooler Unit cooler Suction Liquid Liquid Compressor Test objective Off-Cycle Power 35 <50 Compressor Off Measure fan input power during compressor off-cycle. Refrigeration Capacity, Ambient Condition A 35 <50 25 38 5 Compressor On Determine Net Refrigeration Capacity of Unit Cooler. Notes: 1 Table C.2—Test Operating Conditions for Low-Temperature CO 2 Test description Unit Unit Suction Liquid inlet bubble point temperature Liquid Compressor Test objective Off-Cycle Power −10 <50 Compressor Off Measure fan input power during compressor off cycle. Refrigeration Capacity, Ambient Condition A −10 <50 −20 38 5 Compressor On Determine Net Refrigeration Capacity of Unit Cooler. Defrost −10 <50 Compressor Off Test according to Appendix C Section C11 of AHRI 1250-2009. 1. Superheat shall be set as indicated in the installation instructions. If no superheat specification is given a default superheat value of 6.5 °F shall be used. 3.1.7. Test Operating Conditions for High-Temperature Unit Coolers For high-temperature cooler unit coolers, conduct tests using the test conditions specified in table C.3 of this appendix. Table C.3—Test Operating Conditions for High-Temperature Unit Coolers Test description Unit Unit 1 Suction 2 3 Liquid inlet bubble point temperature Liquid Compressor Test objective Off-Cycle 55 55 105 9 Compressor Off Measure fan input power. Refrigeration Capacity Suction A 55 55 38 105 9 Compressor On Determine Net Refrigeration Capacity of Unit Cooler. Notes: 1 2 3 3.2. General Modifications: Methods of Testing When conducting testing in accordance with appendix C of AHRI 1250-2009 (incorporated by reference; see § 431.303), the following modifications must be made. 3.2.1. Refrigerant Temperature Measurements In AHRI 1250-2009 appendix C, section C3.1.6, any refrigerant temperature measurements entering and leaving the unit cooler may use sheathed sensors immersed in the flowing refrigerant instead of thermometer wells. When testing a condensing unit alone, measure refrigerant liquid temperature leaving the condensing unit using thermometer wells as described in AHRI 1250-2009 appendix C, section C3.1.6 or sheathed sensors immersed in the flowing refrigerant. For all of these cases, if the refrigerant tube outer diameter is less than 1/2 3.2.2. It is not necessary to perform composition analysis of refrigerant (appendix C, section C3.3.6) or refrigerant oil concentration testing (appendix C, section C3.4.6). 3.2.3. Subcooling at Refrigerant Mass Flow Meter In appendix C, section C3.4.5 of AHRI 1250-2009 (incorporated by reference; see § 431.303), and in section 7.1.2 of ASHRAE 23.1-2010 (incorporated by reference; see § 431.303) when verifying subcooling at the mass flow meters, only the sight glass and a temperature sensor located on the tube surface under the insulation are required. Subcooling shall be verified to be within the 3 °F requirement downstream of flow meters located in the same chamber as a condensing unit under test and upstream of flow meters located in the same chamber as a unit cooler under test, rather than always downstream as indicated in AHRI 1250-2009, section C3.4.5 or always upstream as indicated in section 7.1.2 of ASHRAE 23.1-2010. If the subcooling is less than 3 °F, cool the line between the condensing unit outlet and this location to achieve the required subcooling. When providing such cooling while testing a matched pair, (a) set up the line-cooling system and also set up apparatus to heat the liquid line between the mass flow meters and the unit cooler, (b) when the system has achieved steady state without activation of the heating and cooling systems, measure the liquid temperature entering the expansion valve for a period of at least 30 minutes, (c) activate the cooling system to provide the required subcooling at the mass flow meters, (d) if necessary, apply heat such that the temperature entering the expansion valve is within 0.5 0 3.2.4. In appendix C, section C3.5, regarding unit cooler fan power measurements, for a given motor winding configuration, the total power input shall be measured at the highest nameplate voltage. For three-phase power, voltage imbalances shall be no more than 2 percent from phase to phase. 3.2.5. In the test setup (appendix C, section C8.3), the liquid line and suction line shall be constructed of pipes of the manufacturer-specified size. The pipe lines shall be insulated with a minimum total thermal resistance equivalent to 1/2 2 3.2.6. Installation Instructions Manufacturer installation instructions refer to the instructions that are applied to the unit ( i.e., 3.2.6.1 Installation Instruction Hierarchy when available installation instructions are in conflict 3.2.6.1.1 If a manufacturer installation instruction provided on the label(s) applied to the unit conflicts with the manufacturer installation instructions that are shipped with the unit, the instructions on the unit's label take precedence. 3.2.6.1.2 Manufacturer installation instructions provided in any documents that are packaged with the unit take precedence over any manufacturer installation instructions provided online. 3.2.6.2 For testing of attached split systems, the manufacturer installation instructions for the dedicated condensing unit shall take precedence over the manufacturer installation instructions for the unit cooler. 3.2.6.3 Unit setup shall be in accordance with the manufacturer installation instructions (laboratory installation instructions shall not be used). 3.2.6.4 Achieving test conditions shall always take precedence over installation instructions. 3.2.7. Refrigerant Charging and Adjustment of Superheat and Subcooling. All dedicated condensing systems (dedicated condensing units tested alone, matched pairs, and single packaged dedicated systems) that use flooding of the condenser for head pressure control during low-ambient-temperature conditions shall be charged, and superheat and/or subcooling shall be set, at Refrigeration C test conditions unless otherwise specified in the installation instructions. If after being charged at Refrigeration C condition the unit under test does not operate at the Refrigeration A condition due to high pressure cut out, refrigerant shall be removed in increments of 4 ounces or 5 percent of the test unit's receiver capacity, whichever quantity is larger, until the unit operates at the Refrigeration A condition. All tests shall be run at this final refrigerant charge. If less than 0 °F of subcooling is measured for the refrigerant leaving the condensing unit when testing at B or C condition, calculate the refrigerant-enthalpy-based capacity ( i.e., All dedicated condensing systems that do not use a flooded condenser design shall be charged at Refrigeration A test conditions unless otherwise specified in the installation instructions. If the installation instructions give a specified range for superheat, sub-cooling, or refrigerant pressure, the average of the range shall be used as the refrigerant charging parameter target and the test condition tolerance shall be ±50 percent of the range. Perform charging of near-azeotropic and zeotropic refrigerants only with refrigerant in the liquid state. Once the correct refrigerant charge is determined, all tests shall run until completion without further modification. 3.2.7.1. When charging or adjusting superheat/subcooling, use all pertinent instructions contained in the installation instructions to achieve charging parameters within the tolerances. However, in the event of conflicting charging information between installation instructions, follow the installation instruction hierarchy listed in section 3.2.6. of this appendix. Conflicting information is defined as multiple conditions given for charge adjustment where all conditions specified cannot be met. In the event of conflicting information within the same set of charging instructions (e.g., the installation instructions shipped with the dedicated condensing unit), follow the hierarchy in table C.4 of this section for priority. Unless the installation instructions specify a different charging tolerance, the tolerances identified in table C.4 of this section shall be used. Table C.4—Test Condition Tolerances and Hierarchy for Refrigerant Charging and Setting of Refrigerant Conditions Priority Fixed orifice Expansion valve Parameter with installation Tolerance Parameter with installation Tolerance 1 Superheat ±2.0 °F Subcooling 10% of the Target Value; No less than ±0.5 °F, No more than ±2.0 °F. 2 High Side Pressure or Saturation Temperature ±4.0 psi or ±1.0 °F High Side Pressure or Saturation Temperature ±4.0 psi or ±1.0 °F. 3 Low Side Pressure or Saturation Temperature ±2.0 psi or ±0.8 °F Superheat ±2.0 °F. 4 Low Side Temperature ±2.0 °F Low Side Pressure or Saturation Temperature ±2.0 psi or ±0.8 °F. 5 High Side Temperature ±2.0 °F Approach Temperature ±1.0 °F. 6 Charge Weight ±2.0 oz Charge Weight 0.5% or 1.0 oz, whichever is greater. 3.2.7.2. Dedicated Condensing Unit. 3.2.8. Chamber Conditioning using the Unit Under Test. In appendix C, section C6.2 of AHRI 1250-2009, for applicable system configurations (matched pairs, single-packaged refrigeration systems, and standalone unit coolers), the unit under test may be used to aid in achieving the required test chamber conditions prior to beginning any steady state test. However, the unit under test must be inspected and confirmed to be free from frost before initiating steady state testing. 3.3. Matched systems, single-package dedicated systems, and unit coolers tested alone: 3.3.1. For unit coolers tested alone, use test procedures described in AHRI 1250-2009 for testing unit coolers for use in mix-match system ratings, except that for the test conditions in tables 15 and 16 of this appendix, use the Suction A saturation condition test points only. Also, for unit coolers tested alone, other than high-temperature unit coolers, use the calculations in section 7.9 of AHRI 1250-2009 to determine AWEF and net capacity described in AHRI 1250-2009 for unit coolers matched to parallel rack systems. 3.3.2. In appendix C, section C.13, the version of AHRI Standard 420 used for test methods, requirements, and procedures shall be AHRI 420-2008 (incorporated by reference; see § 431.303). 3.3.3. Evaporator Fan Power. 3.3.3.1. Ducted Evaporator Air. For ducted fan coil units with ducted evaporator air, or that can be installed with or without ducted evaporator air: Connect ductwork on both the inlet and outlet connections and determine external static pressure as described in ASHRAE 37 (incorporated by reference; see § 431.303), sections 6.4 and 6.5. Use pressure measurement instrumentation as described in ASHRAE 37, section 5.3.2. Test at the fan speed specified in manufacturer installation instructions—if there is more than one fan speed setting and the installation instructions do not specify which speed to use, test at the highest speed. Conduct tests with the external static pressure equal to 50 percent of the maximum external static pressure allowed by the manufacturer for system installation within a tolerance of −0.00/+0.05 in. wc. Set the external static pressure by symmetrically restricting the outlet of the test duct. Alternatively, if using the indoor air enthalpy method to measure capacity, set external static pressure by adjusting the fan of the airflow measurement apparatus. In case of conflict, these requirements for setting evaporator airflow take precedence over airflow values specified in manufacturer installation instructions or product literature. 3.3.3.2. Unit Coolers or Single-Packaged Systems that are not High-Temperature Refrigeration Systems. Use appendix C, section C10 of AHRI 1250-2009 for off-cycle evaporator fan testing, with the exception that evaporator fan controls using periodic stir cycles shall be adjusted so that the greater of a 50 percent duty cycle (rather than a 25 percent duty cycle) or the manufacturer default is used for measuring off-cycle fan energy. For adjustable-speed controls, the greater of 50 percent fan speed (rather than 25 percent fan speed) or the manufacturer's default fan speed shall be used for measuring off-cycle fan energy. Also, a two-speed or multi-speed fan control may be used as the qualifying evaporator fan control. For such a control, a fan speed no less than 50 percent of the speed used in the maximum capacity tests shall be used for measuring off-cycle fan energy. 3.3.3.3. High-Temperature Refrigeration Systems. 3.3.3.3.1. The evaporator fan power consumption shall be measured in accordance with the requirements in section C3.5 of AHRI 1250-2009. This measurement shall be made with the fan operating at full speed, either measuring unit cooler or total system power input upon the completion of the steady state test when the compressor and the condenser fan of the walk-in system are turned off, or by submetered measurement of the evaporator fan power during the steady state test. Section C3.5 of AHRI 1250-2009 is revised to read: Evaporator Fan Power Measurement. The following shall be measured and recorded during a fan power test. EF comp,on FS Fan speed(s), rpm N Number of motors P b T db T wb V Voltage of each phase For a given motor winding configuration, the total power input shall be measured at the highest nameplate voltage. For three-phase power, voltage imbalance shall be no more than 2%. 3.3.3.3.2. Evaporator fan power for the off-cycle is equal to the on-cycle evaporator fan power with a run time of 10 percent of the off-cycle time. EF comp,off EF comp,on 3.3.4. Use appendix C, section C11 of AHRI 1250-2009 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.303) for defrost testing. The Frost Load Condition Defrost Test (C11.1.1) is optional. 3.3.4.1. If the frost load condition defrost test is performed: 3.3.4.1.1 Operate the unit cooler at the dry coil conditions as specified in appendix C, section C11.1 to obtain dry coil defrost energy, DF d 3.3.4.1.2 Operate the unit cooler at the frost load conditions as specified in appendix C, sections C11.1 and C11.1.1 to obtain frosted coil defrost energy, DF f 3.3.4.1.3 The number of defrosts per day, N DF 3.3.4.1.4 Use appendix C, equations C13 and C14 in section C11.3 to calculate, respectively, the daily average defrost energy, DF, in W-h and the daily contribution of the load attributed to defrost Q DF 3.3.4.1.5 The defrost adequacy requirements in appendix C, section C11.3 shall apply. 3.3.4.2 If the frost load test is not performed: 3.3.4.2.1 Operate the unit cooler at the dry coil conditions as specified in appendix C, section C11.1 to obtain dry coil defrost energy, DF d 3.3.4.2.2 The frost load defrost energy, DF f d 3.3.4.2.3 The number of defrosts per day N DF 3.3.4.2.4 Use appendix C, equation C13 in section C11.3 to calculate the daily average defrost energy, DF, in W-h. 3.3.4.2.5 The daily contribution of the load attributed to defrost Q DF Where: DF d 3.3.5. If a unit has adaptive defrost, use appendix C, section C11.2 of AHRI 1250-2009 as follows: 3.3.5.1. When testing to certify to the energy conservation standards in § 431.306, do not perform the optional test for adaptive or demand defrost in appendix C, section C11.2. 3.3.5.2. When determining the represented value of the calculated benefit for the inclusion of adaptive defrost, conduct the optional test for adaptive or demand defrost in appendix C, section C11.2 to establish the maximum time interval allowed between dry coil defrosts. If this time is greater than 24 hours, set its value to 24 hours. Then, calculate N DF DF 3.3.6. For matched refrigeration systems and single-package dedicated systems, calculate the AWEF using the calculations in AHRI 1250-2009 (incorporated by reference; see § 431.303), section 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, or 7.7, as applicable. 3.3.7. Calculations for Unit Coolers Tested Alone. 3.3.7.1. Unit Coolers that are not High-Temperature Unit Coolers. Calculate the AWEF and net capacity using the calculations in AHRI 1250-2009, section 7.9. 3.3.7.2 High-Temperature Unit Coolers. Calculate AWEF on the basis that walk-in box load is equal to half of the system net capacity, without variation according to high and low load periods, and with EER set according to tested evaporator capacity, as follows: The net capacity, q mix,evap Where: Where: B L LF is the load factor; and Other symbols are as defined in section 8 of AHRI 1250-2009. 3.3.7.3. If the unit cooler has variable-speed evaporator fans that vary fan speed in response to load, then: 3.3.7.3.1. When testing to certify compliance with the energy conservation standards in § 431.306, fans shall operate at full speed during on-cycle operation. Do not conduct the calculations in AHRI 1250-2009, section 7.9.3. Instead, use AHRI 1250-2009, section 7.9.2 to determine the system's AWEF. 3.3.7.3.2. When calculating the benefit for the inclusion of variable-speed evaporator fans that modulate fan speed in response to load for the purpose of making representations of efficiency, use AHRI 1250-2009, section 7.9.3 to determine the system AWEF. 3.4. Dedicated condensing units that are not matched for testing and are not single-package dedicated systems 3.4.1. Refer to appendix C, section C.12 of AHRI 1250-2009 (incorporated by reference; see § 431.303), for the method of test for dedicated condensing units. The version of ASHRAE Standard 23 used for test methods, requirements, and procedures shall be ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 23.1-2010 (incorporated by reference; see § 431.303). When applying this test method, use the applicable test method modifications listed in sections 3.1 and 3.2 of this appendix. For the test conditions in AHRI 1250-2009, Tables 11, 12, 13, and 14, use the Suction A condition test points only. 3.4.2. Calculate the AWEF and net capacity for dedicated condensing units using the calculations in AHRI 1250-2009 (incorporated by reference; see § 431.303) section 7.8. Use the following modifications to the calculations in lieu of unit cooler test data: 3.4.2.1. For calculating enthalpy leaving the unit cooler to calculate gross capacity, (a) the saturated refrigerant temperature (dew point) at the unit cooler coil exit, T evap 3.4.2.2. The on-cycle evaporator fan power in watts, EF comp,on For medium-temperature systems (coolers), EF comp,on mix,cd For low-temperature systems (freezers), EF comp,on mix,cd Where: q mix,cd 3.4.2.3. The off-cycle evaporator fan power in watts, EF comp,off EF comp,off comp,on Where: EF comp,on 3.4.2.4. The daily defrost energy use in watt-hours, DF, shall be calculated as follows: For medium-temperature systems (coolers), DF = 0 For low-temperature systems (freezers), DF = 8.5 × 10 −3 mix,cd 1.27 DF Where: q mix,cd N DF 3.4.2.5. The daily defrost heat load contribution in Btu, Q DF For medium-temperature systems (coolers), Q DF For low-temperature systems (freezers), Q DF Where: DF is the daily defrost energy use in watt-hours. 3.5 Hot Gas Defrost Refrigeration Systems For all hot gas defrost refrigeration systems, remove the hot gas defrost mechanical components and disconnect all such components from electrical power. 3.5.1 Hot Gas Defrost Dedicated Condensing Units Tested Alone: Test these units as described in section 3.4 of this appendix for electric defrost dedicated condensing units that are not matched for testing and are not single-package dedicated systems. 3.5.2 Hot Gas Defrost Matched Systems and Single-package Dedicated Systems: Test these units as described in section 3.3 of this appendix for electric defrost matched systems and single-package dedicated systems, but do not conduct defrost tests as described in sections 3.3.4 and 3.3.5 of this appendix. Calculate daily defrost energy use as described in section 3.4.2.4 of this appendix. Calculate daily defrost heat contribution as described in section 3.4.2.5 of this appendix. 3.5.3 Hot Gas Defrost Unit Coolers Tested Alone: Test these units as described in section 3.3 of this appendix for electric defrost unit coolers tested alone, but do not conduct defrost tests as described in sections 3.3.4 and 3.3.5 of this appendix. Calculate average defrost heat load Q DF [81 FR 95803, Dec. 28, 2016, as amended at 86 FR 16035, Mar. 26, 2021; 88 FR 28845, May 4, 2023; 88 FR 73217, Oct. 25, 2023] Appendix C1 to Subpart R of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Net Capacity and AWEF2 of Walk-In Cooler and Walk-In Freezer Refrigeration Systems Note: Prior to October 31, 2023, representations with respect to the energy use of refrigeration components of walk-in coolers and walk-in freezers, including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with the applicable provisions for 10 CFR part 431, subpart R, appendix C, revised as of January 1, 2022. Beginning October 31, 2023, representations with respect to energy use of refrigeration components of walk-in coolers and walk-in freezers, including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with appendix C to this subpart. For any amended standards for walk-in coolers and walk-in freezers published after January 1, 2022, manufacturers must use the results of testing under this appendix to determine compliance. Representations related to energy consumption must be made in accordance with this appendix when determining compliance with the relevant standard. Manufacturers may also use this appendix to certify compliance with any amended standards prior to the applicable compliance date for those standards. 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.303, the entire standard for AHRI 1250-2020, ANSI/ASHRAE 16, ANSI/ASHRAE 23.1-2010, ANSI/ASHRAE 37, ANSI/ASHRAE 41.1, ANSI/ASHRAE 41.3, ANSI/ASHRAE 41.6, and ANSI/ASHRAE 41.10. However, certain enumerated provisions of these standards, as set forth in sections 0.1 through 0.8 of this appendix are inapplicable. To the extent there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of a referenced industry standard and the CFR, the CFR provisions control. To the extent there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of AHRI 1250-2020, ANSI/ASHRAE 16, ANSI/ASHRAE 23.1-2010, ANSI/ASHRAE 37, ANSI/ASHRAE 41.1, ANSI/ASHRAE 41.3, ANSI/ASHRAE 41.6, and ANSI/ASHRAE 41.10, the AHRI 1250-2020 provisions control. 0.1 AHRI 1250-2020 (a) Section 1 Purpose, is inapplicable (b) Section 2 Scope, is inapplicable (c) Section 9 Minimum Data Requirements for Published Rating, is inapplicable (d) Section 10 Marking and Nameplate Data, is inapplicable (e) Section 11 Conformance Conditions, is inapplicable 0.2 ANSI/ASHRAE 16 (a) Section 1 Purpose, is inapplicable (b) Section 2 Scope, is inapplicable (c) Section 4 Classifications, is inapplicable (d) Normative Appendices E-M, are inapplicable (e) Informative Appendices N-R, are inapplicable 0.3 ANSI/ASHRAE 23.1-2010 (a) Section 1 Purpose, is inapplicable (b) Section 2 Scope, is inapplicable (c) Section 4 Classifications, is inapplicable 0.4 ANSI/ASHRAE 37 (a) Section 1 Purpose, is inapplicable (b) Section 2 Scope, is inapplicable (c) Section 4 Classifications, is inapplicable (d) Informative Appendix A Classifications of Unitary Air-conditioners and Heat Pumps, is inapplicable. 0.5 ANSI/ASHRAE 41.1 (a) Section 1 Purpose, is inapplicable (b) Section 2 Scope, is inapplicable (c) Section 4 Classifications, is inapplicable (d) Section 9 Test Report, is inapplicable (e) Informative Appendices A-C, are inapplicable 0.6 ANSI/ASHRAE 41.3 (a) Section 1 Purpose, is inapplicable (b) Section 2 Scope, is inapplicable (c) Section 4 Classifications, is inapplicable (d) Section 6 Instrument Types (informative), is inapplicable (e) Section 8 Test Report, is inapplicable (f) Informative Annexes A-D, are inapplicable 0.7 ANSI/ASHRAE 41.6 (a) Section 1 Purpose, is inapplicable (b) Section 2 Scope, is inapplicable (c) Section 4 Classifications, is inapplicable (d) Section 9 Test Report, is inapplicable (e) Informative Appendices A-D, are inapplicable 0.8 ANSI/ASHRAE 41.10 (a) Section 1 Purpose, is inapplicable (b) Section 2 Scope, is inapplicable (c) Section 4 Classifications, is inapplicable (d) Section 10 Test Report, is inapplicable (e) Informative Annexes A-D, are inapplicable 1. Scope This appendix covers the test requirements used to determine the net capacity and the AWEF2 of the refrigeration system of a walk-in cooler or walk-in freezer. 2. Definitions 2.1. Applicable Definitions The definitions contained in § 431.302, AHRI 1250-2020, ANSI/ASHRAE 37, and ANSI/ASHRAE 16 apply to this appendix. When definitions in standards incorporated by reference are in conflict or when they conflict with this section, the hierarchy of precedence shall be in the following order: § 431.302, AHRI 1250-2020, and then either ANSI/ASHRAE 37 or ANSI/ASHRAE 16. The term “unit cooler” used in AHRI 1250-2020 and this subpart shall be considered to address both “unit coolers” and “ducted fan coil units,” as appropriate. 2.2. Additional Definitions 2.2.1. Digital Compressor 2.2.2. Displacement Ratio, 2.2.3. Duty Cycle, 2.2.4. Maximum Speed, i.e. 2.2.5. Minimum Speed, 2.2.6. Multiple-Capacity, 2.2.7. Speed Ratio, 3. Test Methods, Measurements, and Calculations Determine the Annual Walk-in Energy Factor (AWEF2) and net capacity of walk-in cooler and walk-in freezer refrigeration systems by conducting the test procedure set forth in AHRI 1250-2020, with the modifications to that test procedure provided in this section. However, certain sections of AHRI 1250-2020, ANSI/ASHRAE 37, and ANSI/ASHRAE 16 are not applicable, as set forth in sections 0.1, 0.2, and 0.3 of this appendix. Round AWEF2 measurements to the nearest 0.01 Btu/Wh. Round net capacity measurements as indicated in table 1 of this appendix. Table 1—Rounding of Refrigeration System Net Capacity Net capacity range, Btu/h Rounding <20,000 100 ≥20,000 and <38,000 200 ≥38,000 and <65,000 500 ≥65,000 1,000 The following sections of this appendix provide additional instructions for testing. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of this appendix takes highest precedence, followed by AHRI 1250-2020, then ANSI/ASHRAE 37 or ANSI/ASHRAE 16. Any subsequent amendment to a referenced document by the standard-setting organization will not affect the test procedure in this appendix, unless and until the test procedure is amended by DOE. Material is incorporated as it exists on the date of the approval, and a notification of any change in the incorporation will be published in the Federal Register 3.1. Instrumentation Accuracy and Test Tolerances Use measuring instruments as described in section 4.1 of AHRI 1250-2020, with the following additional requirement. 3.1.1. Electrical Energy Input measured in Wh with a minimum accuracy of ±0.5% of reading (for Off-Cycle tests per footnote 5 of Table C3 in section C3.6.2 of AHRI 1250-2020). 3.2. Test Operating Conditions Test conditions used to determine AWEF2 shall be as specified in Tables 4 through 17 of AHRI 1250-2020. Tables 7 and 11 of AHRI 1250-2020, labeled to apply to variable-speed outdoor matched-pair refrigeration systems, shall also be used for testing variable-capacity single-packaged outdoor refrigeration systems, and also for testing multiple-capacity matched-pair or single-packaged outdoor refrigeration systems. Test conditions used to determine AWEF2 for refrigeration systems not specifically identified in AHRI 1250-2020 are as enumerated in sections 3.5.1 through 3.5.6 of this appendix. 3.2.1 Test Operating Conditions for High-Temperature Refrigeration Systems For fixed-capacity high-temperature matched-pair or single-packaged refrigeration systems with indoor condensing units, conduct tests using the test conditions specified in table 2 of this appendix. For fixed-capacity high-temperature matched-pair or single-packaged refrigeration systems with outdoor condensing units, conduct tests using the test conditions specified in table 3 of this appendix. For high-temperature unit coolers tested alone, conduct tests using the test conditions specified in table 4 of this appendix. Table 2—Test Operating Conditions for Fixed-Capacity High-Temperature Indoor Matched Pair or Single-Packaged Refrigeration Systems Test description Unit cooler Unit cooler 1 Condenser Condenser Compressor Test objective Off-Cycle Power 55 55 Compressor Off Measure total input wattage during compressor off-cycle, (E cu,off comp,off 2 Refrigeration Capacity A 55 55 90 3 4 Compressor On Determine Net Refrigeration Capacity of Unit Cooler, input power, and EER at Test Condition. Notes: 1 2 3 4 Table 3—Test Operating Conditions for Fixed-Capacity High-Temperature Outdoor Matched-Pair or Single-Packaged Refrigeration Systems Test Unit cooler Unit cooler 1 Condenser Condenser Compressor Test objective Refrigeration Capacity A 55 55 95 3 4 Compressor On Determine Net Refrigeration Capacity of Unit Cooler, input power, and EER at Test Condition. Off-Cycle Power, Capacity A 55 55 95 3 4 Compressor Off Measure total input wattage during compressor off-cycle, ( E cu,off comp,off 2 Refrigeration Capacity B 55 55 59 3 4 Compressor On Determine Net Refrigeration Capacity of Unit Cooler and system input power at moderate condition. Off-Cycle Power, Capacity B 55 55 59 3 4 Compressor Off Measure total input wattage during compressor off-cycle, (E cu,off comp,off 2 Refrigeration Capacity C 55 55 35 3 4 Compressor On Determine Net Refrigeration Capacity of Unit Cooler and system input power at cold condition. Off-Cycle Power, Capacity C 55 55 35 3 4 Compressor Off Measure total input wattage during compressor off-cycle, (E cu,off comp,off 2 Notes: 1 2 3 e.g., 4 Table 4—Test Operating Conditions for High-Temperature Unit Coolers Test description Unit cooler Unit cooler 1 Suction 3 4 Liquid inlet Liquid inlet Compressor Test objective Off-Cycle 55 55 105 9 Compressor Off Measure unit cooler input wattage during compressor off-cycle, E F 2 Refrigeration Capacity 55 55 38 105 9 Compressor On Determine Net Refrigeration Capacity of Unit Cooler, input power, and EER at Test Condition. Notes: 1 2 3 4 3.2.2 Test Operating Conditions for CO 2 For medium-temperature CO 2 2 Table 5—Test Operating Conditions 1 2 Test title Unit cooler Unit cooler Suction 3 Liquid inlet Liquid inlet Compressor Test objective Off-Cycle Power 35 <50 Compressor Off Measure unit cooler input wattage during compressor off-cycle, E F 2 Refrigeration Capacity, Ambient Condition A 35 <50 25 38 5 Compressor On Determine Net Refrigeration Capacity of Unit Cooler, q Notes: 1 2 3 Table 6—Test Operating Conditions for Low-Temperature CO 2 Test title Unit cooler Unit cooler Suction 2 Liquid inlet Liquid inlet Compressor Test objective Off-Cycle Power −10 <50 Compressor Off Measure unit cooler input wattage during compressor off-cycle, E F 2 Refrigeration Capacity, Ambient Condition A −10 <50 −20 38 5 Compressor On Determine Net Refrigeration Capacity of Unit Cooler, q Defrost −10 <50 Compressor Off Test according to Appendix C Section C10 of AHRI 1250-2020, D Q Notes: 1 2 3 3.2.3 Test Operating Conditions for Two-Capacity Condensing Units Tested Alone For two-capacity medium-temperature outdoor condensing units tested alone, conduct tests using the test conditions specified in table 7 of this appendix. For two-capacity medium-temperature indoor condensing units tested alone, conduct tests using the test conditions specified in table 8 of this appendix. For two-capacity low-temperature outdoor condensing units tested alone, conduct tests using the test conditions specified in table 9 of this appendix. For two-capacity low-temperature indoor condensing units tested alone, conduct tests using the test conditions specified in table 10 of this appendix. Table 7—Test Operating Conditions for Two-Capacity Medium-Temperature Outdoor Dedicated Condensing Units Test description Suction Return gas, °F Condenser Condenser 1 Compressor status Capacity, Condition A, Low Capacity 24 41 95 75 Low Capacity, k=1. Capacity, Condition A, High Capacity 23 41 95 75 High Capacity, k=2. Off-Cycle, Condition A 95 75 Off. Capacity, Condition B, Low Capacity 24 41 59 54 Low Capacity, k=1. Capacity, Condition B, High Capacity 23 59 54 High Capacity, k=2. Off-Cycle, Condition B 59 54 Off. Capacity, Condition C, Low Capacity 24 41 35 34 Low Capacity, k=1. Capacity, Condition C, High Capacity 23 41 35 34 High Capacity, k=2. Off-Cycle, Condition C 35 34 Off. Notes: 1 Table 8—Test Operating Conditions for Two-Capacity Medium-Temperature Indoor Dedicated Condensing Units Test description Suction Return gas, °F Condenser Condenser 1 Compressor status Capacity, Condition A, Low Capacity 24 41 90 75 Low Capacity, k=1. Capacity, Condition A, High Capacity 23 41 90 75 High Capacity, k=2. Off-Cycle, Condition A 90 75 Off. Notes: 1 Table 9—Test Operating Conditions for Two-Capacity Low-Temperature Outdoor Dedicated Condensing Units Test title Suction Return gas, Condenser Condenser 1 Compressor operating mode Capacity, Condition A, Low Capacity −22 5 95 75 Low Capacity, k=1. Capacity, Condition A, High Capacity −22 5 95 75 High Capacity, k=2. Off-Cycle, Condition A 95 75 Compressor Off. Capacity, Condition B, Low Capacity −22 5 59 54 Low Capacity, k=1. Capacity, Condition B, High Capacity −22 5 59 54 High Capacity, k=2. Off-Cycle, Condition B 59 54 Compressor Off. Capacity, Condition C, Low Capacity −22 5 35 34 Low Capacity, k=1. Capacity, Condition C, High Capacity −22 5 35 34 High Capacity, k=2. Off-Cycle, Condition C 35 34 Compressor Off. Notes: 1 e.g., Table 10—Test Operating Conditions for Two-Capacity Low-Temperature Indoor Dedicated Condensing Units Test title Suction Return gas, °F Condenser Condenser 1 Compressor operating mode Capacity, Condition A, Low Capacity −22 5 90 75 Low Capacity, k=1. Capacity, Condition A, High Capacity −22 5 90 75 High Capacity, k=2. Off-Cycle, Condition A 90 75 Compressor Off. Notes: 1 3.2.4 Test Operating Conditions for Variable- or Multiple-Capacity Condensing Units Tested Alone For variable-capacity or multiple-capacity outdoor medium-temperature condensing units tested alone, conduct tests using the test conditions specified in table 11 of this appendix. For variable-capacity or multiple-capacity indoor medium-temperature condensing units tested alone, conduct tests using the test conditions specified in table 12 of this appendix. For variable-capacity or multiple-capacity outdoor low-temperature condensing units tested alone, conduct tests using the test conditions specified in table 13 of this appendix. For variable-capacity or multiple-capacity indoor low-temperature condensing units tested alone, conduct tests using the test conditions specified in table 14 of this appendix. Table 11—Test Operating Conditions for Variable- or Multiple-Capacity Medium-Temperature Outdoor Dedicated Condensing Units Test description Suction Return gas, °F Condenser Condenser 1 Compressor status Capacity, Condition A, Minimum Capacity 24 41 95 75 Minimum Capacity, k=1. Capacity, Condition A, Intermediate Capacity 24 41 95 75 Intermediate Capacity, k=i. Capacity, Condition A, Maximum Capacity 23 41 95 75 Maximum Capacity, k=2 Off-Cycle, Condition A 95 75 Off. Capacity, Condition B, Minimum Capacity 24 41 59 54 Minimum Capacity, k=1. Capacity, Condition B, Intermediate Capacity 24 41 59 54 Intermediate Capacity, k=i. Capacity, Condition B, Maximum Capacity 23 41 59 54 Maximum Capacity, k=2. Off-Cycle, Condition B 59 54 Off. Capacity, Condition C, Minimum Capacity 24 41 35 34 Minimum Capacity, k=1. Capacity, Condition C, Intermediate Capacity 24 41 35 34 Intermediate Capacity, k=i. Capacity, Condition C, Maximum Capacity 23 41 35 34 Maximum Capacity, k=2. Off-Cycle, Condition C 35 34 Off. Notes: 1 Table 12—Test Operating Conditions for Variable- or Multiple-Capacity Medium-Temperature Indoor Dedicated Condensing Units Test description Suction Return gas, °F Condenser Condenser 1 Compressor status Capacity, Condition A, Minimum Capacity 24 41 90 75 Minimum Capacity, k=1. Capacity, Condition A, Intermediate Capacity 24 41 90 75 Intermediate Capacity, k=i. Capacity, Condition A, Maximum Capacity 23 41 90 75 Maximum Capacity, k=2. Off-Cycle, Condition A 90 75 Off. Notes: 1 Table 13—Test Operating Conditions for Variable- or Multiple-Capacity Low-Temperature Outdoor Dedicated Condensing Units Test title Suction Return gas, Condenser Condenser 1 Compressor operating mode Capacity, Condition A, Minimum Capacity −22 5 95 75 Minimum Capacity, k=1. Capacity, Condition A, Intermediate Capacity −22 5 95 75 Intermediate Capacity, k=i. Capacity, Condition A, Maximum Capacity −22 5 95 75 Maximum Capacity, k=2. Off-Cycle, Condition A 95 75 Compressor Off. Capacity, Condition B, Minimum Capacity −22 5 59 54 Minimum Capacity, k=1. Capacity, Condition B, Intermediate Capacity −22 5 59 54 Intermediate Capacity, k=i. Capacity, Condition B, Maximum Capacity −22 5 59 54 Maximum Capacity, k=2. Off-Cycle, Condition B 59 54 Compressor Off. Capacity, Condition C, Minimum Capacity −22 5 35 34 Minimum Capacity, k=1. Capacity, Condition C, Intermediate Capacity −22 5 35 34 Intermediate Capacity, k=i. Capacity, Condition C, Maximum Capacity −22 5 35 34 Maximum Capacity, k=2. Off-Cycle, Condition C 35 34 Compressor Off. Notes: 1 e.g., Table 14—Test Operating Conditions for Variable- or Multiple-Capacity Low-Temperature Indoor Dedicated Condensing Units Test title Suction Return gas, Condenser Condenser 1 Compressor operating mode Capacity, Condition A, Minimum Capacity −22 5 90 75 Minimum Capacity, k=1. Capacity, Condition A, Intermediate Capacity −22 5 90 75 Intermediate Capacity, k=i. Capacity, Condition A, Maximum Capacity −22 5 90 75 Maximum Capacity, k=2. Off-Cycle, Condition A 90 75 Compressor Off. Notes: 1 e.g., 3.2.5 Test Operating Conditions for Two-Capacity Indoor Matched-Pair or Single-Packaged Refrigeration Systems For two-capacity indoor medium-temperature matched-pair or single-packaged refrigeration systems, conduct tests using the test conditions specified in table 15 of this appendix. For two-capacity indoor low-temperature matched-pair or single-packaged refrigeration systems, conduct tests using the test conditions specified in table 16 of this appendix. Table 15—Test Operating Conditions for Two-Capacity Medium-Temperature Indoor Matched-Pair or Single-Packaged Refrigeration Systems Test description Unit cooler Unit cooler Condenser Condenser Compressor status Capacity, Condition A, Low Capacity 35 <50 90 1 2 Low Capacity. Capacity, Condition A, High Capacity 35 <50 90 1 2 High Capacity. Off-Cycle, Condition A 35 <50 90 1 2 Off. Notes: 1 2 Table 16—Test Operating Conditions for Two Capacity Low-Temperature Indoor Matched-Pair or Single-Packaged Refrigeration Systems Test description Unit cooler Unit cooler Condenser Maximum Compressor status Capacity, Condition A, Low Capacity −10 <50 90 1 2 Low Capacity. Capacity, Condition A, High Capacity −10 <50 90 1 2 High Capacity. Off-Cycle, Condition A −10 <50 90 1 2 Off. Defrost −10 <50 System Dependent. Notes: 1 2 3.2.6 Test Conditions for Variable- or Multiple-Capacity Indoor Matched Pair or Single-Packaged Refrigeration Systems For variable- or multiple-capacity indoor medium-temperature matched-pair or single-packaged refrigeration systems, conduct tests using the test conditions specified in table 17 of this appendix. For variable- or multiple-capacity indoor low-temperature matched-pair or single-packaged refrigeration systems, conduct tests using the test conditions specified in table 18 of this appendix. Table 17—Test Operating Conditions for Variable- or Multiple-Capacity Medium-Temperature Indoor Matched-Pair or Single-Packaged Refrigeration Systems Test description Unit cooler Unit cooler Condenser Condenser Compressor status Capacity, Condition A, Minimum Capacity 35 <50 90 1 2 Minimum Capacity. Capacity, Condition A, Intermediate Capacity 35 <50 90 1 2 Intermediate Capacity. Capacity, Condition A, High Capacity 35 <50 90 1 1 Maximum Capacity. Off-Cycle, Condition A 35 <50 90 1 2 Off. Notes: 1 2 Table 18—Test Operating Conditions for Variable- or Multiple-Capacity Low-Temperature Indoor Matched-Pair or Single-Packaged Refrigeration Systems Test description Unit cooler Unit cooler Condenser Maximum condenser Compressor status Capacity, Condition A, Minimum Capacity −10 <50 90 1 2 Minimum Capacity. Capacity, Condition A, Intermediate Capacity −10 <50 90 1 2 Intermediate Capacity. Capacity, Condition A, Maximum Capacity −10 <50 90 1 2 Maximum Capacity. Off-Cycle, Condition A −10 <50 90 1 2 Off. Defrost −10 <50 System Dependent. Notes: 1 2 3.3 Calculation for Walk-in Box Load 3.3.1 For medium- and low-temperature refrigeration systems with indoor condensing units, calculate walk-in box loads for high and low load periods as a function of net capacity as described in section 6.2.1 of AHRI 1250-2020. 3.3.2 For medium- and low-temperature refrigeration systems with outdoor condensing units, calculate walk-in box loads for high and low load periods as a function of net capacity and outdoor temperature as described in section 6.2.2 of AHRI 1250-2020. 3.3.3 For high-temperature refrigeration systems, calculate walk-in box load as follows. B q ss,A Where q ss,A 3.4 Calculation for Annual Walk-in Energy Factor (AWEF2) Calculations used to determine AWEF2 based on performance data obtained for testing shall be as specified in section 7 of AHRI 1250-2020 with modifications as indicated in sections 3.4.7 through 3.4.10 of this appendix. Calculations used to determine AWEF2 for refrigeration systems not specifically identified in sections 7.1.1 through 7.1.6 of AHRI 1250-2020 are enumerated in sections 3.4.1 through 3.4.6 and 3.4.11 through 3.4.14 of this appendix. 3.4.1 Two-Capacity Condensing Units Tested Alone, Indoor 3.4.1.1 Unit Cooler Power Calculate maximum-capacity unit cooler power during the compressor on period E comp,on Calculate unit cooler power during the compressor off period E comp,off 3.4.1.2 Defrost For freezer refrigeration systems, calculate defrost heat contribution Q DF D F gross k =2 3.4.1.3 Net Capacity Calculate steady-state maximum net capacity, q ss k =2 ss k =1 q ss k =2 gross k =2 E F comp,on q ss k =1 gross k =1 E F comp,on Where: Q gross k =2 gross k =1 3.4.1.4 Calculate average power input during the low load period as follows. If the low load period box load, BL Q DF ss k =1 Where: E ss k =1 E cu,off If the low load period box load, BL Q DF ss k =1 3.4.1.5 Calculate average power input during the high load period as follows. 3.4.1.6 Calculate the AWEF2 as follows: 3.4.2 Variable-Capacity or Multistage Condensing Units Tested Alone, Indoor 3.4.2.1 Unit Cooler Power Calculate maximum-capacity unit cooler power during the compressor on period E F comp,on Calculate unit cooler power during the compressor off period E F comp,off 3.4.2.2 Defrost Calculate Defrost parameters as described in section 4.4.1.2 of this appendix. 3.4.2.3 Net Capacity Calculate steady-state maximum net capacity, q ss k =2 ss k=i ss k =1 q ss k =2 gross k =2 E comp,on q ss k =2 gross k =2 K f E comp,on q ss k =1 gross k =1 E comp,on Where: Q gross k =2 gross k=i gross, k =1 K f 3.4.2.4 Calculate average power input during the low load period as follows. If the low load period box load, BL Q DF ss k =1 Where E cu,off If the low load period box load BL Q DF ss k =1 ss k=i Where: EER k=1 ss k =1 E ss k =1 E comp,on EER k=i ss k=i E ss k=i K f E comp,on 3.4.2.5 Calculate average power input during the high load period as follows: If the high load period box load, BL Q DF ss k =1 ss k =i If the high load period box load, BL Q DF ss k =i ss k =2 Where: EER k=2 ss k =2 E ss k =2 E comp,on 3.4.2.6 Calculate the AWEF2 as follows. 3.4.3 Two-Capacity Condensing Units Tested Alone, Outdoor 3.4.3.1 Unit Cooler Power Calculate maximum-capacity unit cooler power during the compressor on period E comp,on Calculate unit cooler power during the compressor off period E comp,off 3.4.3.2 Defrost Calculate Defrost parameters as described in section 3.4.1.2 of this appendix. 3.4.3.3 Condensing Unit Off-Cycle Power Calculate Condensing Unit Off-Cycle Power for temperature t j Where E cu,off,A E cu,off,C j j 3.4.3.4 Net Capacity and Condensing Unit Power Input Calculate steady-state maximum net capacity, q ss k =2 t j ss k =1 t j ss k =2 t j ss k =1 t j j If t j If 59 °F < t j Where: The capacity level k can equal 1 or 2; Q gross,X k =2 gross,X k =1 E ss,X k =2 ss,X k =1 3.4.3.5 Calculate average power input during the low load period as follows. Calculate the temperature, t IL BL t j Q DF ss k =1 t j IL BL t IL Q DF ss k =1 t IL For t j IL Where E cu,off t j j For t j IL 3.4.3.6 Calculate average power input during the high load period as follows. Calculate the temperature, t IH BL t j Q DF ss k =1 t j IH BL t IH Q DF ss k =1 t IH Calculate the temperature, t IIH BL t j Q DF ss k =2 t j IIH BL t IIH Q DF ss k =1 t IIH For t j IH For t IH j IIH For t IIH j E H t j E ss k =2 t j E comp,on 3.4.3.7 Calculate the AWEF2 as follows: 3.4.4 Variable-Capacity or Multistage Condensing Units Tested Alone, Outdoor 3.4.4.1 Unit Cooler Power Calculate maximum-capacity unit cooler power during the compressor on period E comp,on Calculate unit cooler power during the compressor off period E comp,on 3.4.4.2 Defrost Calculate Defrost parameters as described in section 3.4.1.2 of this appendix. 3.4.4.3 Condensing Unit Off-Cycle Power Calculate Condensing Unit Off-Cycle Power for temperature, t j 3.4.4.4 Net Capacity and Condensing Unit Power Input Calculate steady-state maximum net capacity, q ss k =2 t j ss k =i t j ss k =1 t j ss k =2 t j ss k =i t j ss k =1 t j j If t j If 59 °F < t j Where: The capacity level k can equal 1, i, or 2; Q gross,X k =2 gross,X k=i gross,X k =1 E ss,X k =2 ss,X k =1 K f 3.4.4.5 Calculate average power input during the low load period as follows. Calculate the temperature, t IL BL t j Q DF ss k =1 t j IL BL t IL Q DF ss k =1 t IL Calculate the temperature, t VL BL t j Q DF ss k =i t j VL BL t VL Q DF ss k =i t VL For t j IL Where, E cu,off t j j For t IL j VL For t VL j Where: EER k=2 t j ss k =1 t j E ss k =1 t j E comp,on EER k=i j ss k =i t j E ss k =i t j K f E comp,on EER k=2 j ss k =2 t j E ss k =2 t j E comp,on 3.4.4.6 Calculate average power input during the high load period as follows. Calculate the temperature t VH BL t j DF ss k =i t j VH BL t VH Q DF ss k =i t VH Calculate the temperature t IIH BL t j Q DF ss k =2 t j IIH BL t IIH Q DF ss k =2 t IIH For t j VH For t VH j IIH For t IIH j E H t j E ss k =2 t j E F comp,on 3.4.4.7 Calculate the AWEF2 as follows: 3.4.5 Two-Capacity Indoor Matched Pairs or Single-Packaged Refrigeration Systems Other Than High-Temperature 3.4.5.1 Defrost For freezer refrigeration systems, defrost heat contribution Q DF D F 3.4.5.2 Calculate average power input during the low load period as follows. If the low load period box load B L L Q DF ss k =1 Where: q ss k =1 E ss k =1 E F comp,off E cu,off If the low load period box load B L L Q DF ss k =1 Where q ss k =2 E ss k =2 3.4.5.3 Calculate average power input during the high load period as follows. 3.4.5.4 Calculate the AWEF2 as follows: 3.4.6 Variable-Capacity or Multistage Indoor Matched Pairs or Single-Packaged Refrigeration Systems Other Than High-Temperature 3.4.6.1 Defrost For freezer refrigeration systems, defrost heat contribution Q DF D F 3.4.6.2 Calculate average power input during the low load period as follows. If the low load period box load B L L Q DF ss k =1 Where: q ss k =1 E ss k =1 E F comp,off E cu,off If the low load period box load B L L Q DF ss k=i Where: EER k=1 ss k =1 E ss k =1 q ss k=i E ss k=i EER k=i ss k=i E ss k=i 3.4.6.3 Calculate average power input during the high load period as follows. If the high load period box load B L H Q DF ss k =1 ss k=i If the high load period box load B L H Q DF ss k=i ss k =2 Where: q ss k =2 E ss k =2 EER k=2 ss k =2 E ss k =2 3.4.6.4 Calculate the AWEF2 as follows. 3.4.7 Variable-Capacity or Multistage Outdoor Matched Pairs or Single-Packaged Refrigeration Systems Other Than High-Temperature Calculate AWEF2 as described in section 7.6 of AHRI 1250-2020, with the following revisions. 3.4.7.1 Condensing Unit Off-Cycle Power Calculate condensing unit off-cycle power for temperature t j E CU,off E CU,off t j j 3.4.7.2 Unit Cooler Off-Cycle Power Set unit cooler Off-Cycle power E F comp,off 3.4.7.3 Average Power During the Low Load Period Calculate average power for intermediate-capacity compressor operation during the low load period E ss,L k=v t j For t j VL For t VL j Where: EER k=1 j ss k =1 t j E ss k =1 t j EER k=i j ss k=i t j E ss k=i t j EER k=2 j ss k =2 t j E ss k=2 t j 3.4.7.4 Average Power During the High Load Period Calculate average power for intermediate-capacity compressor operation during the high load period E ss,H k=v t j For t j VH For t VH j 3.4.8 Two-Capacity Outdoor Matched Pairs or Single-Packaged Refrigeration Systems Other Than High-Temperature Calculate AWEF2 as described in section 7.5 of AHRI 1250-2020, with the following revisions for Condensing Unit Off-Cycle Power and Unit Cooler Off-Cycle Power. Calculate condensing unit off-cycle power for temperature t j E CU,off E CU,off t j j E F comp,off 3.4.9 Single-Capacity Outdoor Matched Pairs or Single-Packaged Refrigeration Systems Other Than High-Temperature Calculate AWEF2 as described in section 7.4 of AHRI 1250-2020, with the following revision for Condensing Unit Off-Cycle Power and Unit Cooler Off-cycle Power. Calculate condensing unit off-cycle power for temperature t j E CU,off E CU,off t j j E comp,off 3.4.10 Single-Capacity Condensing Units, Outdoor Calculate AWEF2 as described in section 7.9 of AHRI 1250-2020, with the following revision for Condensing Unit Off-Cycle Power. Calculate condensing unit off-cycle power for temperature t j 3.4.11 High-Temperature Matched Pairs or Single-Packaged Refrigeration Systems, Indoor 3.4.11.1 Calculate Load Factor LF as follows: Where: B L E F comp,off q ss,A 3.4.11.2 Calculate the AWEF2 as follows: Where: E ss,A E cu,off 3.4.12 High-Temperature Matched Pairs or Single-Packaged Refrigeration Systems, Outdoor 3.4.12.1 Calculate Load Factor LF(t j j Where: B L E F comp,off q ss t j j 3.4.12.2 Calculate the AWEF2 as follows: Where: E ss t j j E cu,off t j j n j 3.4.13 High-Temperature Unit Coolers Tested Alone 3.4.13.1 Calculate Refrigeration System Power Input as follows: Where: q mix,evap E F comp,on EER, in W, equals 3.4.13.2 Calculate the load factor LF as follows: Where: B L E F comp,off 3.4.13.3 Calculate AWEF2 as follows: 3.4.14 CO 2 Calculate AWEF2 for CO 2 3.5 Test Method Test the Refrigeration System in accordance with AHRI 1250-2020 to determine refrigeration capacity and power input for the specified test conditions, with revisions and additions as described in this section. 3.5.1 Chamber Conditioning Using the Unit Under Test In Appendix C, section C5.2.2 of AHRI 1250-2020, for applicable system configurations (matched pairs, single-packaged refrigeration systems, and standalone unit coolers), the unit under test may be used to aid in achieving the required test chamber conditions prior to beginning any steady state test. However, the unit under test must be inspected and confirmed to be free from frost before initiating steady state testing. 3.5.2 General Modification: Methods of Testing 3.5.2.1 Refrigerant Temperature Measurements When testing a condensing unit alone, measure refrigerant liquid temperature leaving the condensing unit, and the refrigerant vapor temperature entering the condensing unit as required in section C7.5.1.1.2 of Appendix C of AHRI 1250-2020 using the same measurement approach specified for the unit cooler in section C3.1.3 of Appendix C of AHRI 1250-2020. In all cases in which thermometer wells or immersed sheathed sensors are prescribed, if the refrigerant tube outer diameter is less than 1/2 3.5.2.2 Mass Flow Meter Location When using the DX Dual Instrumentation test method of AHRI 1250-2020, applicable for unit coolers, dedicated condensing units, and matched pairs, the second mass flow meter may be installed in the suction line as shown in Figure C1 of AHRI 1250-2020. 3.5.2.3 Subcooling at Refrigerant Mass Flow Meter In section C3.4.5 of Appendix C of AHRI 1250-2020, when verifying subcooling at the mass flow meters, only the sight glass and a temperature sensor located on the tube surface under the insulation are required. Subcooling shall be verified to be within the 3 °F requirement downstream of flow meters located in the same chamber as a condensing unit under test and upstream of flow meters located in the same chamber as a unit cooler under test, rather than always downstream as indicated in AHRI 1250-2009, section C3.4.5. If the subcooling is less than 3 °F when testing a unit cooler, dedicated condensing unit, or matched pair (not a single-packaged system), cool the line between the condensing unit outlet and this location to achieve the required subcooling. When providing such cooling while testing a matched pair (a) set up the line-cooling system and also set up apparatus to heat the liquid line between the mass flow meters and the unit cooler, (b) when the system has achieved steady state without activation of the heating and cooling systems, measure the liquid temperature entering the expansion valve for a period of at least 30 minutes, (c) activate the cooling system to provide the required subcooling at the mass flow meters, (d) if necessary, apply heat such that the temperature entering the expansion valve is within 0.5 °F of the temperature measured during step (b), and (e) proceed with measurements once condition (d) has been verified. 3.5.2.4 Installation Instructions Manufacturer installation instructions or installation instructions described in this section refer to the instructions that come packaged with or appear on the labels applied to the unit. This does not include online manuals. Installation Instruction Hierarchy: 3.5.2.5. Refrigerant Charging and Adjustment of Superheat and Subcooling. All dedicated condensing systems (dedicated condensing units tested alone, matched pairs, and single packaged dedicated systems) that use flooding of the condenser for head pressure control during low-ambient-temperature conditions shall be charged, and superheat and/or subcooling shall be set, at Refrigeration C test conditions unless otherwise specified in the installation instructions. If after being charged at Refrigeration C condition the unit under test does not operate at the Refrigeration A condition due to high pressure cut out, refrigerant shall be removed in increments of 4 ounces or 5 percent of the test unit's receiver capacity, whichever quantity is larger, until the unit operates at the Refrigeration A condition. All tests shall be run at this final refrigerant charge. If less than 0 °F of subcooling is measured for the refrigerant leaving the condensing unit when testing at B or C condition, calculate the refrigerant-enthalpy-based capacity ( i.e. All dedicated condensing systems that do not use a flooded condenser design shall be charged at Refrigeration A test conditions unless otherwise specified in the installation instructions. If the installation instructions give a specified range for superheat, sub-cooling, or refrigerant pressure, the average of the range shall be used as the refrigerant charging parameter target and the test condition tolerance shall be ±50 percent of the range. Perform charging of near-azeotropic and zeotropic refrigerants only with refrigerant in the liquid state. Once the correct refrigerant charge is determined, all tests shall run until completion without further modification. 3.5.2.5.1. When charging or adjusting superheat/subcooling, use all pertinent instructions contained in the installation instructions to achieve charging parameters within the tolerances. However, in the event of conflicting charging information between installation instructions, follow the installation instruction hierarchy listed in section 3.5.2.4. Conflicting information is defined as multiple conditions given for charge adjustment where all conditions specified cannot be met. In the event of conflicting information within the same set of charging instructions (e.g., the installation instructions shipped with the dedicated condensing unit), follow the hierarchy in Table 19 for priority. Unless the installation instructions specify a different charging tolerance, the tolerances identified in table 19 of this appendix shall be used. Table 19—Test Condition Tolerances and Hierarchy for Refrigerant Charging and Setting of Refrigerant Conditions Priority Fixed orifice Expansion Valve Parameter with installation Tolerance Parameter with installation Tolerance 1 Superheat ±2.0 °F Subcooling 10% of the Target Value; No less than ±0.5 °F, No more than ±2.0 °F 2 High Side Pressure or Saturation Temperature* ±4.0 psi or ±1.0 °F High Side Pressure or Saturation Temperature* ±4.0 psi or 3 Low Side Pressure or Saturation Temperature* ±2.0 psi or ±0.8 °F Superheat ±2.0 °F 4 Low Side Temperature ±2.0 °F Low Side Pressure or Saturation Temperature * ±2.0 psi or 5 High Side Temperature ±2.0 °F Approach Temperature ±1.0 °F 6 Charge Weight ±2.0 oz Charge Weight 0.5% or 1.0 oz, whichever is greater * Saturation temperature can refer to either bubble or dew point calculated based on a measured pressure, or a coil temperature measurement, as specified by the installation instructions. 3.5.2.5.2. Dedicated Condensing Unit. If the Dedicated Condensing Unit includes a receiver and the subcooling target leaving the condensing unit provided in installation instructions cannot be met without fully filling the receiver, the subcooling target shall be ignored. Likewise, if the Dedicated Condensing unit does not include a receiver and the subcooling target leaving the condensing unit cannot be met without the unit cycling off on high pressure, the subcooling target can be ignored. Also, if no instructions for charging or for setting subcooling leaving the condensing unit are provided in the installation instructions, the refrigeration system shall be set up with a charge quantity and/or exit subcooling such that the unit operates during testing without shutdown (e.g., on a high-pressure switch) and operation of the unit is otherwise consistent with the requirements of the test procedure of this appendix and the installation instructions. 3.5.2.5.3. Unit Cooler. 3.5.2.5.4. Single-Packaged Unit. 3.5.2.5.4.1. Install a pressure gauge in the liquid line if charging is on the basis of subcooling, or high side pressure or corresponding saturation or dew point temperature. 3.5.2.5.4.2. Install a pressure gauge in the suction line if charging is on the basis of superheat, or low side pressure or corresponding saturation or dew point temperature. Install this gauge as close to the evaporator as allowable by the installation instructions and the physical constraints of the unit. Use methods for installing pressure gauge(s) at the required location(s) as indicated in the installation instructions if specified. 3.5.2.5.4.3. If the installation instructions indicate that refrigerant line pressure gauges should not be installed and the unit fails to operate due to high-pressure or low-pressure compressor cut off, then a charging port shall be installed, and the unit shall be evacuated of refrigerant and charged to the nameplate charge. 3.5.2.6 Ducted Units For systems with ducted evaporator air, or that can be installed with or without ducted evaporator air: Connect ductwork on both the inlet and outlet connections and determine external static pressure (ESP) as described in sections 6.4 and 6.5 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37. Use pressure measurement instrumentation as described in section 5.3.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37. Test at the fan speed specified in the installation instructions—if there is more than one fan speed setting and the installation instructions do not specify which speed to use, test at the highest speed. Conduct tests with the ESP equal to 50% of the maximum ESP allowed in the installation instructions, within a tolerance of −0.00/+0.05 inches of water column. If the installation instructions do not provide the maximum ESP, the ESP shall be set for testing such that the air volume rate is 2/3 If testing using either the indoor or outdoor air enthalpy method to measure the air volume rate, adjust the airflow measurement apparatus fan to set the external static pressure—otherwise, set the external static pressure by symmetrically restricting the outlet of the test duct. In case of conflict, these requirements for setting airflow take precedence over airflow values specified in manufacturer installation instructions or product literature. 3.5.2.7. Two-Speed or Multiple-Speed Evaporator Fans. Two-Speed or Multiple-Speed evaporator fans shall be considered to meet the qualifying control requirements of section C4.2 of Appendix C of AHRI 1250-2020 for measuring off-cycle fan energy if they use a fan speed no less than 50% of the speed used in the maximum capacity tests. 3.5.2.8. Defrost Use section C10.2.1 of Appendix C of AHRI 1250-2020 for defrost testing. The Test Room Conditioning Equipment requirement of section C10.2.1.1 of Appendix C of AHRI 1250-2020 does not apply. 3.5.2.8.1 Adaptive Defrost When testing to certify compliance to the energy conservation standards, use N DF DF 3.5.2.8.2 Hot Gas Defrost When testing to certify compliance to the energy conservation standards, remove the hot gas defrost mechanical components and disconnect all such components from electrical power. Test the units as if they are electric defrost units, but do not conduct the defrost tests described in section C10.2.1 of AHRI 1250-2020. Use the defrost heat and power consumption values as described in section C10.2.2 of AHRI 1250-2020 for the AWEF2 calculations. 3.5.2.9 Dedicated condensing units that are not matched for testing and are not single-packaged dedicated systems. The temperature measurement requirements of sections C3.1.3 and C4.1.3.1 appendix C of AHRI 1250-2020 shall apply only to the condensing unit exit rather than to the unit cooler inlet and outlet, and they shall be applied for two measurements when using the DX Dual Instrumentation test method. 3.5.2.10. Single-packaged dedicated systems Use the test method in section C9 of appendix C of AHRI 1250-2020 (including the applicable provisions of ASHRAE 16-2016, ASHRAE 23.1-2010, ASHRAE 37-2009, and ASHRAE 41.6-2014, as referenced in section C9.1 of AHRI 1250-2020) as the method of test for single-packaged dedicated systems, with modifications as described in this section. Use two test methods listed in table 20 of this appendix to calculate the net capacity and power consumption. The test method listed with a lower “Hierarchy Number” and that has “Primary” as an allowable use in table 20 of this appendix shall be considered the primary measurement and used as the net capacity. Table 20—Single-Packaged Methods of Test and Hierarchy Hierarchy number Method of test Test hierarchy 1 Balanced Ambient Indoor Calorimeter Primary. 2 Indoor Air Enthalpy Primary or Secondary. 3 Indoor Room Calorimeter Primary or Secondary. 4 Calibrated Box Primary or Secondary. 5 Balanced Ambient Outdoor Calorimeter Secondary. 6 Outdoor Air Enthalpy Secondary. 7 Outdoor Room Calorimeter Secondary. 8 Single-Packaged Refrigerant Enthalpy 1 Secondary. 9 Compressor Calibration Secondary. Notes: 1 3.5.2.10.1 Single-Packaged Refrigerant Enthalpy Method The single-packaged refrigerant enthalpy method shall follow the test procedure of the DX Calibrated Box method in AHRI 1250-2020, appendix C, section C8 for refrigerant-side measurements with the following modifications: 3.5.2.10.1.1 Air-side measurements shall follow the requirements of the primary single-packaged method listed in table 20 of this appendix. The air-side measurements and refrigerant-side measurements shall be collected over the same intervals. 3.5.2.10.1.2 A preliminary test at Test Rating Condition A is required using the primary method prior to any modification necessary to install the refrigerant-side measuring instruments. Install surface mount temperature sensors on the evaporator and condenser coils at locations not affected by liquid subcooling or vapor superheat (i.e., near the midpoint of the coil at a return bend), entering and leaving the compressor, and entering the expansion device. These temperature sensors shall be included in the regularly recorded data. 3.5.2.10.1.3 After the preliminary test is completed, the refrigerant shall be removed from the equipment and the refrigerant-side measuring instruments shall be installed. The equipment shall then be evacuated and recharged with refrigerant. Once the equipment is operating at Test Condition A, the refrigerant charge shall be adjusted until, as compared to the average values from the preliminary test, the following conditions are achieved: (a) Each on-coil temperature sensor indicates a reading that is within ±1.0 °F of the measurement in the initial test, (b) The temperatures of the refrigerant entering and leaving the compressor are within ±4 °F, and (c) The refrigerant temperature entering the expansion device is within ±1 °F. 3.5.2.10.1.4 Once these conditions have been achieved over an interval of at least 10 minutes, refrigerant charging equipment shall be removed and the official tests shall be conducted. 3.5.2.10.1.5 The lengths of liquid line to be added shall be 5 feet maximum, not including the requisite flow meter. This maximum length applies to each circuit separately. 3.5.2.10.1.6 Use section C9.2 of appendix C of AHRI 1250-2020 for allowable refrigeration capacity heat balance. Calculate the single-packaged refrigerant enthalpy (secondary) method test net capacity Q net,secondary net,secondary ref-3.412 E comp,on sploss Where: Q ref E comp,on Q sploss Q sploss UA cond T evapside T condside UA amb T evapside T amb Where: UA cond amb i.e. T evapside T condside T amb 3.5.2.10.1.7 For multi-circuit single-packaged systems utilizing the single-packaged refrigerant enthalpy method, apply the test method separately for each circuit and sum the separately-calculated refrigerant-side gross refrigeration capacities. 3.5.2.10.2 Calibrated Box Test Procedure 3.5.2.10.2.1 Measurements. Refer to section C3 of AHRI 1250-2020 (including the applicable provisions of ASHRAE 41.1-2013, ASHRAE 41.3-2014, and ASHRAE 41.10-2013, as referenced in section C3 of AHRI 1250-2020) for requirements of air-side and refrigerant-side measurements. 3.5.2.10.2.2 Apparatus setup for Calibrated Box Calibration and Test. Refer to section C5 of AHRI 1250-2020 and section C8 of AHRI 1250-2020 for specific test setup. 3.5.2.10.2.3 The calibrated box shall be installed in a temperature-controlled enclosure in which the temperature can be maintained at a constant level. When using the calibrated box method for Single-Packaged Dedicated Systems, the enclosure air temperature shall be maintained such that the condenser air entering conditions are as specified for the test. 3.5.2.10.2. The temperature-controlled enclosure shall be of a size that will provide clearances of not less than 18 in at all sides, top and bottom, except that clearance of any one surface may be reduced to not less than 5.5 inches. 3.5.2.10.2.5 The heat leakage of the calibrated box shall be noted in the test report. 3.5.2.10.2.6 Refrigerant lines within the calibrated box shall be well insulated to avoid appreciable heat loss or gain. 3.5.2.10.2.7 Instruments for measuring the temperature around the outside of the calibrated box to represent the enclosure temperature T en 3.5.2.10.2.8 One of the following two approaches shall be used for the box external temperature measurement. Box calibration and system capacity measurement shall both be done using the same one of these approaches. 1: Air temperature sensors. Each temperature sensor shall be at a distance of 6 inches from the calibrated box. If the clearance from a surface of the box (allowed for one surface only) is less than 12 inches, the temperature measuring instruments shall be located midway between the outer wall of the calibrated box and the adjacent surface. 2: Surface temperature sensors. Surface temperature sensors shall be mounted on the calibrated box surfaces to represent the enclosure temperature, T en 3.5.2.10.2.9 Additional surface temperature sensors may be used to measure external hot spots during refrigeration system testing. If this is done, two temperature sensors shall be used to measure the average temperature of the calibrated box surface covered by the condensing section—they shall be located centered on equal-area rectangles comprising the covered calibrated box surface whose common sides span the short dimension of this surface. Additional surface temperature sensors may be used to measure box surfaces on which warm condenser discharge air impinges. A pattern of square surfaces measuring one foot square shall be mapped out to represent the hot spot upon which the warm condenser air impinges. One temperature sensor shall be used to measure surface temperature at the center of each square (see figure C5 of this section). A drawing showing this pattern and identifying the surface temperature sensors shall be provided in the test report. The average surface temperature of the overall calibrated box outer surface during testing shall be calculated as follows. Where: A i T i A j T' j T 1 T j T k ; A k T” k Figure C5: Illustration of Layout of Surface Temperature Sensors on Face of Calibrated Box on which Single-Packaged Dedicated System is Mounted when Using Section 3.5.2.10.2.7 of Appendix C to this Part.3.5.2.10.2.10 Heating means inside the calibrated box shall be shielded or installed in a manner to avoid radiation to the Single-Packaged Dedicated System, the temperature measuring instruments, and to the walls of the box. The heating means shall be constructed to avoid stratification of temperature, and suitable means shall be provided for distributing the temperature uniformly. 3.5.2.10.2.11 The average air dry-bulb temperature in the calibrated box during Single-Packaged Dedicated System tests and calibrated box heat leakage tests shall be the average of eight temperatures measured at the corners of the box at a distance of 2 inches to 4 inches from the walls. The instruments shall be shielded from any cold or warm surfaces except that they shall not be shielded from the adjacent walls of the box. The Single-Packaged Dedicated System under test shall be mounted such that the temperature instruments are not in the direct air stream from the discharge of the Single-Packaged Dedicated System. 3.5.2.10.2.12 Calibration of the Calibrated Box. Calibration of the Calibrated Box shall occur prior to installation of the Single-Packaged Dedicated System. This shall be done either (a) prior to cutting the opening needed to install the Single-Packaged Dedicated System, or (b) with an insulating panel with the same thickness and thermal resistance as the box wall installed in the opening intended for the Single-Packaged Dedicated System installation. Care shall be taken to avoid thermal shorts in the location of the opening either during calibration or during subsequent installation of the Single-Packaged Dedicated System. A calibration test shall be made for air movements comparable to those expected for Single-Packaged Dedicated System capacity measurement, i.e., 3.5.2.10.2.13 The heat input shall be adjusted to maintain an average box temperature not less than 25.0 °F above the test enclosure temperature. 3.5.2.10.2.14 The average dry-bulb temperature inside the calibrated box shall not vary more than 1.0 °F over the course of the calibration test. 3.5.2.10.2.15 A calibration test shall be the average of 11 consecutive hourly readings when the box has reached a steady-state temperature condition. 3.5.2.10.2.16 The box temperature shall be the average of all readings after a steady-state temperature condition has been reached. 3.5.2.10.2.17 The calibrated box has reached a steady-state temperature condition when: The average box temperature is not less than 25 °F above the test enclosure temperature. Temperature variations do not exceed 5.0 °F between temperature measuring stations. Temperatures do not vary by more than 2 °F at any one temperature- measuring station. 3.5.2.10.2.18 Data to be Measured and Recorded. Refer to Table C5 in section C6.2 of AHRI 1250-2020 for the required data that need to measured and recorded. 3.5.2.10.2.19 Refrigeration Capacity Calculation. The heat leakage coefficient of the calibrated box is calculated by For each Dry Rating Condition, calculate the Net Capacity: q ss K cb T en T cb E c 3.5.2.10.3 Detachable single-packaged systems shall be tested as single-packaged dedicated refrigeration systems. 3.5.2.11 Variable-Capacity and Multiple-Capacity Dedicated Condensing Refrigeration Systems 3.5.2.11.1 Manufacturer-Provided Equipment Overrides Where needed, the manufacturer must provide a means for overriding the controls of the test unit so that the compressor(s) operates at the specified speed or capacity and the indoor blower operates at the speed consistent with the compressor operating level as would occur without override. 3.5.2.11.2 Compressor Operating Levels For variable-capacity and multiple-capacity compressor systems, the minimum capacity for testing shall be the minimum capacity that the system control would operate the compressor in normal operation. Likewise, the maximum capacity for testing shall be the maximum capacity that the system control would operate the compressor in normal operation. For variable-speed compressor systems, the intermediate speed for testing shall be the average of the minimum and maximum speeds. For digital compressor systems, the intermediate duty cycle shall be the average of the minimum and maximum duty cycles. For multiple-capacity compressor systems with three capacity levels, the intermediate operating level for testing shall be the middle capacity level. For multiple-capacity compressor systems with more than three capacity levels, the intermediate operating level for testing shall be the level whose displacement ratio is closest to the average of the maximum and minimum displacement ratios. 3.5.2.11.3 Refrigeration Systems with Digital Compressor(s) Use the test methods described in section 3.5.2.10.1 of this appendix as the secondary method of test for refrigeration systems with digital compressor(s) with modifications as described in this section. The Test Operating tolerance for refrigerant mass flow rate and suction pressure in Table 2 of AHRI 1250-2020 shall be ignored. Temperature and pressure measurements used to calculate shall be recorded at a frequency of once per second or faster and based on average values measured over the 30-minute test period. 3.5.2.11.3.1 For Matched pair (not including single-packaged systems) and Dedicated Condensing Unit refrigeration systems, the preliminary test in sections 3.5.2.10.1.2 and 3.5.2.10.1.3 of this appendix is not required. The liquid line and suction line shall be 25 feet ± 3 inches, not including the requisite flow meters. Also, the term in the equation to calculate net capacity shall be set equal to zero. 3.5.2.11.3.2 For Dedicated Condensing Unit refrigeration systems, the primary capacity measurement method shall be balanced ambient outdoor calorimeter, outdoor air enthalpy, or outdoor room calorimeter. [88 FR 28843, May 4, 2023, as amended at 88 FR 73217, Oct. 25, 2023; 90 FR 6795, Jan. 21, 2025] Subpart S—Metal Halide Lamp Ballasts and Fixtures Source: 74 FR 12075, Mar. 23, 2009, unless otherwise noted. § 431.321 Purpose and scope. This subpart contains energy conservation requirements for metal halide lamp ballasts and fixtures, pursuant to Part A of Title III of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 6291-6309. [75 FR 10966, Mar. 9, 2010] § 431.322 Definitions concerning metal halide lamp ballasts and fixtures. Active mode (1) Is connected to a main power source; (2) Has been activated; and (3) Provides one or more main functions. Ballast Ballast efficiency out in (1) P out (2) P in (3) The lamp, and the capacitor when the capacitor is provided, shall constitute a nominal system in accordance with the ANSI C78.43-2017 (incorporated by reference; see § 431.323); (4) For ballasts with a frequency of 60 Hz, Pin and Pout shall be measured after lamps have been stabilized according to Section 4.4 of ANSI C82.6-2015 (incorporated by reference; see § 431.323) using a wattmeter with accuracy specified in Section 4.5 of ANSI C82.6-2015; and (5) For ballasts with a frequency greater than 60 Hz, Pin and Pout shall have a basic accuracy of ±0.5 percent at the higher of either 3 times the output operating frequency of the ballast or 2.4 kHz. Basic model Ceramic metal halide lamp Electronic ballast General lighting application High-frequency electronic metal halide ballast Metal halide ballast Metal halide lamp Metal halide lamp fixture Nonpulse-start electronic ballast Off mode (1) Is connected to a main power source; and (2) Is not providing any standby or active mode function. PLC control signal Probe-start metal halide ballast Pulse-start metal halide ballast Quartz metal halide lamp Reference lamp Standby mode (1) Is connected to a main power source; and (2) Offers one or more of the following user-oriented or protective functions: (i) To facilitate the activation or deactivation of other functions (including active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer; (ii) Continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions. [74 FR 12075, Mar. 23, 2009, as amended at 75 FR 10966, Mar. 9, 2010; 74 FR 12074, Mar. 23, 2009; 79 FR 7843, Feb. 10, 2014; 87 FR 37699, June 24, 2022] Test Procedures § 431.323 Materials incorporated by reference. (a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this subpart with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, the U.S. Department of Energy (DOE) must publish a document in the Federal Register [email protected], https://www.energy.gov/eere/buildings/building-technologies-office. [email protected], www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html. (b) ANSI. www.ansi.org. (1) ANSI C78.43-2017, American National Standard for Electric Lamps—Single-Ended Metal Halide Lamps, approved December 21, 2017; IBR approved for § 431.324. (2) ANSI C78.44-2016, American National Standard for Electric Lamps—Double-Ended Metal Halide Lamps, approved July 1, 2016; IBR approved for § 431.324. (3) ANSI C82.6-2015 (R2020), American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts—Ballasts for High-Intensity Discharge Lamps—Methods of Measurement, approved March 30, 2020; IBR approved for §§ 431.322; 431.324. (4) ANSI C82.9-2016, American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts—High Intensity Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps—Definitions, approved July 12, 2016; IBR approved for §§ 431.322; 431.324. (c) IEC. webstore.iec.ch/home. (1) IEC 63103, Lighting Equipment—Non-active Mode Power Measurement, Edition 1.0, dated 2020-07; IBR approved for § 431.324. (2) [Reserved] (d) NFPA. http://www.nfpa.org; (1) NFPA 70-2002 (“NFPA 70”), National Electrical Code 2002 Edition, IBR approved for § 431.326; (2) [Reserved] (e) UL. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., COMM 2000, 1414 Brook Drive, Downers Grove, IL 60515, 1-888-853-3503, or go to http://www.ul.com. (1) UL 1029 (ANSI/UL 1029-2007) (“UL 1029”), Standard for Safety High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts, 5th edition, May 25, 1994, which consists of pages dated May 25, 1994, September 28, 1995, August 3, 1998, February 7, 2001 and December 11, 2007, IBR approved for § 431.326. (2) [Reserved] [74 FR 12075, Mar. 23, 2009, as amended at 75 FR 10966, Mar. 9, 2010; 87 FR 37699, June 24, 2022] § 431.324 Uniform test method for the measurement of energy efficiency and standby mode energy consumption of metal halide lamp ballasts. (a) Scope. (b) Active mode procedure General instructions. (2) Test conditions and setup. (ii) Airflow in the room for the testing period must be ≤0.5 meters/second. (iii) Test circuits must be in accordance with the circuit connections specified in Section 6.3 of ANSI C82.6-2015 (R2020). (iv) For ballasts designed to operate lamps rated less than 150 W that have 120 V as an available input voltage, testing must be performed at 120 V. For ballasts designed to operate lamps rated less than 150 W that do not have 120 V as an available voltage, testing must be performed at the highest available input voltage. For ballasts designed to operate lamps rated greater than or equal to 150 W that have 277 V as an available input voltage, testing must be conducted at 277 V. For ballasts designed to operate lamps rated greater than or equal to 150 W that do not have 277 V as an available input voltage, testing must be conducted at the highest available input voltage. (v) Operate dimming ballasts at maximum input power. (vi) Select the metal halide lamp for testing as follows: (A) The metal halide lamp used for testing must meet the specifications of a reference lamp as defined by ANSI C82.9-2016 and the rated values of the corresponding lamp data sheet as specified in ANSI C78.43-2017 (both incorporated by reference; see see (B) Ballasts designated with ANSI codes corresponding to more than one lamp must be tested with the lamp having the highest nominal lamp wattage as specified in ANSI C78.43-2017 or ANSI C78.44-2016, as applicable. (C) Ballasts designated with ANSI codes corresponding to both ceramic metal halide lamps (code beginning with “C”) and quartz metal halide lamps (code beginning with “M”) of the same nominal lamp wattage must be tested with the quartz metal halide lamp. (3) Test method Stabilization criteria General instruction. (B) Basic stabilization method. (C) Alternative stabilization method. (ii) Test measurements. (B) The ballast output (lamp) power during operating conditions must be measured in accordance with the methods specified in Sections 6.2 and 6.10 of ANSI C82.6-2015 (R2020). (C) For ballasts with a frequency of 60 Hz, the ballast input and output power shall be measured after lamps have been stabilized according to Section 4.4 of ANSI C82.6-2015 (R2020) using a wattmeter with accuracy specified in Section 4.5 of ANSI C82.6-2015 (R2020); and (D) For ballasts with a frequency greater than 60 Hz, the ballast input and output power shall have a basic accuracy of ±0.5 percent at the higher of either 3 times the output operating frequency of the ballast or 2.4 kHz. (iii) Calculations. (B) [Reserved] (c) Standby mode procedure General instructions. (2) Test conditions and setup. (ii) Connect each ballast to a lamp as specified in paragraph (b)(2)(vi) of this section. Note: ballast operation with a reference lamp is not required. (3) Test method and measurement. (ii) Send a signal to the ballast instructing it to have zero light output using the appropriate ballast communication protocol or system for the ballast being tested. (iii) Stabilize the ballast prior to measurement using one of the methods as specified in Section 5.4 of IEC 63103. (iv) Measure the standby mode energy consumption in watts using one of the methods as specified in Section 5.4 of IEC 63103. [87 FR 37699, June 24, 2022] Energy Conservation Standards § 431.326 Energy conservation standards and their effective dates. (a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, each metal halide lamp fixture manufactured on or after January 1, 2009, and designed to be operated with lamps rated greater than or equal to 150 watts but less than or equal to 500 watts shall contain— (1) A pulse-start metal halide ballast with a minimum ballast efficiency of 88 percent; (2) A magnetic probe-start ballast with a minimum ballast efficiency of 94 percent; or (3) A nonpulse-start electronic ballast with either a minimum ballast efficiency of 92 percent for wattages greater than 250 watts; or a minimum ballast efficiency of 90 percent for wattages less than or equal to 250 watts. (b) The standards described in paragraph (a) of this section do not apply to— (1) Metal halide lamp fixtures with regulated lag ballasts; (2) Metal halide lamp fixtures that use electronic ballasts that operate at 480 volts; or (3) Metal halide lamp fixtures that; (i) Are rated only for 150 watt lamps; (ii) Are rated for use in wet locations; as specified by the National Fire Protection Association in NFPA 70 (incorporated by reference; see (iii) Contain a ballast that is rated to operate at ambient air temperatures above 50 °C, as specified in UL 1029, (incorporated by reference; see (c) Except when the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section are more stringent ( i.e., Designed to be Tested input Minimum standard equation‡‡ ≥50 W and ≤100 W Tested at 480 V (1/(1 + 1.24 × P^(−0.351))) − 0.020†† ≥50 W and ≤100 W All others 1/(1 + 1.24 × P^(−0.351)) >100 W and <150† W Tested at 480 V (1/(1 + 1.24 × P^(−0.351))) − 0.020 >100 W and <150† W All others 1/(1 + 1.24 × P^(−0.351)) ≥150 ‡ W and ≤250 W Tested at 480 V 0.880 ≥150 ‡ W and ≤250 W All others For ≥150 W and ≤200 W: 0.880 For >200 W and ≤250 W: 1/(1 + 0.876 × P^(−0.351)) >250 W and ≤500 W Tested at 480 V For >250 and <265 W: 0.880 For ≥265 W and ≤500 W: (1/(1 + 0.876 × P^(−0.351)) − 0.010 >250 W and ≤500 W All others 1/(1 + 0.876 × P^(−0.351)) >500 W and ≤1000 W Tested at 480 V For >500 W and ≤750 W: 0.900 For >750 W and ≤1000 W: 0.000104 × P + 0.822 For >500 W and ≤1000 W: may not utilize a probe-start ballast >500 W and ≤1000 W All others For >500 W and ≤750 W: 0.910 For >750 W and ≤1000 W: 0.000104 × P + 0.832 For >500 W and ≤1000 W: may not utilize a probe-start ballast † Includes 150 W fixtures specified in paragraph (b)(3) of this section, that are fixtures rated only for 150 W lamps; rated for use in wet locations, as specified by the NFPA 70 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.323), section 410.4(A); and containing a ballast that is rated to operate at ambient air temperatures above 50 °C, as specified by UL 1029 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.323). ‡ Excludes 150 W fixtures specified in paragraph (b)(3) of this section, that are fixtures rated only for 150 W lamps; rated for use in wet locations, as specified by the NFPA 70, section 410.4(A); and containing a ballast that is rated to operate at ambient air temperatures above 50 °C, as specified by UL 1029. †† P is defined as the rated wattage of the lamp the fixture is designed to operate. ‡‡ Tested input voltage is specified in 10 CFR 431.324. (d) Except as provided in paragraph (e) of this section, metal halide lamp fixtures manufactured on or after February 10, 2017, that operate lamps with rated wattage >500 W to ≤1000 W must not contain a probe-start metal halide ballast. (e) The standards described in paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section do not apply to— (1) Metal halide lamp fixtures with regulated-lag ballasts; (2) Metal halide lamp fixtures that use electronic ballasts that operate at 480 volts; and (3) Metal halide lamp fixtures that use high-frequency electronic ballasts. [74 FR 12075, Mar. 23, 2009, as amended at 79 FR 7844, Feb. 10, 2014] Subpart T—Compressors Source: 81 FR 79998, Nov. 15, 2016, unless otherwise noted. § 431.341 Purpose and scope. This subpart contains and energy conservation requirements for compressors, pursuant to Part A-1 of Title III of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 6311-6317. § 431.342 Definitions concerning compressors. The following definitions are applicable to this subpart, including appendix A. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of the definitions adopted in this section take precedence over any descriptions or definitions found in any other source, including in ISO Standard 1217:2009(E), “Displacement compressors—Acceptance tests,” as amended through Amendment 1:2016(E), “Calculation of isentropic efficiency and relationship with specific energy” (incorporated by reference, see § 431.343). In cases where definitions reference design intent, DOE will consider all relevant information, including marketing materials, labels and certifications, and equipment design, to determine design intent. Actual volume flow rate Air compressor Air-cooled compressor Ancillary equipment Auxiliary substance Bare compressor e.g., (1) The driver; (2) Speed-adjusting gear(s); (3) Gas processing apparatuses and piping; and (4) Compressor equipment packaging and mounting facilities and enclosures. Basic model Brushless electric motor Compressor Compressor motor nominal horsepower Driver Fixed-speed compressor Full-load actual volume flow rate Liquid-cooled compressor Lubricant-free compressor Lubricated compressor Maximum full-flow operating pressure Mechanical equipment Package isentropic efficiency Package specific power Positive displacement compressor Pressure ratio at full-load operating pressure Reciprocating compressor Rotary compressor Rotor Variable-speed compressor Water-injected lubricated compressor [82 FR 1101, Jan. 4, 2017, as amended at 85 FR 1591, Jan. 10, 2020; 90 FR 5555, Jan. 17, 2025] § 431.343 Materials incorporated by reference. (a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this subpart with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, the DOE must publish a document in the Federal Register [email protected], www.energy.gov/eere/buildings/building-technologies-office. www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html [email protected]. (b) IEC. webstore.iec.ch. (1) IEC 60584-1:2013, Thermocouples—Part 1: EMF specifications and tolerances, (2) IEC 60584-3:2021, Thermocouples—Part 3: Extension and compensating cables—Tolerances and identification system, (c) ISO. www.iso.org. (1) ISO 1217:2009(E), Displacement compressors—Acceptance tests, (2) ISO 1217:2009/Amd.1:2016(E), Displacement compressors—Acceptance tests Calculation of isentropic efficiency and relationship with specific energy, (3) ISO 5167-1:2022(E), Measurement of fluid flow by means of pressure differential devices inserted in circular cross-section conduits running full (4) ISO 9300:2022(E), Measurement of gas flow by means of critical flow nozzles, [90 FR 5555, Jan. 17, 2025] § 431.344 Test procedure for measuring and determining energy efficiency of compressors. (a) Scope. (1) Is an air compressor; (2) Is a rotary compressor; (3) Is not a liquid ring compressor; (4) Is driven by a brushless electric motor; (5) Is a lubricated compressor; (6) Has a full-load operating pressure greater than or equal to 75 pounds per square inch gauge (psig) and less than or equal to 200 psig; (7) Is not designed and tested to the requirements of the American Petroleum Institute Standard 619, “Rotary-Type Positive-Displacement Compressors for Petroleum, Petrochemical, and Natural Gas Industries;” (8) Has full-load actual volume flow rate greater than or equal to 35 cubic feet per minute (cfm), or is distributed in commerce with a compressor motor nominal horsepower greater than or equal to 10 horsepower (hp); and (9) Has a full-load actual volume flow rate less than or equal to 1,250 cfm, or is distributed in commerce with a compressor motor nominal horsepower less than or equal to 200 hp. (b) Testing and calculations. isen,FL isen,PL [82 FR 1102, Jan. 4, 2017] § 431.345 Energy conservation standards and effective dates. (a) Each compressor that is manufactured starting on January 10, 2025 and that: (1) Is an air compressor, (2) Is a rotary compressor, (3) Is not a liquid ring compressor, (4) Is driven by a brushless electric motor, (5) Is a lubricated compressor, (6) Has a full-load operating pressure greater than or equal to 75 pounds per square inch gauge (psig) and less than or equal to 200 psig, (7) Is not designed and tested to the requirements of The American Petroleum Institute standard 619, “Rotary-Type Positive-Displacement Compressors for Petroleum, Petrochemical, and Natural Gas Industries,” (8) Has full-load actual volume flow rate greater than or equal to 35 cubic feet per minute (cfm), or is distributed in commerce with a compressor motor nominal horsepower greater than or equal to 10 horsepower (hp), (9) Has a full-load actual volume flow rate less than or equal to 1,250 cfm, or is distributed in commerce with a compressor motor nominal horsepower less than or equal to 200 hp, (10) Is driven by a three-phase electric motor, (11) Is manufactured alone or as a component of another piece of equipment; and (12) Is in one of the equipment classes listed in the Table 1, must have a full-load package isentropic efficiency or part-load package isentropic efficiency that is not less than the appropriate “Minimum Package Isentropic Efficiency” value listed in Table 1 of this section. Table 1—Energy Conservation Standards for Certain Compressors Equipment class Minimum package isentropic efficiency η Regr d Rotary, lubricated, air-cooled, fixed-speed compressor η Regr Regr −0.00928 * ln 2 1 1 −15 Rotary, lubricated, air-cooled, variable-speed compressor η Regr Regr −0.01549 * ln 2 1 1 −10 Rotary, lubricated, liquid-cooled, fixed-speed compressor .02349 + η Regr Regr −0.00928 * ln 2 1 1 −15 Rotary, lubricated, liquid-cooled, variable-speed compressor .02349 + η Regr Regr −0.01549 * ln 2 1 1 −15 (b) Instructions for the use of Table 1 of this section: (1) To determine the standard level a compressor must meet, the correct equipment class must be identified. The descriptions are in the first column (“Equipment Class”); definitions for these descriptions are found in § 431.342. (2) The second column (“Minimum Package Isentropic Efficiency”) contains the applicable energy conservation standard level, provided in terms of package isentropic efficiency. (3) For “Fixed-speed compressor” equipment classes, the relevant Package Isentropic Efficiency is Full-load Package Isentropic Efficiency. For “Variable-speed compressor” equipment classes, the relevant Package Isentropic Efficiency is Part-load Package Isentropic Efficiency. Both Full- and Part-load Package Isentropic Efficiency are determined in accordance with the test procedure in § 431.344. (4) The second column (“Minimum Package Isentropic Efficiency”) references the third column (“η Regr (5) The second and third columns contain the term V 1 [85 FR 1591, Jan. 10, 2020] §§ 431.346-431.346 [Reserved] Appendix A to Subpart T of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for Certain Air Compressors Note: Prior to July 16, 2025, any representations made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of compressors must be based on testing conducted in accordance with: (a) The applicable provisions of this appendix as they appeared in this subpart T of part 431 as of January 1, 2023; or (b) This appendix. Beginning July 16, 2025, representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of compressors, including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with this appendix. 1. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.343, the entire standard for: IEC 60584-1:2013, IEC 60584-3:2021, ISO 1217:2009(E), ISO 1217:2009/Amd.1:2016(E), ISO 5167-1:2022, and ISO 9300:2022; however, only enumerated provisions of ISO 1217:2009(E) and ISO 1217:2009/Amd.1:2016(E) are applicable to this appendix as listed in section 1. To the extent there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of a referenced industry standard and the CFR, the CFR provisions control. 1.1 ISO 1217:2009(E) 1.1.1 Section 2, Normative references; 1.1.2 Section 3, Terms and definitions; 1.1.3 Section 4, Symbols; 1.1.4 Section 5, Measuring equipment, methods and accuracy (excluding 5.1, 5.5, 5.7, and 5.8); 1.1.5 Section 6, Test procedures: the introductory text to Section 6.2, Test arrangements, paragraphs 6.2(g) and 6.2(h), and Table 1—Maximum deviations from specified values and fluctuations from average readings of this appendix; 1.1.6 Annex B (normative), Simplified acceptance test for bare displacement compressors, Section B.4.5 Comparison with specified values; 1.1.7 Annex C (normative), Simplified acceptance test for electrically driven packaged displacement compressors (excluding C.1.2, C.2.1, C.3, C.4.2.2, C.4.3.1, and C.4.5). 1.2 ISO 1217:2009/Amd.1:2016(E) 1.2.1 Section 3.5.1: isentropic power; 1.2.2 Section 3.6.1: isentropic efficiency; 1.2.3 Annex H (informative), Isentropic efficiency and its relation to specific energy requirement, sections H.2, Symbols and subscripts, and H.3, Derivation of isentropic power. 2. Measurements, Test Conditions, and Equipment Configuration 2.1. Measurement Equipment. 2.1.1. For the purposes of measuring air compressor performance, the equipment necessary to measure volume flow rate, inlet and discharge pressure, temperature, condensate, and packaged compressor power input must comply with the equipment and accuracy requirements specified in sections 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.6, and 5.9 of ISO 1217:2009(E), (including the applicable provisions of IEC 60584-1 and IEC 60584-3, as referenced in section 5.3 of ISO 1217:2009(E) and the applicable provisions of ISO 5167-1 and ISO 9300, as referenced in section 5.6 of ISO 1217:2009(E)) and sections C.2.3 and C.2.4 of Annex C to ISO 1217:2009(E). 2.1.2. Electrical measurement equipment must be capable of measuring true root mean square (RMS) current, true RMS voltage, and real power up to the 40th harmonic of fundamental supply source frequency. 2.1.3. Any instruments used to measure a particular parameter specified in section 2.1.1 of this appendix must have a combined accuracy of ±2.0 percent of the measured value at the fundamental supply source frequency, where combined accuracy is the square root of the sum of the squares of individual instrument accuracies. 2.1.4. Any instruments used to directly measure the density of air must have an accuracy of ±1.0 percent of the measured value. 2.1.5. Any pressure measurement equipment used in a calculation of another variable ( e.g., 2.1.6. Any temperature measurement equipment used in a calculation of another variable ( e.g., 2.1.7. Where ISO 1217:2009(E) refers to “corrected volume flow rate,” the term is deemed synonymous with the term “actual volume flow rate,” as defined in section 3.4.1 of ISO 1217:2009(E). 2.2. Test Conditions and Configuration of Unit Under Test 2.2.1. For both fixed-speed and variable-speed compressors, conduct testing in accordance with the test conditions, unit configuration, and specifications of section 6.2 paragraphs (g) and (h) of ISO 1217:2009(E) and sections C.1.1, C.2.2, C.2.3, C.2.4, C.4.1, C.4.2.1, C.4.2.3, and C.4.3.2 of Annex C to ISO 1217:2009(E). 2.2.2. The power supply must: (a) Maintain the voltage greater than or equal to 95 percent and less than or equal to 110 percent of the rated value of the motor, (b) Maintain the frequency within ±5 percent of the rated value of the motor, (c) Maintain the voltage unbalance of the power supply within ±3 percent of the rated values of the motor, and (d) Maintain total harmonic distortion below 12 percent throughout the test. 2.2.3. Ambient Conditions. The ambient air temperature must be greater than or equal to 68 °F and less than or equal to 90 °F for the duration of testing. There are no ambient condition requirements for inlet pressure or relative humidity. 2.2.4. All equipment indicated in table 1 of this appendix must be present and installed for all tests specified in this appendix. If the compressor is distributed in commerce without an item from table 1 of this appendix, the manufacturer must provide an appropriate item to be installed for the test. Additional ancillary equipment may be installed for the test, if distributed in commerce with the compressor, but this additional ancillary equipment is not required. If any of the equipment listed in table 2 of this appendix is distributed in commerce with units of the compressor basic model, it must be present and installed for all tests specified in this appendix. Table 1—Equipment Required During Test Equipment Fixed-speed rotary air compressors Variable-speed Driver Yes Yes. Bare compressors Yes Yes. Inlet filter Yes Yes. Inlet valve Yes Yes. Minimum pressure check valve/backflow check valve Yes Yes. Lubricant separator Yes Yes. Air piping Yes Yes. Lubricant piping Yes Yes. Lubricant filter Yes Yes. Lubricant cooler Yes Yes. Thermostatic valve Yes Yes. Electrical switchgear or frequency converter for the driver Yes Not applicable.* Device to control the speed of the driver ( e.g., Not applicable ** Yes. Compressed air cooler(s) Yes Yes. Pressure switch, pressure transducer, or similar pressure control device Yes Yes. Moisture separator and drain Yes Yes. * This category is not applicable to variable-speed rotary air compressors. ** This category is not applicable to fixed-speed rotary air compressors. Table 2—Equipment Required During Test, if Distributed in Commerce With the Basic Model Equipment Fixed-speed rotary air compressors Variable-speed rotary air compressors Cooling fan(s) and motors Yes Yes. Mechanical equipment Yes Yes. Lubricant pump Yes Yes. Interstage cooler Yes Yes. Electronic or electrical controls and user interface Yes Yes. All protective and safety devices Yes Yes. 2.2.5. The inlet of the compressor under test must be open to the atmosphere and take in ambient air for all tests specified in this appendix. 2.2.6. The compressor under test must be set up according to all manufacturer instructions for normal operation ( e.g., 2.2.7. The piping connected to the discharge orifice of the compressor must be of a diameter at least equal to that of the compressor discharge orifice to which it is connected. The piping must be straight with a length of at least 6 inches. 2.2.8. Transducers used to record compressor discharge pressure must be located on the discharge piping between 2 inches and 6 inches, inclusive, from the discharge orifice of the compressor. The pressure tap for transducers must be located at the highest point of the pipe's cross section. 3. Determination of Package Isentropic Efficiency, Package Specific Power, and Pressure Ratio at Full-Load Operating Pressure 3.1 Data Collection and Analysis. 3.1.1. Stabilization. Record data at each load point under steady-state conditions. Steady-state conditions are achieved when a set of two consecutive readings taken at least 10 seconds apart and no more than 60 seconds apart are within the maximum permissible fluctuation from the average (of the two consecutive readings), as specified in table 1 of ISO 1217:2009(E) for— (a) Discharge pressure; (b) Temperature at the nozzle or orifice plate, measured per section 5.3 of ISO 1217:2009(E); and (c) Differential pressure over the nozzle or orifice plate, measured per section 5.2 of ISO 1217:2009(E). 3.1.2. Data Sampling and Frequency. At each load point, record a minimum set of 16 unique readings, collected over a minimum time of 15 minutes. Each consecutive reading must be no more than 60 seconds apart, and not less than 10 seconds apart. All readings at each load point must be within the maximum permissible fluctuation from average specified in table 1 of ISO 1217:2009(E) for— (a) Discharge pressure; (b) Temperature at the nozzle or orifice plate, measured per section 5.3 of ISO 1217:2009(E); and (c) Differential pressure over the nozzle or orifice plate, measured per section 5.2 of ISO 1217:2009(E). If one or more readings do not meet the requirements, then all previous readings must be disregarded and a new set of at least 16 new unique readings must be collected over a minimum time of 15 minutes. Average the readings to determine the value of each parameter to be used in subsequent calculations. 3.1.3. Calculations and Rounding. Perform all calculations using raw measured values. Round the final result for package isentropic efficiency to the thousandth ( i.e., i.e., i.e., i.e., i.e., 3.2. Full-Load Operating Pressure and Full-Load Actual Volume Flow Rate Determine the full-load operating pressure and full-load actual volume flow rate (referenced throughout this appendix) in accordance with the procedures prescribed in section 4 of this appendix. 3.3. Full-Load Package Isentropic Efficiency for Fixed- and Variable-Speed Air Compressors Use this test method to test fixed-speed air compressors and variable-speed air compressors. 3.3.1. Test unit at full-load operating pressure and full-load volume flow rate according to the requirements established in sections 2, 3.1, and 3.2 of this appendix. Measure volume flow rate and calculate actual volume flow rate in accordance with section C.4.2.1 of Annex C to ISO 1217:2009(E) with no corrections made for shaft speed. Measure discharge gauge pressure and packaged compressor power input. Measured discharge gauge pressure and calculated actual volume flow rate must be within the deviation limits for discharge pressure and volume flow rate specified in tables C.1 and C.2 of Annex C to ISO 1217:2009(E), where full-load operating pressure and full-load actual volume flow rate (as determined in section 4 of this appendix) are the targeted values. 3.3.2. Calculate the package isentropic efficiency at full-load operating pressure and full-load actual volume flow rate (full-load package isentropic efficiency, η isen,FL P isen, P real, 3.3.2.1. Calculate the isentropic power required for compression at full-load operating pressure and full-load actual volume flow rate using equation (H.6) of Annex H to ISO 1217:2009/Amd.1:2016(E). For q V 1, p 1, p 2, (a) 100 kPa, and (b) The measured discharge gauge pressure (Pa) from section 3.3.1 of this appendix. For K, 3.3.2.2. Calculate real packaged compressor power input at full-load operating pressure and full-load actual volume flow rate using the following equation: P real,100% 5 6 PR,100 % Where: K 5 K 6 (a) The sum of 100 kPa and the measured discharge gauge pressure (kPa) from section 3.3.1 of this appendix, to (b) 100 kPa; and P PR,100 % 3.4. Part-Load Package Isentropic Efficiency for Variable-Speed Air Compressors Use this test method to test variable-speed air compressors. 3.4.1. Test unit at two load points: (a) Full-load operating pressure and 70 percent of full-load actual volume flow rate and (b) Full-load operating pressure and 40 percent of full-load actual volume flow rate, according to the requirements established in sections 2, 3.1, and 3.2 of this appendix. To reach each specified load point, adjust the speed of the driver and the backpressure of the system. For each load point, measure volume flow rate and calculate actual volume flow rate in accordance with section C.4.2.1 of Annex C to ISO 1217:2009(E), with no corrections made for shaft speed. For each load point, measure discharge gauge pressure and packaged compressor power input. Measured discharge gauge pressure and calculated actual volume flow rate must be within the deviation limits for discharge pressure and volume flow rate specified in tables C.1 and C.2 of Annex C to ISO 1217:2009(E). 3.4.2. For variable-speed compressors, calculate the part-load package isentropic efficiency using the following equation: η isen,PL v 40 % isen,40 % v 70 % isen,70 % v 100 % isen,100 % Where: η isen,PL η isen,100 % η isen,70 % η isen,40 % v 40 % v 70 % v 100 % 3.4.3. Calculate package isentropic efficiency at full-load operating pressure and 70 percent of full-load actual volume flow rate using the equation for isentropic efficiency in section 3.6.1 of ISO 1217:2009(E) as modified by ISO 1217:2009/Amd.1:2016(E). For P isen, P real, 3.4.3.1. Calculate the isentropic power required for compression at full-load operating pressure and 70 percent of full-load actual volume flow rate using equation (H.6) of Annex H to ISO 1217:2009/Amd.1:2016(E). For q V 1, p 1, p 2, (a) 100 kPa, and (b) Discharge gauge pressure (Pa) at full-load operating pressure and 70 percent of full-load actual volume flow rate, as calculated in section 3.4.1 of this appendix. For K, 3.4.3.2. Calculate real packaged compressor power input at full-load operating pressure and 70 percent of full-load actual volume flow rate using the following equation: P real,70 % 5 6 PR,70 % Where: K 5 K 6 (a) The sum of 100 kPa and the measured discharge gauge pressure (kPa) from the test at 70 percent of full-load actual volume flow rate in section 3.4.1 of this appendix, to (b) 100 kPa; and P PR,70 % 3.4.4. Calculate package isentropic efficiency at full-load operating pressure and 40 percent of full-load actual volume flow rate using the equation for isentropic efficiency in section 3.6.1 of ISO 1217:2009(E) as modified by ISO 1217:2009/Amd.1:2016(E). For P isen, P real, 3.4.4.1. Calculate the isentropic power required for compression at full-load operating pressure and 40 percent of full-load actual volume flow rate using equation (H.6) of Annex H to ISO 1217:2009/Amd.1:2016(E). For q V 1, p 1, p 2, (a) 100 kPa, and (b) Discharge gauge pressure (Pa) at full-load operating pressure and 40 percent of full-load actual volume flow rate, as calculated in section 3.4.1 of this appendix. For K, 3.4.4.2. Calculate real packaged compressor power input at full-load operating pressure and 40 percent of full-load actual volume flow rate using the following equation: P real,40 % 5 6 PR,40 % Where: K 5 K 6 (a) The sum of 100 kPa and the measured discharge gauge pressure (kPa) from the test at 40 percent of full-load actual volume flow rate in section 3.4.1 of this appendix, to (b) 100 kPa; and P PR,40 % 3.5. Determination of Package Specific Power For both fixed and variable-speed air compressors, determine the package specific power, at any load point, using the equation for specific energy consumption in section C.4.4 of Annex C to ISO 1217:2009(E) and other values measured pursuant to this appendix, with no correction for shaft speed. Calculate P Pcorr P Pcorr 5 6 PR Where: K 5 K 6 (a) The sum of 100 kPa and the measured discharge gauge pressure (kPa) from the test used to determine the package specific power, to (b) 100 kPa; and P PR 3.6. Determination of Pressure Ratio at Full-Load Operating Pressure Pressure ratio at full-load operating pressure, as defined in § 431.342, is calculated using the following equation: Where: PR = pressure ratio at full-load operating pressure; P 1 P FL 4. Method To Determine Maximum Full-Flow Operating Pressure, Full-Load Operating Pressure, and Full-Load Actual Volume Flow Rate 4.1. Principal Strategy The principal strategy of this method is to incrementally increase discharge pressure by 2 psig relative to a starting point, and identify the maximum full-flow operating pressure at which the compressor is capable of operating. The maximum discharge pressure achieved is the maximum full-flow operating pressure. The full-load operating pressure and full-load actual volume flow rate are determined based on the maximum full-flow operating pressure. 4.2. Pre-test Instructions 4.2.1. Safety. For the method presented in section 4.3.1 of this appendix, only test discharge pressure within the safe operating range of the compressor, as specified by the manufacturer in the installation and operation manual shipped with the unit. Make no changes to safety limits or equipment. Do not violate any manufacturer-provided motor operational guidelines for normal use, including any restriction on instantaneous and continuous input power draw and output shaft power ( e.g., 4.2.2. Adjustment of Discharge Pressure 4.2.2.1. If the air compressor is not equipped, as distributed in commerce by the manufacturer, with any mechanism to adjust the maximum discharge pressure output limit, proceed to section 4.2.3 of this appendix. 4.2.2.2. If the air compressor is equipped, as distributed in commerce by the manufacturer, with any mechanism to adjust the maximum discharge pressure output limit, then adjust this mechanism to the maximum pressure allowed, according to the manufacturer's operating instructions for these mechanisms. Mechanisms to adjust discharge pressure may include, but are not limited to, onboard digital or analog controls, and user-adjustable inlet valves. 4.2.3. Driver speed. If the unit under test is a variable-speed compressor, maintain maximum driver speed throughout the test. If the unit under test is a fixed-speed compressor with a multi-speed driver, maintain driver speed at the maximum speed throughout the test. 4.2.4. Measurements and Tolerances 4.2.4.1. Recording. Record data by electronic means such that the requirements of section 4.2.4.5 of this appendix are met. 4.2.4.2. Discharge Pressure. Measure discharge pressure in accordance with section 5.2 of ISO 1217:2009(E). Express compressor discharge pressure in psig in reference to ambient conditions, and record it to the nearest integer. Specify targeted discharge pressure points in integer values only. The maximum allowable measured deviation from the targeted discharge pressure at each tested point is ±1 psig. 4.2.4.3. Actual Volume Flow Rate. Measure actual volume flow rate in accordance with section C.4.2.1 of Annex C to ISO 1217:2009(E) (where it is called “corrected volume flow rate”) with no corrections made for shaft speed. Express compressor actual volume flow rate in cubic feet per minute at inlet conditions (cfm). 4.2.4.4. Stabilization. Record data at each tested load point under steady-state conditions, as determined in section 3.1.1 of this appendix. 4.2.4.5. Data Sampling and Frequency. At each load point, record a set of at least of two readings, collected at a minimum of 10 seconds apart. All readings at each load point must be within the maximum permissible fluctuation from the average (of the two consecutive readings), as specified in 3.1.2 of this appendix. Average the measurements to determine the value of each parameter to be used in subsequent calculations. 4.2.5 Adjusting System Backpressure. Set up the unit under test so that backpressure on the unit can be adjusted ( e.g., 4.2.6 Unloaded Condition. A unit is considered to be in an unloaded condition if capacity controls on the unit automatically reduce the actual volume flow rate from the compressor ( e.g., 4.3. Test Instructions 4.3.1. Adjust the backpressure of the system so the measured discharge pressure is 90 percent of the expected maximum full-flow operating pressure, rounded to the nearest integer, in psig. If the expected maximum full-flow operating pressure is not known, then adjust the backpressure of the system so that the measured discharge pressure is 65 psig. Allow the unit to remain at this setting for 15 minutes to allow the unit to thermally stabilize. Then measure and record discharge pressure and actual volume flow rate at the starting pressure. 4.3.2. Adjust the backpressure of the system to increase the discharge pressure by 2 psig from the previous value, allow the unit to remain at this setting for a minimum of 2 minutes, and proceed to section 4.3.3 of this appendix. 4.3.3. If the unit is now in an unloaded condition, end the test and proceed to section 4.3.4 of this appendix. If the unit is not in an unloaded condition, measure discharge pressure and actual volume flow rate, and repeat section 4.3.2 of this appendix. 4.3.4. Of the discharge pressures recorded under stabilized conditions in sections 4.3.1 through 4.3.3 of this appendix, identify the largest. This is the maximum full-flow operating pressure. Determine the full-load operating pressure as a self-declared value greater than or equal to the lesser of (A) 90 percent of the maximum full-flow operating pressure, or (B) 10 psig less than the maximum full-flow operating pressure. 4.3.5 The full-load actual volume flow rate is the actual volume flow rate measured at the full-load operating pressure. If the self-declared full-load operating pressure falls on a previously tested value of discharge pressure, then use the previously measured actual volume flow rate as the full-load actual volume flow rate. If the self-declared full-load operating pressure does not fall on a previously tested value of discharge pressure, then adjust the backpressure of the system to the self-declared full-load operating pressure and allow the unit to remain at this setting for a minimum of 2 minutes. The measured actual volume flow rate at this setting is the full-load actual volume flow rate. [90 FR 5555, Jan. 17, 2025] Subpart U—Enforcement for Electric Motors Source: 69 FR 61941, Oct. 21, 2004, unless otherwise noted. Redesignated at 70 FR 60416, Oct. 18, 2005. § 431.381 Purpose and scope for electric motors. This subpart describes violations of EPCA's energy conservation requirements, specific procedures we will follow in pursuing alleged non-compliance of an electric motor with an applicable energy conservation standard or labeling requirement, and general procedures for enforcement action, largely drawn directly from EPCA, that apply to electric motors. [76 FR 12505, Mar. 7, 2011] § 431.382 Prohibited acts. (a) Each of the following is a prohibited act under sections 332 and 345 of the Act: (1) Distribution in commerce by a manufacturer or private labeler of any “new covered equipment” which is not labeled in accordance with an applicable labeling rule prescribed in accordance with Section 344 of the Act, and in this part; (2) Removal from any “new covered equipment” or rendering illegible, by a manufacturer, distributor, retailer, or private labeler, of any label required under this part to be provided with such covered equipment; (3) Failure to permit access to, or copying of records required to be supplied under the Act and this part, or failure to make reports or provide other information required to be supplied under the Act and this part; (4) Advertisement of an electric motor or motors, by a manufacturer, distributor, retailer, or private labeler, in a catalog from which the equipment may be purchased, without including in the catalog all information as required by § 431.31(b)(1), provided, however, that this shall not apply to an advertisement of an electric motor in a catalog if distribution of the catalog began before the effective date of the labeling rule applicable to that motor; (5) Failure of a manufacturer to supply at his expense a reasonable number of units of covered equipment to a test laboratory designated by the Secretary; (6) Failure of a manufacturer to permit a representative designated by the Secretary to observe any testing required by the Act and this part, and to inspect the results of such testing; and (7) Distribution in commerce by a manufacturer or private labeler of any new covered equipment which is not in compliance with an applicable energy efficiency standard prescribed under the Act and this part. (b) In accordance with sections 333 and 345 of the Act, any person who knowingly violates any provision of paragraph (a) of this section may be subject to assessment of a civil penalty of no more than $575 for each violation. (c) For purposes of this section: (1) The term “new covered equipment” means covered equipment the title of which has not passed to a purchaser who buys such product for purposes other than: (i) Reselling it; or (ii) Leasing it for a period in excess of one year; and (2) The term “knowingly” means: (i) Having actual knowledge; or (ii) Presumed to have knowledge deemed to be possessed by a reasonable person who acts in the circumstances, including knowledge obtainable upon the exercise of due care. [69 FR 61941, Oct. 21, 2004. Redesignated at 70 FR 60416, Oct. 18, 2005, as amended at 79 FR 19, Jan. 2, 2014; 81 FR 41794, June 28, 2016; 81 FR 96351, Dec. 30, 2016; 83 FR 1291, Jan. 11, 2018; 83 FR 66083, Dec. 26, 2018; 85 FR 830, Jan. 8, 2020; 86 FR 2955, Jan. 14, 2021; 87 FR 1063, Jan. 10, 2022; 88 FR 2193, Jan. 13, 2023; 89 FR 1028, Jan. 9, 2024; 89 FR 105406, Dec. 27, 2024] § 431.383 Enforcement process for electric motors. (a) Test notice. (1) The test notice procedure will only be followed after the Secretary or his/her designated representative has examined the underlying test data (or, where appropriate, data as to use of an alternative efficiency determination method) provided by the manufacturer and after the manufacturer has been offered the opportunity to meet with the Department to verify, as applicable, compliance with the applicable efficiency standard, or the accuracy of labeling information, or both. In addition, where compliance of a basic model was certified based on an AEDM, the Department shall have the discretion to pursue the provisions of § 431.17(a)(4)(iii) prior to invoking the test notice procedure. A representative designated by the Secretary shall be permitted to observe any re-verification procedures undertaken pursuant to this subpart, and to inspect the results of such reverification. (2) The test notice will be signed by the Secretary or his/her designee. The test notice will be mailed or delivered by the Department to the plant manager or other responsible official, as designated by the manufacturer. (3) The test notice will specify the model or basic model to be selected for testing, the method of selecting the test sample, the date and time at which testing shall be initiated, the date by which testing is scheduled to be completed and the facility at which testing will be conducted. The test notice may also provide for situations in which the specified basic model is unavailable for testing, and may include alternative basic models. (4) The Secretary may require in the test notice that the manufacturer of an electric motor shall ship at his expense a reasonable number of units of a basic model specified in such test notice to a testing laboratory designated by the Secretary. The number of units of a basic model specified in a test notice shall not exceed 20. (5) Within five working days of the time the units are selected, the manufacturer shall ship the specified test units of a basic model to the testing laboratory. (b) Testing laboratory. (c) Sampling. (d) Test unit selection. (1) The batch may be subdivided by the Department utilizing criteria specified in the test notice. (2) A batch sample of up to 20 units will then be randomly selected from one or more subdivided groups within the batch. The manufacturer shall keep on hand all units in the batch sample until such time as the basic model is determined to be in compliance or non-compliance. (3) Individual test units comprising the test sample shall be randomly selected from the batch sample. (4) All random selection shall be achieved by sequentially numbering all of the units in a batch sample and then using a table of random numbers to select the units to be tested. (e) Test unit preparation. (2) No quality control, testing, or assembly procedures shall be performed on a test unit, or any parts and sub-assemblies thereof, that is not performed during the production and assembly of all other units included in the basic model. (3) A test unit shall be considered defective if such unit is inoperative or is found to be in noncompliance due to failure of the unit to operate according to the manufacturer's design and operating instructions. Defective units, including those damaged due to shipping or handling, shall be reported immediately to the Department. The Department shall authorize testing of an additional unit on a case-by-case basis. (4)(i) Non-standard endshields or flanges. (ii) Partial electric motors. (f) Testing at manufacturer's option. (2) All units tested under this paragraph shall be selected and tested in accordance with the provisions given in paragraphs (a) through (e) of this section. (3) The manufacturer shall bear the cost of all testing conducted under this paragraph. (4) The manufacturer shall cease distribution of the basic model tested under the provisions of this paragraph from the time the manufacturer elects to exercise the option provided in this paragraph until the basic model is determined to be in compliance. The Department may seek civil penalties for all units distributed during such period. (5) If the additional testing results in a determination of compliance, a notice of allowance to resume distribution shall be issued by the Department. [69 FR 61941, Oct. 21, 2004. Redesignated at 70 FR 60416, Oct. 18, 2005, as amended at 78 FR 75995, Dec. 13, 2013] § 431.384 [Reserved] § 431.385 Cessation of distribution of a basic model of an electric motor. (a) In the event that a model of an electric motor is determined non-compliant by the Department in accordance with § 431.192 or if a manufacturer or private labeler determines a model of an electric motor to be in noncompliance, then the manufacturer or private labeler shall: (1) Immediately cease distribution in commerce of the basic model. (2) Give immediate written notification of the determination of noncompliance, to all persons to whom the manufacturer has distributed units of the basic model manufactured since the date of the last determination of compliance. (3) Pursuant to a request made by the Secretary, provide the Department within 30 days of the request, records, reports, and other documentation pertaining to the acquisition, ordering, storage, shipment, or sale of a basic model determined to be in noncompliance. (4) The manufacturer may modify the non-compliant basic model in such manner as to make it comply with the applicable performance standard. Such modified basic model shall then be treated as a new basic model and must be certified in accordance with the provisions of this subpart; except that in addition to satisfying all requirements of this subpart, the manufacturer shall also maintain records that demonstrate that modifications have been made to all units of the new basic model prior to distribution in commerce. (b) If a basic model is not properly certified in accordance with the requirements of this subpart, the Secretary may seek, among other remedies, injunctive action to prohibit distribution in commerce of such basic model. § 431.386 Remedies. If the Secretary determines that a basic model of any covered equipment does not comply with an applicable energy conservation standard: (a) The Secretary will notify the manufacturer, private labeler, or any other person as required, of this finding and of the Secretary's intent to seek a judicial order restraining further distribution in commerce of units of such a basic model unless the manufacturer, private labeler or other person as required, delivers, within 15 calendar days, a satisfactory statement to the Secretary, of the steps the manufacturer, private labeler or other person will take to insure that the noncompliant basic model will no longer be distributed in commerce. The Secretary will monitor the implementation of such statement. (b) If the manufacturer, private labeler or any other person as required, fails to stop distribution of the noncompliant basic model, the Secretary may seek to restrain such violation in accordance with sections 334 and 345 of the Act. (c) The Secretary will determine whether the facts of the case warrant the assessment of civil penalties for knowing violations in accordance with sections 333 and 345 of the Act. § 431.387 Hearings and appeals. (a) Under sections 333(d) and 345 of the Act, before issuing an order assessing a civil penalty against any person, the Secretary must provide to such a person a notice of the proposed penalty. Such notice must inform the person that such person can choose (in writing within 30 days after receipt of the notice) to have the procedures of paragraph (c) of this section (in lieu of those in paragraph (b) of this section) apply with respect to such assessment. (b)(1) Unless a person elects, within 30 calendar days after receipt of a notice under paragraph (a) of this section, to have paragraph (c) of this section apply with respect to the civil penalty under paragraph (a), the Secretary will assess the penalty, by order, after providing an opportunity for an agency hearing under 5 U.S.C. 554, before an administrative law judge appointed under 5 U.S.C. 3105, and making a determination of violation on the record. Such assessment order will include the administrative law judge's findings and the basis for such assessment. (2) Any person against whom the Secretary assesses a penalty under this paragraph may, within 60 calendar days after the date of the order assessing such penalty, initiate action in the United States Court of Appeals for the appropriate judicial circuit for judicial review of such order in accordance with 5 U.S.C. chapter 7. The court will have jurisdiction to enter a judgment affirming, modifying, or setting aside in whole or in part, the order of the Secretary, or the court may remand the proceeding to the Secretary for such further action as the court may direct. (c)(1) In the case of any civil penalty with respect to which the procedures of this paragraph have been elected, the Secretary will promptly assess such penalty, by order, after the date of the receipt of the notice under paragraph (a) of this section of the proposed penalty. (2) If the person has not paid the civil penalty within 60 calendar days after the assessment has been made under paragraph (c)(1) of this section, the Secretary will institute an action in the appropriate District Court of the United States for an order affirming the assessment of the civil penalty. The court will have authority to review de novo the law and the facts involved and jurisdiction to enter a judgment enforcing, modifying, and enforcing as so modified, or setting aside in whole or in part, such assessment. (3) Any election to have this paragraph apply can only be revoked with the consent of the Secretary. (d) If any person fails to pay an assessment of a civil penalty after it has become a final and unappealable order under paragraph (b) of this section, or after the appropriate District Court has entered final judgment in favor of the Secretary under paragraph (c) of this section, the Secretary will institute an action to recover the amount of such penalty in any appropriate District Court of the United States. In such action, the validity and appropriateness of such final assessment order or judgment will not be subject to review. (e)(1) In accordance with the provisions of sections 333(d)(5)(A) and 345 of the Act and notwithstanding the provisions of title 28, United States Code, or Section 502(c) of the Department of Energy Organization Act, the General Counsel of the Department of Energy (or any attorney or attorneys within DOE designated by the Secretary) will represent the Secretary, and will supervise, conduct, and argue any civil litigation to which paragraph (c) of this section applies (including any related collection action under paragraph (d) of this section) in a court of the United States or in any other court, except the Supreme Court of the United States. However, the Secretary or the General Counsel will consult with the Attorney General concerning such litigation and the Attorney General will provide, on request, such assistance in the conduct of such litigation as may be appropriate. (2) In accordance with the provisions of sections 333(d)(5)(B) and 345 of the Act, and subject to the provisions of Section 502(c) of the Department of Energy Organization Act, the Secretary will be represented by the Attorney General, or the Solicitor General, as appropriate, in actions under this section, except to the extent provided in paragraph (e)(1) of this section. (3) In accordance with the provisions of Section 333(d)(5)(c) and 345 of the Act, Section 402(d) of the Department of Energy Organization Act will not apply with respect to the function of the Secretary under this section. Appendix A to Subpart U of Part 431—Sampling Plan for Enforcement Testing of Electric Motors Step 1. The first sample size (n 1 Step 2. Compute the mean (X 1 1 where X i Step 3. Compute the sample standard deviation (S 1 1 Step 4. Compute the standard error (SE(X 1 Step 5. Compute the lower control limit (LCL 1 where: RE is the applicable EPCA nominal full-load efficiency when the test is to determine compliance with the applicable statutory standard, or is the labeled nominal full-load efficiency when the test is to determine compliance with the labeled efficiency value, and t is the 2.5th percentile of a t-distribution for a sample size of n 1 Step 6. Compare the mean of the first sample (X 1 1 (i) If the mean of the first sample is below the lower control limit, then the basic model is in non-compliance and testing is at an end. (ii) If the mean is equal to or greater than the lower control limit, no final determination of compliance or non-compliance can be made; proceed to Step 7. Step 7. Determine the recommended sample size (n) as follows: where S 1 is based on a 20 percent tolerance in the total power loss at full-load and fixed output power. Given the value of n, determine one of the following: (i) If the value of n is less than or equal to n 1 1 1 (ii) If the value of n is greater than n1, the basic model is in non-compliance. The size of a second sample n 2 1 2 2 1 Step 8. Compute the combined (X 2 1 2 Step 9. Compute the standard error (SE(X 2 1 2 (Note that S 1 Step 10. Set the lower control limit (LCL 2 where t has the value obtained in Step 5, and compare the combined sample mean (X 2 2 (i) If the mean of the combined sample (X 2 2 (ii) If the mean of the combined sample (X 2 2 Manufacturer-Option Testing If a determination of non-compliance is made in Steps 6, 7 or 10, of this appendix A, the manufacturer may request that additional testing be conducted, in accordance with the following procedures. Step A. The manufacturer requests that an additional number, n 3 3 1 2 3 Step B. Compute the mean full-load efficiency, standard error, and lower control limit of the new combined sample in accordance with the procedures prescribed in Steps 8, 9, and 10, of this appendix A. Step C. Compare the mean performance of the new combined sample to the lower control limit (LCL 2 (a) If the new combined sample mean is equal to or greater than the lower control limit, the basic model is in compliance and testing is at an end. (b) If the new combined sample mean is less than the lower control limit and the value of n 1 2 3 (c) Otherwise, the basic model is determined to be in non-compliance. Subpart V—General Provisions Source: 69 FR 61941, Oct. 21, 2004, unless otherwise noted. Redesignated at 70 FR 60417, Oct. 18, 2005. § 431.401 Petitions for waiver and interim waiver. (a) General information. (1) Any interested person may submit a petition to waive for a particular basic model the requirements of any uniform test method contained in this part, upon the grounds that either the basic model contains one or more design characteristics that prevent testing of the basic model according to the prescribed test procedures or cause the prescribed test procedures to evaluate the basic model in a manner so unrepresentative of its true energy or water consumption characteristics as to provide materially inaccurate comparative data. (2) Manufacturers of basic model(s) subject to a waiver or interim waiver are responsible for complying with the other requirements of this part and with the requirements of 10 CFR part 429 regardless of the person that originally submitted the petition for waiver and/or interim waiver. The filing of a petition for waiver and/or interim waiver shall not constitute grounds for noncompliance with any requirements of this part. (3) All correspondence regarding waivers and interim waivers must be submitted to DOE either electronically to [email protected] (b) Petition content and publication. (i) Identify the particular basic model(s) for which a waiver is requested, each brand name under which the identified basic model(s) will be distributed in commerce, the design characteristic(s) constituting the grounds for the petition, and the specific requirements sought to be waived, and must discuss in detail the need for the requested waiver; (ii) Identify manufacturers of all other basic models distributed in commerce in the United States and known to the petitioner to incorporate design characteristic(s) similar to those found in the basic model that is the subject of the petition; (iii) Include any alternate test procedures known to the petitioner to evaluate the performance of the equipment type in a manner representative of the energy and/or water consumption characteristics of the basic model; and (iv) Be signed by the petitioner or an authorized representative. In accordance with the provisions set forth in 10 CFR 1004.11, any request for confidential treatment of any information contained in a petition or in supporting documentation must be accompanied by a copy of the petition, application or supporting documentation from which the information claimed to be confidential has been deleted. DOE will publish in the Federal Register (2) In addition to the requirements in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, each petition for interim waiver must reference the related petition for waiver, demonstrate likely success of the petition for waiver, and address what economic hardship and/or competitive disadvantage is likely to result absent a favorable determination on the petition for interim waiver. (c) Notification to other manufacturers. Federal Register, Federal Register (2) If a petitioner does not request an interim waiver and notification has not been provided pursuant to paragraph (c)(1) of this section, each petitioner, after filing a petition for waiver with DOE, and after the petition for waiver has been published in the Federal Register, Federal Register Federal Register, (d) Public comment and rebuttal. (2) Any person submitting written comments to DOE with respect to a petition for waiver must also send a copy of such comments to the petitioner. (3) A petitioner may, within 10 working days of the close of the comment period specified in the Federal Register, (e) Provisions specific to interim waivers. (2) A petition for interim waiver that does not meet the content requirements of paragraph (b) of this section will be considered incomplete. DOE will notify the petitioner of an incomplete petition via email. (3) DOE will grant an interim waiver from the test procedure requirements if it appears likely that the petition for waiver will be granted and/or if DOE determines that it would be desirable for public policy reasons to grant immediate relief pending a determination on the petition for waiver. Notice of DOE's determination on the petition for interim waiver will be published in the Federal Register (f) Provisions specific to waivers (2) Criteria for granting. DOE will grant a waiver from the test procedure requirements if DOE determines either that the basic model(s) for which the waiver was requested contains a design characteristic that prevents testing of the basic model according to the prescribed test procedures, or that the prescribed test procedures evaluate the basic model in a manner so unrepresentative of its true energy or water consumption characteristics as to provide materially inaccurate comparative data. DOE may grant a waiver subject to conditions, which may include adherence to alternate test procedures specified by DOE. DOE will promptly publish in the Federal Register (g) Extension to additional basic models. Federal Register (h) Duration. (i) Publish in the Federal Register (ii) Publish in the Federal Register (2) When DOE publishes a decision and order on a petition for waiver in the Federal Register (3) When DOE amends the test procedure to address the issues presented in a waiver, the waiver or interim waiver will automatically terminate on the date on which use of that test procedure is required to demonstrate compliance. (4) When DOE publishes a decision and order in the Federal Register (i) Compliance certification and representations. (2) When DOE publishes a new or amended test procedure, certification reports to DOE required under 10 CFR 429.12 and any representations must be based on the testing methodology of an applicable waiver or interim waiver, or the new or amended test procedure until the date on which use of such test procedure is required to demonstrate compliance, unless otherwise specified by DOE in the test procedure final rule. Thereafter, certification reports and any representations must be based on the test procedure final rule methodology. Once a manufacturer uses the test procedure final rule methodology in a certification report or any representation, all subsequent certification reports and any representations must be made using the test procedure final rule methodology. (3) If DOE publishes a decision and order modifying an existing waiver, certification reports to DOE required under 10 CFR 429.12 and any representations must be based on either of the two methodologies until 180-360 days after the publication date of the decision and order modifying the waiver, as specified by DOE in the decision and order. Thereafter, certification reports and any representations must be based on the modified test procedure methodology unless otherwise specified by DOE. Once a manufacturer uses the modified test procedure methodology in a certification report or any representation, all subsequent certification reports and any representations must be made using the modified test procedure methodology while the modified waiver is valid. (j) Petition for waiver required of other manufactures. Federal Register (k) Rescission or modification. (2) A person may request that DOE rescind or modify a waiver or interim waiver issued to that person if the person discovers an error in the information provided to DOE as part of its petition, determines that the waiver is no longer needed, or for other appropriate reasons. In a request for rescission, the requestor must provide a statement explaining why it is requesting rescission. In a request for modification, the requestor must explain the need for modification to the authorized test procedure and detail the modifications needed and the corresponding impact on measured energy consumption. (3) DOE will publish a proposed rescission or modification (DOE-initiated or at the request of the original requestor) in the Federal Register Federal Register, (4) DOE will publish its decision in the Federal Register. (5) After the effective date of a rescission, any basic model(s) previously subject to a waiver must be tested and certified using the applicable DOE test procedure in 10 CFR part 431. (l) Revision of regulation. Federal Register Federal Register (m) To exhaust administrative remedies, any person aggrieved by an action under this section must file an appeal with the DOE's Office of Hearings and Appeals as provided in 10 CFR part 1003, subpart C. [79 FR 26601, May 9, 2014, as amended at 85 FR 79820, Dec. 11, 2020; 86 FR 70960, Dec. 14, 2021] § 431.402 Preemption of State regulations for commercial HVAC & WH products. Beginning on the effective date of such standard, an energy conservation standard set forth in this part for a commercial HVAC & WH product supersedes any State or local regulation concerning the energy efficiency or energy use of that product, except as provided for in Section 345(b)(2)(B)-(D) of the Act. § 431.403 Maintenance of records for electric motors. (a) Manufacturers of electric motors must establish, maintain and retain records of the following: (1) The test data for all testing conducted pursuant to this part; (2) The development, substantiation, application, and subsequent verification of any AEDM used under this part; (3) Any written certification received from a certification program, including a certificate or conformity, relied on under the provisions of this part; (b) You must organize such records and index them so that they are readily accessible for review. The records must include the supporting test data associated with tests performed on any test units to satisfy the requirements of this part (except tests performed by DOE). (c) For each basic model, you must retain all such records for a period of two years from the date that production of all units of that basic model has ceased. You must retain records in a form allowing ready access to DOE, upon request. [76 FR 12505, Mar. 7, 2011] § 431.404 Imported electric motors. (a) Under sections 331 and 345 of the Act, any person importing an electric motor into the United States must comply with the provisions of the Act and of this part, and is subject to the remedies of this part. (b) Any electric motor offered for importation in violation of the Act and of this part will be refused admission into the customs territory of the United States under rules issued by the Secretary of the Treasury, except that the Secretary of the Treasury may, by such rules, authorize the importation of such electric motor upon such terms and conditions (including the furnishing of a bond) as may appear to the Secretary of the Treasury appropriate to ensure that such electric motor will not violate the Act and this part, or will be exported or abandoned to the United States. [76 FR 12505, Mar. 7, 2011] § 431.405 Exported electric motors. Under Sections 330 and 345 of the Act, this part does not apply to any electric motor if: (a) Such electric motor is manufactured, sold, or held for sale for export from the United States (or such electric motor was imported for export), unless such electric motor is, in fact, distributed in commerce for use in the United States; and, (b) Such electric motor, when distributed in commerce, or any container in which it is enclosed when so distributed, bears a stamp or label stating that such electric motor is intended for export. [76 FR 12505, Mar. 7, 2011] § 431.406 Subpoena—Electric Motors. Pursuant to sections 329(a) and 345 of the Act, for purposes of carrying out this part, the Secretary or the Secretary's designee, may sign and issue subpoenas for the attendance and testimony of witnesses and the production of relevant books, records, papers, and other documents, and administer the oaths. Witnesses summoned under the provisions of this section shall be paid the same fees and mileage as are paid to witnesses in the courts of the United States. In case of contumacy by, or refusal to obey a subpoena served upon any persons subject to this part, the Secretary may seek an order from the District Court of the United States for any District in which such person is found or resides or transacts business requiring such person to appear and give testimony, or to appear and produce documents. Failure to obey such order is punishable by such court as a contempt thereof. [76 FR 12505, Mar. 7, 2011] § 431.407 Confidentiality—Electric Motors. Pursuant to the provisions of 10 CFR 1004.11, any manufacturer or private labeler of electric motors submitting information or data which they believe to be confidential and exempt from public disclosure should submit one complete copy, and 15 copies from which the information believed to be confidential has been deleted. In accordance with the procedures established at 10 CFR 1004.11, the Department shall make its own determination with regard to any claim that information submitted be exempt from public disclosure. [76 FR 12505, Mar. 7, 2011] § 431.408 Preemption of State regulations for covered equipment other than electric motors and commercial heating, ventilating, air-conditioning and water heating products. This section concerns State regulations providing for any energy conservation standard, or water conservation standard (in the case of commercial prerinse spray valves or commercial clothes washers), or other requirement with respect to the energy efficiency, energy use, or water use (in the case of commercial prerinse spray valves or commercial clothes washers), for any covered equipment other than an electric motor or commercial HVAC and WH product. Any such regulation that contains a standard or requirement that is not identical to a Federal standard in effect under this subpart is preempted by that standard, except as provided for in sections 327(b) and (c) and 345(a)(10), (e), (f) and (g) of the Act. [75 FR 675, Jan. 5, 2010, as amended at 78 FR 62993, Oct. 23, 2013] Subpart W—Petitions To Exempt State Regulation From Preemption; Petitions To Withdraw Exemption of State Regulation Source: 69 FR 61941, Oct. 21, 2004, unless otherwise noted. Redesignated at 70 FR 60417, Oct. 18, 2005. § 431.421 Purpose and scope. (a) The regulations in this subpart prescribe the procedures to be followed in connection with petitions requesting a rule that a State regulation prescribing an energy conservation standard or other requirement respecting energy use or energy efficiency of a type (or class) of covered equipment not be preempted. (b) The regulations in this subpart also prescribe the procedures to be followed in connection with petitions to withdraw a rule exempting a State regulation prescribing an energy conservation standard or other requirement respecting energy use or energy efficiency of a type (or class) of covered equipment. § 431.422 Prescriptions of a rule. (a) Criteria for exemption from preemption. (1) Requirements of petition for exemption from preemption. A petition from a State for a rule for exemption from preemption shall include the information listed in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(vi) of this section. A petition for a rule and correspondence relating to such petition shall be available for public review except for confidential or proprietary information submitted in accordance with the Department of Energy's Freedom of Information Regulations set forth in 10 CFR part 1004. (i) The name, address, and telephone number of the petitioner; (ii) A copy of the State standard for which a rule exempting such standard is sought; (iii) A copy of the State's energy plan and forecast; (iv) Specification of each type or class of covered equipment for which a rule exempting a standard is sought; (v) Other information, if any, believed to be pertinent by the petitioner; and (vi) Such other information as the Secretary may require. (b) Criteria for exemption from preemption when energy emergency conditions exist within State. Federal Register, (1) Requirements of petition for exemption from preemption when energy emergency conditions exist within a State. A petition from a State for a rule for exemption from preemption when energy emergency conditions exist within a State shall include the information listed in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(vi) of this section. A petition shall also include the information prescribed in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) through (b)(1)(iv) of this section, and shall be available for public review except for confidential or proprietary information submitted in accordance with the Department of Energy's Freedom of Information Regulations set forth in 10 CFR part 1004: (i) A description of the energy emergency condition which exists within the State, including causes and impacts. (ii) A description of emergency response actions taken by the State and utilities within the State to alleviate the emergency condition; (iii) An analysis of why the emergency condition cannot be alleviated substantially by importation of energy or the use of interconnection agreements; (iv) An analysis of how the State standard can alleviate substantially such emergency condition. (c) Criteria for withdrawal of a rule exempting a State standard. (1) Requirements of petition to withdraw a rule exempting a State standard. A petition for a rule to withdraw a rule exempting a State standard shall include the information prescribed in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) through (c)(1)(vii) of this section, and shall be available for public review, except for confidential or proprietary information submitted in accordance with the Department of Energy's Freedom of Information Regulations set forth in 10 CFR part 1004: (i) The name, address and telephone number of the petitioner; (ii) A statement of the interest of the petitioner for which a rule withdrawing an exemption is sought; (iii) A copy of the State standard for which a rule withdrawing an exemption is sought; (iv) Specification of each type or class of covered equipment for which a rule withdrawing an exemption is sought; (v) A discussion of the factors contained in paragraph (a) of this section; (vi) Such other information, if any, believed to be pertinent by the petitioner; and (vii) Such other information as the Secretary may require. (2) [Reserved] § 431.423 Filing requirements. (a) Service. (b) Obligation to supply information. (c) The same or related matters. (d) Computation of time. (2) Saturdays, Sundays, and intervening Federal legal holidays shall be excluded from the computation of time when the period of time allowed or prescribed is 7 days or less. (3) When a submission is required to be made within a prescribed time, DOE may grant an extension of time upon good cause shown. (4) Documents received after regular business hours are deemed to have been submitted on the next regular business day. Regular business hours for the DOE's National Office, Washington, DC, are 8:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. (5) DOE reserves the right to refuse to accept, and not to consider, untimely submissions. (e) Filing of petitions. (2) A petition may be submitted on behalf of more than one person. A joint petition shall indicate each person participating in the submission. A joint petition shall provide the information required by § 431.212 for each person on whose behalf the petition is submitted. (3) All petitions shall be signed by the person(s) submitting the petition or by a duly authorized representative. If submitted by a duly authorized representative, the petition shall certify this authorization. (4) A petition for a rule to withdraw a rule exempting a State regulation, all supporting documents, and all future submissions shall be served on each State agency, department, or instrumentality whose regulation the petitioner seeks to supersede. The petition shall contain a certification of this service which states the name and mailing address of the served parties, and the date of service. (f) Acceptance for filing. (2) For purposes of the Act and this subpart, a petition is deemed to be filed on the date it is accepted for filing. (g) Docket. § 431.424 Notice of petition. (a) Promptly after receipt of a petition and its acceptance for filing, notice of such petition shall be published in the Federal Register. Federal Register. (b) In addition to the material required under paragraph (a) of this section, each notice shall contain a summary of the State regulation at issue and the petitioner's reasons for the rule sought. § 431.425 Consolidation. DOE may consolidate any or all matters at issue in two or more proceedings docketed where there exist common parties, common questions of fact and law, and where such consolidation would expedite or simplify consideration of the issues. Consolidation shall not affect the right of any party to raise issues that could have been raised if consolidation had not occurred. § 431.426 Hearing. The Secretary may hold a public hearing, and publish notice in the Federal Register § 431.427 Disposition of petitions. (a) After the submission of public comments under § 431.213(a), the Secretary shall prescribe a final rule or deny the petition within 6 months after the date the petition is filed. (b) The final rule issued by the Secretary or a determination by the Secretary to deny the petition shall include a written statement setting forth his findings and conclusions, and the reasons and basis therefor. A copy of the Secretary's decision shall be sent to the petitioner and the affected State agency. The Secretary shall publish in the Federal Register (c) If the Secretary finds that he cannot issue a final rule within the 6-month period pursuant to paragraph (a) of this section, he shall publish a notice in the Federal Register § 431.428 Effective dates of final rules. (a) A final rule exempting a State standard from Federal preemption will be effective: (1) Upon publication in the Federal Register (2) Three years after such rule is published in the Federal Register (3) Five years after such rule is published in the Federal Register (b) A final rule withdrawing a rule exempting a State standard will be effective upon publication in the Federal Register. § 431.429 Request for reconsideration. (a) Any petitioner whose petition for a rule has been denied may request reconsideration within 30 days of denial. The request shall contain a statement of facts and reasons supporting reconsideration and shall be submitted in writing to the Secretary. (b) The denial of a petition will be reconsidered only where it is alleged and demonstrated that the denial was based on error in law or fact and that evidence of the error is found in the record of the proceedings. (c) If the Secretary fails to take action on the request for reconsideration within 30 days, the request is deemed denied, and the petitioner may seek such judicial review as may be appropriate and available. (d) A petitioner has not exhausted other administrative remedies until a request for reconsideration has been filed and acted upon or deemed denied. § 431.430 Finality of decision. (a) A decision to prescribe a rule that a State energy conservation standard or other requirement not be preempted is final on the date the rule is issued, i.e. (b) A decision to prescribe a rule withdrawing a rule exempting a State standard or other requirement is final on the date the rule is issued, i.e. i.e. Subpart X—Small Electric Motors Source: 74 FR 32072, July 7, 2009, unless otherwise noted. § 431.441 Purpose and scope. This subpart contains definitions, test procedures, and energy conservation requirements for small electric motors, pursuant to Part A-1 of Title III of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 6311-6317. This subpart does not cover “electric motors,” which are addressed in subpart B of this part. This subpart does not cover electric motors that are “dedicated-purpose pool pump motors,” which are addressed in subpart Z of this part. [77 FR 26638, May 4, 2012, as amended at 86 FR 40774, July 29, 2021] § 431.442 Definitions. The following definitions are applicable to this subpart: Alternative efficiency determination method, Average full-load efficiency Basic model Breakdown torque CSA DOE the Department EPCA IEC IEEE NEMA Rated frequency Rated load full load, full rated load, rated full load Rated output power Rated voltage Small electric motor [74 FR 32072, July 7, 2009, as amended at 77 FR 26638, May 4, 2012; 86 FR 23, Jan. 4, 2021] Test Procedures § 431.443 Materials incorporated by reference. (a) General. Federal Register. http://www1.eere.energy.gov/buildings/appliance_standards/. [email protected], www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html. (b) CAN/CSA. http://www.shopcsa.ca/onlinestore/welcome.asp. (1) CSA C747-09 (“CSA C747”), Energy efficiency test methods for small motors, October 2009, IBR approved for §§ 431.444; 431.447. (2) CSA C390-10, Test methods, marking requirements, and energy efficiency levels for three-phase induction motors, March 2010, IBR approved for §§ 431.444; 431.447. (c) IEC. https://webstore.iec.ch/home. (1) IEC 60034-1, Edition 12.0 2010-02, (“IEC 60034-1:2010”), Rotating electrical machines—Part 1: Rating and performance, IBR approved for §§ 431.444. (2) IEC 60034-2-1:2014, Edition 2.0 2014-06, (“IEC 60034-2-1:2014”), Rotating electrical machines—Part 2-1: Standard methods for determining losses and efficiency from tests (excluding machines for traction vehicles), IBR approved for §§ 431.444, and 431.447. (3) IEC 60051-1:2016, Edition 6.0 2016-02, (“IEC 60051-1:2016), Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and their accessories—Part 1: Definitions and general requirements common to all parts, IBR approved for §§ 431.444. (d) IEEE. http://www.ieee.org/web/publications/home/index.html. (1) IEEE 112 TM (2) IEEE Std 114-2010, Test Procedure for Single-Phase Induction Motors, approved September 30, 2010, IBR approved for §§ 431.444; 431.447. (e) NEMA. https://www.nema.org. (1) NEMA MG 1-2016, American National Standard for Motors and Generators, ANSI approved June 1, 2018, IBR approved for § 431.442. (2) [Reserved] [74 FR 32072, July 7, 2009, as amended at 77 FR 26638, May 4, 2012; 86 FR 23, Jan. 4, 2021] § 431.444 Test Procedures for the measurement of energy efficiency of small electric motors. (a) Scope. (b) Testing and Calculations. (1) Incorporation by reference: (i) CSA C747-09: (A) Section 1.6 “Scope” as specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(ii) and (b)(3)(ii) of this section; (B) Section 3 “Definitions” as specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(ii) and (b)(3)(ii) of this section; (C) Section 5 “General test requirements” as specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(ii) and (b)(3)(ii) of this section; and (D) Section 6 “Test method” as specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(ii) and (b)(3)(ii) of this section. (ii) CSA C390-10: (A) Section 1.3, “Scope” as specified in paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section; (B) Section 3.1, “Definitions” as specified in paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section; (C) Section 5, “General test requirements—Measurements” as specified in paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section; (D) Section 7, “Test method” as specified in paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section; (E) Table 1, “Resistance measurement time delay” as specified in paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section; (F) Annex B, “Linear regression analysis” as specified in paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section; and (G) Annex C, “Procedure for correction of dynamometer torque readings” as specified in paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section. (iii) IEC 60034-1:2010: (A) Section 7.2 as specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(iii), (b)(3)(iii), and (b)(4)(iii) of this section; (B) Section 8.6.2.3.3 as specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(iii), (b)(3)(iii), and (b)(4)(iii) of this section; and (C) Table 5 as specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(iii), (b)(3)(iii), and (b)(4)(iii) of this section. (iv) IEC 60034-2-1:2014: (A) Method 2-1-1A as specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(iii) and (b)(3)(iii) of this section; (B) Method 2-1-1B as specified in paragraph (b)(4)(iii) of this section; (C) Section 3 “Terms and definitions” as specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(iii), (b)(3)(iii), and (b)(4)(iii) of this section; (D) Section 4 “Symbols and abbreviations” as specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(iii), (b)(3)(iii), (b)(4)(iii) of this section; (E) Section 5 “Basic requirements” as specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(iii), (b)(3)(iii), and (b)(4)(iii) of this section; (F) Section 6.1.2 “Method 2-1-1A—Direct measurement of input and output” (except Section 6.1.2.2, “Test Procedure”) as specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(iii) and (b)(3)(iii) of this section; (G) Section 6.1.3 “Method 2-1-1B—Summations of losses, additional load losses according to the method of residual losses” as specified in paragraph (b)(4)(iii) of this section; and (H) Annex D, “Test report template for 2-1-1B” as specified in paragraph (b)(4)(iii) of this section. (v) IEC 60051-1:2016: (A) Section 5.2 as specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(iii), (b)(3)(iii) and (b)(4)(iii), of this section; and (B) [Reserved] (vi) IEEE 112-2017: (A) Test Method A as specified in paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section; (B) Test Method B as specified in paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section; (C) Section 3, “General” as specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) and (b)(4)(i) of this section; (D) Section 4, “Measurements” as specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) and (b)(4)(i) of this section; (E) Section 5, “Machine losses and tests for losses” as specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) and (b)(4)(i) of this section; (F) Section 6.1, “General” as specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) and (b)(4)(i) of this section; (G) Section 6.3, “Efficiency test method A—Input-output” as specified in paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section; (H) Section 6.4, “Efficiency test method B—Input-output” as specified in paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section; (I) Section 9.2, “Form A—Method A” as specified in paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section; (J) Section 9.3, “Form A2—Method A calculations” as specified in paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section; (K) Section 9.4, “Form B—Method B” as specified in paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section; and (L) Section 9.5, “Form B2—Method B calculations” as specified in paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section. (vii) IEEE 114-2010: (A) Section 3.2, “Test with load” as specified in paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section; (B) Section 4, “Testing Facilities as specified in paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section; (C) Section 5, “Measurements” as specified in paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section; (D) Section 6, “General” as specified in paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section; (E) Section 7, “Type of loss” as specified in paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section; (F) Section 8, “Efficiency and Power Factor” as specified in paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section; (G) Section 10 “Temperature Tests” as specified in paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section; (H) Annex A, Section A.3 “Determination of Motor Efficiency” as specified in paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section; and (I) Annex A, Section A.4 “Explanatory notes for form 3, test data” as specified in paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section. (viii) In cases where there is a conflict, the language of this appendix takes precedence over those documents. Any subsequent amendment to a referenced document by the standard-setting organization will not affect the test procedure in this appendix, unless and until the test procedure is amended by DOE. (2) Single-phase small electric motors. (i) IEEE 114-2010, Section 3.2, “Test with load”, Section 4, “Testing Facilities, Section 5, “Measurements”, Section 6, “General”, Section 7, “Type of loss”, Section 8, “Efficiency and Power Factor”; Section 10 “Temperature Tests”, Annex A, Section A.3 “Determination of Motor Efficiency”, Annex A, Section A.4 “Explanatory notes for form 3, test data”; (ii) CSA C747-09, Section 1.6 “Scope”, Section 3 “Definitions”, Section 5, “General test requirements”, and Section 6 “Test method”; (iii) IEC 60034-2-1:2014 Method 2-1-1A, Section 3 “Terms and definitions”, Section 4 “Symbols and abbreviations”, Section 5 “Basic requirements”, and Section 6.1.2 “Method 2-1-1A—Direct measurement of input and output” (except Section 6.1.2.2, “Test Procedure”). The supply voltage shall be in accordance with section 7.2 of IEC 60034-1:2010 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.443). The measured resistance at the end of the thermal test shall be determined in a similar way to the extrapolation procedure described in section 8.6.2.3.3 of IEC 60034-1:2010, using the shortest possible time instead of the time interval specified in Table 5 therein, and extrapolating to zero. The measuring instruments for electrical quantities shall have the equivalent of an accuracy class of 0,2 in case of a direct test and 0,5 in case of an indirect test in accordance with section 5.2 of IEC 60051-1:2016 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.443). (A) Additional IEC 60034-2-1:2014 Method 2-1-1A Torque Measurement Instructions. If using IEC 60034-2-1:2014 Method 2-1-1A to measure motor performance, follow the instructions in paragraph (b)(2)(iii)(B) of this section, instead of section 6.1.2.2 of IEC 60034-2-1:2014; (B) Couple the machine under test to a load machine. Measure torque using an in-line, shaft-coupled, rotating torque transducer or stationary, stator reaction torque transducer. Operate the machine under test at the rated load until thermal equilibrium is achieved (rate of change 1 K or less per half hour). Record U, I, Pel, n, T, θc. (3) Polyphase small electric motors of less than or equal to 1 horsepower (0.75 kW). (i) IEEE 112-2017 Test Method A, Section 3, “General”, Section 4, “Measurements”, Section 5, “Machine losses and tests for losses”, Section 6.1, “General”, Section 6.3, “Efficiency test method A—Input-output”, Section 9.2, “Form A—Method A”, and Section 9.3, “Form A2—Method A calculations”; (ii) CSA C747-09, Section 1.6 “Scope”, Section 3 “Definitions”, Section 5, “General test requirements”, and Section 6 “Test method”; (iii) IEC 60034-2-1:2014 Method 2-1-1A, Section 3 “Terms and definitions”, Section 4 “Symbols and abbreviations”, Section 5 “Basic requirements”, and Section 6.1.2 “Method 2-1-1A—Direct measurement of input and output” (except Section 6.1.2.2, “Test Procedure”). The supply voltage shall be in accordance with section 7.2 of IEC 60034-1:2010. The measured resistance at the end of the thermal test shall be determined in a similar way to the extrapolation procedure described in section 8.6.2.3.3 of IEC 60034-1:2010 using the shortest possible time instead of the time interval specified in Table 5 therein, and extrapolating to zero. The measuring instruments for electrical quantities shall have the equivalent of an accuracy class of 0,2 in case of a direct test and 0,5 in case of an indirect test in accordance with section 5.2 of IEC 60051-1:2016. (A) Additional IEC 60034-2-1:2014 Method 2-1-1A Torque Measurement Instructions. If using IEC 60034-2-1:2014 Method 2-1-1A to measure motor performance, follow the instructions in paragraph (b)(3)(iii)(B) of this section, instead of section 6.1.2.2 of IEC 60034-2-1:2014; (B) Couple the machine under test to load machine. Measure torque using an in-line shaft-coupled, rotating torque transducer or stationary, stator reaction torque transducer. Operate the machine under test at the rated load until thermal equilibrium is achieved (rate of change 1 K or less per half hour). Record U, I, Pel, n, T, θc. (4) Polyphase small electric motors of greater than 1 horsepower (0.75 kW). (i) IEEE 112-2017 Test Method B, Section 3, “General”; Section 4, “Measurements”; Section 5, “Machine losses and tests for losses”, Section 6.1, “General”, Section 6.4, “Efficiency test method B—Input-output with loss segregation”, Section 9.4, “Form B—Method B”, and Section 9.5, “Form B2—Method B calculations”; or (ii) CSA C390-10, Section 1.3, “Scope”, Section 3.1, “Definitions”, Section 5, “General test requirements—Measurements”, Section 7, “Test method”, Table 1, “Resistance measurement time delay, Annex B, “Linear regression analysis”, and Annex C, “Procedure for correction of dynamometer torque readings”; or (iii) IEC 60034-2-1:2014 Method 2-1-1B Section 3 “Terms and definitions”, Section 4 “Symbols and abbreviations”, Section 5 “Basic requirements”, Section 6.1.3 “Method 2-1-1B—Summation of losses, additional load losses according to the method of residual losses.”, and Annex D, “Test report template for 2-1-1B. The supply voltage shall be in accordance with section 7.2 of IEC 60034-1:2010. The measured resistance at the end of the thermal test shall be determined in a similar way to the extrapolation procedure described in section 8.6.2.3.3 of IEC 60034-1:2010 using the shortest possible time instead of the time interval specified in Table 5 therein, and extrapolating to zero. The measuring instruments for electrical quantities shall have the equivalent of an accuracy class of 0,2 in case of a direct test and 0,5 in case of an indirect test in accordance with section 5.2 of IEC 60051-1:2016. [86 FR 23, Jan. 4, 2021] § 431.445 Determination of small electric motor efficiency. (a) Scope. (b) Provisions applicable to all small electric motors General requirements. (2) Alternative efficiency determination method. (i) Derived from a mathematical model that represents the mechanical and electrical characteristics of that basic model, and (ii) Based on engineering or statistical analysis, computer simulation or modeling, or other analytic evaluation of performance data. (3) Substantiation of an alternative efficiency determination method. (i) The AEDM must be applied to at least five basic models that have been tested in accordance with § 431.444; and (ii) The predicted total power loss for each such basic model, calculated by applying the AEDM, must be within plus or minus 10 percent of the mean total power loss determined from the testing of that basic model. (4) Subsequent verification of an AEDM. (ii) If requested by the Department, the manufacturer shall conduct simulations to predict the performance of particular basic models of small electric motors specified by the Department, analyses of previous simulations conducted by the manufacturer, sample testing of basic models selected by the Department, or a combination of the foregoing. (5) Use of a certification program. (ii) For each basic model for which a certification program is not used as described in paragraph (b)(5)(i) of this section, any testing of a motor to determine its energy efficiency must be carried out in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section. (c) Additional testing requirements applicable when a certification program is not used Selection of basic models for testing. (A) Two of the basic models must be among the five basic models that have the highest unit volumes of production by the manufacturer in the prior year, or during the prior 12 calendar month period beginning in 2015, whichever is later, and comply with the standards set forth in § 431.446; (B) The basic models should be of different horsepowers without duplication; (C) At least one basic model should be selected from each of the frame number series for which the manufacturer is seeking compliance; and (D) Each basic model should have the lowest average full-load efficiency among the basic models with the same rating (“rating” as used here has the same meaning as it has in the definition of “basic model”). (ii) In any instance where it is impossible for a manufacturer to select basic models for testing in accordance with all of these criteria, the criteria shall be given priority in the order in which they are listed. Within the limits imposed by the criteria, basic models shall be selected randomly. (2) Selection of units for testing within a basic model. 1 1 (3) Applying results of testing. The average full-load efficiency of the sample, X where X i where RE is the required average full-load efficiency. [74 FR 32072, July 7, 2009, as amended at 77 FR 26638, May 4, 2012] Energy Conservation Standards § 431.446 Small electric motors energy conservation standards and their effective dates. (a) Each small electric motor manufactured (alone or as a component of another piece of non-covered equipment) after March 9, 2015, or in the case of a small electric motor which requires listing or certification by a nationally recognized safety testing laboratory, after March 9, 2017, shall have an average full load efficiency of not less than the following: Motor horsepower/standard kilowatt equivalent Average full load efficiency Polyphase Open motors (number of poles) 6 4 2 0.25/0.18 67.5 69.5 65.6 0.33/0.25 71.4 73.4 69.5 0.5/0.37 75.3 78.2 73.4 0.75/0.55 81.7 81.1 76.8 1/0.75 82.5 83.5 77.0 1.5/1.1 83.8 86.5 84.0 2/1.5 N/A 86.5 85.5 3/2.2 N/A 86.9 85.5 Motor horsepower/standard kilowatt equivalent Average full load efficiency Capacitor-start capacitor-run and capacitor-start induction-run Open motors (number of poles) 6 4 2 0.25/0.18 62.2 68.5 66.6 0.33/0.25 66.6 72.4 70.5 0.5/0.37 76.2 76.2 72.4 0.75/0.55 80.2 81.8 76.2 1/0.75 81.1 82.6 80.4 1.5/1.1 N/A 83.8 81.5 2/1.5 N/A 84.5 82.9 3/2.2 N/A N/A 84.1 (b) For purposes of determining the required minimum average full load efficiency of an electric motor that has a horsepower or kilowatt rating between two horsepower or two kilowatt ratings listed in any table of efficiency standards in paragraph (a) of this section, each such motor shall be deemed to have a listed horsepower or kilowatt rating, determined as follows: (1) A horsepower at or above the midpoint between the two consecutive horsepower ratings shall be rounded up to the higher of the two horsepower ratings; (2) A horsepower below the midpoint between the two consecutive horsepower ratings shall be rounded down to the lower of the two horsepower ratings; or (3) A kilowatt rating shall be directly converted from kilowatts to horsepower using the formula 1 kilowatt = (1/0.746) hp, without calculating beyond three significant decimal places, and the resulting horsepower shall be rounded in accordance with paragraphs (b)(1) or (b)(2) of this section, whichever applies. [75 FR 10947, Mar. 9, 2010; 75 FR 17036, Apr. 5, 2010] § 431.447 Department of Energy recognition of nationally recognized certification programs. (a) Petition. (b) Evaluation criteria. (1) It must have satisfactory standards and procedures for conducting and administering a certification system, including periodic follow up activities to assure that basic models of small electric motors continue to conform to the efficiency levels for which they were certified, and for granting a certificate of conformity. (2) It must be independent of small electric motor manufacturers, importers, distributors, private labelers or vendors. It cannot be affiliated with, have financial ties with, be controlled by, or be under common control with any such entity. (3) It must be qualified to operate a certification system in a highly competent manner. (4) It must be expert in the content and application of the test procedures and methodologies in IEEE 112-2017 Test Method A, IEEE 112-2017 Test Method B, IEEE 114-2010, IEC 60034-2-1:2014 Method 2-1-1A, IEC 60034-2-1:2014 Method 2-1-1B, CSA C390-10, or CSA C747-09 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.443) or similar procedures and methodologies for determining the energy efficiency of small electric motors. It must have satisfactory criteria and procedures for the selection and sampling of electric motors tested for energy efficiency. (c) Petition format. (1) Standards and procedures. (2) Independent status. (3) Qualifications to operate a certification system. (4) Expertise in small electric motor test procedures. (5) The ISO/IEC Guides referenced in paragraphs (c)(3) and (c)(4) of this section are not incorporated by reference, but are for information and guidance only. International Organization for Standardization (ISO), 1, ch. de la Voie-Creuse, CP 56, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland/International Electrotechnical Commission, 3, rue de Varembé, P.O. Box 131, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland. (d) Disposition. [77 FR 26639, May 4, 2012, as amended at 86 FR 25, Jan. 4, 2021] § 431.448 Procedures for recognition and withdrawal of recognition of certification programs. (a) Filing of petition. (b) Public notice and solicitation of comments. Federal Register (c) Responsive statement by the petitioner. (d) Public announcement of interim determination and solicitation of comments. Federal Register (e) Public announcement of final determination. Federal Register (f) Additional information. (g) Withdrawal of recognition Withdrawal by the Department. (2) Voluntary withdrawal. (3) Notice of withdrawal of recognition. Federal Register [77 FR 26639, May 4, 2012] Subpart Y—Pumps Source: 81 FR 4145, Jan. 25, 2016, unless otherwise noted. § 431.461 Purpose and scope. This subpart contains definitions, test procedures, and energy conservation requirements for pumps, pursuant to Part A-1 of Title III of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 6311-6317. § 431.462 Definitions. The following definitions are applicable to this subpart, including appendices A, B, and C. In cases where definitions reference design intent, DOE will consider marketing materials, labels and certifications, and equipment design to determine design intent. Adaptive pressure control Bare pump Basic model (1) All variations in numbers of stages of bare RSV and ST pumps must be considered a single basic model; (2) Pump models for which the bare pump differs in impeller diameter and/or impeller trim, may be considered a single basic model; and (3) Pump models for which the bare pump differs in number of stages and/or impeller diameter and which are sold with motors (or motors and controls) of varying horsepower may only be considered a single basic model if: (i) For ESCC, ESFM, IL, and RSV pumps, each motor offered in the basic model has a nominal full load motor efficiency rated at the Federal minimum (see the applicable table at § 431.25) or the same number of bands above the Federal minimum for each respective motor horsepower ( see (ii) For ST pumps, each motor offered in the basic model has a full load motor efficiency at the default nominal full load submersible motor efficiency shown in table 2 of appendix A to subpart Y of this part or the same number of bands above the default nominal full load submersible motor efficiency for each respective motor horsepower ( see Basket strainer e.g., Best efficiency point (BEP) Bowl Bowl diameter Circulator-less-volute Circulator pump Clean water pump Close-coupled pump Continuous control Control Dedicated-purpose pool pump Dedicated-purpose pool pump motor total horsepower Dedicated-purpose pool pump service factor Designed and marketed e.g., Driver Dry rotor pump Dry rotor, three-piece circulator pump (1) A single stage, rotodynamic, single-axis flow, mechanically-coupled, dry rotor pump that: (i) Has a rated hydraulic power less than or equal to 5 hp at the best efficiency point at full impeller diameter, (ii) Is distributed in commerce with a horizontal motor, and (iii) Discharges the pumped liquid through a volute in a plane perpendicular to the shaft. (2) Examples include, but are not limited to, pumps generally referred to in industry as CP3. Dry rotor, two-piece circulator pump (1) A single stage, rotodynamic, single-axis flow, close-coupled, dry rotor pump that: (i) Has a rated hydraulic power less than or equal to 5 hp at best efficiency point at full impeller diameter, (ii) Is distributed in commerce with a horizontal motor, and (iii) Discharges the pumped liquid through a volute in a plane perpendicular to the shaft. (2) Examples include, but are not limited to, pumps generally referred to in industry as CP2. End-suction close-coupled (ESCC) pump End-suction frame mounted/own bearings (ESFM) pump End-suction pump External input signal control Fire pump (1) UL listed under ANSI/UL 448-2013 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463), “Standard for Safety Centrifugal Stationary Pumps for Fire-Protection Service,” or (2) FM Global (FM) approved under the January 2015 edition of FM Class Number 1319, “Approval Standard for Centrifugal Fire Pumps (Horizontal, End Suction Type),” (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463). Freeze protection control Full impeller diameter Header pump Horizontal motor In-line (IL) pump Integral Integral cartridge-filter pool pump Integral sand-filter pool pump Magnet driven pump Manual speed control Mechanical equipment Mechanically-coupled pump Multi-speed dedicated-purpose pool pump i.e., Non-continuous control Non-self-priming pool filter pump On-demand circulator pump (1) Initiates water circulation based on receiving a signal from the action of a user [of a fixture or appliance] or sensing the presence of a user of a fixture and cannot initiate water circulation based on other inputs, such as water temperature or a pre-set schedule. (2) Automatically terminates water circulation once hot water has reached the pump or desired fixture. (3) Does not allow the pump to operate when the temperature in the pipe exceeds 104 °F or for more than 5 minutes continuously. Pool filter pump (1) Either: (i) Includes an integrated basket strainer; or (ii) Does not include an integrated basket strainer, but requires a basket strainer for operation, as stated in manufacturer literature provided with the pump; and (2) May be distributed in commerce connected to, or packaged with, a sand filter, removable cartridge filter, or other filtration accessory, so long as the filtration accessory are connected with consumer-removable connections that allow the filtration accessory to be bypassed. Pool pump timer Pressure cleaner booster pump Pressure control Prime-assist pump (1) Is designed to lift liquid that originates below the centerline of the pump inlet; (2) Requires no manual intervention to prime or re-prime from a dry-start condition; and (3) Includes a device, such as a vacuum pump or air compressor and venturi eductor, to remove air from the suction line in order to automatically perform the prime or re-prime function at any point during the pump's operating cycle. Pump Radially-split, multi-stage, horizontal, diffuser casing (RSH) pump (1) That has a shaft input power greater than or equal to 1 hp and less than or equal to 200 hp at BEP and full impeller diameter and at the number of stages required for testing; (2) In which liquid is discharged in a plane perpendicular to the impeller shaft; (3) For which each stage (or bowl) consists of an impeller and diffuser; and (4) For which no external part of such a pump is designed to be submerged in the pumped liquid. Radially-split, multi-stage, horizontal, end-suction diffuser casing (RSHES) pump Radially-split, multi-stage, horizontal, in-line diffuser casing (RSHIL) pump Radially-split, multi-stage, vertical, diffuser casing (RSV) pump (1) That has a shaft input power greater than or equal to 1 hp and less than or equal to 200 hp at BEP and full impeller diameter and at the number of stages required for testing; (2) In which liquid is discharged in a plane perpendicular to the impeller shaft; (3) For which each stage (or bowl) consists of an impeller and diffuser; and (4) For which no external part of such a pump is designed to be submerged in the pumped liquid. Removable cartridge filter e.g., Rigid electric spa pump (1) Is assembled with four through bolts that hold the motor rear endplate, rear bearing, rotor, front bearing, front endplate, and the bare pump together as an integral unit; (2) Is constructed with buttress threads at the inlet and discharge of the bare pump; and (3) Uses a casing or volute and connections constructed of a non-metallic material. Rotodynamic pump Sand filter Self-priming pool filter pump Self-priming pump (1) Is designed to lift liquid that originates below the centerline of the pump inlet; (2) Contains at least one internal recirculation passage; and (3) Requires a manual filling of the pump casing prior to initial start-up, but is able to re-prime after the initial start-up without the use of external vacuum sources, manual filling, or a foot valve. Single axis flow pump Single-speed dedicated-purpose pool pump Small vertical in-line (SVIL) pump (1) Has a shaft input power less than 1 horsepower at its BEP at full impeller diameter; and (2) In which liquid is discharged in a plane perpendicular to the shaft; and (3) Is not a circulator pump. Small vertical twin-head pump (1) Contains an impeller, impeller shaft (or motor shaft in the case of close-coupled pumps), shaft seal or packing, driver (if present), and mechanical equipment (if present); and (2) Has a shaft input power that is less than or equal to 1 hp at BEP and full impeller diameter; and (3) Has the same primary energy source (if sold with a driver) and the same electrical, physical, and functional characteristics that affect energy consumption or energy efficiency; and (4) Is mounted in its own volute; and (5) Discharges liquid through its volute and the common discharge in a plane perpendicular to the impeller shaft. Storable electric spa pump (1) An integral heater; and (2) An integral air pump. Submersible pump Submersible turbine (ST) pump Temperature control Twin head pump (1) Contains an impeller, impeller shaft (or motor shaft in the case of close-coupled pumps), shaft seal or packing, driver (if present), and mechanical equipment (if present); (2) Has a shaft input power that is greater than or equal to 1 hp and less than or equal to 200 hp at best efficiency point (BEP) and full impeller diameter; (3) Has the same primary energy source (if sold with a driver) and the same electrical, physical, and functional characteristics that affect energy consumption or energy efficiency; (4) Is mounted in its own volute; and (5) Discharges liquid through its volute and the common discharge in a plane perpendicular to the impeller shaft. Two-speed dedicated-purpose pool pump (1) With a pool pump control ( e.g., (2) Without a pool pump control that has the capability to change speed in response to user preferences, but is unable to operate without the presence of such a pool pump control. Variable-speed dedicated-purpose pool pump (1) With a user interface that changes the speed in response to pre-programmed user preferences and allows the user to select the duration of each speed and/or the on/off times; or (2) Without a user interface that changes the speed in response to pre-programmed user preferences and allows the user to select the duration of each speed and/or the on/off times, but is unable to operate without the presence of a user interface. Variable speed drive Vertical turbine (VT) pump (1) That has a shaft input power greater than or equal to 1 hp and less than or equal to 200 hp at BEP and full impeller diameter and at the number of stages required for testing; (2) For which the pump driver is not designed to be submerged in the pumped liquid; (3) That has a single pressure containing boundary ( i.e., (4) That discharges liquid through the same casing in which the impeller shaft is contained. Waterfall pump Wet rotor circulator pump [81 FR 4145, Jan. 25, 2016, as amended at 82 FR 5742, Jan. 18, 2017; 82 FR 36920, Aug. 7, 2017; 87 FR 57298, Sept. 19, 2022; 88 FR 17975, Mar. 24, 2023] § 431.463 Materials incorporated by reference. (a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this subpart with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, DOE must publish a document in the Federal Register [email protected], https://www.energy.gov/eere/buildings/building-technologies-office. www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html [email protected]. (b) ASME. www.asme.org. (1) ASME MFC-3M-2004 (Reaffirmed 2017) (“ASME MFC-3M-2004”), Measurement of Fluid Flow in Pipes Using Orifice, Nozzle, and Venturi, (2) ANSI/ASME MFC-5M-1985 (Reaffirmed 2006) (“ASME MFC-5M-1985”), Measurement of Liquid Flow in Closed Conduits Using Transit-Time Ultrasonic Flowmeters, (3) ASME MFC-8M-2001 (Reaffirmed 2011) (“ASME MFC-8M-2001”), Fluid Flow in Closed Conduits: Connections for Pressure Signal Transmissions Between Primary and Secondary Devices, (4) ASME MFC-12M-2006 (Reaffirmed 2014) (“ASME MFC-12M-2006”), Measurement of Fluid Flow in Closed Conduits Using Multiport Averaging Pitot Primary Elements, (5) ASME MFC-16-2014, Measurement of Liquid Flow in Closed Conduits with Electromagnetic Flowmeters, (6) ASME MFC-22-2007 (Reaffirmed 2014) (“ASME MFC-22-2007”), Measurement of Liquid by Turbine Flowmeters, (c) AWWA. www.awwa.org. (1) ANSI/AWWA E103-2015 (“AWWA E103-2015”), Horizontal and Vertical Line-Shaft Pumps, (2) [Reserved] (d) CSA. www.csagroup.org. (1) CSA C390-10 Test methods, marking requirements, and energy efficiency levels for three-phase induction motors, Updated March 2010; IBR approved for appendix A to this subpart. (2) CSA C747-2009 (Reaffirmed 2014) (“CSA C747-2009 (RA 2014)”), Energy efficiency test methods for small motors, (i) Section 1, “Scope”; (ii) Section 3, “Definitions”; (iii) Section 5, “General Test Requirements”; and (iv) Section 6, “Test Method.” (e) FM. www.fmglobal.com. (1) FM Class Number 1319, Approval Standard for Centrifugal Fire Pumps (Horizontal, End Suction Type), (2) [Reserved] (f) HI. www.Pumps.org. (1) ANSI/HI 9.6.1-2017 (“HI 9.6.1-2017”) “ Rotodynamic Pumps—Guideline for NPSH Margin, (2) ANSI/HI 9.6.6-2016 (“HI 9.6.6-2016”) “ Rotodynamic Pumps for Pump Piping, (3) ANSI/HI 9.8-2018 (“HI 9.8-2018”) “ Rotodynamic Pumps for Pump Intake Design, (4) ANSI/HI 14.1-14.2-2019 (“HI 14.1-14.2-2019”) “ Rotodynamic Pumps for Nomenclature and Definitions, (5) HI 40.6-2014 (“HI 40.6-2014-B”), Methods for Rotodynamic Pump Efficiency Testing, (i) Section 40.6.4.1 “Vertically suspended pumps”; (ii) Section 40.6.4.2 “Submersible pumps”; (iii) Section 40.6.5.3 “Test report”; (iv) Section 40.6.5.5 “Test conditions”; (v) Section 40.6.5.5.2 “Speed of rotation during test”; (vi) Section 40.6.6.1 “Translation of test results to rated speed of rotation”; (vii) Appendix A “Test arrangements (normative)”: A.7 “Testing at temperatures exceeding 30 °C (86 °F)”; and (viii) Appendix B, “Reporting of test results (normative)”). (6) HI 40.6-2021, Hydraulic Institute Standard for Methods for Rotodynamic Pump Efficiency Testing, (7) HI 41.5-2022, Hydraulic Institute Program Guideline for Circulator Pump Energy Rating Program, (8) HI Engineering Data Book, Second Edition copyright 1990; IBR approved for appendix A to this subpart. (g) IEEE. www.ieee.org. (1) IEEE 112-2017, I EEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators, (2) IEEE 113-1985, IEEE Guide: Test Procedures for Direct-Current Machines,” (i) Section 3, Electrical Measurements and Power Sources for all Test Procedures: (A) Section 3.1, “Instrument Selection Factors”; (B) Section 3.4 “Power Measurement”; and (C) Section 3.5 “Power Sources”; (ii) Section 4, Preliminary Tests: (A) Section 4.1, Reference Conditions, Section 4.1.2, “Ambient Air”; and (B) Section 4.1, Reference Conditions, Section 4.1.4 “Direction of Rotation”; and (iii) Section 5, Performance Determination: (A) Section 5.4, Efficiency, Section 5.4.1, “Reference Conditions”; and (B) Section 5.4.3, Direct Measurements of Input and Output, Section 5.4.3.2 “Dynomometer or Torquemeter Method.” (3) IEEE 114-2010 (“IEEE 114-2010-A”), IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Single-Phase Induction Motors, (4) IEEE 114-2010 (“IEEE 114-2010”), “IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Single-Phase Induction Motors,” approved September 30, 2010, IBR approved for appendices B and C to this subpart, as follows: (i) Section 3, “General tests”, Section 3.2, “Tests with load”; (ii) Section 4 “Testing facilities”; and (iii) Section 5, “Measurements”: (A) Section 5.2 “Mechanical measurements”; (B) Section 5.3 “Temperature measurements”; and (iv) Section 6 “Tests.” (h) ISO. www.iso.org. (1) ISO 1438:2017(E) (“ISO 1438:2017”), Hydrometry—Open channel flow measurement using thin-plate weirs, (2) ISO 2186:2007(E) (“ISO 2186:2007”), Fluid flow in closed conduits—Connections for pressure signal transmissions between primary and secondary elements, (3) ISO 2715:2017(E) (“ISO 2715:2017”), Liquid hydrocarbons—Volumetric measurement by turbine flowmeter, (4) ISO 3354:2008(E) (“ISO 3354:2008”), Measurement of clean water flow in closed conduits—Velocity-area method using current-meters in full conduits and under regular flow conditions, (5) ISO 3966:2020(E) (“ISO 3966:2020”), Measurement of fluid flow in closed conduits—Velocity area method using Pitot static tubes, (6) ISO 5167-1:2003(E) (“ISO 5167-1:2003”), Measurement of fluid flow by means of pressure differential devices inserted in circular cross-section conduits running full—Part 1: General principles and requirements, (7) ISO 5198:1987(E) (“ISO 5198:1987”), Centrifugal, mixed flow and axial pumps—Code for hydraulic performance tests—Precision class, (8) ISO 6416:2017(E) (“ISO 6416:2017”), Hydrometry—Measurement of discharge by the ultrasonic transit time (time of flight) method, (9) ISO 20456:2017(E) (“ISO 20456:2017”), Measurement of fluid flow in closed conduits—Guidance for the use of electromagnetic flowmeters for conductive liquids, (i) NFPA. www.nfpa.org. (1) NFPA 20 (“NFPA 20-2016”), Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection, (2) [Reserved] (j) NSF. www.nsf.org. (1) NSF/ANSI 50-2015, Equipment for Swimming Pools, Spas, Hot Tubs and Other Recreational Water Facilities, normative Test methods for the evaluation of centrifugal pumps, Self-priming capability, (2) [Reserved] (k) UL. www.ul.com. (1) UL 448 (“ANSI/UL 448-2013”), Standard for Safety Centrifugal Stationary Pumps for Fire-Protection Service, (2) UL 1081 (“ANSI/UL 1081-2016”), Standard for Swimming Pool Pumps, Filters, and Chlorinators, [88 FR 17976, Mar. 24, 2023, as amended at 88 FR 24471, Apr. 21, 2023] § 431.464 Test procedure for the measurement of energy efficiency, energy consumption, and other performance factors of pumps. (a) General pumps Scope. (i) The following categories of clean water pumps that have the characteristics listed in paragraph (a)(1)(iii) of this section. (A) End suction close-coupled (ESCC); (B) End suction frame mounted/own bearings (ESFM); (C) In-line (IL); (D) Radially split, multi-stage, vertical, in-line casing diffuser (RSV); and (E) Submersible turbine (ST) pumps. (ii) The additional following categories of clean water pumps that have the characteristics listed in paragraph (a)(1)(iii) of this section: (A) Radially-split, multi-stage, horizontal, end-suction diffuser casing (RSHES); (B) Radially-split, multi-stage, horizontal, in-line diffuser casing (RSHIL); (C) Small vertical in-line (SVIL); and (D) Vertical Turbine (VT). (iii) Pump characteristics: (A) Flow rate of 25 gpm or greater at BEP and full impeller diameter; (B) Maximum head of 459 feet at BEP and full impeller diameter and the number of stages required for testing ( see (C) Design temperature range wholly or partially in the range of 15 to 250 °F; (D) Designed to operate with either: ( 1 ( 2 (E) For ST, and VT pumps, a 6-inch or smaller bowl diameter; and (F) For ESCC, and ESFM pumps, a specific speed less than or equal to 5,000 when calculated using U.S. customary units. (2) Testing and calculations. CL VL (b) Dedicated-purpose pool pumps Scope. (i) The following varieties of dedicated-purpose pool pumps: (A) Self-priming pool filter pumps; (B) Non-self-priming pool filter pumps; (C) Waterfall pumps; and (D) Pressure cleaner booster pumps; (ii) Served by single-phase or polyphase input power; (iii) Except for: (A) Submersible pumps; and (B) Self-priming and non-self-priming pool filter pumps with hydraulic output power greater than or equal to 2.5 horsepower. (2) Testing and calculations. (c) Circulator pumps Scope. (2) Testing and calculations. [82 FR 36923, Aug. 7, 2017, as amended at 87 FR 57299, Sept. 19, 2022; 88 FR 17978, Mar. 24, 2023] § 431.465 Pumps energy conservation standards and their compliance dates. (a) For the purposes of paragraph (b) of this section, “PEI CL VL (b) Each pump that is manufactured starting on January 27, 2020 and that: (1) Is in one of the equipment classes listed in the table in paragraph (b)(4) of this section; (2) Meets the definition of a clean water pump in § 431.462; (3) Is not listed in paragraph (c) of this section; and (4) Conforms to the characteristics listed in paragraph (d) of this section must have a PEI CL VL Equipment class 1 Maximum PEI 2 C-value 3 ESCC.1800.CL 1.00 128.47 ESCC.3600.CL 1.00 130.42 ESCC.1800.VL 1.00 128.47 ESCC.3600.VL 1.00 130.42 ESFM.1800.CL 1.00 128.85 ESFM.3600.CL 1.00 130.99 ESFM.1800.VL 1.00 128.85 ESFM.3600.VL 1.00 130.99 IL.1800.CL 1.00 129.30 IL.3600.CL 1.00 133.84 IL.1800.VL 1.00 129.30 IL.3600.VL 1.00 133.84 RSV.1800.CL 1.00 129.63 RSV.3600.CL 1.00 133.20 RSV.1800.VL 1.00 129.63 RSV.3600.VL 1.00 133.20 ST.1800.CL 1.00 138.78 ST.3600.CL 1.00 134.85 ST.1800.VL 1.00 138.78 ST.3600.VL 1.00 134.85 1 2 CL VL 3 STD CL VL (c) The energy efficiency standards in paragraph (b) of this section do not apply to the following pumps: (1) Fire pumps; (2) Self-priming pumps; (3) Prime-assist pumps; (4) Magnet driven pumps; (5) Pumps designed to be used in a nuclear facility subject to 10 CFR part 50, “Domestic Licensing of Production and Utilization Facilities”; (6) Pumps meeting the design and construction requirements set forth in Military Specification MIL-P-17639F, “Pumps, Centrifugal, Miscellaneous Service, Naval Shipboard Use” (as amended); MIL-P-17881D, “Pumps, Centrifugal, Boiler Feed, (Multi-Stage)” (as amended); MIL-P-17840C, “Pumps, Centrifugal, Close-Coupled, Navy Standard (For Surface Ship Application)” (as amended); MIL-P-18682D, “Pump, Centrifugal, Main Condenser Circulating, Naval Shipboard” (as amended); MIL-P-18472G, “Pumps, Centrifugal, Condensate, Feed Booster, Waste Heat Boiler, And Distilling Plant” (as amended). Military specifications and standards are available for review at http://everyspec.com/MIL-SPECS (d) The energy conservation standards in paragraph (b) of this section apply only to pumps that have the following characteristics: (1) Flow rate of 25 gpm or greater at BEP at full impeller diameter; (2) Maximum head of 459 feet at BEP at full impeller diameter and the number of stages required for testing; (3) Design temperature range from 14 to 248 °F; (4) Designed to operate with either: (i) A 2- or 4-pole induction motor; or (ii) A non-induction motor with a speed of rotation operating range that includes speeds of rotation between 2,880 and 4,320 revolutions per minute and/or 1,440 and 2,160 revolutions per minute; and (iii) In either case, the driver and impeller must rotate at the same speed; (5) For ST pumps, a 6-inch or smaller bowl diameter; and (6) For ESCC and ESFM pumps, specific speed less than or equal to 5,000 when calculated using U.S. customary units. (e) For the purposes of paragraph (f) of this section, “WEF” means the weighted energy factor and “hhp” means the rated hydraulic horsepower, as determined in accordance with the test procedure in § 431.464(b) and applicable sampling plans in § 429.59 of this chapter. (f) Each dedicated-purpose pool pump that is not a submersible pump and is manufactured starting on July 19, 2021 must have a WEF rating that is not less than the value calculated from the following table: Equipment class Minimum Minimum allowable WEF score Dedicated-purpose pool pump hhp Applicability Motor phase Self-priming pool filter pumps 0.711 hp ≤hhp <2.5 hp Single WEF = −2.30 * ln (hhp) + 6.59. Self-priming pool filter pumps hhp <0.711 hp Single WEF = 5.55, for hhp ≤0.13 hp −1.30 * ln (hhp) + 2.90, for hhp >0.13 hp. Non-self-priming pool filter pumps hhp <2.5 hp Any WEF = 4.60, for hhp ≤0.13 hp −0.85 * ln (hhp) + 2.87, for hhp >0.13 hp. Pressure cleaner booster pumps Any Any WEF = 0.42. (g) Each integral cartridge filter pool pump and integral sand filter pool pump that is manufactured starting on July 19, 2021 must be distributed in commerce with a pool pump timer that is either integral to the pump or a separate component that is shipped with the pump. (h) For all dedicated-purpose pool pumps distributed in commerce with freeze protection controls, the pump must be shipped with freeze protection disabled or with the following default, user-adjustable settings: (1) The default dry-bulb air temperature setting is no greater than 40 °F; (2) The default run time setting shall be no greater than 1 hour (before the temperature is rechecked); and (3) The default motor speed shall not be more than 1/2 (i) Each circulator pump that is manufactured starting on May 22, 2028 and that meets the criteria in paragraphs (i)(1) through (i)(2) of this section must have a circulator energy index (“CEI”) rating (as determined in accordance with the test procedure in § 431.464(c)(2)) of not more than 1.00 using the instructions in paragraph (i)(3) of this section and with a control mode as specified in paragraph (i)(4) of this section: (1) Is a clean water pump as defined in § 431.462. (2) Is not a submersible pump or a header pump, each as defined in § 431.462. (3) The relationships in this paragraph (i)(3) are necessary to calculate maximum CEI. (i) Calculate CEI according to the following equation: Equation 1 to Paragraph (i)(3)(i) Where: CEI = the circulator energy index (dimensionless); CER = the circulator energy rating (hp), determined in accordance with section 6 of appendix D to subpart Y of part 431; and CER STD (ii) Calculate CER STD Equation 2 to Paragraph (i)(3)(ii) Where: CER STD i = the index variable of the summation notation used to express CER STD ω i i in,STD Table 3 to Paragraph (i)(3)(ii) I Corresponding i 25 .25 50 .25 75 .25 100 .25 (iii) Calculate P i in,STD Equation 3 to Paragraph (i)(3)(iii) Where: P i in,STD P u,i α i η WTW,100 % u,100 % Table 4 to Paragraph ( i I Corresponding i 25 0.4843 50 0.7736 75 0.9417 100 1 Table 5 to Paragraph ( i P u,100 η WTW,100 <1 10*ln(P u,100 ≥1 67.79%. (4) A circulator pump subject to energy conservation standards as described in this paragraph (i) must achieve the maximum CEI as described in paragraph (i)(3)(i) of this section and in accordance with the test procedure in § 431.464(c)(2) in the least consumptive control mode in which it is capable of operating. [81 FR 4431, Jan. 26, 2016, as amended at 82 FR 5742, Jan. 18, 2017; 89 FR 44536, May 20, 2024] § 431.466 Pumps labeling requirements. (a) General pumps. (1) Pump nameplate Required information. (A) For bare pumps and pumps sold with electric motors but not continuous or non-continuous controls, the rated pump energy index—constant load (PEI CL VL (B) The bare pump model number; and (C) If transferred directly to an end-user, the unit's impeller diameter, as distributed in commerce. Otherwise, a space must be provided for the impeller diameter to be filled in. (ii) Display of required information. CL VL CL VL (2) Disclosure of efficiency information in marketing materials. (A) On each page of a catalog that lists the pump; and (B) In other materials used to market the pump. (ii) [Reserved] (b) Dedicated-purpose pool pumps. (1) Pump nameplate Required information. (A) The weighted energy factor (WEF); and (B) The dedicated-purpose pool pump motor total horsepower. (ii) Display of required information. (A) The WEF must be identified in the form “WEF ________.” (B) The dedicated-purpose pool pump motor total horsepower must be identified in one of the following forms: “Dedicated-purpose pool pump motor total horsepower __________,” “DPPP motor total horsepower __________,” “motor total horsepower __________,” “motor THP __________,” or “THP __________.” (2) [Reserved] [82 FR 36923, Aug. 7, 2017] Appendix A to Subpart Y of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Energy Consumption of Pumps Note: On or after September 20, 2023, representations with respect to the energy use or efficiency (including compliance certifications) of pumps specified in § 431.464(a)(1)(i), excluding pumps listed in § 431.464(a)(1)(iv), must be based on testing conducted in accordance with the applicable provisions of this appendix. Any representations with respect to the energy use or efficiency of pumps specified in § 431.464(a)(1)(ii), excluding pumps listed in § 431.464(a)(1)(iv), made on or after September 20, 2023 must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. Manufacturers must use the results of testing under this appendix to determine compliance with any energy conservation standards established for pumps specified in § 431.464(a)(1)(ii), excluding pumps listed in § 431.464(a)(1)(iv), that are published after January 1, 2022. I. Test Procedure for Pumps 0. Incorporation by Reference. DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.463 the entire standard for HI 40.6-2021, HI 9.6.1-2017, HI 9.6.6-2016, HI 9.8-2018, HI 14.1-14.2-2019, the HI Engineering Data Book, ASME MFC-5M-1985, ASME MFC-3M-2004, ASME MFC-8M-2001, ASME MFC-12M-2006, ASME MFC-16-2014, ASME MFC-22-2007, AWWA E103-2015, CSA C390-10, IEEE 112-2017, IEEE 114-2010-A, ISO 1438:2017, ISO 2186:2007, ISO 2715:2017, ISO 3354:2008, ISO 3966:2020, ISO 5167-1:2003, ISO 5198:1987, ISO 6416:2017, and ISO 20456:2017; however, certain enumerated provisions of HI 40.6-2021, as follows are inapplicable. To the extent that there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of a referenced industry standard and the CFR, the CFR provisions control. 0.1 HI 40.6-2021 (a) Section 40.6.1 Scope (b) Section 40.6.5.3 Test report (c) Appendix B Reporting of test results (informative) (d) Appendix E Testing Circulator Pumps (normative) (e) Appendix G DOE Compared to HI 40.6 Nomenclature 0.2 [Reserved] A. General. CL VL A.1 Scope. STD CL VL Table 1—Applicability of Calculation-Based and Testing-Based Test Procedure Options Based on Pump Configuration Pump configuration Pump sub-configuration Applicable test methods Bare Pump Bare Pump OR Pump + Single-Phase Induction Motor (Excluding SVIL) OR Pump + Driver Other Than Electric Motor Section III: Test Procedure for Bare Pumps. Pump + Motor OR Pump + Motor + Controls other than continuous or non-continuous controls ( e.g., Pump + Motor Listed at § 431.25(g) OR SVIL Pump + Motor Covered by DOE's Test Procedure and/or Energy Conservation Standards * OR Pump + Submersible Motor Section IV: Testing-Based Approach for Pumps Sold with Motors OR Section V: Calculation-Based Approach for Pumps Sold with Motors. Pump (Including SVIL) + Motor Not Covered by DOE's Motor Energy Conservation Standards (Except Submersible Motors) ** OR Pump (Other than SVIL) + Single-Phase Induction Motor (if Section III is not used) Section IV: Testing-Based Approach for Pumps Sold with Motors. Pump + Motor + Continuous Controls OR Pump + Motor + Non-Continuous Controls OR Pump + Inverter-Only Synchronous Electric Motor *** (With or Without Controls) Pump + Motor Listed at § 431.25(g) + Continuous Control OR SVIL Pump + Motor Covered by DOE's Test Procedure and/or Energy Conservation Standards * + Continuous Control OR Pump + Submersible Motor + Continuous Control OR Pump + Inverter-Only Synchronous Electric Motor *** (With or Without Continuous Control) Section VI: Testing-Based Approach for Pumps Sold with Motors and Controls OR Section VII: Calculation-Based Approach for Pumps Sold with Motors Controls. Pump + Motor Listed at § 431.25(g) + Non-Continuous Control OR SVIL Pump + Motor Covered by DOE's Test Procedure and/or Energy Conservation Standards * + Non-Continuous Control OR Pump + Submersible Motor + Non-Continuous Control Section VI: Testing-Based Approach for Pumps Sold with Motors and Controls. Pump (Including SVIL) + Motor Not Covered by DOE's Motor Test Procedure and/or Energy Conservation Standards ** (Except Submersible Motors) + Continuous or Non-Continuous Controls OR Pump (Other than SVIL) + Single-Phase Induction Motor + Continuous or Non-Continuous Controls (if Section III is not used) Section VI: Testing-Based Approach for Pumps Sold with Motors and Controls. * All references to “Motor Covered by DOE's Motor Test Procedure and/or Energy Conservation Standards” refer to those listed at § 431.446 of this chapter or those for Small Non-Small Electric Motor Electric Motors (SNEMs) at Subpart B to Part 431, including motors of such varieties that are less than 0.25 hp. ** All references to “Motor Not Covered by DOE's Test Procedure and/or Motor Energy Conservation Standards” refer to motors not listed at § 431.25 of this chapter or, for SVIL, not listed at either § 431.446 of this chapter or in Subpart B to Part 431 (excluding motors of such varieties that are less than 0.25 hp). *** All references to “Inverter-Only Synchronous Electric Motor” refer to inverter-only electric motors that are synchronous electric motors, both as defined in subpart B to Part 431. A.2 Section III of this appendix addresses the test procedure applicable to bare pumps. This test procedure also applies to pumps sold with drivers other than motors and ESCC, ESFM, IL, RSHES, RSHIL, RSV, ST, and VT pumps sold with single-phase induction motors. A.3 Section IV of this appendix addresses the testing-based approach for pumps sold with motors, which applies to all pumps sold with electric motors, except for pumps sold with inverter-only synchronous electric motors, but including pumps sold with single-phase induction motors. This test procedure also applies to pumps sold with controls other than continuous or non-continuous controls ( e.g., A.4 Section V of this appendix addresses the calculation-based approach for pumps sold with motors, which applies to: A.4.1 Pumps sold with polyphase electric motors regulated by DOE's energy conservation standards for electric motors at § 431.25(g), and A.4.2 SVIL pumps sold with small electric motors regulated by DOE's energy conservation standards at § 431.446 or sold with SNEMs regulated by DOE's test procedure and/or energy conservation standards in subpart B of this part but including motors of such varieties that are less than 0.25 hp, and A.4.3 Pumps sold with submersible motors. A.5 Section VI of this appendix addresses the testing-based approach for pumps sold with motors and controls, which applies to all pumps sold with electric motors (including single-phase induction motors) and continuous or non-continuous controls and to pumps sold with inverter-only synchronous electric motors with or without controls. A.6 Section VII of this appendix discusses the calculation-based approach for pumps sold with motors and controls, which applies to: A.6.1 Pumps sold with polyphase electric motors regulated by DOE's energy conservation standards for electric motors at § 431.25(g) and continuous controls and A.6.2 Pumps sold with inverter-only synchronous electric motors regulated by DOE's test procedure and/or energy conservation standards in subpart B of this part, A.6.3 SVIL pumps sold with small electric motors regulated by DOE's energy conservation standards at § 431.446 (but including motors of such varieties that are less than 0.25 hp) and continuous controls or with SNEMs regulated by DOE's test procedure and/or energy conservation standards at subpart B of this part (but including motors of such varieties that are less than 0.25 hp) and continuous controls, and A.6.4 Pumps sold with submersible motors and continuous controls. B. Measurement Equipment. B.1 Instrument Accuracy. B.2 Calibration. Calibration requirements for instrumentation are specified in Appendix D of HI 40.6-2021. C. Test Conditions. C.1 Nominal Speed of Rotation. Determine the nominal speed of rotation based on the range of speeds of rotation at which the pump is designed to operate, in accordance with sections I.C.1.1, I.C.1.2, and I.C.1.3 of this appendix, as applicable. When determining the range of speeds at which the pump is designed to operate, DOE will refer to published data, marketing literature, and other publicly-available information about the pump model and motor, as applicable. C.1.1 For pumps sold without motors, select the nominal speed of rotation based on the speed for which the pump is designed. C.1.1.1 For bare pumps designed for speeds of rotation including 2,880 to 4,320 revolutions per minute (rpm), the nominal speed of rotation shall be 3,600 rpm. C.1.1.2 For bare pumps designed for speeds of rotation including 1,440 to 2,160 rpm, the nominal speed of rotation shall be 1,800 rpm. C.1.1.3 For bare pumps designed for speeds of rotation including 960 to 1,439 rpm, the nominal speed of rotation shall be 1,200 rpm. C.1.2 For pumps sold with induction motors, select the appropriate nominal speed of rotation. C.1.2.1 For pumps sold with 6-pole induction motors, the nominal speed of rotation shall be 1,200 rpm. C.1.2.2 For pumps sold with 4-pole induction motors, the nominal speed of rotation shall be 1,800 rpm. C.1.2.3 For pumps sold with 2-pole induction motors, the nominal speed of rotation shall be 3,600 rpm. C.1.3 For pumps sold with non-induction motors, select the appropriate nominal speed of rotation. C.1.3.1 Where the operating range of the pump and motor includes speeds of rotation between 2,880 and 4,320 rpm, the nominal speed of rotation shall be 3,600 rpm. C.1.3.2 Where the operating range of the pump and motor includes speeds of rotation between 1,440 and 2,160 rpm, the nominal speed of rotation shall be 1,800 rpm. C.1.3.3 Where the operating range of the pump and motor includes speeds of rotation between 960 and 1,439, the nominal speed of rotation shall be 1,200 rpm. C.2 Multi-Stage Pumps. Perform testing on the pump with three stages for RSH and RSV pumps, and nine stages for ST and VT pumps. If the basic model of pump being tested is only available with fewer than the required number of stages, test the pump with the maximum number of stages with which the basic model is distributed in commerce in the United States. If the basic model of pump being tested is only available with greater than the required number of stages, test the pump with the lowest number of stages with which the basic model is distributed in commerce in the United States. If the basic model of pump being tested is available with both fewer and greater than the required number of stages, but not the required number of stages, test the pump with the number of stages closest to the required number of stages. If both the next lower and next higher number of stages are equivalently close to the required number of stages, test the pump with the next higher number of stages. C.3 Twin-Head Pumps. For twin-head pumps, perform testing on an equivalent single impeller IL or SVIL pump as applicable, constructed by incorporating one of the driver and impeller assemblies of the twin-head pump being rated into an adequate IL-style or SVIL-style, single impeller volute and casing. An adequate IL-style or SVIL-style, single impeller volute and casing means a volute and casing for which any physical and functional characteristics that affect energy consumption and energy efficiency are the same as their corresponding characteristics for a single impeller in the twin-head pump volute and casing. D. Data Collection and Analysis. D.1 Damping Devices. Use of damping devices, as described in section 40.6.3.2.2 of HI 40.6-2021, are only permitted to integrate up to the data collection interval used during testing. D.2 Stabilization. Record data at any tested load point only under stabilized conditions, as defined in HI 40.6-2021 section 40.6.5.5.1, including the applicable provisions of HI 9.6.1-2017 as referenced in section 40.6.5.5.1 of HI 40.6, where a minimum of two measurements are used to determine stabilization. D.3 Calculations and Rounding. Normalize all measured data to the nominal speed of rotation of 3,600 or 1,800 or 1,200 rpm based on the nominal speed of rotation selected for the pump in section I.C.1 of this appendix, in accordance with the procedures specified in section 40.6.6.1.1 of HI 40.6-2021. Except for the “expected BEP flow rate,” all terms and quantities refer to values determined in accordance with the procedures set forth in this appendix for the rated pump. Perform all calculations using raw measured values without rounding. Round PER CL VL CL VL i.e., D.4 Pumps with BEP at Run Out. Test pumps for which the expected BEP corresponds to a volume rate of flow that is within 20 percent of the expected maximum flow rate at which the pump is designed to operate continuously or safely ( i.e., D.4.1 Use the following seven flow points—40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, and 100 percent of the expected maximum flow rate for determination of BEP in sections III.D, IV.D, V.D, VI.D, and VII.D of this appendix instead of the flow points specified in those sections. D.4.2 Use flow points of 60, 70, 80, 90, and 100 percent of the expected maximum flow rate of the pump to determine pump power input or driver power input instead of the flow points of 60, 75, 90, 100, 110, and 120 percent of the expected BEP flow rate specified in sections III.E.1.1, IV.E.1, V.E.1.1, VI.E.1, and VII.E.1.1 of this appendix. D.4.3 To determine PER CL STD pump,STD II. Calculation of the Pump Energy Index A. Determine the PEI of each tested pump based on the configuration in which it is sold, as follows: A.1. For pumps rated as bare pumps or pumps sold with motors (other than inverter-only synchronous electric motors), determine the PEI CL Where: PEI CL PER CL PER STD CL A.2 For pumps rated as pumps sold with motors and continuous controls or non-continuous controls (including pumps sold with inverter-only synchronous electric motors with or without controls), determine the PEI VL PEI VL PER VL PER STD CL B. Determine the pump energy rating for the minimally compliant reference pump (PER STD Where: PER STD CL ω i P i in,m i = load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate. B.1. Determine the driver power input at each load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate as follows: Where: P i in,m P i L i i = load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate. B.1.1. Determine the pump power input to the minimally compliant pump at each load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate as follows: Where: P i α i P u,i η pump,STD i = load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate. B.1.1.1 Calculate the minimally compliant pump efficiency based on the following equation: η pump,STD 100 % 2 100 % 2 100 % Where: η pump,STD Q 100 % Ns = specific speed of the tested pump determined in accordance with section II.B.1.1.1.1 of this appendix, and C = the appropriate C-value for the category and nominal speed of rotation of the tested pump, as listed at § 431.466. B.1.1.1.1 Determine the specific speed of the rated pump using the following equation: Where: Ns = specific speed, n sp Q' 100 % H 100 % S = the number of stages with which the pump is being rated B.1.1.2 Determine the pump power output at each load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate using the following equation: Where: P u,i Q i H i SG = the specific gravity of water at specified test conditions, which is equivalent to 1.00, and i = load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate. B.1.2 Determine the motor part load losses at each load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate as follows: L i full i Where: L i L full y i i = load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate. B.1.2.1 Determine the full load motor losses using the appropriate motor efficiency value and horsepower as shown in the following equation: Where: L full MotorHP = the motor horsepower as determined in accordance with section II.B.1.2.1.1 of this appendix (hp), and η motor,full B.1.2.1.1 Determine the motor horsepower as follows: • For bare pumps other than ST pumps, the motor horsepower is determined as the horsepower rating listed in Table 2 of this appendix that is either equivalent to, or the next highest horsepower greater than, the pump power input to the bare pump at 120 percent of the BEP flow rate of the tested pump. • For ST bare pumps, the motor horsepower is determined as the horsepower rating listed in Table 2 of this appendix that, is either equivalent to, or the next highest horsepower greater than, the pump power input to the bare pump at 120 percent of the BEP flow rate of the tested pump divided by a service factor of 1.15. • For pumps sold with motors, pumps sold with motors and continuous controls, or pumps sold with motors and non-continuous controls, the motor horsepower is the rated horsepower of the motor with which the pump is being tested. B.1.2.1.2 Determine the default nominal full load motor efficiency as described in section II.B.1.2.1.2.1 of this appendix for ESCC, ESFM, IL, RSHES, RSHIL, RSV, and VT pumps; section II.B.1.2.1.2.2 of this appendix for ST pumps; and section II.B.1.2.1.2.3 for SVIL pumps. B.1.2.1.2.1. For ESCC, ESFM, IL, RSHES, RSHIL, RSV, and VT pumps, the default nominal full load motor efficiency is the minimum of the nominal full load motor efficiency standards (open or enclosed) from the table containing the current energy conservation standards for NEMA Design B motors at § 431.25, with the number of poles relevant to the speed at which the pump is being tested (see section I.C.1 of this appendix) and the motor horsepower determined in section II.B.1.2.1.1 of this appendix. B.1.2.1.2.2. For ST pumps, prior to the compliance date of any energy conservation standards for submersible motors in subpart B of this part, the default nominal full load motor efficiency is the default nominal full load submersible motor efficiency listed in table 2 of this appendix, with the number of poles relevant to the speed at which the pump is being tested (see section I.C.1 of this appendix) and the motor horsepower determined in section II.B.1.2.1.1 of this appendix. Starting on the compliance date of any energy conservation standards for submersible motors in subpart B of this part, the default nominal full load motor efficiency shall be the minimum of any nominal full load motor efficiency standard from the table containing energy conservation standards for submersible motors in subpart B of this part, with the number of poles relevant to the speed at which the pump is being tested (see section I.C.1 of this appendix) and the motor horsepower determined in section II.B.1.2.1.1 of this appendix. B.1.2.1.2.3. For SVIL pumps, the default nominal full load motor efficiency is the minimum full load motor efficiency standard from the tables containing the current energy conservation standards for polyphase or CSCR/CSIR small electric motors at § 431.446, with the number of poles relevant to the speed at which the pump is being tested (see section I.C.1 of this appendix) and the motor horsepower determined in section II.B.1.2.1.1 of this appendix, or for SVIL pumps sold with motors less than 0.25 hp, the default nominal full load motor efficiency is 58.3% for 6-pole, 64.6% for 4-pole, and 61.7% for 2-pole motors. B.1.2.2 Determine the part load loss factor at each load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate as follows: Where: y i P i MotorHP = the motor horsepower (hp), as determined in accordance with section II.B.1.2.1.1 of this appendix, III. Test Procedure for Bare Pumps A. Scope. A.1 Bare pumps, A.2 Pumps sold with drivers other than electric motors, and A.3 ESCC, ESFM, IL, RSHES, RSHIL, RSV, ST, and VT pumps sold with single-phase induction motors. B. Measurement Equipment. C. Test Conditions. D. Testing BEP for the Pump. D.1. Adjust the flow by throttling the pump without changing the speed of rotation of the pump and conduct the test at a minimum of the following seven flow points: 40, 60, 75, 90, 100, 110, and 120 percent of the expected BEP flow rate of the pump at the nominal speed of rotation, as specified in section 40.6.5.5.1 of HI 40.6-2021, including the applicable provisions of HI 9.6.1-2017 as referenced in section 40.6.5.5.1 of HI 40.6-2021. D.2. Determine the BEP flow rate as the flow rate at the operating point of maximum pump efficiency on the pump efficiency curve, as determined in accordance with section 40.6.6.3 of HI 40.6-2021, where the pump efficiency is the ratio of the pump power output divided by the pump power input, as specified in Table 40.6.2 of HI 40.6-2021, disregarding the calculations provided in section 40.6.6.2 of HI 40.6-2021. E. Calculating the Constant Load Pump Energy Rating. CL Where: PER CL ω i P i in,m i = load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate. E.1 Determine the driver power input at each load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate as follows: Where: P i in,m P i L i i = load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate. E.1.1 Determine the pump power input at 75, 100, 110, and 120 percent of the BEP flow rate by employing a least squares regression to determine a linear relationship between the pump power input at the nominal speed of rotation of the pump and the measured flow rate at the following load points: 60, 75, 90, 100, 110, and 120 percent of the expected BEP flow rate. Use the linear relationship to determine the pump power input at the nominal speed of rotation for the load points of 75, 100, 110, and 120 percent of the BEP flow rate. E.1.2 Determine the motor part load losses at each load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate as follows: L i full i Where: L i L full y i i = load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate. E.1.2.1 Determine the full load motor losses using the appropriate motor efficiency value and horsepower as shown in the following equation: Where: L full MotorHP = the motor horsepower (hp), as determined in accordance with section II.E.1.2.1.1 of this appendix, and η motor,full E.1.2.1.1 Determine the motor horsepower as follows: • For bare pumps other than ST pumps, determine the motor horsepower by selecting the horsepower rating listed in Table 2 of this appendix that is either equivalent to, or the next highest horsepower greater than, the pump power input to the bare pump at 120 percent of the BEP flow rate of the tested pump. • For ST bare pumps, determine the motor horsepower by selecting the horsepower rating listed in Table 2 of this appendix that, is either equivalent to, or the next highest horsepower greater than, the pump power input to the bare pump at 120 percent of the BEP flow rate of the tested pump divided by a service factor of 1.15. • For pumps sold with motors, pumps sold with motors and continuous controls, or pumps sold with motors and non-continuous controls, the motor horsepower is the rated horsepower of the motor with which the pump is being tested. E.1.2.1.2 Determine the default nominal full load motor efficiency as described in section III.E.1.2.1.2.1 of this appendix for ESCC, ESFM, IL, RSHES, RSHIL, RSV, and VT pumps; or section III.E.1.2.1.2.2. of this appendix for ST pumps; or section III.E.1.2.1.2.3 of this appendix for SVIL pumps. E.1.2.1.2.1. For ESCC, ESFM, IL, RSHES, RSHIL, RSV, and VT pumps, the default nominal full load motor efficiency is the minimum of the nominal full load motor efficiency standards (open or enclosed) from the table containing the current energy conservation standards for NEMA Design B motors at § 431.25, with the number of poles relevant to the speed at which the pump is being tested (see section I.C.1 of this appendix) and the motor horsepower determined in section III.E.1.2.1.1 of this appendix. E.1.2.1.2.2. For ST pumps, prior to the compliance date of any energy conservation standards for submersible motors in subpart B of this part, the default nominal full load motor efficiency is the default nominal full load submersible motor efficiency listed in table 2 of this appendix, with the number of poles relevant to the speed at which the pump is being tested (see section I.C.1 of this appendix) and the motor horsepower determined in section III.E.1.2.1.1 of this appendix. Starting on the compliance date of any energy conservation standards for submersible motors in subpart B of this part, the default nominal full load motor efficiency is the minimum of any nominal full load motor efficiency standard from the table containing energy conservation standards for submersible motors in subpart B of this part, with the number of poles relevant to the speed at which the pump is being tested (see section I.C.1 of this appendix) and the motor horsepower determined in accordance with section III.E.1.2.1.1 of this appendix. E.1.2.1.2.3. For SVIL pumps, the default nominal full load motor efficiency is the minimum full load motor efficiency standard from the tables containing the current energy conservation standards for polyphase or CSCR/CSIR small electric motors at § 431.446, with the number of poles relevant to the speed at which the pump is being tested (see section I.C.1 of this appendix) and the motor horsepower determined in section III.E.1.2.1.1 of this appendix, or for SVIL pumps sold with motors less than 0.25 hp, the default nominal full load motor efficiency is 58.3% for 6-pole, 64.6% for 4-pole, and 61.7% for 2-pole motors. E.1.2.2 Determine the loss factor at each load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate as follows: Where: y i P i MotorHP = as determined in accordance with section III.E.1.2.1 of this appendix (hp), IV. Testing-Based Approach for Pumps Sold With Motors A. Scope. B. Measurement Equipment. C. Test Conditions. D. Testing BEP for the Pump. D.1. Adjust the flow by throttling the pump without changing the speed of rotation of the pump and conduct the test at a minimum of the following seven flow points: 40, 60, 75, 90, 100, 110, and 120 percent of the expected BEP flow rate of the pump at the nominal speed of rotation, as specified in section 40.6.5.5.1 of HI 40.6-2021, including the applicable provisions of HI 9.6.1-2017 as referenced in section 40.6.5.5.1 of HI 40.6-2021. D.2 Determine the BEP flow rate as the flow rate at the operating point of maximum overall efficiency on the pump efficiency curve, as determined in accordance with section 40.6.6.3 of HI 40.6-2021, where the overall efficiency is the ratio of the pump power output divided by the driver power input, as specified in Table 40.6.2 of HI 40.6-2021, disregarding the calculations provided in section 40.6.6.2 of HI 40.6-2021. E. Calculating the Constant Load Pump Energy Rating. CL Where: PER CL ω i P i in i = load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate. E.1 Determine the driver power input at 75, 100, and 110 percent of the BEP flow rate by employing a least squares regression to determine a linear relationship between the driver power input at the nominal speed of rotation of the pump and the measured flow rate at the following load points: 60, 75, 90, 100, 110, and 120 percent of the expected BEP flow rate. Use the linear relationship to determine the driver power input at the nominal speed of rotation for the load points of 75, 100, and 110 percent of the BEP flow rate. V. Calculation-Based Approach for Pumps Sold With Motors A. Scope. A.1 Pumps sold with motors subject to DOE's energy conservation standards for polyphase electric motors at § 431.25(g), A.2 SVIL pumps sold with small electric motors regulated by DOE's energy conservation standards at § 431.446 or with SNEMs regulated by DOE's test procedure and/or energy conservation standards in subpart B of this part but including motors of such varieties that are less than 0.25 hp, and A.3. Pumps sold with submersible motors. A.4. Pumps sold with motors not listed in sections V.A.1, V.A.2, or V.A.3 of this appendix cannot use this section V and must apply the test method in section IV of this appendix. B. Measurement Equipment. C. Test Conditions. D. Testing BEP for the Pump. D.1. Adjust the flow by throttling the pump without changing the speed of rotation of the pump and conduct the test at a minimum of the following seven flow points: 40, 60, 75, 90, 100, 110, and 120 percent of the expected BEP flow rate of the pump at the nominal speed of rotation, as specified in section 40.6.5.5.1 of HI 40.6-2021, including the applicable provisions of HI 9.6.1-2017 as referenced in section 40.6.5.5.1 of HI 40.6-2021. D.2. Determine the BEP flow rate as the flow rate at the operating point of maximum pump efficiency on the pump efficiency curve, as determined in accordance with section 40.6.6.3 of HI 40.6-2021, where the pump efficiency is the ratio of the pump power output divided by the pump power input, as specified in Table 40.6.2 of HI 40.6-2021, disregarding the calculations provided in section 40.6.6.2. E. Calculating the Constant Load Pump Energy Rating. CL Where: PER CL ω i P i in,m i = load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate. E.1 Determine the driver power input at each load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate as follows: Where: P i in,m P i L i i = load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate. E.1.1 Determine the pump power input at 75, 100, and 110 percent of the BEP flow rate by employing a least squares regression to determine a linear relationship between the pump power input at the nominal speed of rotation of the pump and the measured flow rate at the following load points: 60, 75, 90, 100, 110, and 120 percent of the expected BEP flow rate. Use the linear relationship to determine the pump power input at the nominal speed of rotation for the load points of 75, 100, and 110 percent of the BEP flow rate. E.1.2 Determine the motor part load losses at each load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate as follows: L i full i Where: L i L full y i i = load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate. E.1.2.1 Determine the full load motor losses using the appropriate motor efficiency value and horsepower as shown in the following equation: Where: L full MotorHP = the horsepower of the motor with which the pump model is being tested (hp), and η motor,full i.e., E.1.2.1.1 For pumps sold with motors other than submersible motors, determine the represented nominal full load motor efficiency as described in section V.E.1.2.1.1.1 of this appendix. For pumps sold with submersible motors, determine the default nominal full load submersible motor efficiency as described in section V.E.1.2.1.1.2 of this appendix. E.1.2.1.1.1 For pumps sold with motors other than submersible motors, the represented nominal full load motor efficiency is that of the motor with which the given pump model is being tested, as determined in accordance with the DOE test procedure for electric motors at § 431.16 or, for SVIL, the DOE test procedure for small electric motors at § 431.444, or the DOE test procedure for SNEMs in subpart B to this part, as applicable (including for motors less than 0.25 hp), and if available, applicable representation procedures in 10 CFR part 429 and this part. E.1.2.1.1.2 For pumps sold with submersible motors, prior to the compliance date of any energy conservation standards for submersible motors in subpart B of this part, the default nominal full load submersible motor efficiency is that listed in table 2 of this appendix, with the number of poles relevant to the speed at which the pump is being tested (see section I.C.1 of this appendix) and the motor horsepower of the pump being tested, or if a test procedure for submersible motors is provided in subpart B to this part, the represented nominal full load motor efficiency of the motor with which the given pump model is being tested, as determined in accordance with the applicable test procedure in subpart B to this part and applicable representation procedures in 10 CFR part 429 and this part, may be used instead. Starting on the compliance date of any energy conservation standards for submersible motors in subpart B of this part, the default nominal full load submersible motor efficiency may no longer be used. Instead, the represented nominal full load motor efficiency of the motor with which the given pump model is being tested, as determined in accordance with the applicable test procedure in subpart B of this part and applicable representation procedures in 10 CFR part 429 and this part, must be used. E.1.2.2 Determine the loss factor at each load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate as follows: Where: y i P i MotorHP = the horsepower of the motor with which the pump model is being tested (hp), i = load point corresponding to 75, 100, or 110 percent of the BEP flow rate, and in the equation in this section V.E.1.2.2. of this appendix to calculate the part load loss factor at each load point VI. Testing-Based Approach for Pumps Sold with Motors and Controls A. Scope. B. Measurement Equipment. C. Test Conditions. D. Testing BEP for the Pump. D.1. Adjust the flow by throttling the pump without changing the speed of rotation of the pump and conduct the test at a minimum of the following seven flow points: 40, 60, 75, 90, 100, 110, and 120 percent of the expected BEP flow rate of the pump at the nominal speed of rotation, as specified in section 40.6.5.5.1 of HI 40.6-2021, including the applicable provisions of HI 9.6.1-2017 as referenced in section 40.6.5.5.1 of HI 40.6-2021. D.2 Determine the BEP flow rate as the flow rate at the operating point of maximum overall efficiency on the pump efficiency curve, as determined in accordance with section 40.6.6.3 of HI 40.6-2021, where the overall efficiency is the ratio of the pump power output divided by the driver power input, as specified in Table 40.6.2 of HI 40.6-2021, disregarding the calculations provided in section 40.6.6.2 of HI 40.6-2021. E. Calculating the Variable Load Pump Energy Rating. VL Where: PER VL ω i P i in,c i = load point corresponding 25, 50, 75, or 100 percent of the BEP flow rate. E.1. Determine the driver power input at 100 percent of the measured BEP flow rate of the tested pump by employing a least squares regression to determine a linear relationship between the measured driver power input at the nominal speed of rotation of the pump and the measured flow rate, using the following load points: 60, 75, 90, 100, 110, and 120 percent of the expected BEP flow rate. Use the linear relationship to determine the driver power input at the nominal speed of rotation for the load point of 100 percent of the measured BEP flow rate of the tested pump. E.2 Determine the driver power input at 25, 50, and 75 percent of the BEP flow rate by measuring the driver power input at the load points defined by: (1) Those flow rates, and (2) The associated head points calculated according to the following reference system curve equation: Where: H i H 100 % Q i Q 100 % i = load point corresponding to 25, 50, or 75 percent of the measured BEP flow rate of the tested pump. E.2.1. For pumps sold with motors and continuous controls, the specific head and flow points must be achieved within 10 percent of the calculated values and the measured driver power input must be corrected to the exact intended head and flow conditions using the following equation: Where: P i in,c H sp,i H M,j Q sp,i Q M,j P M,j in,c i = specified load point at 25, 50, 75, or 100 percent of BEP flow, and j = measured load point corresponding to specified load point i. E.2.2. For pumps sold with motors and non-continuous controls, the head associated with each of the specified flow points shall be no lower than 10 percent below that defined by the reference system curve equation in section VI.E.2 of this appendix. Only the measured flow points must be achieved within 10 percent of the calculated values. Correct for flow and head as described in section VI.E.2.1, except do not correct measured head values that are higher than the reference system curve at the same flow rate; only correct flow rate and head values lower than the reference system curve at the same flow rate. For head values higher than the system curve, use the measured head points directly to calculate PEI VL VII. Calculation-Based Approach for Pumps Sold With Motors and Controls A. Scope. A.1. Pumps sold with motors regulated by DOE's energy conservation standards for polyphase NEMA Design B electric motors at § 431.25(g) and continuous controls, A.2. Pumps sold with inverter-only synchronous electric motors regulated by DOE's test procedure and/or energy conservation standards in subpart B of this part, A.3. SVIL pumps sold with small electric motors regulated by DOE's energy conservation standards at § 431.446 or with SNEMs regulated by DOE's test procedure and/or energy conservation standards in subpart B of this part (but including motors of such varieties that are less than 0.25 hp) and continuous controls, A.4. Pumps sold with submersible motors and continuous controls, and A.5. Pumps sold with motors not listed in sections VII.A.1, VII.A.2, VII.A.3, and VII.A.4 of this appendix and pumps sold without continuous controls, including pumps sold with non-continuous controls, cannot use this section and must apply the test method in section VI of this appendix. B. Measurement Equipment. C. Test Conditions. D. Testing BEP for the Pump. D.1. Adjust the flow by throttling the pump without changing the speed of rotation of the pump and conduct the test at a minimum of the following seven flow points: 40, 60, 75, 90, 100, 110, and 120 percent of the expected BEP flow rate of the pump at the nominal speed of rotation, as specified in HI 40.6-2021, except section 40.6.5.3, and appendix B, including the applicable provisions of HI 9.6.1-2017, HI 9.6.6-2016, HI 9.8-2018, HI 14.1-14.2-2019, the HI Engineering Data Book, ASME MFC-3M-2004, ASME MFC-5M-1985, ASME MFC-8M-2001, ASME MFC-12M-2006, ASME MFC-16-2014, ASME MFC-22-2007, AWWA E103-2015, CSA C390-10, IEEE 112-2017, IEEE 114-2010-A, ISO 1438:2017, ISO 2186:2007, ISO 2715:2017, ISO 3354:2008, ISO 3966:2020, ISO 5167-1:2003, ISO 5198:1987, ISO 6416:2017, and ISO 20456:2017, as referenced in HI 40.6-2021. D.2. Determine the BEP flow rate as the flow rate at the operating point of maximum pump efficiency on the pump efficiency curve, as determined in accordance with section 40.6.6.3 of HI 40.6-2021, where the pump efficiency is the ratio of the pump power output divided by the pump power input, as specified in Table 40.6.2 of HI 40.6-2021, disregarding the calculations provided in section 40.6.6.2. E. Calculating the Variable Load Pump Energy Rating. VL Where: PER VL ω i P i in,c i = load point corresponding to 25, 50, 75, or 100 percent of the BEP flow rate. E.1 Determine the driver power input at each load point corresponding to 25, 50, 75, or 100 percent of the BEP flow rate as follows: Where: P i in,c P i L i i = load point corresponding to 25, 50, 75, or 100 percent of the BEP flow rate. E.1.1 Determine the pump power input at 100 percent of the measured BEP flow rate of the tested pump by employing a least squares regression to determine a linear relationship between the measured pump power input at the nominal speed of rotation and the measured flow rate at the following load points: 60, 75, 90, 100, 110, and 120 percent of the expected BEP flow rate. Use the linear relationship to determine the pump power input at the nominal speed of rotation for the load point of 100 percent of the BEP flow rate. E.1.1.1 Determine the pump power input at 25, 50, and 75 percent of the BEP flow rate based on the measured pump power input at 100 percent of the BEP flow rate and using with the following equation: Where: P i P 100% Q i Q 100% i = load point corresponding to 25, 50, or 75 percent of the measured BEP flow rate of the tested pump. E.1.2 Calculate the motor and control part load losses at each load point corresponding to 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of the BEP flow rate as follows: L i full i Where: L i L full z i i = load point corresponding to 25, 50, 75, or 100 percent of the BEP flow rate. E.1.2.1 Determine the full load motor losses using the appropriate motor efficiency value and horsepower as shown in the following equation: Where: L full MotorHP = the horsepower of the motor with which the pump model is being tested (hp), and η motor,full i.e., E.1.2.1.1 For pumps sold with motors other than inverter-only synchronous electric motors or submersible motors, determine the represented nominal full load motor efficiency as described in section VII.E.1.2.1.1.1 of this appendix. For pumps sold with inverter-only synchronous electric motors, determine the represented nominal full load motor + inverter efficiency as described in section VII.E.1.2.1.1.2 of this appendix. For pumps sold with submersible motors, determine the default nominal full load submersible motor efficiency as described in section VII.E.1.2.1.1.3 of this appendix. E.1.2.1.1.1 For pumps sold with motors other than inverter-only synchronous electric motors or submersible motors, the represented nominal full load motor efficiency is that of the motor with which the given pump model is being tested, as determined in accordance with the DOE test procedure for electric motors at § 431.16 or, for SVIL, the DOE test procedure for small electric motors at § 431.444 or the DOE test procedure for SNEMs in subpart B of this part, as applicable (including for motors less than 0.25 hp), and, if available, applicable representation procedures in 10 CFR part 429 and this part. E.1.2.1.1.2 For pumps sold with inverter-only synchronous electric motors, the represented nominal full load motor + inverter efficiency is that of the motor with which the given pump model is being tested, as determined in accordance with the DOE test procedure for inverter-only synchronous electric motors in subpart B of this part, and, if available, applicable representation procedures in 10 CFR part 429 and this part. E.1.2.1.1.3 For pumps sold with submersible motors, prior to the compliance date of any energy conservation standards for submersible motors in subpart B of this part, the default nominal full load submersible motor efficiency is that listed in table 2 of this appendix, with the number of poles relevant to the speed at which the pump is being tested (see section I.C.1 of this appendix) and the motor horsepower of the pump being tested, or if a test procedure for submersible motors is provided in subpart B of this part, the represented nominal full load motor efficiency of the motor with which the given pump model is being tested, as determined in accordance with the applicable test procedure in subpart B of this part and applicable representation procedures in 10 CFR part 429 and this part, may be used instead. Starting on the compliance date of any energy conservation standards for submersible motors in subpart B of this part, the default nominal full load submersible motor efficiency may no longer be used and instead the represented nominal full load motor efficiency of the motor with which the given pump model is being tested, as determined in accordance with the applicable test procedure in subpart B of this part and applicable representation procedures in 10 CFR part 429 and this part, must be used instead. E.1.2.2 For load points corresponding to 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of the BEP flow rate, determine the part load loss factor at each load point as follows: Where: z a,b,c = coefficients listed in either Table 4 of this appendix for induction motors or Table 5 of this appendix for inverter-only synchronous electric motors, based on the horsepower of the motor with which the pump is being tested, P i MotorHP = the horsepower of the motor with which the pump is being tested (hp), Table 2—Default Nominal Full Load Submersible Motor Efficiency by Motor Horsepower and Pole Motor horsepower Default nominal full load submersible motor efficiency 2 poles 4 poles 6 poles 1 55 68 64 1.5 66 70 72 2 68 70 74 3 70 75.5 75.5 5 74 75.5 75.5 7.5 68 74 72 10 70 74 72 15 72 75.5 74 20 72 77 74 25 74 78.5 77 30 77 80 78.5 40 78.5 81.5 81.5 50 80 82.5 81.5 60 81.5 84 82.5 75 81.5 85.5 82.5 100 81.5 84 82.5 125 84 84 82.5 150 84 85.5 85.5 200 85.5 86.5 85.5 250 86.5 86.5 85.5 Table 3—Nominal Full Load Motor Efficiency Values Nominal full load motor efficiency* 50.5 52.5 55.0 57.5 59.5 62.0 64.0 66.0 68.0 70.0 72.0 74.0 75.5 77.0 78.5 80.0 81.5 82.5 84.0 85.5 86.5 87.5 88.5 89.5 90.2 91.0 91.7 92.4 93.0 93.6 94.1 94.5 95.0 95.4 95.8 96.2 96.5 96.8 97.1 97.4 97.6 97.8 98.0 98.2 98.4 98.5 98.6 98.7 98.8 98.9 99.0 * Note: Table 4—Induction Motor and Control Part Load Loss Factor Equation Coefficients for Section VII.E.1.2.2 of This Appendix A Motor horsepower Coefficients for induction motor and control part load loss factor a b c ≤5 −0.4658 1.4965 0.5303 >5 and ≤20 −1.3198 2.9551 0.1052 >20 and ≤50 −1.5122 3.0777 0.1847 >50 and ≤100 −0.6629 2.1452 0.1952 >100 −0.7583 2.4538 0.2233 Table 5—Inverter-Only Synchronous Electric Motor and Control Part Load Loss Factor Equation Coefficients for Section VII.E.1.2.2 of This Appendix A Motor horsepower Coefficients for induction motor and control part load loss factor a b c ≤5 −0.0898 1.0251 0.0667 >5 and ≤20 −0.1591 1.1683 −0.0085 >20 and ≤50 −0.4071 1.4028 0.0055 >50 and ≤100 −0.3341 1.3377 −0.0023 >100 −0.0749 1.0864 −0.0096 [81 FR 4145, Jan. 25, 2016, as amended at 82 FR 36924, Aug. 7, 2017; 88 FR 17978, Mar. 24, 2023; 88 FR 24471, Apr. 21, 2023; 90 FR 6795, Jan. 21, 2025] Appendix B to Subpart Y of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Energy Efficiency of Dedicated-Purpose Pool Pumps Note: On February 5, 2018 but before July 19, 2021, any representations made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of dedicated-purpose pool pumps subject to testing pursuant to 10 CFR 431.464(b) must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. Any optional representations of energy factor (EF) must be accompanied by a representation of weighted energy factor (WEF). I. Test Procedure for Dedicated-Purpose Pool Pumps A. General A.1 Test Method. To determine the weighted energy factor (WEF) for dedicated-purpose pool pumps, perform “wire-to-water” testing in accordance with HI 40.6-2014-B, except section 40.6.4.1, “Vertically suspended pumps”; section 40.6.4.2, “Submersible pumps”; section 40.6.5.3, “Test report”; section 40.6.5.5, “Test conditions”; section 40.6.5.5.2, “Speed of rotation during testing”; section 40.6.6.1, “Translation of test results to rated speed of rotation”; section 40.6.6.2, “Pump efficiency”; section 40.6.6.3, “Performance curve”; section A.7, “Testing at temperatures exceeding 30 °C (86 °F)”; and appendix B, “Reporting of test results”; (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463) with the modifications and additions as noted throughout the provisions below. Do not use the test points specified in section 40.6.5.5.1, “Test procedure” of HI 40.6-2014-B and instead use those test points specified in section D.3 of this appendix for the applicable dedicated-purpose pool pump variety and speed configuration. When determining overall efficiency, best efficiency point, or other applicable pump energy performance information, section 40.6.5.5.1, “Test procedure”; section 40.6.6.2, “Pump efficiency”; and section 40.6.6.3, “Performance curve” must be used, as applicable. For the purposes of applying this appendix, the term “volume per unit time,” as defined in section 40.6.2, “Terms and definitions,” of HI 40.6-2014-B shall be deemed to be synonymous with the term “flow rate” used throughout that standard and this appendix. A.2. Calculations and Rounding. All terms and quantities refer to values determined in accordance with the procedures set forth in this appendix for the rated pump. Perform all calculations using raw measured values without rounding. Round WEF, EF, maximum head, vertical lift, and true priming time values to the tenths place ( i.e., i.e., B. Measurement Equipment B.1 For the purposes of measuring flow rate, speed of rotation, temperature, and pump power output, the equipment specified in HI 40.6-2014-B Appendix C (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463) necessary to measure head, speed of rotation, flow rate, and temperature must be used and must comply with the stated accuracy requirements in HI 40.6-2014-B Table 40.6.3.2.3, except as specified in section B.1.1 and B.1.2 of this appendix. When more than one instrument is used to measure a given parameter, the combined accuracy, calculated as the root sum of squares of individual instrument accuracies, must meet the specified accuracy requirements. B.1.1 Electrical measurement equipment for determining the driver power input to the motor or controls must be capable of measuring true root mean squared (RMS) current, true RMS voltage, and real power up to the 40th harmonic of fundamental supply source frequency, and have a combined accuracy of ±2.0 percent of the measured value at the fundamental supply source frequency. B.1.2 Instruments for measuring distance ( e.g., B.2 Calibration. Calibration requirements for instrumentation are specified in appendix D of HI 40.6-2014-B (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463). Historical calibration data may be used to justify time periods up to three times longer than those specified in table D.1 of HI 40.6-2014-B provided the supporting historical data shows maintenance of calibration of the given instrument up to the selected extended calibration interval on at least two unique occasions, based on the interval specified in HI 40.6-2014-B. C. Test Conditions and Tolerances C.1 Pump Specifications. Conduct testing at full impeller diameter in accordance with the test conditions, stabilization requirements, and specifications of HI 40.6-2014-B section 40.6.3, “Pump efficiency testing”; section 40.6.4, “Considerations when determining the efficiency of a pump”; section 40.6.5.4 (including appendix A), “Test arrangements”; and section 40.6.5.5, “Test conditions” (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463). C.2 Power Supply Requirements. The following conditions also apply to the mains power supplied to the DPPP motor or controls, if any: (1) Maintain the voltage within ±5 percent of the rated value of the motor, (2) Maintain the frequency within ±1 percent of the rated value of the motor, (3) Maintain the voltage unbalance of the power supply within ±3 percent of the value with which the motor was rated, and (4) Maintain total harmonic distortion below 12 percent throughout the test. C.3 Test Conditions. Testing must be carried out with water that is between 50 and 107 °F with less than or equal to 15 nephelometric turbidity units (NTU). C.4 Tolerances. For waterfall pumps, multi-speed self-priming and non-self-priming pool filter pumps, and variable-speed self-priming and non-self-priming pool filter pumps all measured load points must be within ±2.5 percent of the specified head value and comply with any specified flow values or thresholds. For all other dedicated-purpose pool pumps, all measured load points must be within the greater of ±2.5 percent of the specified flow rate values or ±0.5 gpm and comply with any specified head values or thresholds. D. Data Collection and Stabilization D.1 Damping Devices. Use of damping devices, as described in section 40.6.3.2.2 of HI 40.6-2014-B (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463), are only permitted to integrate up to the data collection interval used during testing. D.2 Stabilization. Record data at any tested load point only under stabilized conditions, as defined in HI 40.6-2014-B section 40.6.5.5.1 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463), where a minimum of two measurements are used to determine stabilization. D.3 Test Points. Measure the flow rate in gpm, pump total head in ft, the driver power input in W, and the speed of rotation in rpm at each load point specified in Table 1 of this appendix for each DPPP variety and speed configuration: Table 1—Load Points ( i w i DPPP varieties Speed configuration(s) Number of load points Load point Test points Flow rate Head Speed Self-Priming Pool Filter Pumps And Non-Self-Priming Pool Filter Pumps Single-speed dedicated-purpose pool pumps and all self-priming and non-self-priming pool filter pumps not meeting the definition of two-*, multi-, or variable-speed dedicated-purpose pool pump 1 High Q high max__speed@C H = 0.0082 × Q high 2 Maximum speed Two-speed dedicated-purpose pool pumps * 2 Low Q low H = 0.0082 × Q low 2 Lowest speed capable of meeting the specified flow and head values, if any ***. High Q high max__speed@C H = 0.0082 × Q high 2 Maximum speed. Multi-speed and variable-speed dedicated-purpose pool pumps 2 Low Q low low low H = 0.0082 × Q low 2 Lowest speed capable of meeting the specified flow and head values. High Q high max__speed@C H = 0.0082 × Q high 2 Lowest speed capable of meeting the specified flow and head values. Waterfall Pumps Single-speed dedicated-purpose pool pumps 1 High Q low 17.0 ft Maximum speed. Pressure Cleaner Booster Pumps Any 1 High 10.0 gpm ≥60.0 ft Lowest speed capable of meeting the specified flow and head values. * In order to apply the test points for two-speed self-priming and non-self-priming pool filter pumps, self-priming pool filter pumps that are greater than or equal to 0.711 rated hydraulic horsepower that are two-speed dedicated-purpose pool pumps must also be distributed in commerce either: (1) With a pool pump control (variable speed drive and user interface or switch) that changes the speed in response to pre-programmed user preferences and allows the user to select the duration of each speed and/or the on/off times or (2) without a pool pump control that has such capability, but without which the pump is unable to operate. Two-speed self-priming pool filter pumps greater than or equal to 0.711 rated hydraulic horsepower that do not meet these requirements must be tested using the load point for single-speed self-priming or non-self-priming pool filter pumps, as appropriate. ** Q max__speed@C *** If a two-speed pump has a low speed that results in a flow rate below the specified values, the low speed of that pump shall not be tested. E. Calculations E.1 Determination of Weighted Energy Factor. Determine the WEF as a ratio of the measured flow and driver power input to the dedicated-purpose pool pump in accordance with the following equation: Where: WEF w i i Q i i P i i i n E.2 Weights. When determining WEF, apply the weights specified in Table 2 of this appendix for the applicable load points, DPPP varieties, and speed configurations: Table 2—Load Point Weights ( w i DPPP varieties Speed configuration(s) Load point(s) i Low flow High flow Self-Priming Pool Filter Pumps and Non-Self-Priming Pool Filter Pumps Single-speed dedicated-purpose pool pumps and all self-priming and non-self-priming pool filter pumps not meeting the definition of two-,* multi-, or variable-speed dedicated-purpose pool pump 1.0 Two-speed dedicated-purpose pool pumps * 0.80 0.20 Multi-speed and variable-speed dedicated-purpose pool pumps 0.80 0.20 Waterfall Pumps Single-speed dedicated-purpose pool pumps 1.0 Pressure Cleaner Booster Pump Any 1.0 * In order to apply the test points for two-speed self-priming and non-self-priming pool filter pumps, self-priming pool filter pumps that are greater than or equal to 0.711 rated hydraulic horsepower that are two-speed dedicated-purpose pool pumps must also be distributed in commerce either: (1) With a pool pump control (variable speed drive and user interface or switch) that changes the speed in response to pre-programmed user preferences and allows the user to select the duration of each speed and/or the on/off times or (2) without a pool pump control that has such capability, but without which the pump is unable to operate. Two-speed self-priming pool filter pumps greater than or equal to 0.711 rated hydraulic horsepower that do not meet these requirements must be tested using the load point for single-speed self-priming or non-self-priming pool filter pumps, as appropriate. E.3 Determination of Horsepower and True Power Factor Metrics E.3.1 Determine the pump power output at any load point i Where: P u,i i Q i i H i i SG E.3.1.1 Determine the rated hydraulic horsepower as the pump power output measured on the reference curve at maximum rotating speed and full impeller diameter for the rated pump. E.3.2 For dedicated-purpose pool pumps with single-phase AC motors or DC motors, determine the dedicated-purpose pool pump nominal motor horsepower as the product of the measured full load speed and torque, adjusted to the appropriate units, as shown in the following equation: Where: P nm T n = the motor speed at full load, in rpm. Full-load speed and torque shall be determined based on the maximum continuous duty motor power output rating allowable for the motor's nameplate ambient rating and insulation class. E.3.2.1 For single-phase AC motors, determine the measured speed and torque at full load according to either section E.3.2.1.1 or E.3.2.1.2 of this appendix. E.3.2.1.1 Use the procedures in section 3.2, “Tests with load”; section 4 “Testing facilities”; section 5.2 “Mechanical measurements”; section 5.3 “Temperature measurements”; and section 6 “Tests” of IEEE 114-2010 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463), or E.3.2.1.2 Use the applicable procedures in section 5, “General test requirements” and section 6, “Tests” of CSA C747-2009 (RA 2014); except in section 6.4(b) the conversion factor shall be 5252, only measurements at full load are required in section 6.5, and section 6.6 shall be disregarded (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463). E.3.2.2 For DC motors, determine the measured speed and torque at full load according to either section E.3.2.2.1 or E.3.2.2.2 of this appendix. E.3.2.2.1 Use the procedures in section 3.1, “Instrument Selection Factors”; section 3.4 “Power Measurement”: Section 3.5 “Power Sources”; section 4.1.2 “Ambient Air”; section 4.1.4 “Direction of Rotation”; section 5.4.1 “Reference Conditions”; and section 5.4.3.2 “Dynomometer or Torquemeter Method” of IEEE 113-1985 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463), or E.3.2.2.2 Use the applicable procedures in section 5, “General test requirements” and section 6, “Tests” of CSA C747-2009 (RA 2014); except in section 6.4(b) the conversion factor shall be 5252, only measurements at full load are required in section 6.5, and section 6.6 shall be disregarded (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463). E.3.3 For dedicated-purpose pool pumps with single-phase AC motors or DC motors, the dedicated-purpose pool pump service factor is equal to 1.0. E.3.4 Determine the dedicated-purpose pool pump motor total horsepower according to section E.3.4.1 of this appendix for dedicated-purpose pool pumps with single-phase AC motors or DC motors and section E.3.4.2 of this appendix for dedicated-purpose pool pumps with polyphase AC motors. E.3.4.1 For dedicated-purpose pool pumps with single-phase AC motors or DC motors, determine the dedicated-purpose pool pump motor total horsepower as the product of the dedicated-purpose pool pump nominal motor horsepower, determined in accordance with section E.3.2 of this appendix, and the dedicated-purpose pool pump service factor, determined in accordance with section E.3.3 of this appendix. E.3.4.2 For dedicated-purpose pool pumps with polyphase AC induction motors, determine the dedicated-purpose pool pump motor total horsepower as the product of the rated nominal motor horsepower and the rated service factor of the motor. E.3.5 Determine the true power factor at each applicable load point specified in Table 1 of this appendix for each DPPP variety and speed configuration as a ratio of driver power input to the motor (or controls, if present) ( P i i Where: PF i i P i i V i i I i i i E.4 Determination of Maximum Head. Determine the maximum head for self-priming pool filter pumps, non-self-priming pool filter pumps, and waterfall pumps by measuring the head at maximum speed and the minimum flow rate at which the pump is designed to operate continuously or safely, where the minimum flow rate is assumed to be zero unless stated otherwise in the manufacturer literature. F. Determination of Self-Priming Capability F.1 Test Method. Determine the vertical lift and true priming time of non-self-priming pool filter pumps and self-priming pool filter pumps that are not already certified as self-priming under NSF/ANSI 50-2015 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463) by testing such pumps pursuant to section C.3 of appendix C of NSF/ANSI 50-2015, except for the modifications and exceptions listed in the following sections F.1.1 through F.1.5 of this appendix: F.1.1 Where section C.3.2, “Apparatus,” and section C.3.4, “Self-priming capability test method,” of NSF/ANSI 50-2015 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463) state that the “suction line must be essentially as shown in annex C, figure C.1;” the phrase “essentially as shown in Annex C, figure C.1” means: • The centerline of the pump impeller shaft is situated a vertical distance equivalent to the specified vertical lift (VL), calculated in accordance with section F.1.1.1. of this appendix, above the water level of a water tank of sufficient volume as to maintain a constant water surface level for the duration of the test; • The pump draws water from the water tank with a riser pipe that extends below the water level a distance of at least 3 times the riser pipe diameter ( i.e., • The suction inlet of the pump is at least 5 pipe diameters from any obstructions, 90° bends, valves, or fittings; and • The riser pipe is of the same pipe diameter as the pump suction inlet. F.1.1.1 The vertical lift (VL) must be normalized to 5.0 feet at an atmospheric pressure of 14.7 psia and a water density of 62.4 lb/ft 3 Where: VL ρ test 3 P abs,test F.1.2 The equipment accuracy requirements specified in section B, “Measurement Equipment,” of this appendix also apply to this section F, as applicable. F.1.2.1 All measurements of head (gauge pressure), flow, and water temperature must be taken at the pump suction inlet and all head measurements must be normalized back to the centerline of the pump impeller shaft in accordance with section A.3.1.3.1 of HI 40.6-2014-B (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463). F.1.3 All tests must be conducted with clear water that meets the requirements adopted in section C.3 of this appendix. F.1.4 In section C.3.4, “Self-priming capability test method,” of NSF/ANSI 50-2015 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463), “the elapsed time to steady discharge gauge reading or full discharge flow” is determined when the changes in head and flow, respectively, are within the tolerance values specified in table 40.6.3.2.2, “Permissible amplitude of fluctuation as a percentage of mean value of quantity being measured at any test point,” of HI 40.6-2014-B (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463). The measured priming time (MPT) is determined as the point in time when the stabilized load point is first achieved, not when stabilization is determined. In addition, the true priming time (TPT) is equivalent to the MPT. F.1.5 The maximum true priming time for each test run must not exceed 10.0 minutes. Disregard section C.3.5 of NSF/ANSI 50-2015 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463). G. Optional Testing and Calculations G.1 Energy Factor. When making representations regarding the EF of dedicated-purpose pool pumps, determine EF on one of four system curves (A, B, C, or D) and at any given speed ( s Where: EF X,s X s Q X,s P X,s G.1.1 System Curves. The energy factor may be determined at any speed ( s Table 3—Systems Curves for Optional EF Test Procedure System curve System curve equation * A H = 0.0167 × Q 2 B H = 0.0500 × Q 2 C H = 0.0082 × Q 2 D H = 0.0044 × Q 2 * In the above table, Q refers to the flow rate in gpm and H refers to head in ft. G.2 Replacement Dedicated-Purpose Pool Pump Motors. To determine the WEF for replacement DPPP motors, test each replacement DPPP motor paired with each dedicated-purpose pool pump bare pump for which the replacement DPPP motor is advertised to be paired, as stated in the manufacturer's literature for that replacement DPPP motor model, according to the testing and calculations described in sections A, B, C, D, and E of this appendix. Alternatively, each replacement DPPP motor may be tested with the most consumptive dedicated-purpose pool pump bare pump for which it is advertised to be paired, as stated in the manufacturer's literature for that replacement DPPP motor model. If a replacement DPPP motor is not advertised to be paired with any specific dedicated-purpose pool pump bare pumps, test with the most consumptive dedicated-purpose pool pump bare pump available. [82 FR 36924, Aug. 7, 2017] Appendix C to Subpart Y of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Energy Efficiency of Dedicated-Purpose Pool Pumps Note: Any representations made on or after July 19, 2021, with respect to the energy use or efficiency of dedicated-purpose pool pumps subject to testing pursuant to 10 CFR 431.464(b) must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. I. Test Procedure for Dedicated-Purpose Pool Pumps A. General A.1 Test Method. To determine the weighted energy factor (WEF) for dedicated-purpose pool pumps, perform “wire-to-water” testing in accordance with HI 40.6-2014-B, except section 40.6.4.1, “Vertically suspended pumps”; section 40.6.4.2, “Submersible pumps”; section 40.6.5.3, “Test report”; section 40.6.5.5, “Test conditions”; section 40.6.5.5.2, “Speed of rotation during testing”; section 40.6.6.1, “Translation of test results to rated speed of rotation”; section 40.6.6.2, “Pump efficiency”; section 40.6.6.3, “Performance curve”; section A.7, “Testing at temperatures exceeding 30 °C (86 °F)”; and appendix B, “Reporting of test results”; (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463) with the modifications and additions as noted throughout the provisions below. Do not use the test points specified in section 40.6.5.5.1, “Test procedure” of HI 40.6-2014-B and instead use those test points specified in section D.3 of this appendix for the applicable dedicated-purpose pool pump variety and speed configuration. When determining overall efficiency, best efficiency point, or other applicable pump energy performance information, section 40.6.5.5.1, “Test procedure”; section 40.6.6.2, “Pump efficiency”; and section 40.6.6.3, “Performance curve” must be used, as applicable. For the purposes of applying this appendix, the term “volume per unit time,” as defined in section 40.6.2, “Terms and definitions,” of HI 40.6-2014-B shall be deemed to be synonymous with the term “flow rate” used throughout that standard and this appendix . A.2 Calculations and Rounding. All terms and quantities refer to values determined in accordance with the procedures set forth in this appendix for the rated pump. Perform all calculations using raw measured values without rounding. Round WEF, maximum head, vertical lift, and true priming time values to the tenths place ( i.e., i.e., B. Measurement Equipment B.1 For the purposes of measuring flow rate, speed of rotation, temperature, and pump power output, the equipment specified in HI 40.6-2014-B Appendix C (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463) necessary to measure head, speed of rotation, flow rate, and temperature must be used and must comply with the stated accuracy requirements in HI 40.6-2014-B Table 40.6.3.2.3, except as specified in sections B.1.1 and B.1.2 of this appendix. When more than one instrument is used to measure a given parameter, the combined accuracy, calculated as the root sum of squares of individual instrument accuracies, must meet the specified accuracy requirements. B.1.1 Electrical measurement equipment for determining the driver power input to the motor or controls must be capable of measuring true root mean squared (RMS) current, true RMS voltage, and real power up to the 40th harmonic of fundamental supply source frequency, and have a combined accuracy of ±2.0 percent of the measured value at the fundamental supply source frequency. B.1.2 Instruments for measuring distance ( e.g., B.2 Calibration. Calibration requirements for instrumentation are specified in appendix D of HI 40.6-2014-B (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463). Historical calibration data may be used to justify time periods up to three times longer than those specified in table D.1 of HI 40.6-2014-B provided the supporting historical data shows maintenance of calibration of the given instrument up to the selected extended calibration interval on at least two unique occasions, based on the interval specified in HI 40.6-2014-B. C. Test Conditions and Tolerances C.1 Pump Specifications. Conduct testing at full impeller diameter in accordance with the test conditions, stabilization requirements, and specifications of HI 40.6-2014-B section 40.6.3, “Pump efficiency testing”; section 40.6.4, “Considerations when determining the efficiency of a pump”; section 40.6.5.4 (including appendix A), “Test arrangements”; and section 40.6.5.5, “Test conditions” (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463). C.2 Power Supply Requirements. The following conditions also apply to the mains power supplied to the DPPP motor or controls, if any: (1) Maintain the voltage within ±5 percent of the rated value of the motor, (2) Maintain the frequency within ±1 percent of the rated value of the motor, (3) Maintain the voltage unbalance of the power supply within ±3 percent of the value with which the motor was rated, and (4) Maintain total harmonic distortion below 12 percent throughout the test. C.3 Test Conditions. Testing must be carried out with water that is between 50 and 107 °F with less than or equal to 15 nephelometric turbidity units (NTU). C.4 Tolerances. For waterfall pumps, multi-speed self-priming and non-self-priming pool filter pumps, and variable-speed self-priming and non-self-priming pool filter pumps all measured load points must be within ±2.5 percent of the specified head value and comply with any specified flow values or thresholds. For all other dedicated-purpose pool pumps, all measured load points must be within the greater of ±2.5 percent of the specified flow rate values or ±0.5 gpm and comply with any specified head values or thresholds. D. Data Collection and Stabilization D.1 Damping Devices. Use of damping devices, as described in section 40.6.3.2.2 of HI 40.6-2014-B (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463), are only permitted to integrate up to the data collection interval used during testing. D.2 Stabilization. Record data at any tested load point only under stabilized conditions, as defined in HI 40.6-2014-B section 40.6.5.5.1 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463), where a minimum of two measurements are used to determine stabilization. D.3 Test Points. Measure the flow rate in gpm, pump total head in ft, the driver power input in W, and the speed of rotation in rpm at each load point specified in Table 1 of this appendix for each DPPP variety and speed configuration: Table 1—Load Points ( i w i DPPP varieties Speed configuration(s) Number of load points Load point Test points Flow rate Head Speed Self-Priming Pool Filter Pumps And Non-Self-Priming Pool Filter Pumps Single-speed dedicated-purpose pool pumps and all self-priming and non-self-priming pool filter pumps not meeting the definition of two-*, multi-, or variable-speed dedicated-purpose pool pump 1 High Q high max__speed@C H = 0.0082 × Q high 2 Maximum speed. Two-speed dedicated-purpose pool pumps * 2 Low Q low H = 0.0082 × Q low 2 Lowest speed capable of meeting the specified flow and head values, if any. *** High Q high max__speed@C H = 0.0082 × Q low 2 Maximum speed. Multi-speed and variable-speed dedicated-purpose pool pumps 2 Low Q low low low H = 0.0082 × Q low 2 Lowest speed capable of meeting the specified flow and head values. High Q high max__speed@C H = 0.0082 × Q high 2 Lowest speed capable of meeting the specified flow and head values. Waterfall Pumps Single-speed dedicated-purpose pool pumps 1 High Q low 17.0 ft Maximum speed. Pressure Cleaner Booster Pumps Any 1 High 10.0 gpm ≥60.0 ft Lowest speed capable of meeting the specified flow and head values. * In order to apply the test points for two-speed self-priming and non-self-priming pool filter pumps, self-priming pool filter pumps that are greater than or equal to 0.711 rated hydraulic horsepower that are two-speed dedicated-purpose pool pumps must also be distributed in commerce either: (1) With a pool pump control (variable speed drive and user interface or switch) that changes the speed in response to pre-programmed user preferences and allows the user to select the duration of each speed and/or the on/off times or (2) without a pool pump control that has such capability, but without which the pump is unable to operate. Two-speed self-priming pool filter pumps greater than or equal to 0.711 rated hydraulic horsepower that do not meet these requirements must be tested using the load point for single-speed self-priming or non-self-priming pool filter pumps, as appropriate. ** Q max__speed@C *** If a two-speed pump has a low speed that results in a flow rate below the specified values, the low speed of that pump shall not be tested. E. Calculations E.1 Determination of Weighted Energy Factor. Determine the WEF as a ratio of the measured flow and driver power input to the dedicated-purpose pool pump in accordance with the following equation: Where: WEF W i i Q i i P i i i n E.2 Weights. When determining WEF, apply the weights specified in Table 2 of this appendix for the applicable load points, DPPP varieties, and speed configurations: Table 2—Load Point Weights ( w i DPPP varieties Speed configuration(s) Load point(s) i Low flow High flow Self-Priming Pool Filter Pumps and Non-Self-Priming Pool Filter Pumps Single-speed dedicated-purpose pool pumps and all self-priming and non-self-priming pool filter pumps not meeting the definition of two-*, multi-, or variable-speed dedicated-purpose pool pump 1.0 Two-speed dedicated-purpose pool pumps * 0.80 0.20 Multi-speed and variable-speed dedicated-purpose pool pumps 0.80 0.20 Waterfall Pumps Single-speed dedicated-purpose pool pumps 1.0 Pressure Cleaner Booster Pump Any 1.0 * In order to apply the test points for two-speed self-priming and non-self-priming pool filter pumps, self-priming pool filter pumps that are greater than or equal to 0.711 rated hydraulic horsepower that are two-speed dedicated-purpose pool pumps must also be distributed in commerce either: (1) With a pool pump control (variable speed drive and user interface or switch) that changes the speed in response to pre-programmed user preferences and allows the user to select the duration of each speed and/or the on/off times or (2) without a pool pump control that has such capability, but without which the pump is unable to operate. Two-speed self-priming pool filter pumps greater than or equal to 0.711 rated hydraulic horsepower that do not meet these requirements must be tested using the load point for single-speed self-priming or non-self-priming pool filter pumps, as appropriate. E.3 Determination of Horsepower and True Power Factor Metrics E.3.1 Determine the pump power output at any load point i Where: P u,i i Q i i H i i SG E.3.1.1 Determine the rated hydraulic horsepower as the pump power output measured on the reference curve at maximum rotating speed and full impeller diameter for the rated pump. E.3.2 For dedicated-purpose pool pumps with single-phase AC motors or DC motors, determine the dedicated-purpose pool pump nominal motor horsepower as the product of the measured full load speed and torque, adjusted to the appropriate units, as shown in the following equation: Where: P nm T n = the motor speed at full load, in rpm. Full-load speed and torque shall be determined based on the maximum continuous duty motor power output rating allowable for the motor's nameplate ambient rating and insulation class. E.3.2.1 For single-phase AC motors, determine the measured speed and torque at full load according to either section E.3.2.1.1 or E.3.2.1.2 of this appendix. E.3.2.1.1 Use the procedures in section 3.2, “Tests with load”; section 4 “Testing facilities”; section 5.2 “Mechanical measurements”; section 5.3 “Temperature measurements”; and section 6 “Tests” of IEEE 114-2010 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463), or E.3.2.1.2 Use the applicable procedures in section 5, “General test requirements” and section 6, “Tests” of CSA C747-2009 (RA 2014); except in section 6.4(b) the conversion factor shall be 5252, only measurements at full load are required in section 6.5, and section 6.6 shall be disregarded (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463). E.3.2.2 For DC motors, determine the measured speed and torque at full load according to either section E.3.2.2.1 or E.3.2.2.2 of this appendix. E.3.2.2.1 Use the procedures in section 3.1, “Instrument Selection Factors”; section 3.4 “Power Measurement”: Section 3.5 “Power Sources”; section 4.1.2 “Ambient Air”; section 4.1.4 “Direction of Rotation”; section 5.4.1 “Reference Conditions”; and section 5.4.3.2 “Dynomometer or Torquemeter Method” of IEEE 113-1985 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463), or E.3.2.2.2 Use the applicable procedures in section 5, “General test requirements” and section 6, “Tests” of CSA C747-2009 (RA 2014); except in section 6.4(b) the conversion factor shall be 5252, only measurements at full load are required in section 6.5, and section 6.6 shall be disregarded (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463). E.3.3 For dedicated-purpose pool pumps with single-phase AC motors or DC motors, the dedicated-purpose pool pump service factor is equal to 1.0. E.3.4 Determine the dedicated-purpose pool pump motor total horsepower according to section E.3.4.1 of this appendix for dedicated-purpose pool pumps with single-phase AC motors or DC motors and section E.3.4.2 of this appendix for dedicated-purpose pool pumps with polyphase AC motors. E.3.4.1 For dedicated-purpose pool pumps with single-phase AC motors or DC motors, determine the dedicated-purpose pool pump motor total horsepower as the product of the dedicated-purpose pool pump nominal motor horsepower, determined in accordance with section E.3.2 of this appendix, and the dedicated-purpose pool pump service factor, determined in accordance with section E.3.3 of this appendix. E.3.4.2 For dedicated-purpose pool pumps with polyphase AC induction motors, determine the dedicated-purpose pool pump motor total horsepower as the product of the rated nominal motor horsepower and the rated service factor of the motor. E.3.5 Determine the true power factor at each applicable load point specified in Table 1 of this appendix for each DPPP variety and speed configuration as a ratio of driver power input to the motor (or controls, if present) ( P i i Where: PF i i P i i V i i I i i i E.4 Determination of Maximum Head. Determine the maximum head for self-priming pool filter pumps, non-self-priming pool filter pumps, and waterfall pumps by measuring the head at maximum speed and the minimum flow rate at which the pump is designed to operate continuously or safely, where the minimum flow rate is assumed to be zero unless stated otherwise in the manufacturer literature. F. Determination of Self-Priming Capability F.1 Test Method. Determine the vertical lift and true priming time of non-self-priming pool filter pumps and self-priming pool filter pumps that are not already certified as self-priming under NSF/ANSI 50-2015 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463) by testing such pumps pursuant to section C.3 of appendix C of NSF/ANSI 50-2015, except for the modifications and exceptions listed in the following sections F.1.1 through F.1.5 of this appendix: F.1.1 Where section C.3.2, “Apparatus,” and section C.3.4, “Self-priming capability test method,” of NSF/ANSI 50-2015 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463) state that the “suction line must be essentially as shown in annex C, figure C.1;” the phrase “essentially as shown in Annex C, figure C.1” means: (1) The centerline of the pump impeller shaft is situated a vertical distance equivalent to the specified vertical lift (VL), calculated in accordance with section F.1.1.1. of this appendix, above the water level of a water tank of sufficient volume as to maintain a constant water surface level for the duration of the test; (2) The pump draws water from the water tank with a riser pipe that extends below the water level a distance of at least 3 times the riser pipe diameter ( i.e., (3) The suction inlet of the pump is at least 5 pipe diameters from any obstructions, 90° bends, valves, or fittings; and (4) The riser pipe is of the same pipe diameter as the pump suction inlet. F.1.1.1 The vertical lift (VL) must be normalized to 5.0 feet at an atmospheric pressure of 14.7 psia and a water density of 62.4 lb/ft 3 Where: VL ρ test 3 P abs,test F.1.2 The equipment accuracy requirements specified in section B, “Measurement Equipment,” of this appendix also apply to this section F, as applicable. F.1.2.1 All measurements of head (gauge pressure), flow, and water temperature must be taken at the pump suction inlet and all head measurements must be normalized back to the centerline of the pump impeller shaft in accordance with section A.3.1.3.1 of HI 40.6-2014-B (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463). F.1.3 All tests must be conducted with clear water that meets the requirements adopted in section C.3 of this appendix. F.1.4 In section C.3.4, “Self-priming capability test method,” of NSF/ANSI 50-2015 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463), “the elapsed time to steady discharge gauge reading or full discharge flow” is determined when the changes in head and flow, respectively, are within the tolerance values specified in table 40.6.3.2.2, “Permissible amplitude of fluctuation as a percentage of mean value of quantity being measured at any test point,” of HI 40.6-2014-B (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463). The measured priming time (MPT) is determined as the point in time when the stabilized load point is first achieved, not when stabilization is determined. In addition, the true priming time (TPT) is equivalent to the MPT. F.1.5 The maximum true priming time for each test run must not exceed 10.0 minutes. Disregard section C.3.5 of NSF/ANSI 50-2015 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.463). G. Optional Testing and Calculations G.1 Replacement Dedicated-Purpose Pool Pump Motors. To determine the WEF for replacement DPPP motors, test each replacement DPPP motor paired with each dedicated-purpose pool pump bare pump for which the replacement DPPP motor is advertised to be paired, as stated in the manufacturer's literature for that replacement DPPP motor model, according to the testing and calculations described in sections A, B, C, D, and E of this appendix. Alternatively, each replacement DPPP motor may be tested with the most consumptive dedicated-purpose pool pump bare pump for which it is advertised to be paired, as stated in the manufacturer's literature for that replacement DPPP motor model. If a replacement DPPP motor is not advertised to be paired with any specific dedicated-purpose pool pump bare pumps, test with the most consumptive dedicated-purpose pool pump bare pump available. [82 FR 36924, Aug. 7, 2017] Appendix D to Subpart Y of Part 431—Uniform Test Method for the Measurement of Energy Consumption of Circulator Pumps Note 1 to appendix D to subpart Y of part 431: Beginning March 20, 2023, any representations made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of circulator pumps subject to testing pursuant to 10 CFR 431.464(c) must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 431.463 the entire standard for HI 40.6-2021 and for HI 41.5-2022. However, not all provisions of HI 40.6-2021 and HI 41.5-2022 apply to this appendix. If there is any conflict between any industry standard and this appendix, follow the language of the test procedure in this appendix, disregarding the conflicting industry standard language. 0.1 Specifically, the following provisions of HI 40.6-2021 are not applicable: (a) Section 40.6.4—Considerations when determining the efficiency of certain pumps, Section 40.6.4.1—Vertically suspended pumps (b) Section 40.6.4—Considerations when determining the efficiency of certain pumps, Section 40.6.4.2—Submersible pumps (c) Section 40.6.5—Test procedures, Section 40.6.5.3—Test report (d) Section 40.6.5—Test procedures, Section 40.6.5.5—Test conditions, Section 40.6.5.5.2—Speed of rotation during test (e) Section 40.6.6—Analysis, Section 40.6.6.1—Translation of the test results to the specified speed of rotation (f) Section 40.6.6—Analysis, Section 40.6.6.1—Translation of the test results to the specified speed of rotation, Section 40.6.6.1.1—Translation of the test results into data based on specified speed of rotation (g) Appendix B—Reporting of test results (h) Appendix G—DOE compared to HI 40.6 nomenclature 0.2 Specifically, only the following provisions of HI 41.5-2022 are applicable: (a) Section 41.5.3.4.1—Determination of CER—Full Speed (b) Section 41.5.3.4.2—Determination of CER—Pressure Speed Control (c) Section 41.5.3.4.3—Determination of CER—Temperature Speed Control (d) Section 41.5.3.4.4.1—Determination of CER—External Input Signal Speed Control Only (e) Section 41.5.3.4.4.2—Determination of CER—External Input Signal Speed Control Operated With Other Control Methods (f) Section 41.5.3.4.5—Determination of CER—Manual Speed Control 1. General To determine the circulator energy index (CEI), testing shall be performed in accordance with HI 40.6-2021, including Appendix E “Testing Circulator Pumps,” with the exceptions noted in section 0.1 of this appendix and the modifications and additions as noted throughout the following provisions. For the purposes of applying this appendix, the term “pump power output,” as defined in section 40.6.2, “Terms and definitions,” of HI 40.6-2021 shall be deemed to be synonymous with the term “hydraulic horsepower” used throughout that standard and this appendix. 2. Scope 2.1 This appendix is applicable to all circulator pumps and describes how to calculate the circulator energy index (CEI; section F) based on the pump energy rating for the minimally compliant reference circulator pump (CER STD Table 1 to Appendix D to Subpart Y of Part 431—Applicability of Test Methods Based on Circulator Pump Configuration and Control Method With Which Circulator Pump is Distributed in Commerce Circulator pump configuration Control method with which circulator pump is distributed Test method to be used for testing and calculation of CER Circulator Pump + Motor Circulator pumps at full speed or circulator pumps without pressure, temperature, external input signal, or manual speed control HI 41.5-2022 Section 41.5.3.4.1. Circulator Pump + Motor + Controls Circulator pumps with pressure control (including adaptive pressure control) HI 41.5-2022 Section 41.5.3.4.2. Circulator pumps with temperature control HI 41.5-2022 Section 41.5.3.4.3. Circulator pumps with only external input signal control, and which cannot be operated without an external input signal HI 41.5-2022 Section 41.5.3.4.4.1. Circulator pumps with external input signal control in addition to other control varieties, or which can be operated without an external input signal HI 41.5-2022 Section 41.5.3.4.4.2. Circulator pumps with manual speed control HI 41.5-2022 Section 41.5.3.4.5. 2.2 If a given circulator pump model is distributed in commerce with multiple control varieties available, the manufacturer may select a control variety (or varieties) among those available with which to test the circulator pump, including the test method for circulator pumps at full speed or circulator pumps without external input signal, manual, pressure, or temperature controls). 3. Measurement Equipment For the purposes of measuring flow rate, head, driver power input, and pump power output, the equipment specified in HI 40.6-2021 Appendix C must be used and must comply with the stated accuracy requirements in HI 40.6-2021 Table 40.6.3.2.3. When more than one instrument is used to measure a given parameter, the combined accuracy, calculated as the root sum of squares of individual instrument accuracies, must meet the specified accuracy requirements. 4. Test Conditions 4.1 Pump specifications. Conduct testing in accordance with the test conditions, stabilization requirements, and specifications of HI 40.6-2021 section 40.6.3, “Pump efficiency testing”; section 40.6.4, “Considerations when determining the efficiency of a pump,” including section 40.6.4.4, “Determination of pump overall efficiency”; section 40.6.5.4 (including Appendix A), “Test arrangements”; and section 40.6.5.5, “Test conditions.” 4.2 Twin head circulator pump. To test twin head circulator pumps, one of the two impeller assemblies should be incorporated into an adequate, single impeller volute and casing. An adequate, single impeller volute and casing means a volute and casing for which any physical and functional characteristics that affect energy consumption and energy efficiency are essentially identical to their corresponding characteristics for a single impeller in the twin head circulator pump volute and casing. 4.3 Circulator-less-volute. To determine the CEI for a circulator-less-volute, test each circulator-less-volute with each volute for which the circulator-less-volute is offered for sale or advertised to be paired for that circulator pump model according to the testing and calculations described in the applicable test method listed in Table 1 of this appendix, depending on the variety of control with which the circulator pump model is distributed in commerce. Alternatively, each circulator-less-volute may be tested with the most consumptive volute with which is it offered for sale or advertised to be paired for that circulator pump model. 5. Data Collection and Analysis 5.1 Stabilization. Record data at any test point only under stabilized conditions, as defined in HI 40.6-2021 section 40.6.5.5.1. 5.2 Testing BEP at maximum speed for the circulator pump. Determine the BEP of the circulator pump at maximum speed as specified in Appendix E of HI 40.6-2021 including sections 40.6.5.5.1 and 40.6.6 as modified. Determine the BEP flow rate at maximum speed as the flow rate at the operating point of maximum overall efficiency on the circulator pump curve, as determined in accordance with section 40.6.6.3 of HI 40.6-2021 as modified by Appendix E, where overall efficiency is the ratio of the circulator pump power output divided by the driver power input, as specified in Table 40.6.2.1 of HI 40.6-2021. For the purposes of this test procedure, all references to “driver power input” in this appendix or HI 40.6-2021 shall refer to the input power to the controls, or to the motor if no controls are present. 5.3 Rounding. All terms and quantities refer to values determined in accordance with the procedures set forth in this appendix for the rated circulator pump. Perform all calculations using raw measured values without rounding. Round CER to three significant figures. Round CEI to the hundredths decimal place. Round rated hydraulic horsepower to the less precise of the following two values: three significant figures; the fourth decimal place when expressed in units of horsepower. 6. Calculation of CEI Determine CEI using the following equation: Where: CEI = the circulator energy index (dimensionless); CER = the circulator energy rating determined in accordance with Table 1 of this appendix (hp); and CER STD 7. Determination of Additional Circulator Performance Parameters 7.1 To determine flow and head at BEP; pump power output (hydraulic horsepower) and driver power input at load points used in the calculation of CEI, including the rated hydraulic horsepower; and any other reported performance parameters, conduct testing according to section 1 of this appendix. 7.2 Determine the rated hydraulic horsepower as the pump power output measured at BEP and full impeller diameter for the rated pump. 7.3 Determine the true power factor at each applicable load point specified in the applicable test method listed in Table 1 of this appendix for each circulator pump control variety as a ratio of driver power input to the motor (or controls, if present) ( P i i, Where: PF i i, P i i, V i i, I i i, i [87 FR 57299, Sept. 19, 2022] Subpart Z—Dedicated-Purpose Pool Pump Motors Source: 86 FR 40774, July 29, 2021, unless otherwise noted. § 431.481 Purpose and scope. (a) Purpose. (b) Scope. (c) Incorporation by reference. [86 FR 40774, July 29, 2021, as amended at 88 FR 67041, Sept. 28, 2023] § 431.482 Materials incorporated by reference. (a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this subpart with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, the Department of Energy (DOE) must publish a document in the Federal Register [email protected], https://www.energy.gov/eere/buildings/building-technologies-office. www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html [email protected]. (b) CSA. https://www.csagroup.org/store. (1) CSA C747-09 (Reaffirmed 2014) (“CSA C747-09”), “Energy efficiency test method for small motors” as revised through August 2016, including Update No. 1; IBR approved for § 431.484. (2) [Reserved] (c) UL. https://www.ul.com. (1) UL 1004-10 (“UL 1004-10:2022”), Standard for Safety for Pool Pump Motors, (2) [Reserved] [86 FR 40774, July 29, 2021, as amended at 88 FR 67041, Sept. 28, 2023; 88 FR 71990, Oct. 19, 2023] § 431.483 Definitions. The definitions applicable to this subpart are defined in section 2 “Glossary” of UL 1004-10:2022 (incorporated by reference, see § 431.482). In addition, the following definition applies: Basic model [88 FR 67041, Sept. 28, 2023] § 431.484 Test procedure. (a) Scope. (b) Testing and calculations. § 431.485 Energy conservation standards. (a) For the purpose of paragraphs (b), (c) and (d) of this section, “THP” means dedicated-purpose-pool pump motor total horsepower. (b) Each dedicated-purpose pool pump motor manufactured starting on September 29, 2025, with a THP less than 0.5 THP, must have a full-load efficiency that is not less than 69 percent. (c) Each dedicated-purpose pool pump motor manufactured starting on the dates provided in table 1 to this paragraph (c) with a THP greater than or equal to 0.5 THP must be a variable speed control dedicated-purpose pool pump motor, and must follow the requirements in paragraph (d) of this section. Table 1 to Paragraph ( c Equipment class Compliance date Small-size (0.5 ≤ THP <1.15) September 28, 2027. Standard-size (1.15 ≤ THP ≤ 5) September 29, 2025. (d) All dedicated-purpose pool pump motors with a THP greater than or equal to 0.5 THP and distributed in commerce with freeze protection controls, must be shipped with freeze protection disabled or with the following user-adjustable settings: (1) The default dry-bulb air temperature setting is no greater than 40 °F; (2) The default run time setting shall be no greater than 1 hour (before the temperature is rechecked); and (3) The default motor speed (in revolutions per minute, or rpm) in freeze protection mode shall not be more than half of the maximum operating speed. [88 FR 67041, Sept. 28, 2023]

Related documents

• 50 CFR Part 600 — Magnuson-Stevens Act Provisions#512148
• 50 CFR Part 622 — Fisheries of the Caribbean, Gulf of America, and South Atlantic#512149
• 50 CFR Part 635 — Atlantic Highly Migratory Species#512150
• 50 CFR Part 648 — Fisheries of the Northeastern United States#512151
• 50 CFR Part 660 — Fisheries off West Coast States#512152